AIS Specification PDF

Invitation to Bid For
PACKAGE-C
AIS SUBSTATIONS
765 kV S/C MAINPURI-HAPUR & MAINPURI-GREATER NOIDA LINE WITH 765 kV AIS AT HAPUR AND GREATER NOIDA AND ASSOCIATED SCHEMES/WORK THROUGH TARIFF BASED COMPETITIVE BIDDING PROCESS ON BUILD, OWN, OPERATE & MAINTAIN AND TRANSFER
(Hapur, Greater Noida, Sikandrabad, Nehtaur)
Table of Contents
1. Volume-I A. General Technical Feature B. Technical Details 2. Volume-II A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. Circuit Breaker Isolator Instrument Transformer Surge Arrester Battery and Battery Charger LT Transformer LT Switchgear Power and Control Cable Relay And Protection Panel Substation Automation System PLCC and SDH Capacitor Bank Illumination System Switchyard Erection Structures Fire Protection System Air Conditioning Diesel Generator Civil Works
3. Volume-III A. Guaranteed Technical Particulars B. Schedule of Deviations C. Bill Of Quantity D. Mandatory Spare E. Standard Code F. Diagnostic Tools G. Appendix-I (Single Line Diagram) H. Appendix-II ( Plot Layout)
VOLUME-I
SECTION-A General Technical Features of AIS Substations 1.0 Scope of Work The scope includes design, engineering, manufacture, fabrication, testing at manufacturers work/testing laboratories, delivery, unloading at site, storage, erection, testing and
commissioning at site of the complete 765/400/220/132 kV switchyard with circuit breakers, isolators, current transformers, capacitor voltage transformers, surge arresters, Control & protection, PLCC equipments and other electrical and mechanical auxiliary systems on turnkey basis. However, equipment/ activities listed in clause 3.0 are excluded. Substations Covered a) 765/400/220 kV Substation at HapurOne and half breaker with double main bus scheme for 765 & 400kV side and Double main and transfer scheme for 220kV side. b) 765/400/220 kV Substation at Greater Noida One and half breaker with double main bus scheme for 765 & 400kV side and Double main and transfer scheme for 220kV side. c) 400/220 kV Substation at SikandrabadOne and half breaker with double main bus scheme for 400kV side and Double main and transfer scheme for 220kV side. d) 400/132 kV Substation at NehtaurOne and half breaker with double main bus scheme for 400kV side and Single main and transfer scheme for 132kV side The bidders are strongly advised to quote for alternative proposals also for various packages whereby enhanced reliability and ease of operation and maintenance should be the focal point. The offer should clearly bring out the salient features & cost implications of adaption of such alternatives. 2.0 2.1 Intent of Specification It is the intent of this specification to describe primary features, materials, and design & performance requirements and to establish minimum standards for the work. 2.2 The specification is not intended to specify the complete details of various practices of contractor, but to specify the requirements with regard to performance, durability and satisfactory operation under the specified site conditions. 2.3 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with internal/external agencies, project management, training of Owner's manpower, loading, unloading, handling, moving to final destination for successful erection, testing and commissioning of the substation/switchyard.
VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)
2.4
Design of the AIS substation and its associated electrical & mechanical auxiliaries systems includes preparation of single line diagrams , electrical layouts, erection key diagrams, electrical and physical clearance diagrams, design calculations for Earth mat, control & protection schematics, wiring & termination schedules, civil designs (as applicable) & drawings, design of fire fighting system, air conditioning system, indoor/outdoor lighting/illumination and other relevant drawings & documents required for engineering of all facilities under the scope of this contract.
2.5
Civil Works: Option-1: The scope entails complete civil work including labour, materials, plants, equipment, temporary works, constructional plant, fuel supplies, transportation and all incidental items not specified but reasonably implied, or necessary for the proper completion of the work. Option-2: The actual works will be carried out by the Owner/its subsidiaries as a sub-contractor to the main contractor according to his design and requirements. In this eventually cement, steel (construction steel and AIS structures), earthing rod and AIS strip will be supplied by Owner. However, detailed justified estimate for the same will have to be provided by package supplier at the start of the project Laying of earthing mat (below ground) will also be undertaken by the Owner under the supervision of contractor. DG set, EOT cranes can also be provided by the owner under this option. The choice of opting for option-1 or 2 shall be at the discretion of the Owner.
2.6
Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required for erection, testing and commissioning and satisfactory operation of the substation are deemed to be included in the scope of the specification unless specifically excluded.
3.0
Specific Exclusions The following items of work are specifically excluded from the scope of the specifications for all substations: a) Transformer and Reactor: These shall be supplied under a separate package. However, erection and commissioning of the same shall form part of this package. b) Colony/Housing of substation.
Note:
1. Bidder: The person/party quoting for the package. 2. Contractor: The successful bidder on whom the package order is awarded. 3. Owner: The package awardee.
c) Outgoing lines (beyond gantries in case of over-head feeders). d) Approach road up to Substation/Switchyard entrance. 4.0 Single Line Diagram For Air Insulated Substation at the 765 & 400 kV voltage levels one and half breaker with double main bus scheme, for 220kV Double main and transfer scheme, and for 132kV single main and transfer bus scheme shall be used. Single line diagram and arrangements are enclosed and shall be further engineered by the contractor. The exact direction of the entry of lines for different voltage rating is still not frozen. There is a possibility that the direction of termination of lines may force the Project to adopt D type arrangement instead of I type for the one and half breaker scheme/s. There is also a school of thought that whenever there are two transformers in one and half breaker scheme, one should normally be connected to the first bus and other to the second bus, otherwise effectiveness of scheme is reduced. Please comment on this especially from protection point of view. The following single line diagrams shall be adhered to: (See Appendix-1) a) 765/400/220 kV Substation at Hapur (Drawing No.MEIL-D-001) b) 765/400/220 kV Substation at Greater Noida (Drawing No.MEIL-D-002) c) 400/220 kV Substation at Sikandrabad (Drawing No.MEIL-D-003) d) 400/132 kV Substation at Nehtaur (Drawing No.MEIL-D-004) Tentative plot layouts are attached at Appendix-2 5.0 The following drawings / documents shall be submitted in addition to the documents proposed at Annexure-I: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Type Test reports Guaranteed Technical Particulars Quality assurance plan Equipment catalogues Equipment O & M manuals Complete System O & M Manual Mechanical and Electrical Packages detail drawings All the drawings/documents listed above shall be in the approval category.
6.0
Special Tools and Tackles A complete list of tools and tackles shall be furnished by the contractor as under: 1. An exhaustive list of tools and tackles that shall be handed over to the owner for subsequent Operation and Maintenance activities. 2. A list of tools and tackles that shall be brought by the contractor for completion of Erection, Testing and Commissioning activity but taken back after accomplishment of work.
7.0 7.1
Specific Requirements Training of Owners Personnel The contractor shall organize and conduct complete and thorough training program (to be conducted in English language). The traveling and living expenses of Owners personnel, if any, shall be borne by Owner. The training shall be carried out at the place of manufacture and also at site/s or as the case may require and as agreed by Owner so as to ensure the complete adequacy of the program and imparting of detailed knowledge of system/equipment design engineering and operation and maintenance aspects. The minimum duration of the training shall be as follows: Design, operation and maintenance of the AIS installations including procedures for fault attending (at contractor works) for 5 man-weeks. The contractor shall also provide training in the area of testing, commissioning and maintenance for at-least 5 personnel for 5 days at one of the AIS Substations. Design, operation, maintenance and commissioning aspect for 5 contractors works as per following a) Circuit Breaker (controlled switching) 3 days (Five) persons at
b) Protection and Automation (As Mentioned in Volume-II, Section J). c) PLCC 2 days 2 days
d) SDH 7.2
The Contractor shall provide all auxiliary system (like battery, AC/DC feeders etc) taking into consideration, the future bays also as per single line diagram in addition to bays under present scope.
7.3
As 765, 400 kV, 220kV, 132kV AIS is likely be extended in future, the contractor shall make available during detailed engineering and document Hand -Over stage, all necessary details.
7.4
Construction Power and Water: These shall be arranged by the contractor. However in case the Owner is in a position to provide the same at a later date, the charges for the same shall be intimated and if acceptable to contractor , these could be availed. It may be noted that reliability of power and water would not be ensured by the Owner and in no case, he shall be held responsible for any delay in works because of non-availability of power and water.
7.5
The contractor shall be responsible for safety of human and equipment during the working. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-ordinate and obtain Electrical Inspector's clearance before commissioning. Any additional items, modification due to observation of such statutory authorities shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
8.0
Standards and Codes All applicable standards and code as brought out in the technical specification (Volume-III SectionE) shall be adhered to. Further all Central and State Government (UP) guidelines and gazette notifications shall be complied with. Some applicable notifications are:-
a) CEA notification No.CEA/TETD/MP/R/01/2010 Dt.20/08/10 b) Building Bye Laws-2003 ( inclusive all requirement stipulated in Clause 4g of the gazette notification ) c) IE Rules 1956 with latest amendments. d) CEA amendment on (installation & operation of meters)Reg.2006 issued on 04.06.2010 e) UP Grid Code-18/04/07
Annexure-I Suggestive Drawing / Document List S.No 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 4 Document/Drawing DESIGN CALCULATIONS Short Circuit Force Calculation DSLP Calculation Sag & Swing Calculation Earthmat Design Calculation Battery and Battery Charger Sizing Document Relay Setting Calculations EHV Cable Sizing ( if applicable ) Cable Sizing CT-PT Sizing Stringing Charts LAYOUT DRAWINGS Single Line Diagram Switchyard Layout Switchyard Sections Structure Loading Diagram Plan and Section Earth Mat Layout Equipment and Structure Earthing Details Cable Trench Layout and Cable Trench Sections Single Line drawing for AC/DC System Erection Key Diagram Control & Protection Protection Key Diagram Interlocking schemes Cable Schedules All Individual Equipment OGA Detailed Drawings Schematics Rating Plate Diagram Categorey A A A A A A A A A I Remarks
A A A I I I I A I
A A I
A I A
The drawing/ document details are not listed for individual equipment but an exaustive submission of drawings/ documents shall be ensured. The
submission shall be complete in all respects.
5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
Packages Illumination System Air Conditioning & Ventillation System Fire Fighting System Sub-Station Automation System PLCC System ( including PABX Exchange ) A A A A The drawing/ document details are not listed for individual packages but an exaustive submission of drawings/ documents shall be ensured. The submission shall be complete in all respects.
5.5 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 Civil Works & Structures Design of tower i/c foundation bolts.(400kV) Design of eqpt. support struct. i/c fdn bolts.(400kV) Design of tower foundation Design of eqpt.foundations Design of cable trenches. Details of foundation bolts for Towers Details of foundation bolts for Eqpt Structures Foundation layout for the yard. RCC Detail of tower foundation RCC details of eqpt.foundations. RCC details of cable trenches Details of road. Details of fencing & gates. Layout & details of drainage. Water Management System Legend: A: For Approval
A A A A A I I I I I I I I I A
I: For Information. However, the owner still reserves the right to comment on the drawing/ document.
SECTION-B TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AIS SUBSTATION 1.0 1.1 FOREWORD The provisions under this section are intended to supplement general requirements for the materials, equipments and services covered under other sections of tender documents and are not exclusive. 2.0 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT The contractor shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information, design documents, drawings etc., fully in conformity with the technical specification during detailed engineering. 2.2 It is recognized that the Contractor may have standardized on the use of certain components, materials, processes or procedures different from those specified herein. Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the manufacturers standard practice will also be considered provided such proposals meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements and are acceptable to Purchaser. 2.3 Wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a particular brand, Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific name mentioned shall be understood as establishing type, function and quality and not as limiting competition. 2.4 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings, fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such equipment and/or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in the Technical Specifications unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the specification and bid price schedule but which are necessary for commissioning and satisfactory operation of the switchyard/substation unless specifically excluded shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied without any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard equipment provided, shall be inter-changeable with one another. 3.0 3.1 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED The 800kV and 420kV system is being designed to limit the switching surge over voltage of 1.9 p.u. and 2.5 p.u., respectively and the power frequency over voltage of 1.4 p.u. and 1.5 p.u., respectively. In case of the 420kV system, the initial value of the temporary over voltages could be 2.0 p.u. for 1 - 2 cycles. The equipment furnished under this specification shall perform all its
VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)
functions and operate satisfactorily without showing undue strain, restrike etc under such over voltage conditions. 3.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various other electrical, electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation. 3.3 All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical, thermal and electromechanical forces due to various factors like wind load, temperature variation, ice & snow, (wherever applicable) short circuit etc for the equipment. 3.4 The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account various forces that are required to withstand. 3.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following: a) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be match marked. b) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet / operating mechanism to marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear proper identification to facilitate the connection at site. 3.6 For single phase transformer, automatic insertion of the spare transformer incase of problem with a healthy transformer should be offered. Other options can also be given but estimated time for changing the transformer and down time should be provided by the contractor. 3.7 Equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following major technical parameters as brought out hereunder. System Parameter 765kV, 400kV & 220kV System S.No. Description of parameters 1. System operating voltage 2. Maximum operating voltage of the system (rms) 3. 4. 5. i) Rated frequency No. of phase Rated Insulation levels Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 microsec.) 2100kVp 1550kVp 1050kVp 650kVp 170kVp 50HZ 3 50HZ 3 50HZ 3 50 Hz 3 50 Hz 3 800kV 420kV 245kV 145kV 36kV 765kV System 765kV 400kV System 400kV 220kV System 220kV 132kV System 132kV 33kV System 33kV
S.No.
Description of parameters
765kV System 1550kVp
400kV System 1050kVp
220kV System -
132kV System 275kV
33kV System 70kV
ii)
Switching impulse withstand voltage (250/2500 micro sec.) dry and wet
iii)
One minute power frequency dry withstand voltage (rms)
830kV
630kV
105kV
iv)
One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage (rms)
460kV
500 microvolt
6.
Corona extinction voltage
508 kV
320kV
156kV
105kV
7.
Max. radio interference voltage for frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz at 508 kVrms for 765kV, 266kVrms for 400kV system 156kVrms for 220kV system and
2500 microvolt
1000 microvolt
1000 microvolt
500 microvolt
8.
Minimum creepage distance
31 mm/kV
31 mm/kV
31 mm/kV
31 mm/kV
31 mm/kV
9. i.
Min. clearances Phase to phase 7600mm (for conductorconductor configurat ion) 9400mm (for rodconductor configurat ion) ii. Phase to earth 4900mm (for conductor3500 mm 2100 mm 1300 mm 320 mm 4000mm 2100 mm 1300 mm 320 mm
10
S.No.
Description of parameters
765kV System structure) 6400mm (for rodstructure)
400kV System
220kV System
132kV System
33kV System
iii.
Sectional clearances
10300 mm
6500 mm
5000 mm
4000 mm
3000 mm
iv.
Rated short circuit current 40kA for 1 sec duration System neutral earthing Effectivel y earthed
50kA
40kA
31.5 kA
25 kA
v.
Effectivel y earthed
Note : 1. The above parameters are applicable for installations up to an altitude of 1000m above mean sea level. For altitude exceeding 1000m, necessary altitude correction factor shall be applicable. 2. The insulation and RIV levels of the equipments shall be as per values given in the respective chapter of the equipments. 4.0 4.1 4.1.1 ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS Drawings All drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break-up for packing and shipment, dimensions, internal & the external connections, fixing arrangement required and any other information specifically requested in the specifications. 4.1.2 Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Purchaser, the unit designation, the specifications title, the specification number and the name of the Project 4.1.3 The review of these data by the Purchaser will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and documents interfaces with the equipment provided under the specifications, external connections and of the dimensions which might affect substation layout. This review by the Purchaser may not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. This review and/or approval by the Purchaser shall not be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these specifications and documents.
11
4.2
All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractors risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to approval by the Purchaser. Approval of Contractors drawing or work by the Purchaser shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
4.3
All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including review and approval by the Purchaser shall form part of the Contract Document and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed in strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the Purchaser in Writing.
NOTE :
1)
The contractor may please note that all resubmissions must incorporate all comments given in the earlier submission by the Purchaser or adequate justification for not incorporating the same must be submitted failing which the submission of documents is likely to be returned.
2)
All drawings should be submitted in softcopy form, however substation design drawings like SLD, GA, all layouts etc. shall also be submitted in AutoCAD Version. SLD, GA & layout drawings shall be submitted for the entire substation.
3)
The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded diagrams with complete instructions for storage, handling, erection, commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling procedures.
4)
If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction manuals require any modifications/ additions/changes, the same shall be incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Purchaser.
5) 6)
The Contractor shall furnish to the Purchaser catalogues of spare parts. All As-built drawings/documents shall be certified by site indicating the changes before final submission.
5.0 5.1 5.1.1
MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP General Requirement Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship, equipment, materials and components of the covered equipment, it is essential that the same must be new, of highest grade of
12
the best quality of their kind, conforming to best engineering practice and suitable for the purpose for which they are intended. 5.1.2 Incase where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the specification as similar to any special standard, the Purchaser shall decide upon the question of similarity. When required by the specification or when required by the Purchaser the Contractor shall submit, for approval, all the information concerning the materials or components to be used in manufacture. Machinery, equipment, materials and components supplied, installed or used without such approval shall run the risk of subsequent rejection, it being understood that the cost as well as the time delay associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor. 5.1.3 The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions, replacements and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with its duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements. All joints and fastenings shall be devised, constructed and documented so that the component parts shall be accurately positioned and restrained to fulfill their required function. In general, screw threads shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the Purchaser. 5.1.4 Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to gauge and shall also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall also be interchangeable and shall be made of the same materials and workmanship as the corresponding parts of the Equipment supplied under the Specification. Where feasible, common component units shall be employed in different pieces of equipment in order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment of the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable. 5.1.5 All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance with the best modern practices will be accepted. Installation shall be considered as being the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting, leveling, aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment bases/foundations, performing the alignment check and final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in accordance with the manufacturers tolerances, instructions and the Specification. All factory assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments made as necessary to re-establish the manufacturers limits suitable guards shall be provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or moving machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and removal for maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be installed at designated locations and tested for healthiness.
13
5.1.6
The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used for installation purposes shall be drained out and the system flushed through where necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The Contractor shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.
5.1.7
All oil, grease and other consumables used in the Works/ Equipment shall be purchased in India unless the Contractor has any special requirement for the specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India. In such is the case he shall declare in the proposal, where such oil or grease is available. He shall help Purchaser in establishing equivalent Indian make and Indian Contractor. The same shall be applicable to other consumables too.
5.1.8
Corona and radio interference voltage test and seismic withstand test (for 132kV and above voltage level) procedures for equipments shall be in line with the procedure given at Annexure-I and II respectively.
5.2
Provisions for Exposure to Hot and Humid climate Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favorable to the growth of fungi and mildew. The indoor equipments located in non-air conditioned areas shall also be of same type.
5.2.1
Space Heaters
5.2.1.1 The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240V as supply voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided. 5.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters shall be supplied to prevent condensation in any compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the compartment and electrical connections shall be made sufficiently away from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation. 5.2.1.3 Suitable anti condensation heaters with the provision of thermostat shall be provided. 5.2.2 FUNGI STATIC VARNISH Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be applied on parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.
14
5.2.3
Ventilation opening Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have ventilation openings with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds and suitable provision shall be made so as to avoid any communication of air / dust with any part in the enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc.
5.2.4
Degree of Protection The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under: a) Installed outdoor : IP- 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31 c) Installed in covered area: IP-52 d) Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited: IP-41 e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards): IP-52 The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS: 13947 (Part-I) / IEC-60947 (Part-I) / IS 12063 / IEC-60529. Type test report for degree of protection test, shall be submitted for approval. 5.3 5.3.1 RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which is to be engraved manufacturers name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with details of the loading conditions under which the item of substation in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may be required by the Purchaser. The rating plate of each equipment shall be according to IEC requirement. 5.3.2 All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers, reactors, CB, CT, CVT, SA, Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC equipments shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi and the other with English inscriptions may be provided. 5.4 FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS
15
All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds, touch up paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered under the scope of the specifications, into successful Operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specifically excluded under the exclusions in these specifications and documents. 6.0 6.1 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS / COORDINATION The bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the offer only shall be accepted for supply. However, the Purchaser or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the Purchaser & contractor agree upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly. 6.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and/or schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly. 6.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate equipments to provide the best co-ordinate performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design of various components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance. 6.4 The Contractor has to coordinate designs and terminations with the agencies (if any) who are Consultants/Contractor for the Purchaser. The names of agencies shall be intimated to the successful bidders. 7.0 7.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract whether manufactured or performed within the Contractors Works or at his Subcontractors premises or at the Purchasers site or at any other place of Work are in accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance program to control such activities at all points necessary. Such program shall be broadly outlined by the contractor and finalized after discussions before the award of contract. The detailed program shall be submitted by the contractor after the award for reference. A quality assurance program of the contractor shall generally cover the following: a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance program: b) Documentation control system;
16
c) d)
Qualification data for bidders key personnel; The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of subContractors services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
e)
System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and fabrication and assembly control;
f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n)
Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions; Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities. Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities; System for indication and appraisal of inspection status; System for quality audits; System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Purchaser. System for maintenance of records; System for handling storage and delivery; and A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered. The Purchaser or his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor/his vendors quality management and control activities.
7.2
Quality Assurance Documents The contractor would be required to submit all the Quality Plans for all equipments & packages at the start of the Project for the approval of the owner. The Quality Assurance Documents as stipulated in the approved Quality Plans would be made available at the time of purchasers inspection of equipment/material
8.0 8.1
TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests as per technical specification and shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections.
8.2
The reports for all type tests as per technical specification shall be furnished by the Contractor along with equipment / material drawings. However, type test reports of similar equipments/ material shall be acceptable for all project with similar requirement. The type tests conducted
17
earlier should have either been conducted in accredited laboratory (accredited based on ISO / IEC Guide 25 / 17025 or EN 45001 by the national accreditation body of the country where laboratory is located) or witnessed by a Government agency/reputed customer or representative authorized by Utility or representative of accredited test lab or reputed consultant. The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last 10 (ten) years prior to the date of award of order. In case the test reports are of the test conducted earlier than 10 (ten) years prior to the date of award of order, the contractor shall repeat these test(s) at no extra cost to the purchaser. However, in case of instrument transformers, the following type tests should have been conducted within 5 (five) years prior to the date of bid opening. i. ii. iii. iv. Lightning Impulse Test Switching Impulse Test Multiple Chopped Impulse Test (For CT) Chopped Impulse Test (For CVT )
In case the test reports are of these tests (for instrument transformers) as mentioned above are conducted earlier than 5 (five) years prior to the date of bid opening, the contractor shall repeat these test(s) at no extra cost to the purchaser. Further, in the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not acceptable due to any design/manufacturing changes (including substitution of components) or due to non-compliance with the requirement stipulated in the Technical Specification or any/all type tests not carried out, same shall be carried out without any additional cost implication to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall intimate the Purchaser the detailed program about the tests atleast two (2) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in advance in case of foreign supplies. Further, in case type tests are required to be conducted/ repeated and the deputation of Inspector/Purchaser's representative is required, then all the expenses shall be borne by the contractor. 8.3 8.4 Tests for all auxiliary equipment should have been conducted within last 5 years Type testing requirements if given specifically for the individual equipment in Volume II shall be complemented by the additional requirement. The price of conducting type tests shall be included in price schedule and break up of these shall be given in the relevant schedule of Bid Proposal Sheets. These Type test charges would be considered in bid evaluation. In case Bidder does not indicate charges for any of the type tests or does not mention the name of any test in the price schedules, it will be presumed that the particular test has been offered free of charge. Further, in case any Bidder indicates that he shall not carry out a particular test, his offer shall be considered incomplete and shall be liable to be rejected. The Purchaser reserves the right to witness any or all the type tests. The Purchaser also reserves the right to waive the repeating of type tests partly or fully and in case
18
of waival, test charges for the same shall not be payable. The Purchaser shall bear all expenses for deputation of purchasers representative(s) for witnessing the type tests under this clause except in the case of re-deputation if any, necessitated due to no fault of the purchaser. 8.5 The Purchaser, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency acting on behalf of the Purchaser shall have at all reasonable times free access to the Contractors/sub-vendors premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the Works during its manufacture or erection if part of the Works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorised representative permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractors own premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, despatch or at site at the option of the Purchaser and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be rejected. 8.6 The Contractor shall give the Purchaser /Inspector fifteen (15) days written notice for on-shore and six (6) weeks notice for off-shore material being ready for joint testing including contractor and OWNER. Such tests shall be to the Contractors account except for the expenses of the Inspector. The Purchaser /inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will attend such tests within fifteen (15) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed alone with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the Inspectors presence and he shall forthwith forward to the Inspector duly certified copies of tests in triplicate. 8.7 The Purchaser or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the Contractor, of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections and shall either make the modifications that may be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the Purchaser /Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to comply with the Contract. 8.8 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractors or Sub-Contractors works, the Purchaser /inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the Purchaser /Inspector, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractors Test certificate by the Engineer/Inspector. Failure of the Purchaser /Inspector to issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the Works. The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Purchaser to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be found not to
19
comply with the Contract. The equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of CIP by the Purchaser. 8.9 In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the Purchaser /Inspector or his authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the Contract and shall give facilities to the Purchaser /Inspector or to his authorized representative to accomplish testing. 8.10 The inspection by Purchaser and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance program forming a part of the Contract. 8.11 The Purchaser will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractors premises or at site or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the material comply with the specification. 8.12 The Purchaser reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site. The testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the Purchaser. 9.0 9.1 TESTS Pre-commissioning Tests On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Purchaser and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for charging, leading to initial precommissioning tests at Site. The lists of pre-commissioning tests to be performed are given in respective chapters and shall be included in the Contractors quality assurance program. 9.2 9.2.1 Commissioning Tests The available instrumentation and control equipment will to be used during such tests and the Purchaser will calibrate all such measuring equipment and devices as far as practicable. 9.2.2 Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost. 9.2.3 The specific tests requirement on equipment have been brought out in the respective chapters of the technical specification.
20
9.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard. However necessary fee shall be reimbursed by Owner on production of requisite documents.
10.0 10.1
PACKAGING & PROTECTION All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. On request of the Purchaser, the Contractor shall also submit packing details/associated drawing for any equipment/material under his scope of supply, to facilitate the Purchaser to repack any equipment/material at a later date, in case the need arises. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken into account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor. Purchaser takes no responsibility of the availability of the wagons.
10.2
All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a nonmetallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and pipings and conduit equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage.
11.0 11.1
FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically agreed, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts & bolts and spring washers shall be electro galvanized to service condition 4. All steel conductors including those used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be galvanized according to IS: 2629.
11.2
HOT DIP GALVANISING
11.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m and minimum average thickness of coating shall be 86 microns for all items having thickness 6mm and above. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating thickness shall be as per relevant ASTM. For surface which shall be embedded in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m minimum. 11.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The
21
presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection. 11.2.3 After galvanizing. no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization. 11.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS-2633. 11.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four immersions of the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six immersions. The following galvanizing tests should essentially be performed as per relevant Indian Standards. - Coating thickness - Uniformity of zinc - Adhesion test - Mass of zinc coating 11.2.6 Galvanised material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanized surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed. 11.3 PAINTING
11.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with the IS-6005 Code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet. All surfaces, which will not be easily accessible after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying. 11.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be flash dried while the second coat shall be stoved. 11.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting.
22
11.3.4
The exterior and interior color of the paint in case of new substations shall preferably be RAL 7032 for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control cabinets, panels etc. unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of the equipments. Glossy white colour inside the equipments /boards /panels/junction boxes is also acceptable. The exterior colour for panels shall be matching with the existing panels in case of extension of a substation. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the equipments.
11.3.5
In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like electrostatic painting etc., the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the offer for Purchasers review & approval.
12.0 12.1
HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturers drawings or as directed by the Purchaser or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of switchyard equipment means completion of all site tests specified and energisation at rated voltage.
12.2
Contractor may engage manufacturers Engineers to supervise the unloading, transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by them separately. Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per instructions of the manufacturers supervisory Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation to them.
12.3
The contractor shall have to ensure that the hard and flat indoor and outdoor storage areas are in place prior to commencement of delivery of material at site. Contractor shall also ensure availability of proper unloading and material handling equipment like cranes etc. and polyester/nylon ropes of suitable capacity to avoid damage during unloading and handling of material at site. All indoor equipments shall be stored indoors. Outdoor equipment may be stored outdoors but on a hard and flat raised area properly covered with waterproof and dustproof covers to protect them from water seepage and moisture ingress. However, all associated control panels, marshalling boxes operating boxes etc. of outdoor equipments are to be stored indoors only. Storage of equipment on top of another one is not permitted if the wooden packing is used. Material opened for joint inspection shall be repacked properly as per manufacturers recommendations.
23
During storage of material regular periodic monitoring of important parameters like oil level / leakage, SF6 / Nitrogen pressure etc. shall be ensured by the contractor. 12.4 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of manufacturers drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained from the Purchaser. Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent to not following manufacturers drawings/instructions correctly. 12.5 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers, isolators and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected against damage during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 12.6 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the Purchaser immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of Purchasers information only. The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser every week a report detailing all the receipts during the weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor. 12.7 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed over to the Purchaser in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until taken over by Purchaser, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature, corrosion, damages etc. 12.8 Where material / equipment is unloaded by Purchaser before the Contractor arrives at site or even when he is at site, Purchaser by right can hand over the same to Contractor and there upon it will be the responsibility of Contractor to store the material in an orderly and proper manner. 13.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to store all equipment which requires indoor storage. 12.10 12.11 The words erection and installation used in the specification are synonymous. Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
24
123.12 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. If at any stage during the execution of the Contract, it is observed that the erected equipment(s) do not meet the above minimum clearances as given in clause 3.6 the Contractor shall immediately proceed to correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost. 12.13 Equipment Bases A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the Purchaser. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all around, and shall have threaded drain connections. 13.0 TOOLS AND TACKLES The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and maintenance of the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be separately, packed and brought on to Site. 14.0 Diagnostic Tools: List given at volume-III, Section-E. Quantity will be minimum 1 set. However additional items which are not mentioned at annexure and are mandatory, bidder shall specify the same. 15.0 15.1 AUXILIARY SUPPLY The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system indicated under section Electrical & Mechanical Auxiliaries having the following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air-conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also conform the parameters as indicated in the following. Normal Voltage Variation in Voltage Frequency HZ 415V 240V 220V 10% 10% 190V to 240V 50 5% 50 5% DC 3 / 4 Wire 1 / 2 Wire Solidly Earthed Solidly Earthed Isolated system 110V 95V to 120V DC Isolated system 2 wire 2 wire in Phase/Wire Neutral connection
25
48V
DC
2Wire earthed
System
(+)
Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to 10%. 16.0 16.1 SUPPORT STRUCTURE The equipment support structures shall be suitable for equipment connections at the first level i.e 14.0 meter, 8.0 meter and 5.9 meter from plinth level for 765 kV, 420 kV and 245 kV substations respectively. All equipment support structures shall be supplied alongwith brackets, angles, stools etc. for attaching the operating mechanism, control cabinets & marshalling box (wherever applicable) etc. 16.2 Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements:
16.2.1 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 metres. 17.0 17.1 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA CC1 and shall be made of materials listed below : a) For connecting ACSR conductors Aluminum alloy casting, conforming to designation A6 of IS:617 and all test shall conform to IS:617 b) For connecting equipment aluminum terminals made of copper with A6 ACSR conductors of IS:617 with 2mm thick bimetallic liner and all test shall conform to IS:617 c) d) For connecting G.I i) Bolts, nuts & Plain, Washers M12, for others hot dip galvanised. Galvanised mild steel shield wire i) Electro-galvanised for sizes below alloy casting conforming to designation Bimetallic connectors made from
26
ii) Spring washers for items for a to c IS:1573 17.2
ii) Electro-galvanised mild steel suitable
at-least service condition-3 as per
Necessary clamps and connectors shall be supplied for all equipment and connections. The requirement regarding external corona and RIV as specified for any equipment shall include its terminal fittings. If corona rings are required to meet these requirements they shall be considered as part of that equipment and included in the scope of work.
17.3
Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic clamps shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected to stress.
17.4
Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the scope of Work.
17.5
No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral with aluminum body or 2 mm thick bi-metallic strips shall be provided for Bi-metallic clamps.
17.6
All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
17.7
Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal clamps for bus posts shall be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/sliding) type connection of 4" IPS AL. tube as required. In both the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to centre line of the tube) should be same.
17.8
Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified ambient temperature. The rated current for which the clamp/ connector is designed with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
17.9 17.10 17.11
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact resistance. Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled. Tests Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS: 5561 and shall also be subjected to routine tests as per IS:5561. Following type test reports shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2
27
above except for sl. no.(ii) & (iii) for which type test once conducted shall be applicable (i.e. the requirement of test conducted within last ten years shall not be applicable). i. ii. iii. iv. 18.0 Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is 35C over 50C ambient) Short time current test Corona (dry) and RIV (dry) test (for 220 KV and above voltage level clamps) Resistance test and tensile test CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES & MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT 18.1 All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in accordance with IS5039/IS-8623, IEC-60439, as applicable, and the clauses given below: 18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be made of sheet steel or aluminum enclosure and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be atleast 2.0 mm thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot rolled or alternately 1.6 mm thick stainless steel can also be used. The box shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed box the thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness. 18.3 A canopy and sealing arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes / Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain water. 18.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with padlocking arrangements. The distance between two hinges shall be adequate to ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere. The quality of the gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/cracked during the operation of the equipment. 18.5 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with suitably profiled EPDM/Neoprene gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with approved quality plan, IS:11149 and IS:3400. Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of brass. 18.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by means of weather proof and dust-proof connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be designed with generous clearances to avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable gland plate above the base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate. Gland plate shall have
28
provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required. The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression type and made of brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands shall conform to BS: 6121. 18.7 A 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided in the cabinet with ONOFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket shall be of industrial grade. 18.8 For illumination, a fluorescent tube or CFL of approximately 9 to 15 watts shall be provided. The switching of the fittings shall be controlled by the door switch. For junction boxes of smaller sizes such as lighting junction box, manual operated earth switch mechanism box etc., plug socket, heater and illumination is not required to be provided. 18.9 All control switches shall be of MCB/rotary switch type and Toggle/piano switches shall not be
accepted. 18.10 Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and secured by the use of self etching washer. Earthing of hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire. 18.11 The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing the numbering/ connection/feruling by pasting the same on the inside of the door. 18.12 a) The following routine tests along with the routine tests as per IS: 5039 shall also be conducted: i) Check for wiring ii) Visual and dimension check b) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box shall conform to IP-55 as per IS: 13947 including application of, 2.5 KV rms for 1 (one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test after IP-55 test. 19.0 19.1 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment will be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All interphase and external connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be made through terminal blocks. 19.2 Terminal blocks shall be 650V grade and have continuous rating to carry the maximum expected current on the terminals and non breakable type. These shall be of moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud type terminals. But preferably the
29
terminal blocks shall be non-disconnecting stud type of Elmex or Phoenix or Wago or equivalent make. 19.3 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current transformer secondary leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities. 19.4 The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally. 19.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be acceptable. 19.6 19.7 19.8 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design. The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the mounting rails. The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers. 19.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following conductors on each side. a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm CT/PT circuits copper flexible. b) All CT/PT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm copper flexible. 19.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live. 19.11 Atleast 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows. 19.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row of terminal block and the associated cable gland plate for outdoor ground mounted marshalling box and the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm. 19.13 The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary interphase electrical connections (where applicable) as well as between phases and common terminal boxes or control cabinets. For equipments rated for 400 kV and above the wiring required in these items shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded cables in order to avoid surge overvoltages either transferred through the equipment or due to transients induced from the EHV circuits.
30
19.14
All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge withstand capability in accordance with the relevant IEC Publications, in both longitudinal and transverse modes. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary filtering, surge protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment.
20.0 20.1
LAMPS & SOCKETS Sockets All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp & 15 Amp pin round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.
20.2
Hand Lamp: A 240 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
20.3
Switches and Fuses:
20.3.1 Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control, signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with miniature circuit breaker / switch fuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse ratings shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC fuses. 20.3.2 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS: 9228 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and alarm contacts will also be accepted. All accessible live connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and voltage. 21.0 21.1 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators: Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 2099 & IEC- 60137 while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC-62155/IS:5621.The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:2544/IEC-60168 and IEC-60273. The insulators shall also conform to IEC-60815 as applicable. The bidder may also offer composite hollow insulators, conforming to IEC-61462. 21.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws or
31
imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture. 21.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs and similar other defects. 21.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they will be used. 21.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between the conductors and bushing which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors, insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by chemical action. No radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the normal rated voltage. 21.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the shape and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as metal or glazed porcelain. 21.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive pressure on the joints. 21.8 Tests In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS: 2099 & IS: 2544 & IS : 5621. 22.0 Motors Motors shall be Squirrel Cage three phase induction motors of sufficient size capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven equipment and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved make. 22.1 Enclosures a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof enclosure equivalent to IP-55 as per IS: 4691. For motors to be installed indoor i.e. inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust proof equivalent to IP-44 as per IS: 4691. b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
32
c)
Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d)
Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other means to facilitate lifting.
22.2
Operational Features
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point and the motor shall not be over loaded at any operating point of driven equipment that will rise in service. b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the particulars as given in Clause 15.0 of this Section. 22.3 Starting Requirements:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-line starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage. b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value. c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS:325. d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque under the supply voltage conditions specified under Clause 15.0 shall be capable of withstanding atleast two successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one start from hot condition without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred supply condition. e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment of minimum permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement, the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall remain closed for speed lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation. 22.4 Running Requirements:
33
a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of 50 degree C shall be within the limits specified in IS:325 (for 3 phase induction motors) after adjustment due to increased ambient temperature specified. b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in IS: 4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings. c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a period of 5 minutes with rated load commencing from hot condition. 22.5 Testing and Commissioning An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Contractor or Purchaser without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval. a) Insulation resistance. b) c) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation. Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause and the conditions corrected. 23.0 23.1 23.2 Equipment Qualifying Requirements All equipment should have been successfully type tested. The equipment (of similar or higher rating) should be operating in a tropical country. Field report, preferably a certificate from an end user/s may also be furnished. 24.0 Operation and Maintenance The contractor will be responsible for O&M of substation for 6 months, during this period he will trained the OWNER staff and for next 6 months O&M will be under contractors supervision. 25.0 Guarantee and Warrantee The contractor has to provide 18 months guarantee from the date of commissioning.
34
ANNEXURE-I CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST 1. General Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors, where applicable, shall be tested for external corona (for 400kV & above) both by observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage (RIV) for 132kV above. 2. Test Levels: The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification. 3. Test Methods for RIV: 3.1. RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International SpecialCommittee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1(1993) Part -1. The measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 Mhz but other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts. 3.2. Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication No. 1071964, except otherwise noted herein. 3.3. In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fittings of identical type supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals. 3.4. Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, and 110% of the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The specified RIV test voltage for 765kV, 400 kV, 220 KV is listed in the detailed specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts. 3.5. The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
35
3.6. The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noisel meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus, connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test voltage shall be raised to 110% of specified corona extinction voltage and maintained there for five minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, test shall be stopped, otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity) disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkness shall be taken under test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, and 110%. Additional photographs shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The photographic process shall be such that prints are available for inspection and comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energized connectors. The photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no cut-off. For recording purpose, modern devices utilizing UV recording methods such as image intensifier may also be used. 4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be taken from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test object to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence. 4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides. Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate camera positions and angles. The precise location
36
of camera shall be approved by Purchasers inspector, after determining the best camera locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona. 4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels. 4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the sample between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of Purchasers inspector if, in his opinion, it will not prejudice other test. 5. Test Records: In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report: a) b) c) d) Background noise before and after test. Detailed procedure of application of test voltage. Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each level. Results and observations with regard to location and type of interference sources detected at each step. e) direction. f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall be recorded. Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100 microvolts in each
37
ANNEXURE - II SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST PROCEDURE The seismic withstanding test on the complete equipment (for 132kV and above) shall be carried out alongwith supporting structure. The Bidder shall arrange to transport the structure from his Contractors premises/OWNER sites for the purpose of seismic withstand test only. The seismic level specified shall be applied at the base of the structure. The accelerometers shall be provided at the Terminal Pad of the equipment and any other point as agreed by the Purchaser. The seismic test shall be carried out in all possible combinations of the equipment. The seismic test procedure shall be furnished for approval of the Purchaser.
38
VOLUME-II
SECTION- (A) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1.0 1.1 GENERAL The circuit breakers and accessories shall conform to IEC: 62271-100, IEC: 62271-01 and other relevant IEC standards except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements specified in VOLUME-I, TR. 1.2 800/420/245/145 kV circuit breakers offered would be of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) type only and of class C2-M2 as per IEC. The bidder may also offer circuit breakers of either live tank type or dead tank type of proven design. 1.3 The circuit breaker shall be complete with terminal connectors, operating mechanism, control cabinets, piping, inter-pole cable, cable accessories like glands, terminal blocks, marking ferrules, lugs, pressure gauges, density monitors (with graduated scale), galvanised support structure for CB and control cabinets, their foundation bolts and all other circuit breaker accessories required for carrying out all the functions the CB is required to perform. All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker installation such as main equipment, terminals, control parts, connectors and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not shall be provided. 1.4 Painting shall be done in line with VOLUME-I, TR. Shade- 697 as per IS-5 or RAL- 7032 or similar shades with Owner approval can be used for painting. The support structure of circuit breaker shall be hot dip galvanised. Exposed hardware items shall be hot dip galvanised or Electro-galvanised. 1.5 The circuit breakers shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological conditions as given in VOLUME-I, TR. 2.0 2.1 2.2 DUTY REQUIREMENTS: The circuit breakers shall be capable of performing their duties without opening resistors. The circuit breaker shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault or fault location also for line switching when used on a 800/420/245/145 kV effectively grounded system, and perform make and break operations as per the stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily. 2.2.1 PRE INSERTION RESISTER 800/420 kV circuit breakers wherever specified shall be provided with single step pre-insertion closing resistors to limit the switching surges to a value of less than 1.9 p.u for 800 kV and 2.3 p.u. for 420 kV respectively. The resistor shall have thermal rating for the following duties: Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 1
i)
TERMINAL FAULT Close -1 Min-Open-Close-open- 2 min-close-1 Min-open close open.
ii) RECLOSING AGAINST TRAPPED CHARGES Duty same as under (i) above. The first, third and fourth closures are to be on de-energized line while second closing is to be made with lines against trapped charge of 1.2 p.u. of opposite polarity. iii) OUT OF PHASE CLOSING One closing operation under phase opposition that is with twice the voltage across the terminals. iv) No allowance shall be made for heat dissipation of resistor during time interval between successive closing operations. The resistors and resistor supports shall perform all these duties without deterioration. Calculations and test reports of resistors proving thermal rating for duties specified above shall be furnished during detailed engineering. The calculations shall take care of adverse tolerances on resistance values and time settings. 2.3 The breaker shall be capable of interrupting the steady state and transient magnetising current corresponding of power transformers. 2.4 The circuit breaker shall also be capable of: i) ii) Interrupting line/cable charging current as per IEC without use of opening resistors. Clearing short line fault (Kilometric faults) with source impedance behind the bus equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified. iii) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at twice rated voltage under phase opposition condition. iv) 400kV breakers shall be able to switch in and out the 400kV shunt reactor for any value from 50MVAR and above, without giving rise to overvoltage more than 2.3 p.u. Laboratory test and / or field test reports in support of the same shall be furnished during detailed engineering. 2.5 The Breaker shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them during fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped charges. 2.6 CONTROLLED SWITCHING REQUIREMENTS The Circuit Breaker shall be equipped with controlled switching with consequent optimization of switching behavior, when used in: Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 2
a)
For 800 kV Switching of transformer Switching of shunt reactor
The controller shall be provided in Circuit breaker of switchable line reactor and in Main & Tie circuit breakers of Transformers and Bus reactors. b) For 400 kV Switching of shunt reactor. The controller shall be provided in Circuit breaker of switchable line reactor and in Main & Tie circuit breakers of Bus reactors. The controlling relay shall also record and monitor the switching operations and make adjustments to the switching instants to optimize the switching behavior as necessary. It shall provide self diagnostic facilities, signaling of alarms and enable downloading of data captured from the switching events. 2.6.1 Technical Requirement for controlled switching device: a) The controller shall be designed to operate at the correctly and satisfactorily with the excursion of auxiliary A/C & DC voltages and frequency as specified in VOLUME-I, TR. b) The controller shall meet the requirements of IEC-60255-4 Appendix E class III regarding HF disturbance test, and fast transient test shall be as per IEC61000 4 level III and insulation test as per 60255 5. c) The controller shall have functions for switching ON & OFF the circuit breakers. d) The controller shall get command to operate the breakers manually or through auto re-close relay at random. The controller shall be able to analyze the current and voltage waves available through the signals from secondaries of CTs & CVTs for the purpose of calculation of optimum moment of the switching the circuit breaker and issue command to circuit breaker to operate. e) The controller shall also have an adaptive control feature to consider the next operating time of the breaker in calculation of optimum time of issuing the switching command. In calculation of next operating time of the breaker the controller must consider all factors that may affect the operating time of the breaker such as, but not limited to, ambient temperature, hydraulic/pneumatic pressure of the operating mechanism, control voltage variation, SF6 gas density Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 3
variations etc. Schematic drawing for this purpose shall be provided by the contractor. The accuracy of the operating time estimation by the controller shall be better than + 0.5 ms. f) The controller should have display facility at the front for the settings and measured values. g) The controller should be PC compatible for the setting of various parameters and down loading of the settings and measured values date time of switching etc. Window based software for this purpose shall be supplied by the contractor to be used on the owners PC. h) The controller shall have self-monitoring facility. i) The controller shall be suitable for current input of 1 amp from the secondary of the CTs. and 110 V (Ph to Ph) from the CVTs. The controller shall also take care of transient and dynamic state values of the current from the secondary of the CTs and CVTs. j) The controller shall have time setting resolution of 0.1 ms or better.
k) The controller shall have sufficient number of output/input potential free contacts for connecting the monitoring equipment and annunciation system available in the control room. Necessary details shall be worked out during engineering the scheme. 3.0 3.1 TOTAL BREAK TIME: The total break time as specified under this Chapter shall not be exceeded under any of the following duties: i) Test duties T10, T30, T60, T100a, and T100s (TRV as per IEC: 62271-100)
ii) Short line fault L75, L90 3.2 The Bidder may please note that total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions specified such as with the combined variation of the trip coil voltage, (70-110%), pneumatic/hydraulic pressure and arc extinguishing medium pressure etc. While furnishing the proof of the total break time of complete circuit breaker, the Bidders may specifically bring out the effect of non-simultaneity between contacts within a pole or between poles and show how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time. 3.3 4.0 The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES: 4
Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker
The features and constructional details of circuit breakers shall be in accordance with requirements stated hereunder: 4.1 Contacts The gap between the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand atleast the rated phase to ground voltage for 8 hours at zero gauge pressure of SF6 gas due to the leakage. The breaker should be able to withstand all dielectric stresses imposed on it in open condition at lock out pressure continuously (i.e. 2 p.u. across the breaker continuously, for validation of which a power frequency dielectric with stand test conducted for a duration of at least 15 minutes is acceptable). 4.2 If multi-break interrupters are used, these shall be so designed and augmented that a uniform voltage distribution is developed across them. Calculations/ test reports in support of the same shall be furnished. The thermal and voltage withstand of the grading elements shall be adequate for the service conditions and duty specified. 4.3 The SF6 Circuit Breaker shall meet the following additional requirements: a) The circuit breaker shall be single pressure type. The design and construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is a minimum possibility of gas leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be any condensation of SF6 gas on the internal insulating surfaces of the circuit breaker. b) All gasketted surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if necessary, to minimise distortion and to make a tight seal, the operating rod connecting the operating mechanism to the arc chamber (SF6 media) shall have adequate seals. The SF6 gas leakage should not exceed 0.5% per year and the leakage rate shall be guaranteed for at least 10 years. In case the leakage under the specified conditions is found to be greater than 0.5% after one year of commissioning of circuit breaker, the manufacturer will have to supply free of cost, the total gas requirement for subsequent ten (10) years, based on actual leakage observed during first year of operation after commissioning. c) In the interrupter assembly there shall be an absorbing product box to minimise the effect of SF6 decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the construction of the circuit breakers shall be fully compatible with SF6 gas decomposition products. d) Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of two other poles (for 800, 420 & 245 kV CBs) and the SF6 density of each pole shall be monitored. For CBs of voltage class of 145 kV or less, a common SF6 scheme/density monitor shall be acceptable. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 5
e)
The dial type SF6 density monitor shall be adequately temperature compensated to model the pressure changes due to variations in ambient temperature within the body of circuit breaker as a whole. The density monitor shall have graduated scale and shall meet the following requirements: It shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for checking/replacement without draining the SF6 gas by providing suitable interlocked non return valve coupling.
f)
Each Circuit Breaker shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of minimum 8 millibars without distortion or failure of any part.
g)
Sufficient SF6 gas including that will be required for gas analysis during filling shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers installed.
4.4
Provisions shall be made for attaching an operational analyser to record contact travel, speed and making measurement of operating timings, pre-insertion timings of closing resisters if used, synchronisation of contacts in one pole.
5.0
SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS): a) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 60376, 60376A and 60376B and shall be suitable in all respects for use in the switchgear under the operating conditions. b) The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at site shall comply with requirements of the relevant standards and regulations. c) Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, air, hydrolysable fluorides and water content as per IEC 60376, 60376A and 60376B and test certificates shall be furnished to Employer indicating all the tests as per IEC 60376 for each lot of SF6 gas in stipulated copies as indicated in VOLUME-I, TR. Gas bottles should be tested for leakage during receipt at site.
6.0
INSULATORS: a) The porcelain of the insulators shall conform to the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR. b) The mechanical characteristics of insulators shall match with the requirements specified under this Chapter. c) All hollow insulators shall conform to IEC-62155. All routine and sample tests shall be conducted on the hollow column insulators as per these standards with requirements and procedures modified as under: i) Pressure test as a routine test. 6
ii) Bending load test as a routine test. iii) Bending load test as a sample test on each lot. iv) Burst pressure test as a sample test on each lot. v) In addition to above, ultrasonic test shall be carried out as additional routine test. d) Hollow Porcelain for pressurised columns/chambers should be in one integral piece in green and fired stage. 7.0 SPARE PARTS AND MANDATORY MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT: The bidder shall include in his proposal spare parts and maintenance equipment. Calibration certificates of each maintenance equipment shall be supplied along with the equipment. 8.0 8.1 OPERATING MECHANISM AND CONTROL General Requirements 8.1.1 Circuit breaker shall be operated by pneumatic mechanism (for 400 kV & 800 kV ratings only) or spring charged mechanism or hydraulic mechanism or a combination of these. The mechanism shall be housed in a weather proof and dust proof control cabinet as stipulated in Section-VOLUME-I, TR. 8.1.2 8.1.3 The operating mechanism shall be strong, rigid, not subject to rebound. The mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip free (as per IEC definition) under every method of closing. 8.1.4 The mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not prevent tripping and will not cause trip or closing operation of the power operating devices. 8.1.5 A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close position of the breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An operation counter shall also be provided in the central control cabinet. 8.1.6 Working parts of the mechanism shall be corrosion resisting material, bearings which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. Bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or locked to prevent loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the breaker. 8.1.7 The bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the mechanism along with the operation manual for the circuit breaker. The instruction manuals shall contain exploded diagrams with complete storage, handling, erection, commissioning, troubleshooting, servicing and overhauling instructions. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 7
8.2
Control: 8.2.1 The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary contact switches and push buttons. 8.2.2 Each breaker shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping circuits, pressure switches and coils each to be fed from separate DC sources and connected to a different set of protective relays. 8.2.3 The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However, provisions shall be made for local electrical control. For this purpose a local/remote selector switch and close and trip control switch/push buttons shall be provided in the Breaker central control cabinet. 8.2.4 The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision during both open and close position of breaker. The trip circuit supervision relay would be provided on relay panels. 8.2.5 Closing coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated voltage. However, even at 50% of rated voltage the breaker shall be able to open. If additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their successful operation and reliability for similar applications on outdoor circuit breakers shall be clearly brought out in the additional information schedules. 8.2.6 Density Monitor contacts and pressure switch contact shall be suitable for direct use as permissive in closing and tripping circuits. The density monitor shall be placed suitably inclined in such a way so that the readings are visible from ground level with or without using binoculars. Separate contacts have to be used for each of tripping and closing circuits. If contacts are not suitably rated and multiplying relays are used then fail safe logic/schemes are to be employed. DC supplies for all auxiliary circuits shall be monitored and provision shall be made for remote annunciations and operation lockout in case of D.C. failures. Density monitors are to be so mounted that the contacts do not change on vibration during operation of circuit Breaker.
8.2.7
The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be positively driven by the breaker operating rod.
8.3
Pneumatically operated mechanism (for 420 kV and 800 kV only) a) Each pneumatic operated breaker shall be equipped with compressed air system in accordance with Clause 16.0. b) The breaker local air receivers shall comply with the requirements under Clause 16.4 and shall have sufficient capacity for at-least two CO operations of the breaker at the lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling. c) Independently adjustable pressure switches with potential free, ungrounded contacts to actuate a lock out device shall be provided. This lockout device with provision of remote alarm indication shall be incorporated in the circuit breaker to prevent operation whenever the pressure of the operating mechanism is below that required for satisfactory operation of the circuit breaker. The scheme should permit operation of all blocking and alarm relays as soon as the pressure transient present during the rapid pressure drop has been damped and a reliable pressure measurement can be made. Such facilities shall be provided for following conditions: i) Trip lockout pressure - 2 Nos.
ii) Close lockout pressure - 1 No. iii) Auto re-close lockout pressure - 1 No. iv) Extreme low pressure - 1 No. d) The compressed air mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit breaker under all duty conditions with the air pressure immediately before operation between 85% and 110% of the rated supply pressure. The make/break time at this supply pressure shall not exceed the specified make/break time within any value of trip coil supply voltage as specified. e) The compressed air piping shall comply to requirements under Clause 16.0. 8.4 Spring operated mechanism: a) Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor in accordance with VOLUME-I, TR. Opening spring and closing spring with limit switch for automatic charging and other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a complete operating unit shall also be provided.
b) As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of the closing and opening operations shall be possible. The motor shall have adequate thermal rating for this duty. c) After failure of power supply to the motor one close open operation shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating mechanism. d) Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used solely for compressing the closing spring. Facility for manual charging of the closing spring shall also be provided. The motor rating shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for full charging of the closing spring. e) Closing action of circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping. f) When closing springs are discharged after closing a breaker, closing springs shall be automatically charged for the next operation and an indication of this shall be provided in the local and remote control cabinet. g) Provisions shall be made to prevent a closing operation of the breaker when the spring is in the partial charged condition. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent discharging of closing springs when the breaker is already in the closed position. h) The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the operating spring to close and latch the circuit breaker against the rated making current and also to provide the required energy for the tripping mechanism in case the tripping energy is derived from the operating mechanism. 8.5 Hydraulically operated mechanism: a) Hydraulically operated mechanism shall comprise of operating unit with power cylinder, control valves, high and low pressure reservoir, motor. Electrically driven motor shall comply to VOLUME-I, TR. b) The hydraulic oil used shall be fully compatible for the specified temperature range. c) The oil pressure switch controlling the oil pump and pressure in the high pressure reservoir shall have adequate number of spare contacts to be used for continuous monitoring of low pressure, high pressure etc. d) The mechanism shall be suitable for atleast two close open operations after failure of AC supply to the motor starting at pressure equal to the lowest pressure of auto reclose duty plus pressure drop for one close open operation.
10
e) The mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit breaker correctly and performing the duty cycle specified under all conditions with the pressure of hydraulic operated fluid in the operating mechanism at the lowest permissible pressure before make up. The opening time at the lowest pressure for a particular operation shall not exceed the guaranteed operating time within any value of trip coil supply voltage as specified. f) Trip lockout shall be provided to prevent operations of the circuit breaker below the minimum specified hydraulic pressure. Alarm contacts for loss of Nitrogen shall be provided. g) All hydraulic joints shall have no oil leakage under the site conditions and joints shall be tested at factory against oil leakage at a minimum of 1.5 times maximum working pressure. 9.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE: The structure design shall be such that during operation of circuit breaker vibrations are reduced to minimum. 10.0 TERMINAL CONNECTOR PAD: The circuit breaker terminal pads shall be made up of high quality electrolytic copper or aluminium and shall be conforming to Australian standard AS-2935 for rated current. The terminal pad shall have protective covers which shall be removed before interconnections.
11.0 11.1
INTERPOLE CABLING: All cables to be used by contractor shall be armoured and shall be as per IS 1554/ IEC-502 (1100 Volts Grade). All cables within & between circuit breaker poles shall be supplied by the CB manufacturer.
11.2
Only stranded conductor shall be used. Minimum size of the conductor for interpole control wiring shall be 1.5 sq.mm (Copper).
11.3
The cables shall be with oxygen index Min-29 and temp. index as 250C as per relevant standards.
12.0 12.1
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES Following is a partial list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be furnished by Contractor in the Central Control cabinet. Number and exact location of these parts shall be indicated in the bid.
11
i)
Cable glands (Double compression type), Lugs, Ferrules etc.
ii) Local/remote changeover switch. iii) Operation counter iv) Pneumatic/hydraulic pressure gauge, pump/compressor start counter (to be provided in case of pneumatic/Hydraulic operating mechanism). v) Control switches to cut off control power supply. vi) Fuses as required. vii) The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out all contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for future use. viii)Antipumping relay. ix) Pole discrepancy relay (for electrically ganged CBs). x) D.C. Supervision relays. xi) Rating and diagram plate in accordance with IEC incorporating year of manufacture. xii) Controlled switching equipments like sensors, timers, relays etc.(as applicable) 12.2 Additional fittings for pneumatically operated circuit breaker a) Unit compressed air system in accordance with Clause 16.0. b) Breaker air receivers. c) Pressure gauge, spring loaded safety valve and pressure switch with adjustable contacts. d) Pressure switch to initiate an alarm if the pressure in the auxiliary reservoir remains below a preset level for longer than it is normally necessary to refill the reservoir. e) Stop, non-return and other control valves, pipings and all accessories upto breaker mechanism housing. 13.0 ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER: a) The temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density monitor alongwith details of density monitor. b) Method of checking the healthiness of voltage distribution devices (condensers) provided across the breaks at site. c) Data on capabilities of circuit breakers in terms of time and number of operations at duties ranging from 100% fault currents to load currents of the lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or checks. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 12
d) The effect of non-simultaneity between contacts between poles and also show how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time. e) Sectional view of non-return couplings if used for SF6 pipes. f) Details & type of filters used in interrupter assembly and also the operating experience with such filters. g) Details of SF6 gas: i) The test methods used in controlling the quality of gas used in the circuit breakers particularly purity and moisture content. ii) Proposed tests to assess the conditions of the SF6 within a circuit breaker after a period of service particularly with regard to moisture contents of the gas. h) The bidders shall furnish along with the bid, curves supported by test data indicating the opening time under close open operation with combined variation of trip coil voltage and pneumatic/hydraulic pressure. j) Detailed literature and schematic diagrams of switching mechanism for closing resistor showing the duration of insertion shall also be furnished alongwith the calculations in respect of thermal rating of resistors for the duties specified under clause 2.2 of this chapter in case of 420 kV circuit breaker. i) All duty requirements as applicable to 800 kV, 420 kV, 245 kV & 145 kV CBs specified under Clause 2.0 of shall be provided with the support of adequate test reports. j) 14.0 14.1 Field test report or laboratory test report in case of CB meant for reactor switching duty.
TESTS: In accordance with the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR the circuit breaker along with its operating mechanism shall conform to IEC: 62271-100.
14.2
The test reports of the type tests and the following additional type tests shall also be submitted for Purchasers review: i) Corona extinction voltage test (as per Annexure-I of VOLUME-I, TR).
ii) Out of phase closing test as per IEC: 62271-100. iii) Line charging breaking current for proving parameters as per clause no. 3.2 (B) (i). iv) Test to demonstrate the Power Frequency withstand capability of breaker in open condition at Zero Gauge pressure and at lockout pressure (Ref. Clause 4.1).
13
v) Seismic withstand test (As per Annexure-II of VOLUME-I, TR) in unpressurised condition. vi) Verification of the degree of protection. vii) Low & high temperature test. (if applicable) viii) Humidity test. (if applicable) ix) Static Terminal Load test. x) Critical Currents test (if applicable). xi) Switching of Shunt Reactors. xii) Controlled switching performance and validation tests(wherever applicable) 14.3 Routine Tests Routine tests as per IEC: 62271-100 shall be performed on all circuit breakers. In addition to the mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the following tests shall also be performed. i) Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained with the help of a suitable operation analyser to determine the breaker contact movement during opening, closing, autoreclosing and trip free operation under normal as well as limiting operating conditions (control voltage, pneumatic/hydraulic pressure etc.). The tests shall show the speed of contacts directly at various stages of operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time, shortest time between separation and meeting of contacts at break make operation etc. This test shall also be performed at site for which the necessary operation analyser alongwith necessary transducers, cables, console, etc. where included in scope of supply shall be furnished and utilised. In case of substations where operation analyser is existing, the bidder shall utilise the same. However necessary adopter and transducers etc. if required shall have to be supplied by the bidder. ii) Measurement of Dynamic Contact resistance measurement for arcing & main contacts. Signature of Dynamic contact resistance measurements shall be taken as reference for comparing the same during operation and maintenance in order to ascertain the healthiness of contacts. iii) Routine tests on Circuit breakers with Controlled switching equipment as per draft IEC. 15.0 15.1 DEAD TANK TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER In case dead tank type circuit breaker is offered, the Bidder shall offer bushing type CTs on either side of dead tank circuit breaker instead of conventional outdoor CTs. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 14
15.2
The enclosure shall be made of either Al/Al Alloy or mild steel (suitably hot dip galvanised). The enclosure shall be designed for the mechanical and thermal loads to which it is subjected in service. The enclosure shall be manufactured and tested according to the pressure vessel codes {i.e., latest edition of the ASME code for pressure vessel - Section VIII of BS-5179, IS4379, IS-7311 (as applicable) and also shall meet Indian Boiler Regulations}. The maximum temperature of enclosure with CB breaker carrying full load current shall not exceed the ambient by more than 20 deg C.
15.3
The enclosure has to be tested as a routine test at 1.5 times the design pressure for one minute. A bursting pressure test shall be carried out at 5 times the design pressure as type test on the enclosure.
16.0 16.1
UNIT COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS: The unit compressed air system shall meet the following requirements: a) The compressed air system shall be provided with necessary piping, piping accessories, control valves, safety valves, filters, reducing valves, isolating valves, drain ports, automatic condensate drain valve etc. The Unit compressed air system shall be provided with suitable anti-vibration pads wherever required. b) The compressors or pumps shall be of the air cooled type and mounted within the operating mechanism housing or a separate weather-proof and dust-proof housing. c) The air receiver shall have stored energy for 2 CO operations of the breaker at the blocking pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling. The unit compressor shall be capable of building up required pressure for another 2 CO operations within 30 minutes. d) The size of the compressor shall be determined by the bidder. The compressor shall be of sufficient capacity for performing all the operations above mentioned.
16.2
Air Compressor: a) The air compressor shall be of air cooled type complete with cylinder lubrication, drive motor etc. The compressor shall be rated for the following duty: i) Total running time of not exceeding 80 minutes compressor to build up the rated pressure from atmospheric pressure ii) Normal running air not exceeding 15 minutes charging considering 10% leakage/day.
15
iii) Air charging time not exceeding 15 minutes. After one close-open operation from rated pressure. b) Compressor shall be driven by automatically controlled motors conforming to requirements of VOLUME-I, TR. c) The compressor shall be provided with automatic adjustable unloading device during starting. d) The compressor shall be equipped with a Time totaliser and a Pressure gauge. 16.3 Intercooler and after cooler: (If applicable) Intercooler between compressor stage and after cooler at discharge if any of H.P. cylinder shall be included in Contractors scope. They shall be of air cooled type and shall be designed as per ASME Code of IEMA Standards. The design pressure on the air side of cooler shall be 1.25 times the working pressure. A corrosion allowance of 3 mm shall be included for all steel parts. 16.4 Air Receivers: a) Air receiver shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the ASME Code for Pressure Vessel - Section VIII of BS: 5179. If the air receiver is not fully hot dip galvanised, it shall be coated on the inside face with antirust medium and a corrosion allowance of 3.0 mm shall be provided for shell and dished ends. b) Connections for air inlet and outlet, drain and relief valves shall be flanged type or screwed type. Pressure gauge and pressure switch connections shall be screwed type only. c) Accessories such as suitable sized safety valve to relieve full compressor discharge at a set pressure equal to 1.1 times the maximum operating pressure, blow off valve, auto drain tap with isolating and bypass valve, dial type pressure gauge with isolating and drain valve and test connection shall be provided. d) Air receiver shall be offered with atleast 50% spare capacity, calculated on the basis of total air requirement for 2 CO operations. 16.5 Quality of Air: Compressed air used shall be dry and free of dust particles and fully compatible with the materials used in the pneumatic operating mechanism. Arrangement for conditioning the compressed air if required shall be provided as an integral part of air compressor system. If situation warrants, because of the severe ambient conditions, the supplier may offer centralised compressed air system. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 16
16.6
Control and Control Equipment: a) The compressor control shall be of automatic start/stop type initiated by pressure switches. b) Duplicate incoming supply of 415 V, AC shall be provided by the Employer at switchyard bay marshaling box from where the Contractor shall take the feed to the operating mechanism. c) All the necessary compressor control equipment shall be housed in a totally enclosed sheet steel cabinet also conforming to requirements of VOLUME-I, TR. Pressure gauges and other indicating devices, control switches shall be mounted on the control cabinet. d) A glass window shall be provided for viewing the indicating instrument/gauges. The maximum height shall be 2000 mm.
16.7
Compressed Air Piping, Valves and Fittings: a) The flow capacity of all valves shall be at least 20% greater than the total compressor capacity. b) The high pressure pipe and air system shall be such that after one O-0.3 sec-COoperation the breaker shall be capable of performing one CO operation within 3 minutes. c) All compressed air piping shall be bright annealed, seamless phosphorous Deoxidized Non-Arsenical Copper alloy as per BS: 2874 or stainless steel pipe (C - 106 of BS: 2871-1957). d) All joints and connections in the piping system shall be brazed or flared as necessary. e) All compressed air piping shall be carried out in accordance with BS: 162. f) Compressed air piping system shall be complete with Saddle clamps to support the piping system at suitable intervals. Necessary bolts, nuts, pipe fixing clamps etc shall be included in the scope of Contractor.
16.8
Tests: In accordance with the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR, the compressors and its accessories shall conform to the type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards.
17.0 17.1
PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS An indicative list of tests is given below. All routine tests except power frequency voltage dry withstand test on main circuit breaker shall be repeated on the completely assembled breaker at site. This document will be available at respective sites and shall be referred by
17
the contractor. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) Insulation resistance of each pole. Check adjustments, if any suggested by manufacturer. Breaker closing and opening time. Slow and Power closing operation and opening. Trip free and anti pumping operation. Minimum pick-up voltage of coils. Dynamic Contact resistance measurement. Functional checking of compressed air plant and all accessories. Functional checking of control circuits interlocks, tripping through protective relays and auto reclose operation. (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t) 17.2 Insulation resistance of control circuits, motor etc. Resistance of closing and tripping coils. SF6 gas leakage check. Dew Point Measurement Operation check of pressure switches and gas density monitor during gas filling. Checking of mechanical CLOSE interlock, wherever applicable. Testing of grading capacitor. Resistance measurement of main circuit. Checking of operating mechanisms Check for annunciations in control room. Point of wave switching test(wherever applicable)
The contractor shall ensure that erection, testing and commissioning of circuit breaker shall be carried out under the supervision of the circuit breaker manufacturer's representative. The commissioning report shall be signed by the manufacturers representative.
18
19
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CIRCUIT BREAKER
I. a) b)
800 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER: Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature. Rated short circuit current breaking capacity rated voltage corresponding to minimum under operating specified. conditions opening time 40 kA with percentage DC component as per IEC: at 62271-100 3000
c)
Symmetrical interrupting (kA rms)
40 capability
d)
Rated short circuit making current (kAp)
102
e)
i)
Short time current carrying capability for one second (kArms)
40
ii)
Out of phase breaking current capacity (kA rms)
10
f)
Rated operating duty cycle
O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO
g)
Reclosing
Single phase & three phase auto-reclosing
h)
First pole to clear factor
1.3
i)
Rated line charging interrupting current at 90 deg. leading power factor angle (A. rms)
900 A
(The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated line charging current with test voltage immediately before opening equal to the product of U/3 & 1.4 as per IEC: 62271100). Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 20
j)
Temperature rise over the design ambient temperature
As per IEC: 62271-100
k) l) m)
Rated break time Total closing time (ms) Operating mechanism or a combination of these
40 Not more than 150 Spring/Hydraulic
o)
Max. difference in the instants of closing/ opening of contacts (ms) a) Within a pole b) Between poles c) Between poles (closing) 2.5 3.3 5.0
The above shall be at rated control voltage and rated operating and quenching media pressures. p) Trip coil and closing coil voltage q) r) Rated terminal load Auxiliary contacts 220 V DC with variation as specified As per IEC Besides requirement of
specification, the bidder shall wire up 5 NO + 5 NC contacts for future use of purchaser. s) No of Terminals in common All contacts & control circuits to be Control cabinet wired out up to common control cabinet plus use. t) Maximum allowable switching overvoltage under any switching condition u) TRV (kVp) As per IEC: 62271-100 21 1.9 p.u. 24 terminals exclusively for Purchasers
v)
Pre-insertion resistor requirement i) Rating (ohms) 450 (Maximum) 9 time (ms) a) PIR Contacts should open immediately after closing of main circuits. OR b) Atleast 5 ms prior to opening of main contacts at rated air/gas pressure, where the PIR Contacts remain closed. II. a) 420 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER: Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature. b) Rated short circuit current breaking with percentage DC component as per at rated voltage IEC: 62271-100 corresponding to minimum opening time under operating conditions specified c) Symmetrical interrupting capability (kA rms) d) Rated short circuit making current (kAp) e) i) Short time current carrying capability for one second (kArms) ii) Out of phase breaking current capacity (kArms) f) Rated operating duty cycle g) Reclosing Single phase & three phase autoreclosing O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO 12.5 50 125 50 50 kA 2000 / 3150 (as applicable)
ii) Minimum pre-insertion iii) Opening of PIR contacts
22
h) i)
First pole to clear Rated line charging interrupting current
1.3 factor 600 A
at 90 deg. leading power factor angle (A. rms) (The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated line charging current with test voltage immediately before opening equal to the product of U/3 & 1.4 as per IEC: 62271-100). j) Temperature rise over the As per IEC: 62271-100 design ambient temperature k) l) m) Rated break time as per IEC (ms) Total closing time (ms) Operating mechanism or a combination of these n) Max. difference in the instants of closing/ opening of contacts (ms) i) Within a pole 2.5 3.3 5.0 40 Not more than 150 Pneumatic/spring/hydraulic
ii) Between poles (opening) iii) Between poles (closing)
The above shall be at rated control voltage and rated operating and quenching media pressures. o) Trip coil and closing 220 V DC with variation as specified coil voltage p) Noise level at base and upto 50 m (distance from base of breaker) q) r) Rated terminal load Auxiliary contacts As per IEC Besides requirement of 140 dB (Max.)
specification, the bidder shall wire up 5 NO + 5 NC contacts for future use of purchaser. Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 23
s)
No of Terminals in common
All contacts & control circuits Control cabinet to be wired out upto common control cabinet plus 24 use. terminals exclusively for Purchasers
t)
Maximum allowable switching overvoltage under any switching condition
2.3 p.u.
u)
Pre-insertion resistor requirement i) Rating (ohms) 400 8
ii) Minimum pre-insertion time (ms) iii) Opening of PIR contacts
a) PIR Contacts should open immediately after closing of main circuits. OR b) Atleast 5 ms prior to opening of main contacts at rated air/gas pressure, where the PIR Contacts remain closed.
III. a) b)
245 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER: Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature. Rated short circuit current breaking capacity at rated voltage 40 kA 1600/2000/3000
c) d) e)
Symmetrical interrupting capability (kArms) Rated short circuit making current (kAp) Short time current
40 100 40 24
carrying capability for one second (kArms) f) g) h) i) Rated operating duty cycle Reclosing First pole to clear factor Rated line/cable charging current at 90 deg. leading power factor angle (A. rms) (The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated line/cable charging current with test voltage immediately before opening equal to the product of U/3 & 1.4 as per IEC: 62271-100). j) k) l) m) Temperature rise over the design ambient temperature Rated break time Total closing time (ms) Operating mechanism 60 Not more than 200 spring/hydraulic or a combination of these n) Max. difference in the instants of closing/ opening of contacts (ms) i) Between poles (opening) 3.3 5.0 As per IEC: 62271-100 As per IEC interrupting Single phase & three phase autoreclosing 1.3 O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO
ii) Between poles (closing)
The above shall be at rated control voltage and rated operating and quenching media pressures. o) Trip coil and closing coil voltage p) Noise level at base and (distance from base of breaker) q) r) Rated terminal load Auxiliary contacts As per IEC Besides requirement of 220 V DC with variation as specified 140 dB (Max.) upto 50 m
specification, the bidder shall wire up 5 NO + 5 NC Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker 25
contacts for future use of purchaser. s) No of Terminals in common All Contacts & control circuits to be Control cabinet wired out upto common control cabinet plus use. t) Maximum allowable switching overvoltage under any switching condition IV. 145 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER: a) Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature. b) Rated short circuit current breaking DC capacity at rated voltage component as per IEC: 62271-100 to at minimum specified c) d) Symmetrical interrupting capability (kA rms) Rated short circuit making current (kAp) e) Short time current carrying capability for one second (kA rms) f) Out of phase breaking current capacity (kA rms) g) Rated operating duty cycle h) Reclosing Three phase autoreclosing 1.3 26 O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO As per IEC 31.5 80 31.5 corresponding rated voltage time opening 31.5 kA with percentage 1600/2000 As per IEC 24 terminals exclusively for Purchasers
under operating conditions
i) First pole to clear factor Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker
j)
Rated line/cable charging interrupting current at 90 deg. leading power factor angle (A. rms)
As per IEC
(The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated line/cable charging current with test voltage immediately before opening equal to the product of U/3 & 1.4 as per IEC: 62271-100). k) Temperature rise over the design ambient temperature As per IEC: 62271-100
l) m) n)
Rated break time as per IEC (ms) Total closing time (ms) Operating mechanism
60 Not more than 150 spring/hydraulic or a combination of these
o)
Max. difference in the instants of closing/ opening of contacts (ms) between poles at rated control voltage and rated operating and quenching media pressures.
3.3
p) q) r) s)
Trip coil and closing coil voltage Noise level at base and upto 50 m (distance from base of breaker) Rated terminal load Auxiliary contacts
220 V DC with variation 140 dB (Max.) As per IEC Besides requirement of specification, the bidder shall wire up 5 NO + 5 NC contacts for future use of Purchaser.
t)
No. of Terminals in common circuits control cabinet
All contacts & control to be wired out upto common control cabinet plus 24 terminals exclusively for Purchasers use.
27
u)
Maximum allowable switching overvoltage under any switching condition
As per IEC
v)
Rated small inductive current switching capability with overvoltage less than 2.3 p.u.(A)
0.5 to 10
28
SECTION- (B) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ISOLATORS 1.0 1.1 General The Isolators and accessories shall conform in general to IEC: 62271-102 (or IS: 9921) except to the extent explicitly modified in specification and shall be in accordance with requirement of VOLUME-I, TR. 1.2 Isolators shall be outdoor, off-load type. Earth switches shall be provided on isolators wherever called for, with possibility of being mounted on any side of the isolator. 800 kV isolator design shall be double break or vertical break or knee-type. 420 kV & below rated isolators shall be double break type, unless specified otherwise. 1.3 Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied including but not limited to the following: 1.3.1 Isolator assembled with complete Support Insulators, operating rod insulator, base frame, linkages, operating mechanism, control cabinet, interlocks etc. 1.3.2 All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable isolator installation, control parts and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not. 1.3.3 The isolator shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological conditions as given in VOLUME-I, TR. 2.0 Duty Requirements a) Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their closed position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under influence of short circuit current. b) The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that the earth switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical interlocks. Suitable mechanical arrangement shall also be provided for delinking electrical drive for manual operation. c) In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking coil shall
Volume-II (Section-B), Isolator
29
be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and within a variation range as stipulated in VOLUME-I, TR. d) The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the associated lines. e) The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of make/break operation. 3.0 Constructional Features The features and constructional details of Double Break Isolators/Vertical Break/Knee-type isolators, earth switches and accessories shall be in accordance with requirements stated hereunder: 3.1 Contacts a) The contacts shall be self aligning and self cleaning and so designed that binding cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in a heavily polluted atmosphere. b) No undue wear or scuffing shall be evident during the mechanical endurance tests. Contacts and spring shall be designed so that readjustments in contact pressure shall not be necessary throughout the life of the isolator or earthing switch. Each contact or pair of contacts shall be independently sprung so that full pressure is maintained on all contacts at all time. c) Contact springs shall not carry any current and shall not loose their characteristics due to heating effects. d) The moving contact of double break isolator shall have turn-and -twist type or other suitable type of locking arrangement to ensure adequate contact pressure.
3.2
Base Each single pole of the isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base provided with holes and designed for mounting on a supporting structure.
3.3
Blades a) All metal parts shall be of non-rusting and non-corroding material. All current carrying parts shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic copper/aluminium Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent locking facilities if
30
provided on current carrying parts, shall be made of copper silicon alloy or stainless steel or equivalent. The bolts or pins used in current carrying parts shall be made of noncorroding material. Ferrous parts, other than stainless steel shall not be used in close proximity of main current path. All ferrous castings, if used elsewhere shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast-steel. No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of the isolator. b) The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and other corona producing surfaces, where this is impracticable adequate corona rings shall be provided. Corona shields are not acceptable. Corona rings shall be made up of aluminum/aluminum alloy. c) Isolators and earthing switches including their operating parts shall be such that they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by short circuit forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks, or accidental touching of the connecting rods of the operating mechanism. d) The switch shall be designed such that no lubrication of any part is required except at very infrequent intervals. i.e. after every 1000 operations or after 5 years whichever is earlier. 3.4 Insulator a) The insulator shall conform to IS: 2544 and/or IEC-60168. The porcelain of the insulator shall conform to the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR and shall have a minimum cantilever strength of 1000/1000/1000/600 kgs for 800/420/245/145 kV insulators respectively. b) Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the insulators after the main blades are fully closed. c) The parameters of the insulators shall meet the requirements specified under VOLUMEI, TR. d) Insulator shall be type and routine tested as per IEC-60168. Besides following additional tests shall also be conducted: (i) Bending load test in four directions at 50% of minimum bending load guaranteed on all insulators, as a routine test. (ii) Bending load test in four directions at 100% of minimum bending load as a sample test on each lot. (iii) Torsional test on sample insulators of a lot. Volume-II (Section-B), Isolator 31
(iv) Ultrasonic test as a routine test. Name Plate: The name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating year of manufacture. 4.0 Earthing Switches a) Where earthing switches are specified these shall include the complete operating mechanism and auxiliary contacts. b) The earthing switches shall form an integral part of the isolator and shall be mounted on the base frame of the isolator. c) Earthing switches shall be only locally operated. d) The earthing switches shall be constructionally interlocked with the isolator so that the earthing switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical interlocks. Suitable mechanical arrangement shall be provided for delinking electrical drive for manual operation. e) Each earth switch shall be provided with flexible copper/aluminum braids for connection to earth terminal. These braids shall have the same short time current carrying capacity as the earth blade. The transfer of fault current through swivel connection will not be accepted. f) The plane of movement and final position of the earth blades shall be such that adequate electrical clearances are obtained from adjacent live parts in the course of its movement between ON and OFF position. g) The frame of each isolator and earthing switches shall be provided with two reliable earth terminals for connection to the earth mat. h) Isolator design shall be such as to permit addition of earth switches at a future date. It should be possible to interchange position of earth switch to either side. i) The earth switch should be able to carry the same fault current as the main blades of the Isolators and shall withstand dynamic stresses. j) 420 kV & 245 kV earth switches shall also comply with the requirements of IEC-62271102, in respect of induced current switching duty as defined for Class-B and short circuit making capability class E0 for earthing switches. 5.0 Operating Mechanism
32
a) The bidder shall offer motor operated Isolators and earth switches. Earth switches of 36 kV and below rating shall be manual operated. b) Control cabinet/operating mechanism box shall conform to the requirement stipulated in VOLUME-I, TR and shall be made of cast aluminium/aluminum sheet of adequate thickness (minimum 3 mm) or stainless steel (grade-304)of minimum thickness 2mm. c) A Local/Remote selector switch and a set of open/ close push buttons shall be provided on the control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through local or remote push buttons. d) Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to prevent local/remote power operation. e) Motor shall be an AC motor and conform to the requirements of VOLUME-I, TR. f) Suitable reduction gearing shall be provided between the motor and the drive shaft of the isolator. The mechanism shall stop immediately when motor supply is switched off. If necessary a quick electromechanical brake shall be fitted on the higher speed shaft to effect rapid braking. g) Manual operation facility (with handle) should be provided with necessary interlock to disconnect motor. h) Gear should be of forged material suitably chosen to avoid bending/jamming on operation after a prolonged period of non operation. Also all gear and connected material should be so chosen/surface treated to avoid rusting. i) Only stranded conductor shall be used for wiring. Minimum size of the conductor for control circuit wiring shall be 1.5 sq.mm. (Copper). j) The operating mechanism shall be located such that it can be directly mounted on any one of the support structure. 6.0 Operation a) The main Isolator and earth switches shall be individual pole operated for 800/420 kV and gang operated in case of 245 kV & 145 kV. However, 245 kV Tandem Isolators shall be individual-pole operated. The operating mechanism of the three poles shall be well synchronized and interlocked. b) The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service conditions. All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed for negligible deflection. The length of inter insulator and interpole operating rods shall be capable of adjustments, by means of screw thread which can be locked with a lock nut after an Volume-II (Section-B), Isolator 33
adjustment has been made. The isolator and earth switches shall be provided with over center device in the operating mechanism to prevent accidental opening by wind, vibration, short circuit forces or movement of the support structures. c) Each isolator/pole of isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a manual operating handle enabling one man to open or close the isolator with ease in one movement while standing at ground level. Non-detachable type manual operating handle shall have provision for padlocking. For detachable type manual operating handles, suitable provision shall be made inside the operating mechanism box for parking the detached handles. The provision of manual operation shall be located at a convenient operating height from the base of isolator support structure. d) The isolator shall be provided with positive continuous control throughout the entire cycle of operation. The operating pipes and rods shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain positive control under the most adverse conditions and when operated in tension or compression for isolator closing. They shall also be capable of withstanding all torsional and bending stresses due to operation of the isolator. Wherever supported the operating rods shall be provided with bearings on either ends. The operating rods/ pipes shall be provided with suitable universal couplings to account for any angular misalignment. e) All rotating parts shall be provided with grease packed roller or ball bearings in sealed housings designed to prevent the ingress of moisture, dirt or other foreign matter. Bearings pressure shall be kept low to ensure long life and ease of operation. Locking pins wherever used shall be rustproof. f) Signaling of closed position shall not take place unless it is certain that the movable contacts, have reached a position in which rated normal current, peak withstand current and short time withstand current can be carried safely. Signaling of open position shall not take place unless movable contacts have reached a position such that clearance between contacts is atleast 80% of the isolating distance. g) The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each of the Isolators and earthing switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at the lower end of the vertical rod of shaft for the Isolators and earthing switch. The indicator shall be of metal and shall be visible from operating level. h) The contractor shall furnish the following details along with quality norms, during detailed engineering stage. (i) Current transfer arrangement from main blades of isolator alongwith milli volt drop immediately across transfer point. Volume-II (Section-B), Isolator 34
(ii) Details to demonstrate smooth transfer of rotary motion from motor shaft to the insulator along with stoppers to prevent over travel. 7.0 Terminal Connector Stud/Pad The isolator terminal pads/studs shall be made of high quality copper or aluminum and shall be conforming to Australian standard AS-2935 for rated current. The terminal pad shall have protective covers which shall be removed before interconnections. 8.0 Support Structure 800 kV/420 kV/245 kV/145 kV Isolators shall be suitable for mounting on support structures to be supplied in accordance with stipulations of VOLUME-I, TR. 9.0 9.1 Tests In continuation to the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR the isolator alongwith its earthing switch and operating mechanism should have been type tested as per IEC/IS and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IEC-62271-102. Minimum 1000 Nos. mechanical operations in line with mechanical endurance test, M0 duty, shall be carried out on 1 (one) isolator out of every lot of Isolators, assembled completely with all accessories, as acceptance test for the lot. The travel characteristics measured at a suitable location in the base of insulator along with motor current/power drawn, during the entire travel duration are to be recorded at the start and completion and shall not vary by more than (+/-) 10% after completion of 1000 cycles of operation. After completion of test, mechanical interlock operation to be checked. 9.2 The test reports of the type tests and the following additional type tests (additional type tests are required for isolators rated above 72.5 kV only) shall also be submitted for the Purchasers review. (i) Radio interference voltage test as per Annexure-I of Volume-I, TR. (ii) Corona Extinction Voltage test as per Annexure- I of Volume-I, TR (for 800/420 kV Isolators only). (iii) Seismic withstand test on isolator mounted on Support structure as per Annexure-II of Volume-I, TR. The test shall be performed in the following position: Isolator open E/S Closed Isolator open E/S Open Isolator Closed E/S Open
35
10.0
Spare Parts and Maintenance Equipment Bidder shall include in his proposal mandatory spare parts in accordance with the requirements.
11.0 11.1
Pre-Commissioning Tests An indicative list of tests on isolator and earth switch is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./instructions of the equipment Supplier or Purchaser without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Insulation resistance of each pole. Manual and electrical operation and interlocks. Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors. Ground connections. Contact resistance. Proper alignment so as to minimize vibration during operation. Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch. Resistance of operating and interlocks coils. Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical interlocks. 50 operations test on isolator and earth switch.
36
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ISOLATORS 1.0 Technical Particulars: a) 800 kV ISOLATORS: i) ii) Type Rated current at 50C ambient temperature iii) Rated short time withstand current of isolator and earth switch iv) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 102 kAp current of isolator and earth switch v) Temperature rise over design ambient temperature of 50C vi) Rated mechanical terminal load As per Table-3 ofIEC:62271-102 (for 4000A) or as per value calculated in Section VOLUME-I, TR whichever is higher vii) Operating mechanism of isolator /earth switch viii) No. of auxiliary contacts on each isolator ix) No. of auxiliary contacts on each A.C. Motor operated 5 NO + 5 NC contacts wired terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future 3 NO + 3 NC Contacts wired earthing switch to terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future. x) Operating time 20 sec. or less All contacts & control circuits are be wired up to control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly distributed. to As per Table-3 of IEC-62271-1 40 kA for 1 Sec. Outdoor 3150 A
xi) Number of terminal in control to cabinet (Interpole cabling shall be supplied by Contractor)
37
b)
420 kV ISOLATORS: i) ii) Type Rated current at 50C ambient temperature iii) Rated short time withstand current of isolator and earth switch (for 1 Sec.) iv) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 125 kAp current of isolator and earth switch v) Temperature rise over design ambient temperature vi) Rated mechanical terminal load. or As per table III of IEC-62271-102 as per value calculated in SectionVOLUME-I, higher. vii) Operating mechanism of Isolator/earth switch viii) No. of auxiliary contacts on each isolator ix) No. of auxiliary contacts on each 5 NO + 5 NC contacts wired to terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future. NO + 3 NC Contacts wired to earthing switch 3 terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future. x) Operating time 12 sec. or less All contacts & control circuits are be wired upto control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly distributed. A.C. Motor operated TR whichever is As per Table-3 of IEC-62271-1 50 kA Outdoor 2000 A / 3150 A (as applicable)
xi) Number of terminal in control to cabinet (Interpole cabling shall be supplied by Contractor)
c)
245 kV ISOLATORS: i) ii) Type Rated current at 50C ambient temperature Outdoor 3000A/ 2000A/ 1600A 38
iii) Rated short time withstand current of isolator and earth switch (for 1 Sec.) iv) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand current of isolator and earth switch v) Temperature rise over design ambient
40 kA
100 kAp
As per Table-3 of IEC-62271-1 As per table III of IEC-62271-102 as per value calculated in SectionVOLUME-I, higher. TR whichever is
temperature vi) Rated mechanical terminal load or
vii) Operating mechanism of isolator/ earth switch viii) No. of auxiliary contacts on each isolator
A.C. Motor operated
Besides requirement of this spec., 5 NO + 5 NC to contacts, wired to terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future
ix) No. of auxiliary contacts on each
Besides requirement of this spec., earthing switch the bidder shall wire up 3 NO + 3 NC to TBs (Reversible) for Purchasers future use.
x)
Operating time
12 sec. or less All contacts & control circuits are to be wired upto control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly
xi) Number of terminal in control cabinet (Interpole cabling shall be supplied by Contractor) distributed
d)
145 kV ISOLATORS: i) ii) Type Rated current at 50C ambient temperature Outdoor 2000A/ 1250 A
39
iii) Rated short time withstand current of isolator and earth switch (for 1 Sec.) iv) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 80 kAp v)
31.5 kA for 1 Sec.
Temperature rise over design ambient As per Table-3 of IEC-62271-1 As per table III of IEC-62271-102 Or as per value calculated in Section-VOLUME-I, TR whichever is higher.
temperature vii) Rated mechanical terminal load
x)
Operating mechanism of isolator/ earth switch
A.C. Motor operated Besides requirement of this spec., 5 NO + 5 NC to contacts, wired to terminal block exclusively for Purchasers use in future.
xi) No. of auxiliary contacts on each isolator
xii) No. of auxiliary contacts on each earthing switch
Besides requirement of this spec., the bidder shall wire up 3 NO + 3 NC to TBs (Reversible) for Purchasers future use.
x)
Operating time
12 sec. or less All contacts & control circuits are to be wired upto control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly
xi) Number of terminal in control cabinet (Interpole cabling shall be supplied by Contractor) distributed
e) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR 36 KV ISOLATOR Rated voltage Rated current Standards Rated short time Operating drive Type 36kV 400 A IEC 62271-102 25KA for 3 sec Motor operated Double break Isolator without E/S, 3 40
pole, outdoor, Gang operated. 7. Interlock Pad locking of operating handle for preventing unauthorized preventing operation. 8. Construction All ferrous parts to be galvanized except nuts and bolts which shall be electroplated as per relevant IS. 9. Terminal connector To suit site conditions and layout requirements. 10 Operating time As applicable
41
SECTION-C TECHNICAL DETAILS OF INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 1.0 1.1 GENERAL: The instrument transformers and accessories shall conform to the latest version of the standards specified below except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall be in accordance with the requirements in VOLUME-I, TR. Current Transformers Capacitive Voltage Transformers Inductive Voltage Transformers : 1.2 : : : IEC: 60044-1 (or IS: 2705) IEC: 60044-5 / IEC-60358 IEC: 60044-2
The instrument transformers shall be complete with its terminal box and a common marshalling box for a set of 3 instrument transformers.
1.3
The external surface of instrument transformer, if made of steel, shall be hot dip galvanized or painted as per VOLUME-I, TR.
1.4
The impregnation details alongwith tests/checks to ensure successful completion of impregnation cycle shall be furnished for approval.
1.5
The instrument transformers shall be designed for use in geographic and meteorological conditions as given in VOLUME-I, TR.
2.0
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES: The features and constructional details of instrument transformers shall be in accordance with requirements stipulated hereunder:
2.1
a) Instrument transformers shall be of 800/420/245/145 kV class, oil filled/ SF6 gas filled, suitable for outdoor service and upright mounting on steel structures. 420/245/145 kV Instrument transformers and 800 kV CVT shall be with shedded porcelain/ polymer bushings/Insulators However, 800kV CTs shall be acceptable only with polymer Insulator. b) Bushings/Insulators shall conform to requirements stipulated in, VOLUME-I, TR. The bushing/insulator for CT shall be one piece without any metallic flange joint. c) Oil filling and drain plugs, oil sight glass shall be provided for CT and for electromagnetic unit of CVT etc. The Instrument transformer shall have cantilever strength of not less than 500 kg, 500 kg, 350 kg and 350 kg respectively for 800/420/245/145 kV Instrument transformers. For CVT with polymer housing, the
Volume-II (Section-C), Instrument Transformer
42
cantilever strength shall not be less than 150kg. Oil filling and drain plugs are not required with SF6 gas filled CT. d) Instruments transformers shall be hermetically sealed units. Bidder/ Manufacturer shall furnish details of the arrangements made for the sealing of instrument transformers during detailed engineering. Bidder/Manufacturer shall also furnish the details of site tests to check the effectiveness of hermetic sealing for approval. e) Polarity marks shall indelibly be marked on each instrument transformer and at the lead terminals at the associated terminal block. f) In case of SF6 filled CTs/Inductive VTs, it shall be provided with a suitable SF6 gas density monitoring device, with NO/NC contacts to facilitate the remote annunciation and tripping in case of SF6 leakage. Provisions shall be made for online gas filling. Suitable rupture disc shall be provided to prevent explosion. 2.2 Terminal box/Marshalling Box: Terminal box shall conform to the requirements of VOLUME-I, TR. 2.3 Insulating Oil: a) Insulating oil to be used for instrument transformers shall be of EHV grade and shall conform to IS-335 / IEC - 60296 (required for first filling). NonPCB based synthetic insulating oil conforming to IEC 60867 can also be used in the capacitor units of CVT with specific approval from the owner, the proposal for which shall be submitted during detailed engineering stage. b) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-60376, 60376A and 60376B and shall be suitable in all respects for use in the switchgear under operating conditions. 2.4 Name Plate: Name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of manufacture. The rated current, extended current rating in case of current transformers and rated voltage, voltage factor in case of voltage transformers shall be clearly indicated on the name plate. The rated thermal current in case of CT shall also be marked on the name plate. The intermediate voltage in case of capacitor voltage transformer shall be indicated on the name plate.
43
3.0
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: a) Current transformers shall have single primary either ring type, or hair pin type and suitably designed for bringing out the secondary terminals in a weather proof (IP 55) terminal box at the bottom. PF Terminal for measurement of tan delta and capacitance of the unit shall be provided. These secondary terminals shall be terminated to stud type non disconnecting terminal blocks inside the terminal box. In case Bar primary inverted type current transformers are offered the manufacturer will meet following additional requirements: (i) The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing a uniform equi-potential surface for even electric field distribution. (ii) The lowest part of the insulation assembly shall be properly secured to avoid any risk of damage due to transportation stresses. (iii) The upper part of insulation assembly resting on primary bar shall be properly secured to avoid any damage during transportation due to relative movement between insulation assembly & top dome. (iv) Nitrogen if used for hermetic sealing (in case of live tank design) should not come in direct contact with oil. (v) Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend whether any special storage facility is required for spare CT. b) Different ratios specified shall be achieved by secondary taps only and primary reconnection shall not be accepted. c) Core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or other equivalent alloys. The cores used for protection shall produce undistorted secondary current under transient conditions at all ratios with specified CT parameters. d) The expansion chamber at the top of the porcelain insulators should be suitable for expansion of oil. e) Facilities shall be provided at terminal blocks in the marshalling box for star delta formation, short circuiting and grounding of CT secondary terminals. f) Current transformers guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as simultaneous for all cores. g) The rated extended currents for 800 kV and 420 kV class Current transformers shall be as given below:
44
800kV, 3000A Tap Ratio 500/1 1000/1 2000/1 3000/1 200 -180 120 (200 for 15 min)
400kV, 3000A
400kV, 2000A
Rated extended currents in % of rated current 200 -180 120 200 200 120 (200 for 15 min) --
The secondary winding shall be rated for 2A continuously. Further, the intermediate tapping at 3000-2000 of metering core of 3000 A rated 400 kV and 800 kV CTs shall be suitable for using as 1000/1 ratio. The requirements of 3000A CTs are given at TABLE-7. For 245/145 kV class CTs, the rated extended primary current shall be 120% (or 150% if applicable) on all cores of the CTs. h) For 800/420/245/145 kV current transformer, characteristics shall be such as to provide satisfactory performance of burdens ranging from 25% to 100% of rated burden over a range of 5% to 120%(or specified rated extended current whichever is higher) of rated current in case of metering CTs and up to the accuracy limit factor/knee point voltage in case of relaying CTs. i) The current transformer shall be suitable for horizontal transportation. It shall be ensured that the CT is able to withstand all the stresses imposed on it while transporting and there shall be no damage in transit. The Contractor shall submit the details of packing design to the Purchaser for review. j) For 800 kV CTs the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than ten (10) for metering core. For 420/245/145 kV CTs the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than five (5) for metering core. If any auxiliary CTs/reactor are used in the current transformers then all parameters specified shall have to be met treating auxiliary CTs as an integral part of the current transformer. The auxiliary CTs/reactor shall preferably be inbuilt construction of the CTs. In case these are to be mounted separately these shall be mounted in the central marshalling box suitably wired upto the terminal blocks. k) The wiring diagram plate for the interconnections of the three single phase CTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box. Volume-II (Section-C), Instrument Transformer 45
l)
The current transformers should be suitable for mounting on lattice support structure (for 800 kV) or pipe structure (for 420 kV and below) to be provided by the Contractor in accordance with stipulations of VOLUME-I, TR.
m) The CT shall be so designed as to achieve the minimum risks of explosion in service. Bidder/Manufacturer shall bring out in his offer, the measures taken to achieve this. n) 800/420/245/145 kV current transformers shall be suitable for high speed auto reclosing. 4.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: a) 800/420/245/145 kV Voltage transformers shall be capacitor voltage divider type with electromagnetic units and shall be suitable for carrier coupling. b) Voltage transformers secondaries shall be protected by HRC cartridge type fuses for all the windings. In addition fuses shall be provided for the protection and metering windings for fuse monitoring scheme. The secondary terminals of the CVTs shall be terminated to the stud type non - disconnecting terminal blocks in the individual phase secondary boxes via the fuse. c) CVTs shall be suitable for high frequency (HF) coupling required for power line carrier communication. Carrier signal must be prevented from flowing into potential transformer (EMU) circuit by means of a RF choke/reactor suitable for effectively blocking the carrier signals over the entire carrier frequency range i.e. 40 to 500 KHz. Details of the arrangement shall be furnished along with the bid. H.F. terminal of the CVT shall be brought out through a suitable bushing and shall be easily accessible for connection to the coupling filters of the carrier communication equipment, when utilised. Further, earthing link with fastener to be provided for HF terminal. d) The electromagnetic unit comprising compensating reactor, intermediate transformer and protective and damping devices should have separate terminal box with all the secondary terminals brought out. e) The damping device, which should be permanently connected to one of the secondary windings, should be capable of suppressing the ferroresonance oscillations. f) The accuracy of 0.2 on secondary III for all CVTs should be maintained throughout the entire burden range upto 50 VA on all the windings without any adjustments during operation. g) 420/245/145 kV CVTs shall be suitable for mounting on tubular GI pipe in accordance with stipulations of VOLUME-I, TR.
46
h)
It should be ensured that access to secondary terminals is without any danger of access to high voltage circuit.
i)
A protective surge arrester shall be provided if required, to prevent breakdown of insulation by incoming surges and to limit abnormal rise of terminal voltage of shunt capacitor/primary winding, tuning reactor/RF choke etc. due to short circuit in transformer secondaries. In case of an alternate arrangement, bidder shall bring out the details in the bid.
j)
The wiring diagram for the interconnection of the three single phase CVTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box in such a manner that it does not deteriorate with time.
5.0
TERMINAL CONNECTORS: The terminal connectors shall meet the requirements as given in VOLUME-I, TR.
6.0 6.1
TESTS: In accordance with the requirements in VOLUME-I, TR, Current and Voltage Transformers should have been type tested and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IEC:60044-1/IS:2705 and IEC: 60044-5/60044-2 respectively.
6.2
The test reports of the type tests and the following additional type tests (additional type tests are required for Instrument Transformers, rated above 72.5 kV only) shall also be submitted for the Purchasers review. a) Current Transformers: i) Corona & Radio interference voltage test as per Annexure-1 of VOLUME-I, TR & IEC 60044-1. ii) Seismic withstand test as per Annexure-2 of VOLUME-I, TR. iii) Thermal stability test, i.e. application of rated voltage and rated extended thermal current simultaneously by synthetic test circuit. (not applicable for SF6 filled CT) iv) Thermal co-efficient test i.e. measurement of tan delta as a function of temperature (at ambient and between 80C & 90C) and voltage (at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1 Um/3) (not applicable for SF6 filled CT) v) The current transformer shall be subjected to Multiple chopped impulse test (not applicable for SF6 filled CT) by any one of the following two methods given below to assess the CT performance in service to withstand the high frequency over voltage generated due to closing & opening operation of isolators. Alternatively, method as per IEC: 60044-1 may be followed:
47
Method I: 600 negative polarity lightning impulses chopped on crest will be applied to current transformer. The opposite polarity amplitude must be limited to 50% of crest value when the wave is chopped. Impulse crest values will be 1000 kVp for 420 kV CTs. One impulse per minute shall be applied and every 50 impulse high frequency currents form the windings and total current to earth will be recorded and be compared with reference currents recorded applying one or more (max 20) reduced chopped impulses of 50% of test value. Oil samples will be taken before and 3 days after the test. Gas analysis must not show appreciable rate of increase in various gases related with the results of the analysis performed before test. Total sum of crest values of current through secondaries must not exceed 5% of the crest value of total current to earth. CT must withstand dielectric tests after this test to pass the test. Method II: 100 negative polarity impulses with a rise and fall time of less than 0.25 microsecond having 950 kV for 420 kV CT corrected to atmospheric condition shall be applied at one minute interval and total current through insulation of earth will be recorded. The amplitude of first opposite polarity should be limited to 50% of the chopped impulse crest value. Voltage and total current wave shapes shall be recorded after every 10 impulses, and will be compared with reference wave shapes recorded before test at 50% of test values. Oil sample shall be taken before and 3 days after the test and CT shall be deemed to have passed the test if the increase in gas content before and after test is not appreciable. b) Voltage transformers: i) High frequency capacitance and equivalent series resistance measurement (as per IEC-60358). ii) Seismic withstand test (as per Annexure-II of VOLUME-I, TR). iii) Stray capacitance and stray conductance measurement of the low voltage terminal (as per IEC-60358). iv) Determination of temperature coefficient test (as per IEC-60358). v) Corona & Radio interference voltage test as per IEC-60044-5, IEC- 60044-2 or as per Annexure-I of VOLUME-I, TR. However the RIV level shall be as specified in clause Major Technical Parameters in VOLUME-I, TR. Volume-II (Section-C), Instrument Transformer 48
vi) Apart from the above, report of all special tests mentioned in IEC- 60044-5 for Capacitive Voltage Transformer shall also be submitted for approval. 6.3 The current and voltage transformer shall be subjected to the following routine tests in addition to routine tests as per IEC/IS. a) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: ROUTINE TESTS: For Oil filled CTs: i) Measurement of Capacitance.
ii) Oil leakage test. iii) Measurement of tan delta at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1 Um/3. For SF6 filled CTs: i) Dew point measurement
ii) SF6 alarm/ lockout check. iii) SF6 gas leakage test: Gas leakage rate shall be maintained within 0.2% per annum. b) VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: Routine tests on Capacitive voltage transformer shall be done in line with IEC-600445.
7.0
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT: The Bidder shall include in his proposal spare parts equipment.
8.0 8.1
PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Supplier or Purchaser without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
8.2
Current Transformers (a) (b) Insulation Resistance Test for primary and secondary. Polarity test 49
(c)
Ratio identification test - checking of all ratios on all cores by primary injection of current.
(d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable). Magnetizing characteristics test. Tan delta and capacitance measurement Secondary winding resistance measurement Contact resistance measurement (wherever possible/accessible). Test for SF6 (for SF6 filled CTs) Dew point measurement, SF6 alarm/ lockout check.
(j)
DGA test of oil.
Dissolved gas analysis to be carried out at the time of commissioning. CTs must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom of the CT without exposure to atmosphere. Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend the frequency at which oil samples should be taken and norms for various gases in oil after being in operation for different durations. Bidder/Manufacturer should also indicate the total quantity of oil which can be withdrawn from CT for gas analysis before refilling or further treatment of CT becomes necessary. 8.3 Voltage Transformers/Capacitive Voltage Transformers (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Insulation Resistance test for primary (if applicable) and secondary winding. Polarity test Ratio test Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable). Tan delta and capacitance measurement of individual capacitor stacks. Secondary winding resistance measurement.
NOTE: Even Though metering CT & VT are not shown in the Single Line Diagram, same shall be included in Scope and quoted accordingly. They should comply with necessary guidelines issued by CEA.
50
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.1
420 kV Current Transformers: i) ii) Rated Primary current Rated short time thermal current for 1 sec. iii) Rated dynamic current iv) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature v) One minute power frequency 5 kV withstand voltage sec. 125kA (peak) As per IEC: 60044-1 2000 A/3150A (as applicable) 50kA
terminal & earth vi) Number of terminals All terminals of control circuits are to be wired upto marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly distributed on all TBs. vii) Type of insulation Class A
Current transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table - 6. 1.2 245 kV Current Transformers: i) ii) Rated Primary current Rated short time thermal current for 1 sec. iii) Rated dynamic current kA (peak) iv) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature v) One minute power frequency withstand voltage sec. terminal & earth 5 kV 1600 A 40 kA for 1 sec/50 kA (as applicable) 100 As per IEC: 60044-1
51
vi)
Number of terminals
All terminals of control circuits are to be wired upto marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly distributed on all TBs.
vii) Type of insulation
Class A
Current transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table - 7. 1.3 145 kV Current Transformers: i) ii) Rated Primary current Rated short time thermal current iii) Rated dynamic current iv) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature v) One minute power frequency withstand voltage sec. terminal & earth vi) Number of terminals All terminals of control circuits are to be wired upto marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly distributed on all TBs. vii) Type of insulation Class A 5 kV 80 kA (peak) As per IEC: 60044-1 1250A 31.5 kA for 1 sec.
Current transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table-8/ or 9 as applicable. 1.4 Technical Particulars For 800 kV CT: i) ii) Rated Primary current Rated short time thermal 3000A 40 kA for one (1) second current 102 kA (peak) As per IEC: 60044-1
iii) Rated dynamic current iv) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature
52
v)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage sec. terminal & earth
5 kV
vi)
Number of terminals
All terminals of control circuits are to be wired up to marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly distributed on all TBs.
vii) Class of insulation
800 kV Current transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table -5. 2.1 420 kV Voltage Transformers: i) ii) System fault level (for 1 second) Standard reference range of frequencies for which the accuracies are valid iii) High frequency capacitance Within 80% to 150% of rated for entire carrier frequency range capacitance (for CVT only) iv) Equivalent series resistance over the entire carrier frequency range v) Stray capacitance and stray conductance of the LV terminal over entire carrier frequency vi) One minute power frequency withstand voltage: i) Between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal enclosed in a weather proof box ii) For secondary winding 3 kV (rms) As per IEC: 60044-2 or 60044-5 10 kV (rms) for exposed terminals and 4 KV (rms) for terminals As per IEC: 358 (for CVT only) Less than 40 ohms (for CVT only) 50 kA 96% to 102% for protection and 99% to 101% for measurement
vii) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature viii) Number of terminals in cabinet (interpole cabling is to Volume-II (Section-C), Instrument Transformer
All terminals are wired upto control marshaling box plus 12 terminals 53
be supplied by Purchaser) ix) Rated Total Thermal burden (VA)
exclusively for Purchasers use. 300 (100VA/winding)
Voltage Transformers shall also comply with the requirements of Table-2 of this Section. 2.2 245 kV Voltage Transformers: i) ii) System fault level (for 1 second) Standard reference range of frequencies for which measurement ii) the accuracies are valid Within 80% to 150% of rated capacitance (for CVT only) range Less than 40 ohms (for CVT only) 40 kA 96% to 102% for protection and 99% to 101% for
High frequency capacitance for entire carrier frequency
iv) Equivalent series resistance over the entire carrier frequency range v) Stray capacitance and stray conductance of the LV terminal over entire carrier frequency range
As per IEC: 358 (for CVT only)
vi) One minute power frequency withstand voltage: i) Between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal ii) For secondary winding vii) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature viii) Number of terminals in control cabinet (interpole cabling is to be supplied by Purchaser) ix) Rated Total Thermal burden (VA) All terminals are wired upto 10 kV (rms) for exposed terminals and 4 KV (rms) for terminals enclosed in a weather proof box. 3 kV (rms) As per IEC: 60044-2 or 60044-5
marshaling box plus 12 terminals exclusively for Purchasers use. 300 (100VA/winding)
Voltage Transformers shall also comply with the requirements of Table-3 of this Section. 2.3 145 kV Voltage Transformers: Volume-II (Section-C), Instrument Transformer
54
i) ii)
System fault level Standard reference range of frequencies for which the accuracies are valid
31.5 kA for 1 second 96% to 102% for protection and 99% to 101% for measurement
iii) High frequency capacitance for entire carrier frequency range iv) Equivalent series resistance over the entire carrier frequency range v) Stray capacitance and stray conductance of the LV terminal over entire carrier frequency range
Within 80% to 150% of rated capacitance (for CVT only) Less than 40 ohms (for CVT only)
As per IEC: 358 (for CVT only)
vi) One minute power frequency withstand voltage: i) Between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal terminals a weather proof box ii) For secondary winding vii) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature viii) Number of terminals in control cabinet (interpole pole cabling is to be supplied by Purchaser) ix) Rated Total Thermal burden (VA) Voltage Transformers shall also comply with the requirements of Table-4 of this Section. 2.4 800 kV Capacitive Voltage Transformers: i) System fault level 40 kA for one (1) second All terminals are wired upto marshaling box plus 12 terminals exclusively for Purchasers use. 300 (100VA/winding) 3 kV (rms) As per IEC: 60044-2 or 60044-5 10 kV (rms) for exposed terminals and 4 KV (rms) for enclosed in
55
ii)
Standard reference range of frequencies for which measurement the accuracies are valid
96% to 102% for protection and 99% to 101% for
iii) High frequency capacitance for entire carrier frequency range iv) Equivalent series resistance over the entire carrier frequency range v) Stray capacitance and stray conductance of the LV terminal over entire carrier frequency range
Within 80% to 150% of rated capacitance Less than 40 ohms. As per IEC: 60358
vi) One minute power frequency withstand voltage : i) Between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal ii) For secondary winding vii) Maximum temperature rise over design ambient temperature viii) Number of terminals in control cabinet (interpole cabling is to be supplied by Purchaser) ix) Rated Total Thermal burden (VA) Voltage All terminals of control circuits are wired upto marshaling box plus 12 by terminals exclusively for Purchasers use. 300 VA 10 kV (rms) for exposed terminals and 4 KV (rms) for terminals enclosed in a weather proof box 3 kV (rms) IEC: 60044-2 or IEC: 60044-5
56
TABLE - 1 REQUIREMENTS OF 800 KV CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PARTICULAR Rated primary voltage (kV rms) Type No. of secondaries Rated voltage factor Phase angle error Capacitance (pf) Secondary I 7. 8. 9. 10. Application Accuracy Output burden (VA) (minimum) Voltage Ratio Protection 3P 50 765/0.11 3 3 800 Single phase capacitor VT 3 1.2 continuous 1.5 - 30 seconds 10 minutes (For metering core) 4400/8800 + 10% - 5% Secondary II Secondary III Protection 3P 50 765/0.11 3 3 Metering 3P 50 765/0.11 3 3
57
TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF 420 KV CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
PARTICULAR Rated primary voltage (kV rms) Type No. of secondaries Rated voltage factor Phase angle error Capacitance (pf) Secondary I 420 Single phase capacitor VT 3 1.2 continuous 1.5 - 30 seconds 10 minutes (For metering core) 4400/8800 + 10% - 5% Secondary II Secondary III Protection 3P 50 400/0.11 Metering 3P 50 400/0.11
7. 8. 9. 10.
Application Accuracy Output burden (VA) (minimum) Voltage Ratio
Protection 3P 50 400/0.11
58
TABLE 3 REQUIREMENTS OF 245 KV CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PARTICULAR Rated primary voltage (kV rms) Type No. of secondaries Rated voltage factor Phase angle error Capacitance (pf) Secondary I 7. 8. 9. 10. Application Accuracy Output burden (VA) (minimum) Voltage Ratio Protection 3P 50 220/0.11 245 Single phase capacitor VT 3 1.2 continuous 1.5 - 30 seconds 10 minutes (For metering core) 4400/8800* + 10% - 5% Secondary II Secondary III Protection 3P 50 220/0.11 Metering 0.2 P 50 220/0.11
59
TABLE 4 REQUIREMENTS OF 145 KV CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PARTICULAR Rated primary voltage (kV rms) Type No. of secondaries Rated voltage factor Phase angle error Capacitance (pf) Secondary I 7. 8. 9. 10. Application Accuracy Output burden (VA) (minimum) Voltage Ratio Protection 3P 50 132/0.11 145 Single phase capacitor VT 3 1.2 continuous 1.5 - 30 seconds 10 minutes (For metering core) 8800 + 10%/-5% Secondary II Protection 3P 50 132/0.11 Secondary III Metering 0.2 P 50 132/0.11
60
TABLE-5 REQUIREMENTS FOR 800 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS No. of Cores 6 Core No. Application Current Ratio Output Burden (VA) Accuracy Class Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 15 Max. CT Sec. wdg. Resistance (in ) 15 Max. Excit. Current at Vk ( in mA)
BUS DIFF. CHECK
3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 30002000500/1
TPS*
20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1; 120 on 500/1 tap
BUS DIFF. MAIN METERING
TPS*
15
20 20 20 20 20 20 -
0.2S 0.2S 0.2S 0.2S 0.2S 0.2S TPS*
METERING
TRANSF DIFF./LINE PROTN. LINE PROTN/LB B PROTN.
TPS*
15
Note
1. * All Protection Cores shall be of accuracy class TPS as per IEC 60044-1. However, if a higher accuracy class CT is required for protection the same shall be provided. 2. Metering Core shall be of accuracy class 0.2 as per IEC: 60044-1
61
TABLE-6(a) REQUIREMENTS FOR 420 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR 2000 A No. of Cores 5 Core No. Application Current Ratio Output Burden (VA) Accuracy Class as per IEC: 44-1 Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 3000/ 2000/ 500 15 Max. CT Sec. wdg. Resistance (in ) 15 Max. Excit. Current at Vk ( in mA)
BUS DIFF. CHECK BUS DIFF. MAIN METERING
20001000/1 20001000/1 20001000500/1 20001000500/1 30002000500/1
20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap
15
20 20 20 -
0.2S 0.2S 0.2S -
TRANS. BACK UP./LINE PROTN TRANS. DIFF./LINE PROTN.
15
All relaying CTs shall be of accuracy class PS as per IS: 2705.
62
TABLE-6(a) contd REQUIREMENTS FOR 420 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR 3000 A Core No. Application Current Ratio Output Burden (VA) Accuracy Class Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 2000/ 1000 2000/ 1000 Max. CT Sec. Max. Excit. Current at wdg. Vk ( in mA) Resistance (in ) 10/5 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 10/5/2.5 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap 20 on 3000/1 TAP; 30 on 2000/1 Tap; 120 on 500/1 tap
3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1 3000/ 2000/ 500/1
PS
PS
10/5
20 20 20 -
0.2S 0.2S 0.2S PS
TRANS. BACK UP./LINE PROTN TRANS. DIFF./LINE PROTN.
4000/ 2000/ 1000 4000/ 2000/ 1000
PS
10/5/2.5
63
TABLE - 7 REQUIREMENTS FOR 245 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS No. of Cores 5 Core No. Application Current Ratio Output Burden (VA) Accuracy Class as per IEC: 44-1 Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 1600/ 800 1600/ 800 Max. CT Sec. wdg. Resistance (in ) 8/4 Max. Excit. Current at Vk ( in mA)
BUS DIFF. CHECK BUS DIFF. MAIN
1600800/1 1600800/1
25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 800/1 Tap; 25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 800/1 Tap;
8/4
METERING
1600800/1 1600800/1
20 -
0.2S -
1600/ 800 8/4
25 on 1600/1TAP; 50 on 800/1 Tap;
TRANS. BACK UP./LINE PROTN. TRANS. DIFF./LINE PROTN
1600800/1
1600/ 800
8/4
25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 800/1 Tap;
64
TABLE - 8 REQUIREMENTS FOR 145 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS No. of Cores 5 Core No. Application Current Ratio Output Burden (VA) Accuracy Class as per IEC: 44-1 Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 800/ 400 800/ 400 Max. CT Max. Excit. Current Sec. wdg. at Vk ( in mA) Resistance (in ) 8/4 25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 400/1 Tap; 25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 400/1 Tap;
BUS DIFF. CHECK BUS DIFF. MAIN
800400/1 800400/1
8/4
METERING
800400/1 800400/1
20 -
0.2S -
800/ 400 8/4
25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 400/1 Tap;
800400/1
800/ 400
8/4
25 on 1600/1 TAP; 50 on 400/1 Tap;
65
TABLE 9 REQUIREMENTS FOR 145 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS No. of Cores 5 Core No. Application Current Output Ratio Burden (VA) 600300/1 600300/1 300150/1 600300/1 Accuracy Class as per IEC: 44-1 Min.Knee Pt.Voltage (Vk) 600/ 300 600/ 300 Max. CT Sec. wdg. Resistance (in ) 6/3 Max. Excit. Current at Vk ( in mA)
30 on 600/1 TAP; 60 on 300/1 Tap 30 on 600/1 TAP; 60 on 300/1 Tap
6/3
20 -
0.2S -
600/ 300
6/3
30 on 600/1 TAP; 60 on 300/1 Tap
600300/1
600/ 300
6/3
30 on 600/1 TAP; 60 on 300/1 Tap
All relaying CTs shall be of accuracy class PS as per IS: 2705
Note: Details for 33kV Instrument Transformer are not furnished here, same may be decided be Bidder/ Contractor.
66
SECTION-D TECHNICAL DETAILS OF SURGE ARRESTERS 1.0 1.1 GENERAL The Surge arresters shall conform to IEC: 60099-4 except to the extent modified in the specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements under VOLUME-I, TR. 1.2 Arresters shall be of hermetically sealed units, self supporting construction, suitable for mounting on tubular support structures to be supplied by the Contractor. 1.3 The Surge Arrestors shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological conditions as given in VOLUME-I, TR. 2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS: a) The surge arresters shall be of heavy duty station class and gapless type without any series or shunt gaps. b) The surge arresters shall be capable of discharging over-voltages occurring during switching of unloaded transformers, reactors and long lines. c) 420 kV class Surge arresters shall be capable of discharging of severe re-energisation switching surges on a 400 kV, 450 km long line with Surge impedance of 300 ohms and capacitance of 11.986nF/km and over voltage factor of 2.3 p.u. 800 kV class Surge arresters shall be capable of discharging of severe re-energisation switching surges on a 765 kV, 450 km line with Surge impedance of 270 ohms and capacitance of 13 nF/km. d) 420 kV class arrester shall be capable of discharging energy equivalent to class 4 of IEC for a 420 kV system on two successive operations followed immediately by 50 Hz energisation with a sequential voltage profile as specified below: 650 kVp for 3 peaks 575 kVp for 0.1 Sec 550 kVp for 1 seconds 475 kVp for 10 seconds 800 kV class arrester shall be capable of discharging energy equivalent to class 5 of IEC for an 800 kV system on two successive operation followed immediately by 50 Hz energisation with a sequential voltage profile as specified below: 1000 kVp for 3 peaks 910 kVp for 0.1 Sec Volume-II (Section-D), Surge Arrester 67
885 kVp for 1 seconds 866 kVp for 10 seconds e) 245/145 kV class arrester shall be capable for discharging energy equivalent to class 3 of IEC for 245/145 kV system on two successive operations. f) The surge arresters shall be suitable for withstanding forces as defined in VOLUME-I, TR. g) The reference current of the arresters shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage. h) The duty cycle of CB installed in 800/420/245/145 kV System of the Purchaser shall be O-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO. The Surge Arrester shall be suitable for such circuit breaker duties in the system. 3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES: The features and constructional details of surge arresters shall be in accordance with requirement stipulated hereunder: a) The non-linear blocks shall be of sintered metal oxide material. These shall be provided in such a way as to obtain robust construction, with excellent mechanical and electrical properties even after repeated operations. b) The surge arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices suitable for preventing shattering of porcelain housing and providing path for flow of rated fault currents in the event of arrester failure. Details shall be furnished in the bids along with quality checks. c) d) The arresters shall not fail due to arrester porcelain contamination. Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always effectively maintained even when discharging rated lightning current. e) Outer insulator shall be porcelain/polymer conforming to requirements stipulated in VOLUME-I, TR. Terminal connectors shall conform to requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR. The outer insulator housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover will not occur due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage upto the maximum design value for arrester. f) The end fittings shall be made of corrosion proof material and preferably be nonmagnetic. g) The name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of manufacture. Volume-II (Section-D), Surge Arrester 68
h)
The heat treatment cycle details alongwith necessary quality checks used for individual blocks alongwith insulation layer formed across each block are to be furnished. Metalizing coating thickness for reduced resistance between adjacent discs is to be furnished with additional information schedule of bid proposal sheets alongwith procedure for checking the same. Details of thermal stability test for uniform distribution of current on individual disc is to be furnished.
i)
The manufacturer will submit Data for rejection rate of ZnO blocks during manufacturing/operation for the past three years.
j)
The sealing arrangement of the Surge Arrester stacks shall be done incorporating grooved flanges with the O-rings/elliptical cross-section gaskets of Neoprene or Butyl rubber.
k)
The Surge arrester with porcelain housing shall have cantilever strength of not less than 500kg, 500 kg, 350 kg and 350 kg for 624/336/216/120kV surge arresters respectively or as per the value obtained vide VOLUME-I, TR, whichever is higher. For Surge arrester with polymer housing, the cantilever strength shall not be less than 150kg.
4.0
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES: a) 624/336/216/120 kV/ 30 W Arresters shall be complete with insulating base having provision for bolting to flat surface of structure. b) Self contained discharge counters, suitably enclosed for outdoor use and requiring no auxiliary or battery supply for operation shall be provided for each single pole unit along with necessary connection. Suitable leakage current meters should also be provided. The reading of milliammeter and counters shall be visible through an inspection glass panel. The terminals shall be robust and of adequate size and shall be so located that incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum possible bends. c) Surge monitor consisting of discharge counters and milliammeters should be suitable to be mounted on support structure of the arrester and should be tested for IP66 degree of protection. The standard supporting structure for surge arrester should be provided with a mounting pad, for fixing the surge monitor. The surge monitor should be suitable for mounting on this standard mounting pad. Also all nuts, bolts, washers etc. required for fixing the surge monitor shall have to be supplied by the Contractor. The arrangement for Surge Monitor enclosure fixing to the structure shall be at its rear/bottom. Connection between the Surge Arrester base and Surge Monitor shall be through a 2.0 m (minimum) long insulated copper rod/strip of at least 75 sq.mm cross sectional area.
Volume-II (Section-D), Surge Arrester
69
The cable shall be terminated at rear/bottom side of the Surge Monitor. The gaskets of the surge monitors shall be of Neoprene, Butyl or equivalent material. d) Grading/corona rings shall be provided on each complete arrester unit as required. Suitable terminal connectors shall be supplied by the Contractor. 5.0 5.1 TESTS: In accordance with the requirements stipulated under VOLUME-I, TR, the surge arresters should have been type tested as per IEC/IS and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IEC document For contamination test, procedures outlined in 60099-3 shall be followed. The test reports of the type tests and the following additional type tests (additional type tests are required for Surge Arresters above 72.5 kV class only) shall also be submitted for the Purchasers review. i) ii) Radio interference voltage test as per IEC 60099-4. Seismic withstand test as per Annexure-II of VOLUME-I, TR.
iii) Contamination test. iv) Test to verify the Power frequency versus time characteristics. Temporary over voltage profile for 216 kV and below rated arresters to be mutually agreed. Each metal oxide block of surge arresters shall be tested for the guaranteed specific energy capability in addition to the routine/acceptance test as per IEC: 60099-4. 5.2 (a) Acceptance Tests: 1. Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of the arrester units. 2. Lightning Impulse Residual voltage on arrester units. (IEC clause 6.3.2). 3. Internal Ionisation or partial Discharge test. (b) Special Acceptance Test: 1. Thermal stability test on three sections. (IEC Clause 7.2.2). 2. Aging & Energy Capability test on blocks (procedure to be mutually agreed). 3. Wattloss test. (c) Routine Tests: 1. Sealing test: Water dip test at 1.5m depth from top of Surge Arrestor for 30 minutes shall be performed during assembly of Surge Arrester stacks (followed by other
70
routine tests, i.e. P.D. Measurement, Reference Voltage, Residual Voltage & IR measurement). 2. Measurement of reference voltage. 3. Residual voltage test of arrester unit. 4. Internal Ionisation test or partial discharge test. 5. Verticality check on completely assembled Surge arresters as a sample test on each lot. (d) Test on Surge Monitors: The Surge monitors shall also be connected in series with the test specimens during residual voltage and current impulse withstand tests to verify efficacy of the same. Additional routine/ functional tests with one 100A and 10kA current impulse (8/20 micro sec.) shall also be performed on the Surge monitor. Surge monitors shall be routinely tested for water dip test at 1.5m for 30 minutes. No water vapors shall be visible on the monitor glass. (e) Test on insulators All routine tests shall be conducted on the hollow column insulators as per IEC 62155. The following additional tests shall be carried out on 800kV, 420 kV, 245 kV and 145 kV Insulators: i) Ultrasonic test as a routine test.
ii) Pressure test as a routine test. iii) Bending load test in 4 directions at 50% specified bending load as a routine test. iv) Bending load test in 4 directions at 100% specified bending load as a sample test on each lot. v) Burst pressure test as a sample test on each lot. Polymer housing shall be tested in accordance to IEC-61462. 6.0 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT: Bidder shall include in his proposal spare parts and maintenance equipment. 7.0 7.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS An indicative list of tests is given below. (a) (b) Operation check of LA counter. Insulation resistance measurement 71
(c) (d)
Capacitance and Tan delta measurement of individual stacks. Third harmonic resistive current measurement (to be conducted after energisation.) Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Supplier or Purchaser without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
72
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SURGE ARRESTERS 1.0 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: A. (a) (b) 800 kV CLASS SURGE ARRESTER Rated arrester voltage i) Nominal discharge current ii) Discharge current at insulation co-ordination will be done. (c) (d) Minimum discharge capability Continuous operating voltage at 50 deg.C (e) Max. Switching surge residual voltage -at 1kA -at 2kA (f) Max. residual voltage at i) 20kA nominal discharge current ii) Steep fronted wave residual voltage at 10 kA (g) Long duration discharge class (h) (i) High current short duration test value (4/10 micro second wave) Current for pressure relief test (j) (k) (l) Low current long duration test value (2000 micro sec) Prospective symmetrical fault current Pressure relief class A 40kA (rms) for 0.2 Sec. As per IEC. 40 kA rms 100 kAp 5 1480 kVp 1480 kVp 1180 kVp 1220 kVp 13kJ/kV 490 kV (rms) 20kA of 8/20 microsecond which wave 624 kV 20kA of 8/20 microsecond wave.
Volume-II (Section-D), Surge Arrestor
73
B. (a) (b)
420 kV CLASS SURGE ARRESTER Rated arrester voltage i) Nominal discharge current ii) Discharge current at which insulation co-ordination will be done 20kA of 8/20microsecond wave 8kJ/kV 303 kV (rms) 390 kV 20kA of 8/20 microsecond wave
(c) (d)
Minimum discharge Capability Continuous operating voltage at 50 deg.C
(e)
i)
Min. switching surge residual voltage (2kA)
670 kVp
ii) Max. switching surge residual voltage (500A) (f) Max. residual voltage at i) ii) 10kA nominal discharge current 20kA nominal discharge current
650 kVp
900 kVp 975 kVp 1050 kVp 4 100 kAp 50 As per IEC
iii) Steep fronted wave residual voltage at 20 kA (g) (h) (i) (j) Long duration discharge class High current short duration test value (4/10 micro second wave) Current for pressure relief test (kA rms) Low current long duration test value (2400 micro sec) (k) (l) C. (a) (b) Prospective symmetrical fault current Pressure relief class 245 kV CLASS SURGE ARRESTER Rated arrester voltage Nominal discharge current (c) Minimum discharge
50kA (rms) for 0.2 Sec. A
216 kV 10 kA of 8/20 microsecond wave
5kJ/kV 74
capability Volume-II (Section-D), Surge Arrestor
(d)
Continuous operating voltage at 50 deg.C
168 kV rms
(e)
Max. switching surge residual voltage (1kA)
500 kVp
(f)
Max. residual voltage at i) 5 kA ii) 10 kA nominal discharge current 560 kVp 600 kVp
(g)
Max. steep current impulse residual voltage at 10 kA.
650 kVp
(h)
Long duration discharge class
(i)
High current short duration test value (4/10 micro second wave)
100 kAp
(j)
Current for pressure relief test
40 kA rms
(k)
Low current long duration test value (2400 micro sec)
As per IEC.
(l) D. (a) (b)
Pressure relief class 145 kV CLASS SURGE ARRESTER Rated arrester voltage Nominal discharge current
(c) (d)
Minimum discharge capability Continuous operating voltage at 50 deg.C
5kJ/kV 102 kV rms
(e)
Max. switching surge
280 kVp 75
residual voltage (1kA) (f) Max. residual voltage at i) 5 kA 310 kVp 330 kVp
ii) 10 kA nominal discharge current (g) (h) Long duration discharge class High current short duration test value (4/10 micro second wave) (i) Current for pressure relief test (j) Low current long duration test value (2400 micro sec) (k) E. (a) (b) Pressure relief class 36 kV SURGE ARRESTER Rated arrester voltage Nominal discharge current (c) (d) (e) Minimum discharge Continuous operating voltage at 50 deg.C Max. switching surge residual voltage (1kA) (f) Max. residual voltage at i) 5 kA ii) 10 kA nominal discharge current (g) Long duration discharge class (h) Pressure relief class
3 100 kAp
31.5 kA rms
As per IEC.
5kJ/kV 25 kV rms 72 kVp
85 kVp 90 kVp
A 76
SECTION- (E) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER 1.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 All materials/components used in battery chargers and batteries shall be free from flaws and defects and shall conform to the relevant Indian/IEC standards and good engineering practice. 1.1.2 The DC System shall consist of two(2) float-cum-boost chargers and two(2) battery sets for each of 220V and 48 V systems respectively. 1.1.4 Bidder shall select number of cells, float and Boost voltage to achieve following system requirement: System Voltage Maximum Voltage during Float operation 242 Volt 52.8 Volt Minimum voltage available when no charger working and battery fully discharged upto 1.85V per cell. 198 Volt 43.2 Volt Minimum Nos of cell
220 Volt 48 Volt
107 23
Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of battery sizing, selection of number of cells, float and Boost voltages during detailed engineering for Owners acceptance. Battery sizing calculations shall be done as per IEEE- 485 on the basis of following duty cycle: Load Continuous Load 220V DC System Emergency Load Momentary Load 1 hour 1 minute Duration 3 hours Type Of Loads Relays, IEDs, Station HMIs, spring charging, Isolator interlocking load, Miscellaneous permanently connected loads etc. Substation emergency lighting loads. Breaker closing, Tripping loads (taking simultaneous occurrence as per system) Continuous load associated with PLCs.(when speech is not working) Loads associated with PLCs (when speech is working)
48V DC System
Continuous Load Momentary Load
3 hours 15 minute
No extra claim would be admissible if a higher capacity battery is technically required later. The same condition applies to battery Charger;s also. Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger 77
1.2
BATTERY 1.2.1 Type The DC Batteries shall be VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead-Acid) type and shall be Normal Discharge type. These shall be suitable for a long life under continuous float operations and occasional discharges. Air-conditioning shall be provided in Battery room the requirement of which has been specified elsewhere in the Technical Specification. The 220 V DC system is unearth and 48 V DC system is +ve earth system. 1.2.2 Constructional Requirements The design of battery shall be as per field proven practices. Partial plating of cells is not permitted. Paralleling of cells externally for enhancement of capacity is not permitted. Protective transparent front covers with each module shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live module/electrical connections. 1.2.3 Containers The container material shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility and shall be acid resistant. The material shall meet all the requirements of VRLA batteries and be consistent with the life of battery. The container shall be fire retardant and shall have an Oxygen Index of at least 28 %. The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape except from the regulation valve. The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such as to handle the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition. Cell shall not show any deformity or bulge on the sides under all working conditions. The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray. 1.2.4 Cell Covers The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container material and permanently fixed with the container. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without bulging or cracking. It shall also be fire retardant. Fixing of Pressure Regulation Valve & terminal posts in the cover shall be such that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electro-static spark are prevented. 1.2.5 Separators The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells, shall be of glass mat or synthetic material having high acid absorption capability, resistant to sulphuric acid
Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger
78
and good insulating properties. The design of separators shall ensure that there is no misalignment during normal operation and handling. 1.2.6 Pressure Regulation Valve Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be self re-sealable and flame retardant. The valve unit shall be such that it cannot be opened without a proper tool. The valve shall be capable to withstand the internal cell pressure specified by the manufacturer. 1.2.7 Terminal Posts Both the +ve and ve terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination and shall ensure its consistency with the life of the battery. The surface of the terminal post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both +ve and ve posts shall be clearly and unambiguously identifiable. 1.2.8. Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves Where it is not possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery, separate non-corroding lead or copper connectors of suitable size shall be provided to enable connection of the cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid at a very high rate of charge or discharge. Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of copper, brass or stainless steel. Copper or brass nuts and bolts shall be effectively lead coated to prevent corrosion. Stainless steel bolts and nuts can be used without lead coating. All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive environment. 1.2.9. Flame Arrestors Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas escaped during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not affect the performance of the cell.
79
1.2.10. Battery Bank Stand All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall be properly painted with the acid resistant paint. The suitable insulation shall be provided between stand/frame and floor to avoid the grounding of the frame/stand. 1.2.11. Capacity Requirements When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated capacity, corrected at 27 Celsius) before any of the cells in the battery bank reaches 1.85V/cell. The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted condition (1.75V/cell) within 10 hrs up to 90% state of charge. All the cells in a battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float voltage throughout the life. The capacity (corrected at 27Celcius) shall also not be less than C and not more than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate: (a) (b) (c) (d) After Six minutes of discharge After Six hours of discharge After 8 hours of discharge After 10 hours of discharge : : : : 1.98V/cell 1.92V/cell 1.85V/cell 1.75V/cell
Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35 Celcius for a period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall achieve 85% of its rated capacity within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the average voltage throughout the storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt hour efficiency shall be better than 80%. 1.2.12. Expected Battery Life The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at 80% Depth of discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27 Celsius. DOD (Depth of Discharge) is defined as the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in Ampere-hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to its rated capacity. The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float operation. Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger 80
1.2.13. Routine Maintenance of Battery system For routine maintenance of battery system, the contractor shall supply 1 set of following tools: a) b) Torque wrench. Cell test voltmeter(-3-0-+3) volts with least count of 0.01Volt.
1.2.14. Type Test of Battery i) Contractor shall submit type test reports of following tests as per IEC 60896-21 & IEC 60896-22, 2004. The type test reports shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements stipulated in clause no. 9.2 of Technical Specification, VOLUME-I, TR except that the requirement of tests having been conducted within last five years as mentioned therein shall not be applicable). S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Description of test Gas emission High current tolerance Short circuit current and d.c internal resistance Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources Protection against ground short propensity Content & durability of required markings Material identification Valve operation Flammability rating of materials Intercell connector performance Discharge Capacity Charge retention during storage Float service with daily discharges for reliable mains power Recharge behaviour Service life at an operating temperature of 400C for brief duration exposure time. Impact of a stress temperature of 600C for brief duration exposure time with 3 h rate discharge test Abusive over-discharge Thermal runaway sensitivity Low temperature sensitivity Dimensional sensitivity at elevated internal pressure and temperature Stability against mechanical abuse of units during installation 81
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60896-21 & IEC 60896-22, 2004 ii) List of Factory & Site Tests for Battery Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. Test Physical Verification C/10 Capacity test on then cell 8 Hrs. Charge and 15 minutes discharge test at full rated load Factory Tests Site Tests
1.2.15 Installation and commissioning i) Manufacturer of Battery shall supervise the installation and commissioning and perform commissioning tests as recommended in O&M manual / or relevant standards. All necessary instruments, material, tools and tackles required for installation, testing at site and commissioning are to be arranged by Battery manufacturer/ Contractor 1.3. BATTERY CHARGER The DC system for 220 V DC is unearthed and for 48 V DC is +ve earthed. The Battery Chargers as well as their automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with offered VRLA batteries. All battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation at the respective rated load in float charging mode, i.e. Float charging the associated LeadAcid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load. The chargers shall also be capable of Boost charging the associated DC Battery at 2.28 to 2.32 volts per cell at the desired rate. Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise of battery as per manufacturers recommendation to avoid thermal runaway. Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger. 1.3.1. All Battery Chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual. When on automatic control mode during Float charging, the Charger output voltage shall remain within 1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of 10%, Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger 82
frequency variation of 5%, a combined voltage and frequency variation of 10%, and a DC load variation from zero to full load. 1.3.2. All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge. 1.3.3. All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristic, which shall cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the output voltage when the DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload or short circuit in DC System shall not damage the Charger, nor shall it cause blowing of any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short circuit. 1.3.4. Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load limiter setting shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current for Charging mode. 1.3.5. During Boost Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode (when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current for Boost charging mode. 1.3.6. The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on Boost mode, as the Battery charges up. For limiting the output voltage of the Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output range specified for Boost Charging mode. 1.3.7. The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device for Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as current setting device in boost charging mode. 1.3.8. Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1%, irrespective of the DC load level, when they are not connected to a Battery.
83
1.3.9.
MCCB All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one shall be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty. MCCBs should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.
1.3.10. Rectifier Transformer The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) and of class F insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload capacity. 1.3.11. Rectifier Assembly The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed to meet the duty as required by the respective Charger. The rectifier shall be provided with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements with natural air cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type fast acting HRC fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections. 1.3.12. Instruments One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter alongwith selector switches shall be provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be provided for all Chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment. The instruments shall be of 1.5 accuracy class. In addition to the above a centre zero voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V chargers for testing purpose. 1.3.13. Air Break Switches One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type suitable for 500 volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and close with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated from circuit. `ON and `OFF position on the switch shall be clearly indicated. Rating of switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively, MCCBs of suitable ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch. 1.3.14. Fuses All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger 84
carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse. 1.3.15. Blocking Diode Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each charger to prevent current flow from the DC Battery into the Charger. 1.3.16. Annunciation System Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers for the following abnormalities: a) AC power failure b) Rectifier/chargers fuse blown. c) Over voltage across the battery when boost charging. d) Abnormal voltage (High/Low) e) Any other annunciation if required.
Potential free NO Contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for common remote indication CHARGER TROUBLE in Owners Control Board. Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication lamps shall be provided for chargers. A potential free contact for float/boost mode shall be provided for external interlocks. 1.3.17. Name Plates and Marking The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger, on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance. 1.3.18. Charger Construction The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed cubicle type. The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel and shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables and Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger 85
lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor. The lugs for power cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be advised to the Contractor at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of gland plates. The Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber gaskets. The chargers shall have hinged double leaf doors provided on front and on backside for adequate access to the Chargers internals. All the charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger enclosure shall be at least IP-42 as per IS: 13947 Part I. i) All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be mounted on the front side of the Charger. ii) Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and terminal blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wires. Control terminals shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bear a ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits. iii) The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded. 1.3.19. Painting All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated, in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005. Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating shall be `Class-C as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done after phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade-692 (smoke grey) of IS:5 shall be applied, unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers shall be
86
glossy white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly staved. The paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns. 1.3.20. TESTS i) Battery chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard. Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on each Charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type tests specified in IS : 4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification requirements: a) b) c) d) e) f) Voltage regulation test Load limiter characteristics test Efficiency tests High voltage tests Temperature rise test Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained short-circuit. g) h) i) ii) Degree of protection test Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope. Temperature compensation feature demonstration
The Contractor may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the Chargers conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as well as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out: a) b) Insulation resistance test Checking of proper annunciation system operation.
iii)
If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall replace the same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule of the Sub-station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.
iv) The Contractor shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates for the following components whenever required by the OWNER. a) Switches. 87
b) Relays/ MCCBs Volume-II (Section-E), Battery And Battery Charger
c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l)
Instruments. DC fuses. SCR. Diodes. Condensers. Potentiometers. Semiconductor Annunciator. Control wiring Push buttons and contactors.
Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owners approval.
88
SECTION- (F) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF LT TRANSFORMER 1.0 INTENT This specification is intended to cover outdoor type oil filled 33/0.433KV, 800/ 630/400 kVA transformers. 2.0 2.1 Scope of Work Scope of Supply - Transformers as listed above, with insulating oil, all materials and accessories, and complete in all respects. - Gland plates, power cable, lugs, anchor bolts and hardwares. - Mandatory & optional spares and special maintenance equipments if any. 2.2 Scope of Service The scope includes but is not limited to the following items of work to be performed for all equipment and materials furnished under this section: a) b) c) Design, manufacturing, shop testing, packing & despatch Transportation inclusive of insurance and delivery, FOR site basis Unloading, handling, storing, transportation at site upto foundations, oil filling and treatment, erection, testing and commissioning d) e) f) 3.0 3.1 Civil Works Supply of external cables and termination as required. Fire protection system. General Information All temperature indicators, Buchholz relays and other auxiliary devices shall be suitable for 220 V DC Control supply. All alarm and trip Contacts shall also be suitable for connection in 220V DC Circuits. 3.2 Bidders may specifically note that Purchaser proposes to insist on short circuit test as per Clause 16.11 of IS:2026 (Part-I)-1977 and dielectric test as per IS-2026. Any deviation in this regard shall be sufficient ground for rejection of the bid. 4.0 4.1 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS Core 89
Volume-II (Section-F), LT Transformer
The core shall be constructed from high grade, nonaging, cold rolled grain-oriented silicon steel laminations. The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yoke at normal voltage and frequency shall be such that the flux density at any tap position with 10% voltage variation from the voltage corresponding to the tap shall not exceed 1.9 Wb/sq-m. 4.2 Windings The conductor shall be of electrolytic copper, free from scales and burrs. 4.3 Insulating Oil The oil supplied with transformer shall be unused and have the parameters for unused new oil conforming to IS:335 while tested at oil Contractor's premises, No inhibitors shall be used in oil. Ten percent extra oil shall be supplied for topping up after commissioning in nonreturnable containers suitable for outdoor storage. 4.4 Terminal Arrangement a) Bushing terminals shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors of approved type and size for cable/overhead conductors termination of HV side and cable termination on LV side. b) The neutral terminals of 433V winding shall be brought out on a bushing along with the 433 volt phase terminals to form a 4 wire system for the 415 volt. Additional neutral bushing shall also be provided for earthing. 4.5 Off Circuit Tap Changing Equipment The tap change switch shall be three phase, hand operated for simultaneous switching of similar taps on the three phases by operating an external hand wheel. 4.6 Marshalling Box A metal enclosed, weather, vermin & dust proof marshalling box shall be provided with each transformer to accommodate temperature indicators, terminal blocks etc. It shall have a degree of protection of IP 55 as per IS: 2147 4.7 Cable boxes Whenever cable connections are required, suitable cable boxes shall be provided and shall be air insulated. They shall be of sufficient size to accommodate Purchaser's cables and shall have suitable removable side/top cover to facilitate cable termination and inspection.Cable boxes shall be dust & vermin proof.
90
5.0
Inspection and Testing a) The Contractor shall draw up and carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing program during manufacture and commissioning of the transformer. The programme shall be duly approved by the Purchaser. b) The Contractor shall carryout all type tests and routine tests on the transformers as per relevant standards. Type tests shall be carried out on one transformer of each type and routine tests shall be carried out on all transformers.
6.0 6.1
Inspection Tank and Accessories a) Physical and dimensional check of transformer tank and accessories. b) Crack detection of major strength weld seams by dye penetration test.
6.2
Core a) Physical inspection and check of quality of varnish, if used. b) Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, bend properties, magnestisation, characteristics and thickness. c) Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any hot spot by exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux density in the core. d) HV Test
6.3
Insulating Material a) b) c) Sample checks for physical properties of the material Check for dielectric strength Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating material
6.4
Winding a) Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and electrical conductivity and on installation covering. b) Sample check on insulation paper for pH value, Bursting strength, Electric strength.
6.5
Assembled Transformer a) Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing provision for all fittings, finish etc. b) Jacking test on all the assembled transformers.
91
6.6
Oil All standard tests in accordance with relevant Standards shall be carried out on oil samples taken from the transformer before and after testing of the transformer. The contractor shall also prepare a comprehensive inspection and testing program for all bought out subcontracted items and shall submit the same to the Purchaser for approval. Such program shall include the following components: a) Buchholz Relay b) Winding temperature Indicator c) Bushings
d) Marshaling Box e) Tap changer switch
f) Oil temperature indicator 7.0 7.1 Factory Test All standard routine tests in accordance with latest issue of IS : 2026 shall be carried out on each transformer. 7.2 All the type tests in accordance with latest issues of IS : 2026 shall be conducted on one transformer of each rating. 7.3 In addition to all type and routine tests, following additional type tests shall also be carried out on one transformer of each rating as per IS : 2026. a) b) c) Measurement of zero sequence impedance Short circuit test Measurement of acoustic noise level. This shall conform to NEMA standard publication TR-1. d) e) Measurement of capacitance and tan delta of transformer winding. Test on oil samples.
Sequence of testing shall be mutually agreed between Purchaser and Contractor after award. 7.4 All auxiliary equipment shall be tested as per the relevant IS Test Certificates shall be submitted for bought out items. 7.5 High voltage withstand test shall be performed on auxiliary equipment and wiring after complete assembly. Volume-II (Section-F), LT Transformer 92
7.6
Tank Tests: a) Routine Tests: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers b) Type Tests: i) Vacuum Tests: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers ii) Pressure Test: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers
7.7
In addition to the above, the following checks should be carried out at manufacturer's works before despatch for all transformers: a) Check for interchangeability of components of similar transformers and for mounting dimensions. b) Check for proper packing and preservation of accessories like radiators, bushings explosion vent, dehydrating breather, Buchholz relay, conservator etc. c) Check for proper provision of bracings to arrest the movements of core and winding assembly inside the tank. d) Test for gas tightness and derivation of leakage rate. To ensure adequate reserve gas capacity during transit and storage.
7.8
The Contractor shall submit a detailed inspection and testing programme for field activities, covering areas right from the receipt of material stage upto commissioning stage as per IS :1886 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of transformers. The indicative checks and tests are given below. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Physical checks on each transformer on receipt at site for any damage or short supply. Tests on oil samples Oil leakage test Physical checks for colour of silica in breather Check for oil level in breather housing, conservator tank, etc. Check for correct operation of all protections and alarms. Insulation Resistance Measurement for Main Winding, control wiring etc. Continuously observe the transformer operation at no load for 24 hours.
8.0
Fittings The following fittings shall be provided with each transformer covered under this specification.
93
i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii)
Conservator with drain plug and oil filling hole with blanking plate Plain oil Gauge Silica gel Breather Pressure Relief vent Pocket on tank cover for Thermometer Valves Earthing Terminals
viii) Rating & Terminal Marking Plates ix) x) xi) Lifting Lugs Rollers Air Release Plug
The fittings listed above are only indicative and any other fittings which generally are required for satisfactory operation of transformer are deemed to be included. 9.0 9.1 Spare Parts The list of spares for outdoor type transformers covered under this section shall be as specified in mandatory Spares 9.2 In addition, the Bidder shall also recommend optional spare parts and maintenance equipment necessary for three(3) years of successful operation of the equipment. The prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules and these shall not be considered for the purpose of evaluation. 10.0 33 kV feeder Relay Panel for 630 KVA Transformer: The supply and installation of auxiliary transformer should be complete with necessary switchgear and allied equipments. Control and protection shall not be limited to the following: i) Non-directional triple pole IDMT over current and earth fault relays with instantaneous (high set) element 2 nos. (2 O/C + 1 E/F). This can be a 3 element relay also in one casing. ii) iii) Hand reset master trip relay for tripping commands for all protections 1 no. Trip circuit supervision relay- 1 No
94
11.0
Technical Parameters S.No. a) b) c) d) e) f) Description Type Service Number of phases Frequency Type of cooling Rating Ratio Parameters Two Winding Outdoor Three 50 Hz ONAN 250 kVA, 630 kVA and 800 kVA 11/0.433 kV 33/0.433 kVA g) h) i) j) Impedance at 75OC with tolerance Duty Overload Maximum Temp. rise over 50oC ambient i) Oil (Temp. rise measurement by thermometer) 50oC ii) Winding (Temp. rise measured 55o C by resistance method) k) Windings 33kV 630kVA /250kVA i) ii) iii) iv) v) a) System Apparent short circuit level (KA) Winding connection Vector Group Insulation Insulation level (KV) Power frequency test level (KV rms) b) vi) Basic impulse level (KV peak) Highest voltage (KV) for each 170 36 250 52 75 11 95 36 70 52 95 Delta 33 kV 800kVA 11kV 630kVA /250kVA As per IS:2026 (Part-I) Delta Delta Dyn1 Uniform 11 28 0.433 2 Star 0.433kV 0.05+10% Continuous As per IS:6600
winding l) i) ii) m) Tap changer Tap range Tap control H.V. Bushings +5% / -10% in steps of 2.5% on HV side Off circuit tap change switch 800 KVA 630 KVA 11kV i) ii) iii) iv) v) Rated Voltage, KV Rated current, KV Basic impulse Level (KV) Wet and dry power frequency withstand voltage (KV rms) Minimum total Creepage distance (mm) vi) n) i) ii) o) i) Mounting L.V. and Neutral bushing Rated Voltage (Volts) Rated current (amps) Terminal details High Voltage Low Voltage phase and neutral Minimum Clearance (mm) in AIR 33kV 630kVA/ 250kVA i) Phase to Phase Phase to Earth 350 320 530 480 Suitable for 33kV/11kV cable or O/H Conductor Cable box 33kV 800kVA 11kV 630kVA/ 250kVA 280 140 25 25 0.433kV 1100 2000 1100 1000 1100 1000 Tank/Transformer body 250 95 52 12 100A 75 28 31mm/kV 170 70 33kV 36
ii)
p)
ii)
96
SECTION- (G) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF LT SWITCHGEAR 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Scope of work under this section covers the provision of labour, tools, plants, materials and performance of work necessary for the design, manufacture, quality assurance, quality control, shop assembly, shop testing, delivery at site, site storage and preservation, installation, commissioning, performance testing, acceptance testing, training of Employers personnel, handing over to Employer of LT Switchgear system as per the specifications hereunder, complete with all auxiliaries, accessories, spare parts and warranting a trouble free safe operation of the installation. 1.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS i) All boards shall be of metal enclosed, indoor floor mounted, compartmentalized construction and freestanding type. ii) All board frames, shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or pressed and shaped cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.0 mm. Frames shall be enclosed in cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6mm. Doors and covers shall also be of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6 mm. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary. iii) All panel edges and cover/door edges shall be reinforced against distortion by rolling, bending or by the addition of welded reinforcement members. iv) The complete structures shall be rigid, self-supporting free from flaws, twists and bends. All cut-outs be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges. v) All boards shall be of dust and vermin proof construction and shall be provided with a degree of protection of IP:42 as per IS 2147. Provision shall compartments rubber gaskets. vi) Provision of louvers on boards would not be preferred. However, louvers backed with metal screen are acceptable on the busbar chambers where continuous busbar rating exceeds 1000 Amps. vii) All boards shall be uniform height not exceeding 2450 mm. for providing IP: 42 degree be made in all of protection, when Circuit breaker or
module trolley, has been removed. All cut-outs shall be provided with neoprene/Synthetic
viii) Boards shall be easily extendible on both sides, by the addition of the vertical Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 97
sections after removing the end covers. ix) Boards shall be supplied with base frames made of structural steel sections, alongwith all necessary mounting hardware required for welding the base frames to the insert plates. x) All boards shall be divided into distinct vertical sections, each comprising of : (a) A completely enclosed busbar compartment for running horizontal and vertical busbars. Busbar chamber shall be completely enclosed with metallic portions. Bolted covers shall be provided for access to horizontal and Vertical bus bars and all joints for repair maintenance, which shall be feasible without disturbing feeder compartment. (b) Completely enclosed switchgear compartment(s) one for each circuit for housing circuit breaker or MCCB or motor starter. (c) A compartment or alley for power and control cables. Cable alley door shall preferably be hinged. Cable alley shall have no exposed live parts, and shall have no communication with busbar chamber. It shall be of at least 350mm width. (d) A compartment for relays and other control devices associated with a circuit breaker. xi) A completely enclosed busbar compartment for running horizontal and vertical busbars. Busbar chamber shall be completely enclosed with metallic portions. Bolted covers shall be provided for access to horizontal and Vertical bus bars and all joints for repair maintenance, which shall be feasible without disturbing feeder compartment. xii) Completely enclosed switchgear compartment(s) one for each circuit for housing circuit breaker or MCCB or motor starter. xiii) A compartment or alley for power and control cables. Cable alley door shall preferably be hinged. Cable alley shall have no exposed live parts, and shall have no communication with busbar chamber. It shall be of at least 350mm width. xiv) A compartment for relays and other control devices associated with a circuit breaker. xv) Sheet steel barriers shall be provided between two adjacent vertical panels running to the full height of the switchboard, except for the horizontal busbar compartment. Each shipping section shall have full metal sheets at both ends for transport and storage. xvi) All equipments associated with a single circuit except MCB circuits shall be housed in a separate compartment of the vertical section. The Compartment shall be sheet steel enclosed on all sides with the withdrawal units in position or removed. The front of the compartment shall be provided with the hinged single leaf door, with locking facilities. Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 98
xvii) In case of circuits controlled by MCBs, group of MCB feeders can be offered in common compartment. In such case number of MCB feeder to be used in a common compartment shall not exceed 4 (four) and front of MCB compartment, shall have a viewing port of toughen glass sheet for viewing and sheet steel door of module shall be lockable with star knob/panel key. xviii) After isolation of power and control circuit connections it shall be possible to safely carryout maintenance in a compartment with the busbar and adjacent circuit live. Necessary shrouding arrangement shall be provided for this purpose over the cable terminations located in cable alley. xix) The minimum clearance in air between phases and between phase and earth for the entire run of horizontal and vertical busbars, shall be 25mm. xx) For all other components, the clearance between two live parts, A live part and an earthed part and isolating distance shall be at least ten (10) mm throughout. Wherever it is not possible to maintain these clearances, insulation shall be provided by sleeving or barriers. However, for horizontal run of busbar minimum clearance of 25mm should be maintained even if they are sleeved. xxi) The temperature rise of horizontal & vertical busbars when carrying rated current along its full run shall in no case exceed 55 Deg C, with silver plated joints and 40 Deg C with all other type of joints over an outside ambient temperature of 50Deg C. xxii) All single front boards shall be provided with removable bolted covers at the rear. The covers shall be provided with danger labels. xxiii) All identical circuit breakers and module chasis of same test size shall be fully interchangeable without having to carryout modifications. xxiv) All Circuit breaker boards shall be of Single Front type, with fully drawout circuit breakers, which can be drawn out without having to unscrew any connections. The circuit breakers shall be mounted on rollers and guides for smooth movement between SERVICE, TEST and ISOLATED positions and for withdrawal from the Switchboard. Testing of the breaker shall be possible in the TEST position. xxv) Wherever two breaker compartments are provided in the same vertical section, insulating barriers and shrouds shall be provided in the rear cable compartment to avoid accidental touch with the live parts of one circuit when working on the other circuit. xxvi) All disconnecting contacts for power circuits shall be of robust design and fully self aligning. Fixed and moving contacts of the power draw out contact system shall be silver plated. Both fixed and moving contacts shall be replaceable. Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 99
xxvii) All AC & DC boards shall be of single Front type. xxviii) All module shall be fixed type except air circuit breaker module, which shall be drawout type. xxix) The connections from busbars to the main switch shall be fully
insulated/shrouded, and securely bolted. The partition between the feeder compartment and cable alley may be non-metallic and shall be such construction as to allow cable cores with lugs to be easily inserted in the feeder compartment for termination. xxx) All equipment and components shall be neatly arrangement and shall be easily accessible for operation and maintenance. The internal layout of all modules shall be subject to OWNER approval. Bidder shall submit dimensional drawings showing complete internal details of Busbars and module components for each type and rating for approval. xxxi) The tentative power and control cable entries shall be from bottom. However, Owner reserves the right to alter the cable entries, if required, during detailed engineering, without any additional commercial implications. xxxii) Adaptor panels and dummy panels required to meet the various busbar arrangements and layouts required shall be included in Bidders scope of work. xxxiii) All sheet work shall be pre-treated, in tanks, in accordance with IS: 6005. Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with acid. After pickling the parts shall be washed in running water. Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating shall Class-C as specified in IS: 6005. The phosphated surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating after primer application, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint on panels shall be applied, Electrostatic painting shall also be acceptable. xxxiv) Finishing paint on panels shall be shade 631 of IS:5 unless required otherwise by the OWNER. The inside shall be properly stoved. The paint thickness shall be coated by peelable compound by spraying method to protect the finished surfaces from scratches grease dirt and oily spots during testing, transportation, handling and erection. 1.3 i) DERATING OF EQUIPMENTS The current ratings of all equipments at a reference ambient temperature of 50 DegC as per relevant Indian Standards is to be derived by the Bidder. ii) The Bidder shall indicate clearly the derating factors employed for each component and furnish the basis for arriving at these derating duly considering the specified ambient temperature of 50 DegC Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 100
1.4 i)
POWER BUS BARS AND INSULATORS All AC Distribution Boards shall be provided with three phase buses and a neutral bus bars and the DC Distribution Boards shall be provided with two busbars.
ii)
Busbars and jumper connections shall be high conductivity aluminium/copper of adequate size the bus bar size calculations shall be submitted for approval.
iii)
The Cross-Section of the busbars shall be uniform throughout the length of Switchgear and shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the stresses due to the specified short circuit currents.
iv)
All busbars shall be adequately supported by Non-hygroscopic, non- combustible, track resistant & high strength type Polyester fibre glass Moulded Insulators. Separate supports shall be provided for each phase and neutral busbar. If a busbar support is provided anti-tracking barriers shall be provided between the supports.
v)
All busbars joints shall be provided with high tensile steel bolts. Belleville/spring washers and nuts, so as to ensure good contacts at the joints. Non-silver plated Busbars joints shall be thoroughly cleaned at the joint locations and suitable contact grease shall be applied just before making a joint.
vi) vii)
All busbars shall be colour coded as per IS: 375. The Bidder shall furnish calculations alongwith the bid, establishing the adequacy of busbar sizes for specified current ratings, on the basis of short circuit temperature rise consideration at specified ambient temp. current and
1.5 i)
EARTH BUS A galvanised steel earthing shall be provided at the bottom of each panel and shall extend throughout the length of each switchboard. It shall be welded/bolted to the frame work of each panel and breaker earthing contact bar vertical bus shall be provided in each vertical section which shall in turn be bolted/welded to main horizontal ground bus.
ii)
The earth bus shall have sufficient cross-section to carry the momentary short circuit and short time fault currents to earth without exceeding the allowable temperature rise.
iii)
Suitable arrangements shall be provided at each end of the horizontal earth bus for bolting to Owners earthing conductors. The horizontal earth bus shall project out the switchboard ends and shall have predrilled holes for this connection. A joint spaced and taps to earth bus shall be made through at least two bolts.
iv) All non-current metal work of the Switchboard shall be effectively bonded to the Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear
earth 101
bus.
Electrical conductivity of the whole switchgear enclosures frame work and the
truck shall be maintained even after painting. v) The truck and breaker frame shall get earthed while the truck is being inserted in the panel and positive earthing of the truck and breaker frame shall be maintained in all positions. SERVICE & ISOLATED, as well as throughout the intermediate travel. vi) Each module frame shall get engaged to the vertical earth bus, before the disconnecting contacts on this module are engaged to the vertical busbar. vii) All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipments shall be connected to earth by independent standard copper wires of size not less than 2.5mm2. Insulation colour code of earthing wires shall be green. Earthing wires shall be connected to terminals with suitable clamp connections and soldering is not acceptable. Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to the devices when a device is removed is not acceptable. However, looping of earth connections between equipment to provide alternative paths or earth bus is acceptable. viii) VT and CT secondary neutral point earthing shall be at one place only, on the terminal block. Such earthing shall be made through links so that earthing on one secondary circuit shall be removed without disturbing the earthing of other circuit. ix) x) All hinged doors shall be earthed through flexible earthing braid. Caution nameplate Caution-Live Terminals shall be provided at all points where the terminals are like to remain live and isolation is possible only at remote end. 1.6 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS i) Circuit breakers shall be three-pole air break horizontal drawout type and shall have
inherent fault making and breaking capacities as specified in Technical Parameters. ii) Circuit breakers shall be mounted along with operating mechanism on a wheeled carriage. Suitable guides shall be provided to minimize misalignment of the breaker. iii) There shall be Service, Test and Fully withdrawn positions for the breakers. In Test position the circuit breaker shall be capable of being tested for operation without energizing the power circuits i.e. the power contacts shall be disconnected while Control so circuits as to shall remain undisturbed. Locking facilities shall be provided prevent movement of the circuit breaker from the SERVICE,
TEST or FULLY WITHDRAWN position. It shall be possible to close the door in TEST Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 102
position. iv) All circuit breakers shall be provided with 4 NO and 4 NC potential free auxiliary contacts. These contacts shall be addition to those required for internal mechanism of the breaker. Separate limit switches each having required number of contacts shall be provided in both SERVICE & TEST position of the breaker. All contacts shall be rated for making continuously carrying and breaking 10 Amps at 240 V AC and 1 Amp (Inductive) at 220V DC. v) Suitable mechanical indications shall be provided on all circuit breakers to show OPEN. CLOSE, SERVICE, TEST and SPRING CHARGED positions. vi) Main poles of the circuit breakers shall operate simultaneously in such a way not exceed half cycle of rated frequency. vii) All circuit breakers shall be provided with the interlocks. that the
maximum difference between the instants of contacts touching during closing shall
viii) Movement of a circuit breaker between SERVICE AND TEST positions shall not be possible unless it is OPEN position. Attempted with drawl of a closed circuit breaker shall trip the circuit breaker. ix) Closing of a circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in SERVICE, TEST POSITION or in FULLY WITHDRAWN POSITION. x) Circuit breaker cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters operated automatically by the movement of the circuit breaker carriage to cover the stationery isolated contacts when the breaker is withdrawn. It shall however, be possible to open the shutters intentionally, against spring pressure for testing purpose. xi) A breaker of particular rating shall be prevented from insertion in a cubicle of a different rating. xii) Circuit breakers shall be provided with electrical anti-pumping and trip feature,even if mechanical antipumping feature is provided. xiii) Mechanical tripping shall be possible by means of front mounted REDTRIP pushbutton. In case of electrically operated breakers these push buttons shall be shrouded to prevent accidental operation. xiv) Breaker controlled motors shall operate satisfactorily under the following conditions:Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 103
a) Direct on-line starting of Induction Motors rated 110kW to 220 kW with a locked rotor current of seven times the rated current, and starting time of upto 30 seconds. b) Breaking on-load, full load and locked motor currents of Induction Motors for rated 100 kW to 220kW. xv) Means shall be provided to slowly close the circuit breaker in withdrawn position. If required for inspection and setting of Contacts, in service position slow closing shall not be possible. xvi) Power operated mechanism shall be provided with a universal motor suitable for operation 220V DC Control supply with voltage variation from 90% to 110% rated voltage. Motor insulation shall be class E or better. xvii) The motor shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for fully charging the closing spring. xviii) Once the closing springs are discharged, after the one closing operation of circuit breaker, it shall automatically initiate, recharging of the spring. xix) The mechanism shall be such that as long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of closing and opening operations shall be possible. After failure of power supply at least one open-close open operation shall be possible. xx) Provision shall be made for emergency manual charging and as soon as this manual charging handle is coupled, the motor shall automatically get mechanically decoupled. xxi) All circuit breakers shall be provided with closing and trip coils. The closing coils shall operate correctly at all values of Voltage between 85% to 110% of rated control voltage. The trip coil shall operate satisfactorily under all values of supply voltage between 70% to 110% of rated control voltage. xxii) Provision for mechanical closing of the breaker only in TEST and WITHDRAWN positions shall be made. 1.7 PROTECTION CO-ORDINATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to fully co-ordinate the overload and short circuit tripping of the circuit breakers with the upstream and downstream circuit breakers/fuses/motor starters, to provide satisfactory discrimination. 1.8 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) and MCB 104
Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear
i) ii) iii)
MCCB shall in general conform to IS: 13947 Part-2, All MCCB shall be P2 duty. MCCB shall be flush mounted on the AC/DC distribution boards. MCCBs shall be provided with thermo-magnetic type release for Over current and short circuit protection. The setting of the thermal release shall be adjustable between 75% to 100% of the rated current. The MCCB shall have breaking capacity not less than 20kA.
iv)
MCCBs used for ACDB incomers and Bus coupler shall be equipped with stored energy mechanism for electrical closing and tripping. All other MCCBs shall be manually operated. The operating handle should give a clear trip indication.
v) 1.9 i)
Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) shall conform to IEC:898-1998 and IS:8828. RELAYS All relays and timers in protective circuits shall be flush mounted on panel front with connections from the inside. They shall have transparent dust tight covers removable from the front. All protective relays shall have a drawout construction for easy replacement from the front. They shall either have built-up test facilities, or shall be provided with necessary test blocks and test switches located immediately below each relay. The auxiliary relays and timers may be furnished in non-drawout cases.
ii)
All AC relays shall be suitable for operation, at 50 Hz with 110 Volts VT secondary and 1 amp or 5 Amp CT secondary.
iii)
All protective relays and timers shall have at least two potentially free output contacts. Relays shall have contacts as required for protection schemes. Contacts of relays and timers shall be silver faced and shall have a spring action. Adequate number terminals shall be available on the relay cases for applicable relaying schemes. of
iv)
All protective relays auxiliary relays and timers shall be provided with hand reset operation indicators (flags) and analysing the case of operation.
v) vi)
All relays shall withstand a test voltage of 2 KV (rms) for one minute. Motor starters shall be provided with three element, ambient temperature compensated, time lagged, hand reset type overload relays with adjustable settings. The setting ranges shall be properly selected to suit the motor ratings. These relays shall have a separate black coloured hand reset push button mounted on compartment door and shall have at least one changeover contact.
105
vii)
All fuse-protected contactors-controlled
motors
shall
have
phasing protection,
either as a distinct feature in the overload relays (by differential movement of bimetallic strips), or as a separate device. The single phasing protection shall operate even with 80% of the set current flowing in two of the phases. 1.10 i) CONTACTORS Motor starter contactors shall be air break, electromagnetic type rated for uninterrupted duty as per IS: 13947 (Part 4). ii) Contactors shall be double break, non-gravity type and their main contacts shall be silver faced. iii) Direct on line starter contactors shall be utilisation category AC2. These contactors shall be as IS: 13947 (Part 4). iv) Each contactor shall be provided with two (2) normally open (NO) and two (2) normally close (NC) auxiliary contacts. v) Operating coils of contactors shall be of 240V AC Unless otherwise specified elsewhere. The Contactors shall operate satisfactorily between 85% to 110% of the rated voltage. The Contactor shall drop out at 70% of the rated voltage. 1.11 i) INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS All current and voltage transformers shall be completely encapsulated cast resin insulated type suitable for continuous operation at the temperature prevailing the outside ambient temperature is 50 DegC. ii) All instrument transformers shall be able to withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses resulting from the maximum short circuit and momentary current ratings of the associated switchgear. iii) All instrument transformers shall have clear indelible polarity markings. All secondary terminals shall be wired to a separate terminal on an accessible terminal block where starpoint formation and earthing shall be done. iv) Current transformers may be multi or single core type. All voltage transformers shall be single phase type. The bus VTs shall be housed in a separate compartment. Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 106 inside the switchgear enclosure, when the switchgear is operating at its rated condition and
v)
All VTs shall have readily accessible HRC current limiting fuses on both primary and secondary sides.
1.12 i)
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS All indicating and integrating meters shall be flush mounted on panel front. The instruments shall be of at least 96 mm square size with 90 degree scales, and shall have an accuracy class of 2.5 or better. The covers and cases of instrument and meters shall provide a dust and vermin proof construction.
ii)
All instruments shall be compensated for temperature errors and factory calibrated to directly read the primary quantities. Means shall be provided for zero adjustments without removing or dismantling the instruments.
iii)
All instruments shall have white dials with black numerals and lettering. Black knife edge pointer with parallax free dials will be preferred.
iv)
Ammeters provided on Motor feeders shall have a compressed scale at the upper current region to cover the starting current.
v)
Watt-hour meters shall be of 3 phase three element type, Maximum demand indicators need not be provided.
1.13 i)
CONTROL & SELECTOR SWITCHES Control & Selector switches shall be of rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the function and positions. The switches shall be of sturdy construction suitable for mounting on panel front. Switches with shrouding of live parts and sealing of contacts against dust ingress be preferred.
ii)
Circuit breaker selector switches for breaker controlled motor shall have three positions marked contacts of each of the three positions and shall have black shade handles.
stay
put
Switchgear, Normal and Trial respectively. They shall have two
iii)
Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall have four stay put position with adequate number of contacts for three phase 4 wire system. These shall have oval handles Ammeter selector switches shall have make before break type contacts to prevent open circuiting of CT secondarys.
iv)
Contacts of the switches shall be spring assisted and shall be of suitable material to give a long trouble free service.
107
v)
The contact ratings shall be at least the following: a) Make and carry continuously b) Breaking current at 220V DC c) Breaking current at 240V DC 10 Amp. 1 Amp (Inductive) 5 Amp (at 0.3 pf lagging)
1.14 i)
AIR BREAK SWITCHES Air breaker switch shall be of the heavy duty, single throw group operated, load break, fault make type complying with IS: 4064.
ii)
The Bidder shall ensure that all switches are adequately rated so as to be fully protected by the associated fuses during all abnormal operating conditions such as overload, locked motor, short circuit etc.
iii)
Switch operating handles shall be provided with padlocking facilities to lock them in OFF position.
iv)
Interlocks shall be provided such that it is possible to open the cubicle door only when the switch is in OFF position and to close the switch only when the door is closed. However suitable means shall be provided to intentionally defeat the interlocks explained above.
v)
Switches and fuses for AC/DC control supply and heater supply wherever required shall be mounted inside and cubicles.
1.15 i)
PUSH BUTTONS Push-buttons shall be of spring return, push to actuate type. Their contacts shall be rated to make, continuously carry and break 10A at 240V and 0.5A (inductive) at 220V DC.
ii)
All push-buttons shall have one normally open and one normally closed contact, unless specified otherwise. The contact faces shall be of silver or silver alloy.
iii) iv)
All push-buttons shall be provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its function. All push-buttons on panels shall be located in such a way that Red-push- buttons shall always be to the left of green push-buttons.
1.16 i)
INDICATING LAMPS Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting cluster LED type. The lamps shall 108
have escutcheon plates marked with its function, wherever necessary. ii) iii) Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the cubicle. Indication lamps should be located just above the associated push buttons/control switches. iv) All indicating lamps shall be suitable for continuous operation at 90 to 110% of their rated voltage. 1.17 i) FUSES All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge fuse link type. Screw type fuses shall not be accepted. Fuses for AC Circuits shall be of class 2 type, 20 kA (RMS) breaking current at 415 AC, and for DC circuits Class 1 type 5 kA breaking current. ii) iii) Fuses shall have visible operation indicators. Fuses shall be mounted on fuses carriers, which are mounted on fuse bases, wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers fuses shall be directly mounted on plug in type of bases, In such cases one set of insulated fuse pulling handles shall be supplied with each switchgear. iv) Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending upon the circuit requirements and these shall be subject to approval of OWNER. 1.18 i) TERMINAL BLOCKS Terminal blocks shall be of 1100 volts grade and have continuous rating to carry the maximum expected current on the terminals. It shall be complete with insulating barriers, clip-on-type/stud Marking on type terminals strip for Control Cables and identification strips. terminal shall correspond to the terminal numbering on wiring on
diagrams. It shall be similar to ELEMAX standard type terminals, cage clamp type of Phoenix or WAGO or equivalent. ii) Terminal blocks for CT and VT secondary leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. CT secondary leads shall be provided distributed on all terminal circuiting and earthing facilities. It shall be similar to Elem, CATD Type. iii) In all circuit breaker panels at least 10% spare terminals for external connections shall be provided and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 109
blocks. Space for adding another 10% spare terminals shall also be available. iv) All terminals blocks shall be suitable for terminating on each side, two (2) nos. of 2.5mm square size standard copper conductors. v) All terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to the function. Engraved white-on-black labels shall be provided on the terminal blocks. vi) Wherever duplication of a terminal block is necessary it shall be achieved by solid bonding links. vii) Terminal blocks shall be arranged with at least 100 mm clearance between two sets of terminal block. The minimum clearance between the first row of terminal block and the associated cable gland plate shall be 250 mm. 1.19 i) NAME PLATES AND LABELS All switchgears AC/DC distribution boards shall be provided with prominent,
engraved identification plates. The module identification plate shall clearly give the feeder number and feeder designation. For single front switchboards, similar panel and board identification labels shall be provided at the rear also. ii) All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lamicoid with white engraved lettering on black background. Inscriptions and lettering sizes shall be subject to OWNER approval. iii) Suitable plastic sticker labels shall be provided for easy identification of al equipments, located inside the panel/module. These labels shall be positioned so as to be clearly inside visible and shall give the device number as mentioned in the module wiring drawings. 1.20 i) SPACE HEATER Space heater shall be provided in all the boards for preventing harmful moisture condensation. ii) The space heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation on 240V, AC, 50 Hz, single phase supply, and shall be automatically controlled by thermostats. Necessary isolating switches and fuses shall also be provided. 1.21 CONTROL AND SECONDARY WIRING
i) All switchboards shall be supplied completely wired internally upto the terminal blocks Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 110
ready to receive Owners control cables. ii) All inter cubicle and inter panel wiring and connections between panels of same switchboard including all bus wiring for AC and DC supplies shall be provided by the bidder. iii) All internal wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade, single core, 1.5 square mm or larger stranded copper wires having colour coded, PVC insulation. CT circuits shall be wired with 2.5 square mm copper wires. Voltages and insulation shall be same as above. iv) Extra-flexible wires shall be used for wiring to device mounted on moving parts such as hinged doors. v) All wiring shall be properly supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and securely connected to equipment terminals and terminals blocks. 1.22 i) POWER CABLES TERMINATION Cable termination compartment and arrangement for power cables shall be suitable for stranded aluminium conductor, armoured XLPE/PVC insulated and sheathed, single core/three core, 1100V grade cables. ii) All necessary cable terminating accessories such as Gland plates, supporting
clamps and brackets, power cable lugs, hardware etc., shall be provided by successful bidder, suit the final cable sizes which would be advised later. iii) The gland plate shall be removable type and shall cover the entire cable alley. Bidder shall also ensure that sufficient space is provided for all cable glands. Gland plates shall be factory-drilled according to the cable gland sizes and number which shall be informed to the Contractor later. For all single core cables, gland plates shall be of non-magnetic Material. 1.22.1 TYPE TESTS i) Type test reports of Panels (Switchgear and Control gear assemblies) as per IS 8623 Part-I shall be submitted for the following tests before the fabrication of switchgear is started : (a) Verification of temperature rise limits (b) Verification of the dielectric properties (c) Verification of short circuit strength (d) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 111
(e) Verification of clearances and cree distances (f) Verification of mechanical operation (g) Verification of degree of protection ii) Contractor shall submit type test reports for the following Switchgear and Control gears before the fabrication of switchgear is started: (a) Circuit breakers / MCCB as per IS 13947 Part-II (b) Protective Relays as per IEC:60255 for the above equipments test
conducted once are acceptable (i.e. The requirement of test conducted within last five years shall not be applicable). 1.24 i) ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING The Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all electrical equipment included in this specification. ii) Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman like manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Tolerance shall be as established in Contractors drawings or as stipulated by Owner. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been checked and found acceptable by the Owner. iii) Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete inserts etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment. iv) Manufacturers and Owners instructions and recommendations shall be correctly followed in handling, setting, testing and commissioning of all equipment. v) Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective room through the regular door or openings specifically provided for this purpose. No part of the structure shall be utilized to lift or erect any equipment without prior permission of Owner. vi) All boards shall be installed in accordance with Indian Standards IS: 3072 and at Owners instructions. All boards shall be installed on finished surfaces, concrete or steel stills. Contractor shall be required to install and align any channel sills which form part of foundations. In joining shipping sections of switchboards together adjacent housing of panel sections or flanged throat sections shall be bolted together after alignment has been complete. Power bus, enclosures ground and control splices of conventional nature shall be cleaned and bolted together being drawn up with torque spanner of proper size or by other approved means. Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 112
vii)
All boards shall be made completely vermin proof.
viii) Contractor shall take utmost care in holding instruments, relaying and other delicate mechanism wherever the instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be mentioned only after the associated panels have been erected and aligned. The packing materials employed for safe transit of instrument and relays shall be removed after ensuring that panel have been completely installed and no further movement of the same should be necessary. Any damage shall be immediately reported to Owner. ix) Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched by up Contractor if their surface is specified or marred while handling. x) After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connections, Contractor shall perform operational tests on all switchboards, to verify proper operation of switchboards/panels and correctness of all equipment in each and every respect. The cable opening and cables entries for cables terminating to the panels shall be sealed with fire sealing materials. 1.25 i) COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS The contractor shall carry out the following commissioning checks, in addition to the other checks and tests recommended by the manufacturers: A) General (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) B) Check name plate details according to the specification. Check for physical damage. Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, joints connecting terminals. Check earth connections Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings Check all moving parts for proper lubrication Check settings of all the relays
Circuit Breakers (a) (b) (c) Check alignment of breaker truck for free movement Check correct operation of shutters Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values (d) Manual operation of breaker completely assembled 113
(e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)
Power closing/opening operation, manually and electrically Breaker closing and tripping time Trip free and anti-pumping operation IR values, minimum pick up voltage and resistance of coils Contact resistance Simultaneous closing of all the three phases Check electrical & mechanical interlocks provided Check on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches and time of charging.
(m) C)
All functional checks
Current Transformers (a) (b) (c) Meggar between winding and winding terminals to body Polarity test Ratio identification checking of all ratios on all cores by primary injection of current. (d) Spare CT cores, if available, to be shorted and earthed.
D)
Voltage Transformer (a) (b) (c) (d) Insulation resistance test Ratio test on all cores Polarity test Line connections as per connection diagram
E)
Cubicle Wiring (a) (b) Check all switch developments Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the wiring is as per relevant drawing. All interconnections between panels/equipment shall be similarly checked. (c) (d) All the wires shall be meggered to earth Functional checking of all control circuit e.g. closing, tripping control, interlock, supervision and alarm circuit.
114
F)
Relays (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Check connections and wiring Megger all terminals to body Megger AC to DC terminals Check operating characteristics by secondary injection Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils Check operation of electrical/mechanical targets Relays settings Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for directional relays wherever required.
G)
Meters (a) (b) (c) Check calibration by comparing it with a sub-standard. Megger all insulated portions. Check CT and VT connections with particulars reference to their polarities for power type meters.
8.26
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES i) The Bidder shall include in his proposal any special tools and tackles required for erection, testing commissioning and maintenance of the equipments offered. ii) The list of these special tools and tackles shall be given in the bid proposal sheets along with their respective prices. iii) The total price of the special tools and tackles shall be included in proposal sheets. 8.26.1 EQUIPMENTS TO BE FURNISHED i) Standard scheme of interconnection of switchboards and distribution boards along with tentative feeder disposition for each board shall be provided by the bidder for the approval of the Employer. Any other feeder required as per system requirement for efficient and reliable operation shall be deemed to be included in bidders scope.
ii) The Bill of Materials for each type of module shall be as under. These are minimum Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 115
indicative requirement of the system. The necessary auxiliary relays, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be provided as per scheme requirement. Any other item / component required with in a module for efficient and reliable operation shall be deemed to be included in bidders scope. The scheme shall have provision for remote annunciation for the followings : a. Station LT (415V) AC incomer supply unhealthy. b. 220V DCDB U/V, O/V & Earth leakage relay operated. c. 50V DCDB U/V & O/V relay operated. d. DG set start e. DG set protection iii) Module Type AE (Electrically controlled circuit breaker for incoming and Bus Coupler Circuit). a. One (1) Triple pole air circuit breaker complete with all accessories and power operated mechanism as specified. b. Two (2) Neutral Link. c. Three (3) Current Transformer for metering. d. One (1) Ammeter with selector switch. e. Three (3) Current Transformer for relaying. f. One (1) Triple pole instantaneous over-current relay having the setting
range of 200- 800% or 500-2000% of CT secondary and adjustable definite minimum time. g. One (1) Instantaneous earth fault relay having and adjustable setting range
of 10-40% or 20-80% of CT secondary current and adjustable definite minimum time. The earth fault relay shall be provided with a stabilizing resistor. iv) Module Type M1 (Circuit Breaker Controlled Motor Feeder) a. One (1) Triple pole Air Circuit Breaker complete with accessories, and power operated mechanism as specified. b. One (1) Three position 6 pole selector switch
c. SWITCHGEAR / NORMAL / TRIAL d. Three (3) Current Transformer for metering. Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear 116
e. f. g.
One (1) Ammeter with Ammeter Selector Switch. Three (3) Current Transformer for relaying. One (1) Triple pole instantaneous over-current relay for providing positive sequence current protection in all the three phases. The relay setting range shall be continuously adjustable between 200-800% or 400-1600% of CT secondary rated current as required.
h.
One (1) Double pole inverse definite minimum time over current relays connected in R&B phases for over current protection of motor rated 110kw 200kw. The relay shall have an adjustable setting range of 50%-200% of CT Secondary current and time setting range of 0-30 Second. The relay shall be CDGM-22 of EE or equivalent.
i.
One (1) Single pole adjustable definite time delay relay for motor overload alarm connected in Y-phase only. The relay shall have resetting ratio of not less than 90%. The relay shall have continuously adjustable time delay range of 2.5 to 25 Sec.
j.
One (1) Instantaneous earth fault relay having an adjustable setting range of 1040% or 20-80% of CT secondary current. The earth fault relay shall be provided with a stabilizing resistor.
v)
Module Type E a. One (1) Four pole MCCB
vi)
Module G-1 (VT Module with under Voltage Relay) a. Three (3) 415/3 / 110/3 volts single phase voltage transformer star / star connect with star point solidly earthed mounted on common chassis. Burden. b. Six(6) HRC Fuses mounted on the above chassis. One (1)Four Position voltmeter selector switch. c. One (1) Voltmeter (0-500V) d. One (1) Double pole instantaneous under voltage relays with continuous variable setting range of 40-80% of 110 Volts. e. One (1) Time delay pick up relay having a time setting range of 0.5 f. To 3 secs. With 3 NO. Self reset contacts, suitable for 220V DC. 117 Accuracy Class 0.5 draw out for protection and metering with 50VA
g. One (1) Auxiliary relay 220V DC with 2 No. self reset contacts. h. Three (3) Indicating lamps with series resistor and colour lenses vii) Module Type G-2 a. b. c. d. Three (3) HRC Fuse One (1) One (1) Voltmeter (0-500V) Voltmeter selector switch four position (R-Y, Y-B, B-R OFF).
Three (3) Indication lamps (Red, Blue & Yellow)
viii) Module Type H & H (BC) (Isolating Switch Controlled Incoming Circuit) a. b. ix) One (1) Four pole MCCB One (1) Red Indicating lamp to indicate isolating switch closed position.
Module Type S: (DC Metering and Protection Module) a. One (1) Voltmeter 300-0-300V DC for 220V DC DB / Voltmeter 0-75V DC for 50V DCDB b. c. One (1) Three (3) position voltmeter selector switch One (1) Instantaneous under voltage relay with 95% of 220V DC. The resetting ratio of relay should not be more than 1.25. the relay shall be provided with a series resistor and a push button across it for resetting (pick up) the relay at about 105% of the drop out voltage. d. One (1) Instantaneous over voltage relay with setting range of 110% of 220V DC. The resetting ratio of relay should not be less than 0.8. the relay shall have a push button in series for resetting the relay at about 95% of the operating voltage. e. One (1) Earth leakage relay only for 220V DC system having adjustable pick up range between 3 to 7 milliamps the relay shall be suitable for 220V DC/240V AC Auxiliary supply.
x)
Module Type X a. One (1) Double pole 250V MCB
xi)
Module Type-DC (Incomer from Battery & Chargers) a. One (1) Double pole 250V DC MCCB for incomer from Battery.
118
b. One (1) DC ammeter with shunt and range of 90-0-400 Amps for 220V DC DB and 90-0- 200 Amp. for 50V DC DB. c. Two (2) Double pole 250V DC MCCB / MCB. d. One (1) Double pole single throw 250V DC air Break switch connecting battery & charger sections to DC DB. xii) Module Type DG-1 (Electrically Controlled Circuit Breaker for Incomer from DG Set) a. One (1) Triple pole circuit breaker complete with all accessories and power operated mechanism as specified. b. One (1) Frequency meter. c. One (1) Voltmeter with selector switch. d. One (1) Remote/Local Selector switch. e. Three (3) Current Transformer for Metering. f. Six (6) Current Transformers for differential protection (out of this
g. Nos. will be supplied loose for mounting in DG set panel). h. Three (3) Current Transformer for relaying. i. j. One (1) Ammeter Selector Switch. One (1) Ammeter
k. One (1) Wattmeter of range 0-300 KW l. One (1)Three pole voltage controlled definite time delay relay having current setting range of 50-200% of CT secondary current and adjustable time delay 0.3 to 3 secs. m. One (1) Watt hour meter with six (6) digits and minimum count of one (1) kwh. n. One (1) Single pole definite time over current relay having a
continuous setting range of 50-200% of CT secondary current and a time delay of 2.5-25 secs connected in CT of Y phase for overload alarm. The relay shall have a setting ratio of not less than 90%. o. One (1) Three pole differential protection relay having an operating current setting range of 10-40% of generator full load current. The relay shall be high impedance type, with necessary stabilizing resistors. p. Two (2)Push Buttons for Remote starting Volume-II (Section-G), LT Switchgear & stopping of DG Set (Red, 119
Green). xiii) Module Type H1 a. One (1) Double pole DC Switch with pad locking facility in off position. xiv) Module Type EL a. One (1) Four pole MCCB b. One (1) Contactor c. Electronic Timer suitable for continuous operation, push button and selector switch be as per scheme requirement.
8.27
PARAMETERS A) POWER SUPPLY S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 1. 2. i) AC System Voltage Frequency Combined variation Fault Level ii) DC System System Voltage Fault Level iii) Control Supply Voltage Trip and closing Spring charging 220 V DC Unearthed coils 220 V DC Unearthed 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed 415 Volts, 10% 50 Hz 5% + 10% 20 kA (rms) 2 Wire, unearthed 220V 10% 4 kA
B)
CUBICAL DATA S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. BUSBAR RATING Continuous Short Time (1 Sec) Momentary Ambient Temperature One Minute Power WithStand Voltage 120 As specified 20kA (rms) 45kA 50Deg C
i) Power Circuit ii) Control Circuit 6. Cubicle Colour Finish a) Interior b) Control Circuit C) CIRCUIT BREAKER 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Type No. Of poles Voltage and Frequency Rated Operating Duty Symmetrical Interruption Short Circuit making Current Short time Withstand Current for 1Sec Operating Mechanism Duration No. of auxiliary Contacts Short Circuit breaking current i) AC Component ii) DC Component
2500V rms 2500V rms Glossy White Smoke Grey shade No. 692 of IS:5
Air Break 3 415 10%, 50 HZ 5% As per IS 20kA (RMS) 45kA (Peak) 20KA (RMS) for 1 Sec 20 kA (RMS) for 1 Sec 4 NO & 4 NC contacts 20kA Rms As per IS:13947 Part 2
D)
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER AC SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 7. 8. No. Of poles Voltage and Frequency Rated Operating Duty Symmetrical Interrupting Current Short Circuit making Current No. of auxiliary Contacts Short Circuit breaking current 20kA (RMS) 45kA (peak) 2 NO & 2 NC 20kA Rms As per IS:13947 4 415 10%, 50 HZ 5% As per IS
DC SYSTEM 2 250V
4kA
2 NO & 2 NC As per IS:13947
E)
METERS 1. Accuracy Class 2. One Minute power frequency withstand test voltage (kV)
2.5 2.0
F)
CURRENT TRANSFORMER 121
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Type Voltage class and frequency Class of Insulation Accuracy class metering CT Accuracy class protection CT Accuracy class differential protection Short time current rating (for CTs Associated with circuit breakers) i) Current ii) Duration iii) Dynamic Rating iv) One Minute Power WithStand Voltage
Cast resin, Bar primary 650V, 50Hz E or better Class 1, VA adequate for application, but not less than 7.5 VA 5P 15, VA adequate for application, but not less than 7.5 VA PS, KPV = 300 V
20 kA (RMS) One second 45 kA (Peak) 2.5 kV (rms)
G)
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER 1. 2. Type Rated Voltage i) Primary ii) Secondary 3. Method of Connection i) Primary ii) Secondary 4. 5. 6. 7. Rated Voltage Factor Class of insulation One minute power frequency withstand voltage Accuracy class Star Star 1.1 continuous, 1.5 for seconds E or better 2.5 KV (RMS) 0.5, not less than 20 VA 415/3 V 110/3 V Cast resin
H)
RELAY One minute power frequency withstand test Voltage 2 kV (rms)
1.29
AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF OUTDOOR LIGHTING EL-type module of 415 V Main lighting distribution board and Emergency lighting distribution board and shall be controlled by timer and contactor module to facilitate its operation automatically.
122
1.30 i)
AUTOMATIC SUPPLY CHANGEOVER Automatic changeover between Incomer I, Income II and DG set is to be carried out during the failure of supply in one/or both the incomers. After the restoration of the supply, system shall be restored to normal condition automatically. The requirement of changeover under various conditions is as below:(a) Under normal conditions i.e. when supply is available in both the incomers, incomers I&II of 415 V Main switchboard, ACDB shall be in closed condition and Bus couplers and DG set breaker shall be in open condition. (b) In case of failure of either of the sources, the incomer of that source shall trip and Bus coupler shall get closed. On restoration of supply, normal conditions described above are to be established automatically. (c) In case of failure of supply in both the sources, both incomers, incomers of ACDBs and ACDB Bus coupler shall trip and DG Set breaker switched on.
i)
On restoration of one or both sources, DG Set breaker shall trip, DG set stopped and conditions described in paragraph (a) & (b) shall be restored.
ii)
To avoid unnecessary operation of switchgear for momentary disturbances all changeovers from one state to another shall be intimated after a time delay, after the conditions warranting such change has been detected.
123
SECTION- (H) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
1.1kV Control & Auxilliary Power Cables 1.0 SCOPE This technical specification covers the requirement of design, manufacture, testing, packing and dispatch of 1.1kV grade Auxiliary power and control cables (FRLS type). No deviation from the requirements specified in various clauses of this specification shall be allowed. 1.1 TYPE OF CABLES Sl No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Type of Control Cable 2C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 3C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 5C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 7C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 10C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 14C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 19C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 27C x 2.5 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 4 C x 4 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 4 C x 6 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 4 C x 10 sq mm PVC/ Cu. 1C x 630 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 1C x 400 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 1C x 500 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 3.5C x 240 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 3.5C x 300 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 3.5C x 400 sq mm XLPE/Al.
Volume-II (Section-H), Power And Control Cables
124
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1C x 630 sq mm PVC / Al. 1C x 400 sq mm PVC/ Al. 3.5C x 400 sq mm PVC/Al. 3.5C x 300 sq mm PVC/Al. 1C x 185 sq mm PVC/ Al. 1C x 150 sq mm XLPE/ Al. 3.5C x 95 sq mm PVC/ Al. 3.5C x 70 sq mm PVC/ Al. 1C x 50 sq mm PVC/ Al. 3.5C x 35 sq mm PVC/ Al. 2C x 6 sq mm PVC/Al. 2C x 10 sq mm PVC/Al. 4C x 6 sq mm PVC/ Al. 4C x 10 sq mm PVC/ Al. 4C x 16 sq mm PVC/ Al. 4C x 25 sq mm PVC/ Al.
1.2
APPLICABLE STANDARDS The auxiliary power and control cables shall conform to following latest Indian and International standards and their amendments. IS 1554 (Part I) IS 7098 (Part I) IS 5831 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables For working voltage up to and including 1100V XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cables For working voltage up to and including 1100V PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
125
IS 8130 IS 3975
Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords. Low Carbon Galvanized Steel Wires, Formed Wires and Tapes for Armouring of Cables - Specification
IS 10810 IEEE-383
Method of tests for cables. Standard for type test of class IE electric cables, field splices, and connections for nuclear power generating stations.
ASTM-D2843 ASTM-D2863
Standard test method for density of smoke from burning or decomposition of plastics. Standard test method for measuring minimum oxygen concentration to support candle - like combustion of plastics (oxygen index).
IEC:60754 (Part-1 & 2) IEC:60332 (Part I to 3) IS 3961 (Part II) IS 10418 SS 4241475
Test on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions
Recommended current rating for cables PVC insulated and PVC sheathed heavy-duty cables. Drums for electric cables. Swedish chimney test
1.3 1.3.0
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS All cables shall be suitable for high ambient, high humid tropical Indian climatic conditions. All cables shall be designed to withstand the mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under the foreseen steady state and transient/fault conditions, and shall be suitable for the proposed method of installation. Cables shall be derated for the site ambient and ground temperatures, grouping and soil resistivity and cable-laying configuration. Cables shall be selected to limit
126
maximum voltage drop at equipment terminals during normal operation and starting conditions well within permissible values. Voltage grade of cables shall be of earthed grade when used in solidly earthed systems, and unearthed grade when used in non-effectively earthed systems 1.3.1 1.3.2
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES Parameters of the cables are as follows: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Particulars Aux Power cables Control cables ---------------------XLPE PVC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------a) Conductor i) Material Stranded Aluminium Tinned Copper of Annealed Copper as per IS 8130, Grade EC
ii) Size
As required, but 2.5 sq. mm minimum Min. 6 sq.mm Aluminium with minimum 7 strands or 2.5 sq mm for copper With minimum 7 strands Circular/ Circular/ sector sector Shaped. Shaped Circular
iii) Shape
b) Main Insulation i) Material XLPE 90 PVC 70 PVC 70
ii) Continuous withstand temperature (deg.C)
iii) Short circuit withstand tem- 250 perature (deg.C) iv) Colour identi fication c) Inner Sheath
160
160
As per relevant codes and standards All armoured cables shall have distinct extruded inner sheath
127
i)
Material
PVC Black
PVC Black
PVC Black
ii) Colour d) Armour i) Material
Aluminium wire for single core cable and GS wire/formed wire for multi core cables as per relevant IS. Minimum Coverage of 90% 95% of normal armour
GS wire/formed wire as per relevant IS. Min. coverage of 90%.
ii) Breaking Load of Joint e) Outer sheath i)
95% of normal armour
All power & control cable shall have extruded outer sheath. PVC PVC
Material PVC (Polyethelene based Halogen free Material not Acceptable) Black
ii) Colour iii) Marking
Black
Grey same as for Power Cables
- Cable size & Voltage grade (by embossing) - Word FRLS @ 5m (by Embossing) - Sequential marking @1m Oxygen Index: Acid gas generation: Smoke density rating: Temperature Index:
f) FRLS Properties on Outer sheath
Min. 29 (As per ASTMD 2863) Max. 20% (As per IEC754-I) 60% (As per ASTMD 2843) Min 250oC
g) Flammability Test on all As per IEC 332 Part-3 (Category B) & Swedish Chimney test as per SS4241475 Types of cables h) Tolerance on +1.5mm for cable upto 30mm O.D. and +5% or 2mm whichever is Outer Diameter less for cable above 30mm O.D. (O.D.)
128
i) 1.3.3
Minimum 12 x D for all multicore cables and 15 x D for single core cable Bending Radius
Core identification For cables having more than five (5) cores, each core shall be identified by number marking. However, for cables upto five (5) cores, the same shall be by colour as per IS.
1.3.4
Armouring Cables buried direct in ground and cables in switchyard shall be armoured. Strip armouring method (a) mentioned in Table 5, Page-6 of IS: 1554 (Part 1) - 1988 and Table 6, Page-6 of IS: 7098 (Part 1) - 1988 shall not be accepted for any of the cables.
1.3.5
Insulation & Sheath Insulation for PVC insulated aux. power & control cables shall be Type-A as per IS 1554 Part-1. Method of application shall be by extrusion and Sleeve extrusion is not permitted. Insulation for XLPE insulated aux. power cables shall be as per IS 7098 Part-1. Inner sheath shall be PVC Type-ST1 as per IS 5831 for PVC power & PVC control cables and Type-ST2 as per IS 5831 for XLPE power cables. Fillers are acceptable with material same as Inner sheath (Material of filler to be compatible with that of inner sheath). The method of application of inner sheath with fillers shall be Pressure/ Vacuum extrusion and without fillers shall be Pressure extrusion only. Outer sheath for PVC insulated aux. power & control cables shall be PVC Extruded, FRLS, Type ST-1 as per IS 5831 & Category C2 as per IS 1554 (Part-I) Outer sheath for XLPE insulated aux. power cables shall be PVC Extruded, FRLS, Type ST-2 as per IS 5831 & Category C2 as per IS 7098 (Part-I)
1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2
CURRENT RATING FOR CONTROL and AUX. POWER CABLES Normal current rating shall not be less than that covered by IS 3961. PVC insulated cables shall be suitable for continuous conductor temperature of 70 C and short circuit withstand temperature of 160 C. Tables giving de-rating factors for various conditions of cable installation including the following, for all types of cables shall be furnished - Variation in ambient air temperature.
129
- Variation in ground temperature. - Depth of laying. - Cables laid in the ground - Cables laid in trench - Cables laid in ducts - Soil resistivity. - Grouping of cables.
1.4.3
The value of short circuit withstand current ratings of all cables shall be indicated for a short circuit for 1 second duration and should also specify the maximum temperature during short circuit.
1.4.4
The following factors shall also be accounted for, while specifying the maximum short circuit withstand of the cables.
1.4.4.1 Deformation of the insulation, due to thermo-mechanical forces produced by the short circuit conditions, can reduce the effective thickness of insulation. 1.4.4.2 Conductor and core screens can be adversely affected with loss of screening effect. Likewise the thermal properties of the outer sheath material can be the limitation. 1.4.4.3 It is essential that the accessories, which are used in the cable system with mechanical and/or soldered connections, are suitable for the temperature adopted for the cables. 1.4.5 Formula for calculating short circuit current for different duration or curve showing short time current v/s time for different sizes of cables shall be furnished by vendor. 1.5 1.5.1 CABLE DRUMS Cables shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden cable drum and steel drums of heavy construction. It shall be made of good quality wood, pressure impregnated against fungal and insect attack. Wood preservative shall be applied to the entire drum. The ends of the each length of cable shall be sealed before dispatch.
130
1.5.2
All Control and Power Cables shall be supplied in drum length of 1000m, unless otherwise specified. For power cable with conductor cross sectional area 300sqmm and above may be supplied in 500m drums. Each drum shall contain one continuous length of cable. Owner shall have the option of rejecting cable drums with shorter lengths. The cable length per drum is allowed a tolerance of +5%. The tolerance allowed on total quantity of each size is +2%. Where the ordered quantity is not multiple of 1000/500 m and the incremental quantity is very small, the same may be included in one of the drums. Otherwise, an additional length for the incremental quantity will be supplied.
1.5.3
A layer of water proof paper shall be applied to the surface of the drums and over the outer most cable layer.
1.5.4 1.5.5
A clear space of at least 40mm shall be left between the cables and the logging. Each drum shall carry manufacturers name, purchasers name, address and contract number, item number and type, size and length of the cable, net and gross weight stenciled on both sides of drum. A tag containing the same information shall be attached to the leading end of the cable. An arrow and suitable accompanying wordings shall be marked on one end of the reel indicating the direction in which it should be rolled.
1.5.6
Packing shall be sturdy and adequate to protect the cables, from any injury due to
mishandling or other conditions encountered during transportation, handling and storage. Both cable ends shall be sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress of water during transportation and erection. 1.6 1.06.00 1.06.01 1.06.02 TESTS All cables to be supplied shall conform to type tests as per relevant standards and proven type. All acceptance and routine tests shall be conducted as per approved QP of ultimate customer and relevant standards The following type tests shall be carried out on one size each (to be selected by ultimate customer / BHEL) of LT control/LT PVC power/LT XLPE power of each voltage grade: Conductor a) Annealing test : For copper conductor only
1.06.03
131
b) c) d) 1.06.04
Tensile test Wrapping test Resistance test
: : :
For Aluminium conductor only For Aluminium conductor only For Al/Cu
Armour wires/formed wires a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Measurement of dimensions Tensile test Elongation test Torsion test Winding test Resistance test Zinc coating test Wrapping test : : : : : : : : Applicable for all types of material Applicable for all types of material Applicable for all types of material For round wire only For formed wires only Applicable for all types of material For G. S. formed wires / wires only For Aluminium wires only
1.06.05
For PVC / XLPE Insulation & PVC Sheath a) b) Test for thickness Tensile strength and Elongation test Before ageing and after ageing Ageing in air oven Loss of mass test Hot deformation test Heat shock test Shrinkage test Thermal stability test Hot set test Water absorption test Oxygen index test : : Applicable for all types of material Applicable for all types of material
c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k)
: : : : : : : : :
Applicable for all types of material For PVC insulation & PVC sheath only For PVC insulation & PVC sheath only For PVC insulation & PVC sheath only Applicable for all types of material For PVC insulation & PVC sheath only For XLPE insulation only For XLPE insulation only For outer sheath only
132
l) m) 1.06.06
Smoke density test Acid gas generation test
: : :
For outer sheath only For outer sheath only Applicable for all type of materials
Completed Cables a) Flammability test as per IEC 332 part-III b) c) Insulation resistance test (Volume resistivity method) High voltage test
133
SECTION- (I) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS 1. 1.1. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES Simplex panel shall consist of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted thereon and having wiring access from front for relay panels. Doors shall have handles with either built in locking facility or will be provided with pad-lock. 1.2. Relay panels shall be of simplex type design as indicated. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified complementary equipment required for completeness of the protective/control schemes is properly accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary, provide panels with larger dimensions. No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed. However, the width of panels that are being offered to be placed in existing switchyard control rooms, should be in conformity with the space availability in the control room. 1.3. Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS:2147. 1.4. Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural frames completely enclosed with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the panels such as base frame, front sheet and door frames, and 2.0mm for sides, door, top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level transportation and installation. 1.5. All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with synthetic rubber gaskets Neoprene/EPDM generally conforming with provision of IS 11149. However, XLPE gaskets can also be used for fixing protective glass doors. Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screens and filters. The screens shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh 1.6. Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat appearance, inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from outside, with all exterior surfaces tune and smooth. 1.7. Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, which shall be fixed on the embedded foundation channels/insert plates. Anti vibration strips made of shock absorbing materials which shall be supplied by the contractor, shall be placed between panel & base frame. 1.8. Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plate fitted on the bottom of the panel shall be connected to earthing of the panel/station through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.
Volume-II (Section-I), Relay And Protection Panels
134
1.9. 2.0 2.1.
Relay panels of modern modular construction would also be acceptable. MOUNTING All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the terminal blocks ready for external connections. The equipment on front of panel shall be mounted flush. No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
2.2.
Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking on the equipment shall be clearly visible.
2.3.
The Contractor shall carry out cut out, mounting and wiring of the free issue items supplied by others which are to be mounted in his panel in accordance with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings. Cut outs if any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off with blanking plate.
2.4.
The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than 750mm from the bottom of the panel. The centre lines of relays, meters and recorders shall be not less than 450mm from the bottom of the panel
2.5.
The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders etc. shall be matched.
2.6. 2.7.
No equipment shall be mounted on the doors. At existing station, panels shall be matched with other panels in the control room in respect of dimensions, colour, appearance and arrangement of equipment (centre lines of switches, push buttons and other equipment) on the front of the panel.
3.0 3.1.
PANEL INTERNAL WIRING Panels shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring provided between all electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels. When panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring and connections between the panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be carried out internally
3.2.
All wiring shall be carried out with 650V grade, single core, stranded copper conductor wires with PVC insulation. The minimum size of the multi-stranded copper conductor used for internal wiring shall be as follows:
135
All circuits except current transformer circuits and voltage transfer circuits meant for energy metering one 1.5mm sq. per lead. All current transformer circuits one 2.5 sq.mm lead. Voltage transformer circuit (for energy meters): Two 2.5 mm sq.per lead. 3.3. All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters & troughs shall be used for this purpose. 3.4. Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits, annunciation circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of the panels running throughout the entire length of the panels. 3.5. Wire termination shall be made with solderless crimping type and tinned copper lugs, which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker or device shall be distinguished by the addition of red coloured unlettered ferrule. 3.6. Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be preferred for inter panel wiring. Inter-connections to adjacent panel shall be brought out to a separate set of terminal blocks located near the slots of holes meant for taking the inter-connecting wires. 3.7. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipments 4. 0 4.1. TERMINAL BLOCKS All internal wiring to be connected to external equipment shall terminate on terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and have 10 Amps. continuous rating, moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Markings on the terminal blocks shall correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring diagrams. All terminal blocks shall have shrouding with transparent unbreakable material. 4.2. Disconnecting type terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities. 4.3. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.
136
4.4.
Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following conductors of external cable on each side All CT & PT circuits: minimum of two of 2.5mm Sq. copper. AC/DC Power Supply Circuits : One of 6mm Sq. Aluminium. All other circuits: minimum of one of 2.5mm Sq. Copper.
4.5.
There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of terminal blocks and the associated cable gland plate or panel side wall. Also the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks edges shall be minimum of 150mm.
4.6.
Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run in parallel and close proximity along each side of the wiring-duct to provide for convenient attachment of internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for the Owner's external cable connections. All adjacent terminal blocks shall also share this field wiring corridor. All wiring shall be provided with adequate support inside the panels to hold them firmly and to enable free and flexible termination without causing strain on terminals.
4.7.
The number and sizes of the Owner's multi core incoming external cables will be furnished to the Contractor after placement of the order. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, supporting clamps & brackets, wiring troughs and gutters etc. (except glands & lugs) for external cables shall be included the scope of supply.
5.0 5.1.
PAINTING All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the IS:6005 "Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel".
5.2. 5.3.
Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
5.4.
After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.
5.5.
The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while the second coat shall be stoved.
5.6.
After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting. The exterior colour of paint shall be of a slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. Volume-II (Section-I), Relay And Protection Panels 137
5.7.
A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the panels.
5.8.
In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure like electrostatic painting , the procedure shall be submitted for OWNER's review and approval.
6.0 6.1.
NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted inside the panels shall be provided with individual name plates with equipment designation engraved. Also on the top of each panel on front as well as rear side, large and bold nameplates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.
6.2.
All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear with individual name plates engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
6.3.
All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, manufacturer's type, serial number and electrical rating data.
6.4.
Name Plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Name plates shall be black with white engraving lettering.
6.5.
All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel bearing LOA No & Date, Name of the Substation & feeder and reference drawing number.
7.0 7.1.
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Plug Point: 240V, Single phase 50Hz, AC socket with switch suitable to accept 5 Amps and 15 Amps pin round standard Indian plug, shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF switch.
7.2.
Interior Lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture rated for 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panel controlled by the respective panel door switch. Adequate lighting shall also be provided for the corridor in Duplex panels.
7.3.
Switches and Fuses: Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing and isolating of DC and AC supplies for various control, signaling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with Fuses. Selection of the main and sub-circuit Fuses rating shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Voltage transformer circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming to IS: 13703 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. The short time fuse rating of Fuses shall be not less than 9 KA. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse 'rating' and 'voltage'.
138
7.4.
Space Heater: Each panel shall be provided with a thermostatically connected space heater rated for 240V, single phase , 50 Hz Ac supply for the internal heating of the panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The fittings shall be complete with switch unit
8.0 8.1.
EARTHING All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed. Location of earth bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various switching conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall be at least 25 X 6 sq. mm perforated copper with threaded holes at a gap of 50mm with a provision of bolts and nuts for connection with cable armours and mounted equipment etc for effective earthing. When several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of Contractor. Provision shall be made for extending the earth bus bars to future adjoining panels on either side.
8.2.
Provision shall be made on each bus bar of the end panels for connecting Substation earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of Contractor.
8.3.
All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment including gland plate, shall be connected to the earth bus by copper wires of size not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be green.
8.4.
Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to other devices when the loop is broken, shall not be permitted. Earthing may be done in such a manner that no circulating current shall flow in the panel.
8.5.
VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made through links so that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing continuity of earthing system for other groups.
8.6.
An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to earth bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.
9.0 9.1.
RELAYS All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear.
9.2.
All protective relays shall be of numerical type and communication protocol shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC 61850 shall be applicable to these relays. Volume-II (Section-I), Relay And Protection Panels 139
9.3.
All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type/modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.
9.4.
All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC Voltage operated relays shall be suitable for 110 Volts VT secondary and current operated relays for 1 amp CT secondary. All DC operated relays and timers shall be designed for the DC voltage specified, and shall operate satisfactorily between 80% and 110% of rated voltage. Voltage operated relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.
9.5.
The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the protection scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and timers required for interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts suiting contact duties of protective relays and monitoring of control supplies and circuits, lockout relay monitoring circuits etc. also required for the complete protection schemes described in the specification shall be provided. All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential free isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as required to complete the scheme; contacts shall be silver faced with spring action. Relay case shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential free external connections to the relay coils and contacts, including spare contacts.
9.6.
Timers shall be of solid state type. Time delay in terms of milliseconds obtained by the external capacitor resistor combination is not preferred and shall be avoided .
9.7.
No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de-energised shall be employed in the circuits.
9.8.
Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the purpose of testing and maintenance.
9.9.
Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of shunt reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following shall be strictly ensured: (a) The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than that of the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure definite operation of the flag indicator of the relay. (b) Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more relays operate simultaneously. (c) Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the D.C. Supply Voltage is minimum.
140
(d)
Trip-circuit seal-in is required for all trip outputs, irrespective of the magnitude of the interrupted current. The trip-circuit seal-in logic shall not only seal-in the trip output(s),but also the relevant initiation signals to other scheme functions, (e.g. initiate signals to the circuit-breaker failure function, reclosing function etc.), and the alarm output signals.
(e)
Two methods of seal-in are required, one based on the measurement of AC current, catering for those circumstances for which the interrupted current is above a set threshold, and one based on a fixed time duration, catering for those circumstances for which the interrupted current is small (below the set threshold).
(f)
For the current seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained until the circuit breaker opens, at which time the seal-in shall reset and the seal-in method shall not now revert to the fixed time duration method. For this seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained for the set time duration. For the line protection schemes, this time duration shall be independently settable for single- and three-pole tripping.
(g)
Seal-in by way of current or by way of the fixed duration timer shall occur irrespective of whether the trip command originates from within the main protection device itself (from any of the internal protection functions), or from an external device with its trip output routed through the main protection device for tripping. Trip-circuit seal-in shall not take place under sub-harmonic conditions (e.g. reactor ring down).
9.10.
All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for future use.
9.11.
The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the ones specified shall also be acceptable if they meet the functional requirements.
9.12.
Any alternative/additional protections or relays considered necessary for providing complete effective and reliable protection shall also be offered separately. The acceptance of this alternative/ additional equipment shall lie with the Owner.
9.13.
The bidder shall include in his bid a list of installations where the relays quoted have been in satisfactory operation.
9.14. 9.15.
All relays and their drawings shall have phase indications as R-Red, Y-yellow, B-blue For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following: a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay from/to the personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
141
b)
The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 870-5-103 and 61850 protocol.
c) In case of line protection and transformer/reactor differential protection, the features like fault recorder and event logging function as available including available as optional feature in these relays shall be supplied and activated at no extra cost to the owner. Also necessary software/hardware for automatic uploading to station HMI/DR work station (as applicable) shall be supplied. It is to be clearly understood that these shall be in addition to fault locator and event logger functions as specified at clause no. 19. 10. 10.1. 10.2. TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION All relays shall be suitable for series compensated line. The line protection relays are required to protect the line and clear the faults on line within shortest possible time with reliability, selectivity and full sensitivity to all type of faults on lines. The general concept is to have two main protections having equal performance requirement specially in respect of time as called Main-I and Main-II for 765kV, 400KV and 220KV transmission lines and Main and back up protection for 132 KV transmission lines. 10.3. The Transmission system for which the line protection equipment are required is shown in the Table. The length of lines for 765,400 kV are also indicated there. 10.4. The maximum fault current could be as high as 40 kA but the minimum fault current could be as low as 20% of rated current of CT secondary. The starting & measuring relays characteristics should be satisfactory under these extremely varying conditions. 10.5. The protective relays shall be suitable for use with capacitor voltage transformers having non-electronic damping and transient response as per IEC. 10.6. Fault Recorder, Distance to fault Locator and Over voltage relay (stage -1) functions if offered as an integral part of line protection relay, shall be acceptable provided these meet the technical requirements as specified in the respective clauses. 10.7. Auto reclose relay function if offered as an integral part of line distance protection relay, shall be acceptable for 220kV and 132 KV lines only provided the auto reclose relay feature meets the technical requirements as specified in the respective clause. 10.8. The following protections shall be provided for each of the Transmission lines: For 765 KV,400 KV & 220KV Main-I: Numerical distance protection scheme
142
Main-II: Numerical distance protection scheme of a make different from that of Main I For 132KV Main: Numerical distance protection scheme Back up : Directional Over current and Earth fault Protection 10.9. Further back up Over current and Earth fault protection shall be provided instead of Main -II protection scheme for 220KV lines to match with requirements at the remote ends. 10.10. The detailed description of the above line protections is given here under. 10.10.1. Main-I and Main-II Numerical Distance Protection scheme: (a) (b) Shall have continuous self monitoring and diagnostic feature. Shall be non-switched type with separate measurements for all phase to phase and phase to ground faults (c) Shall have stepped time-distance characteristics and three independent zones (zone 1, zone-2 and zone-3) (d) Shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1 , zone-2 and zone- 3. (e) Shall have following maximum operating time (including trip relay time , if any) under given set of conditions and with CVT being used on line (with all filters included) . (i) For 765 KV,400 KV & 220 KV lines: Source to Impedance ratio Relay setting (Ohms) Fault Locations (as % of relay setting) Fault resistance (Ohms) Maximum operating time (Milliseconds ) (ii) for 132 KV lines : A relaxation of 5 ms in above timings is allowed for 132 KV lines. 0 40 for all faults 0 45 for 3 ph. Faults & 60 for all other faults 4 (10 or 20) and 2 50 15 2 50
143
(f)
The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 -85 degree or shall have independent resistance(R ) and reactance (X) setting.
(g)
shall have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.
(h) (i) (j) (k)
shall have resetting time of less than 55 milli-seconds (including the resetting time of trip relays) shall have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting. shall have variable residual compensation. shall have memory circuits with defined characteristics in all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse conditions and instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase fault shall operate
(l) (m)
shall have weak end in-feed feature shall be suitable for single & three phase tripping. However relays offered for 132 kV lines provided with mechanically ganged circuit breakers single pole tripping need not to be provided.
(n)
shall have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 70 times rated current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
(o)
shall be provided with necessary self reset type trip duty contacts for completion of the scheme (Minimum number of these trip duty contacts shall be four per phase) either through built in or through separate high speed trip relays . Making capacity of these trip contacts shall be 30 amp for 0.2 seconds with an inductive load of L/R > 10 mill seconds. If separate high speed trip relays are used , the operating time of the same shall not be more than 10 milliseconds
(p) (q)
shall be suitable for use in permissive under reach / over reach /blocking communication mode. shall have suitable number of potential free contacts for Carrier aided Tripping, Auto reclosing, CB failure, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.
(r)
include power swing blocking protection which shall have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described above. block tripping during power swing conditions. release blocking in the event of actual fault
(s)
include fuse failure protection which shall monitor all the three fuses of C.V.T. and associated cable against open circuit. Volume-II (Section-I), Relay And Protection Panels 144
inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation. have an operating time less than 7 milliseconds remain inoperative for system earth faults (t) include a directional back up Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT ) earth fault relay with normal inverse characteristics as per IEC 60255-3 as a built in feature or as a separate unit for 400 KV and 220KV transmission lines (u) In case the numerical distance relay is not having the built in feature as per above clause (t), the same can be supplied as an independent relay (v) Must have a current reversal guard feature. 10.10.2. Back-up Directional Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme (a) shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall be either independent or composite unit (b) (c) (d) shall be of Numerical type shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes. shall (e) shall have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or have internal feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay. 10.10.3. All trip relays used in transmission line protection scheme shall be of self/electrical reset type depending on application requirement. have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs .
145
11.0 11.1.
Circuit Breaker Protection : This shall include following function: AUTO RECLOSING function shall be separate from Main-I and Main-II protection However, Autoreclose as in built function of bay controller unit (BCU) provided for sub-station automation is acceptable. The AUTO RECLOSE shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) have single phase and three phase reclosing facilities. have a continuously variable single phase dead time range of 0.1-2 seconds. have a continuously variable three phase dead time range of 0.1-2 seconds. have a continuously variable reclaim time range of 5-300 seconds. incorporate a four-position selector switch/ from which single phase/three phase/single and three phase auto reclosure and non-auto reclosure mode can beselected. Alternatively, the mode of auto reclosing can be selected through programming. (f) have facilities for selecting check synchronising or dead line charging features. It shall be possible at any time to change the required feature by reconnection of links. (g) (h) be of single shot type. have priority circuit to closing of both circuit breakers in case one and half breaker arrangements to allow sequential closing of breakers (i) include check synchronising relay which shall have a time setting continuously variable between 0.5-5 seconds. with a facility of additional 10 seconds. have a response time within 200 milli seconds with the timer disconnected. have a phase angle setting not exceeding 35 degree have a voltage difference setting not exceeding 10% include dead line charging relay which shall have two sets of relays and each set shall be able to monitor the three phase voltage where one set shall be connected to the line CVTs with a fixed setting of 20% of rated voltage and the other set shall be connected to the bus CVTs with a fixed setting of 80% of rated voltage. incorporate necessary auxiliary relays and timers to give comprehensive scheme.
146
11.2.
LOCAL BREAKER BACK-UP PROTECTION SCHEME shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) be triple pole type have an operating time of less than 15 milli seconds have a resetting time of less than 15 milli seconds have three over current elements be arranged to get individual initiation from the corresponding phase of main protections of line for each over current element. However, common three phase initiation is acceptable for other protections and transformer /reactor equipment protections (f) (g) (h) (i) have a setting range of 20-80% of rated current have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated current irrespective of the setting have a timer with continuously adjustable setting range of 0.1-1 seconds have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
11.3.
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY (a) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each 'phase' trip-coil and associated circuit of circuit breaker during 'ON' and 'OFF' conditions. (b) (c) The relay shall have adequate contacts for providing connection to alarm and event logger. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of not less than 200 milli seconds and be provided with operation indications for each phase.
12.
LINE OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY shall (a) (b) monitor all three phases have two independent stages and stage- 1 & II relay are acceptable as built in with line distance relays Main I & II respectively . (c) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with an adjustable time delay range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage. (d) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with a time delay of 100-200 mill seconds for the second stage. (e) be tuned to power frequency
147
(f) (g) (h)
provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage relays. have a drop-off to pick-up ratio greater than 95%. provide separate out-put contacts for each 'Phase' and stage for breaker trip relays, event logger and other scheme requirements.
13. 13.1.
REACTOR PROTECTION Numerical Differential Protection shall (a) (b) Be triple pole type Have operation time less than 25 milli-seconds at 5 times setting. (c) (d) (e) (f) Be tuned to system frequency
Have current setting range of 10 to 40% of 1 Amp. Or a suitable voltage setting range. Be high impedance / biased differential type . Be stable for all external faults
13.2.
Restricted earth fault protection Relay shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Be single pole and numerical type Be of current/voltage operated high impedance type Have a current setting of 10-40% of 1 Amp./have a suitable voltage setting range. Be tuned to system frequency. Have a suitable non-linear resistor to limit the peak voltage to 1000 Volts.
13.3.
Numerical Back up impedance protection Relay shall (a) (b) Be triple pole type, with faulty phase identification/ indication Be single step polarised 'mho' distance/ impedance relay suitable for measuring phase to ground and phase to phase faults. (c) Have adequate ohmic setting range to cover at least 60 % of the impedance of the reactor and shall be continuously variable. (d) (e) Have an adjustable characteristic angle of 30-80 degree. Have a definite time delay relay with a continuously adjustable setting range of 0.2- 2.0 seconds.
148
(f)
Include VT failure relay which shall block the tripping during VT fuse failure condition.
14. 14.1.
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION Numerical Transformer differential protection scheme shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Be triple pole type, with faulty phase identification/ indication Have an operating time not greater than 30 milli seconds at 5 times the rated current . Have three instantaneous high set over-current units Have an adjustable bias setting range of 20-50% Be suitable for rated current of 1 Amp. Have second harmonic or other inrush proof features and also should be stable under normal over fluxing conditions. Magnetising inrush proof feature shall not be achieved through any intentional time delay e.g use of timers to block relay operation or using disc operated relays (g) Have an operating current setting of 15% or less (h) include necessary separate interposing current transformers for angle and ratio correction or have internal feature in the relay to take care of the angle & ratio correction (h) Have a fault recording feature to record graphic form of instantaneous values of following analogue channels during faults and disturbances for the pre fault and post fault period: Current in all three windings in nine analogue channels in case of 400kV class and above transformers or 6 analogue channels for lower voltage transformers and Voltage in one channel The disturbance recorder shall have the facility to record the following external digital channel signals apart from the digital signals pertaining to differential relay. 1. REF protection operated 2. HV breaker status (Main and tie) 3. IV breaker status 4. Bucholz /OLTC Bucholz alarm / trip
149
5. WTI/OTI/PRD alarm/trip of transformer Necessary hardware and software for automatic up-loading the data captured by disturbance recorder to the personal computer (DR Work Station) available in the substation shall be included in the scope. 14.2. Over fluxing protection Relays shall (a) (b) Operate on the principle of Voltage to frequency ratio and shall be phase to phase connected Have inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer over fluxing withstand capability curve. (c) Provide an independent 'alarm' with the time delay continuously adjustable between 0.1 to 6.0 seconds at values of 'v/f' between 100% to 130% of rated values (d) (e) Tripping time shall be governed by 'v/f' Vs. time characteristics of the relay Have a set of characteristics for Various time multiplier settings. The maximum operating time of the relay shall not exceed 3 seconds and 1.5 seconds at 'v/f' values of 1.4 and 1.5 times, the rated values, respectively. (f) (g) (h) 14.3. Have an accuracy of operating time, better than 10%. Have a resetting ratio of 95 % or better. Be acceptable as a built in feature of protection IEDs provided for transformer protection
Numerical Restricted Earth Fault Protection shall (a) (b) (c) (d) Be single pole type Be of current/voltage operated high impedance type Have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1 Amp./ have a suitable voltage setting range. Be tuned to the system frequency
14.4.
Numerical Back-up Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme with high set feature (a) Shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall be either independent or composite unit(s). (b) (c) The scheme shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes Over current relay shall Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
150
Have low transient, over reach high set instantaneous unit of continuously variable setting range 500-2000 % of rated current
(d)
Have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead Include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs. Earth fault relay shall Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current
Have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag Include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs Include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or have internal feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay
14.5.
Transformer Overload Protection Relay shall (a) (b) (c) Be of single pole type Be of definite time over-current type Have one set of over-current relay element, with continuously adjustable setting range of 50-200% of rated current (d) Have one adjustable time delay relay for alarm having setting range of 1 to 10.0 seconds, continuously. (e) (f) Have a drop-off/pick-up ratio greater than 95%. Be acceptable as built in feature of numerical transformer differential relay
14.6. (a)
Transformer Neutral Current relay for 765/400 KV transformer. Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current
(b)
151
15.
TEE PROTECTION DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS 15.1.1. TEE-1 differential protection relays shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Be triple pole type Have an operating time less than 30 milliseconds at 5 times the rated current. Have three instantaneous high set over current units Have an adjustable bias setting range of 20-50% Have an operating current setting of 15% of 1 Amp or less
15.1.2. TEE-2 Differential relay shall (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Be triple pole type Have operating time less than 25 milliseconds at 5 times setting Be tuned to system frequency Have current setting range of 20 to 80% of 1 Amp Be voltage operated, high impedance type Be stable for all external faults Be provided with suitable non linear resistors across the relay to limit the peak voltage to 1000 volts 16. TRIPPING RELAY High Speed Tripping Relay shall (a) (b) (c) (d) Be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds). Reset within 20 milli seconds Be D.C. operated Have adequate contacts to meet the requirement of scheme, other functions like auto-reclose relay, LBB relay as well as cater to associated equipment like event logger, Disturbance recorder, fault Locator, etc. (e) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
152
17.
DC SUPPLY SUPERIVISION RELAY (a) (b) (c) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the failure of D.C. supply to which, it is connected. It shall have adequate potential free contacts to meet the scheme requirement. The relay shall have a 'time delay on drop-off' of not less than 100 milli seconds and be provided with operation indicator/flag.
18. 18.1
BUS BAR PROTECTION Redundant (1+1) numerical Bus Bar protection scheme for each bus system (Bus1 +Bus2+Transfer Bus wherever applicable) for 400kV and 765kV shall be provided. The scheme shall be engineered so as to ensure that operation of any one out of two schemes connected to main faulty bus shall result in tripping of the same.
18.2
Single busbar protection scheme shall be provided for each main and transfer bus for 220KV and 132 KV voltage levels
18.3
Each Bus Bar protection scheme shall (a) Have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of faults of 25 milli seconds at 5 times setting value. (b) (c) Operate selectively for each bus bar Give hundred percent security up to 40 KA fault level up to 40 KA for fault level for 400KV and 220KV and 31.5 KA for 132 KV (d) Incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondary against any possible open circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection inoperative and initiate an alarm (e) (f) (g) (h) Not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars. Incorporate clear zone indication. Be of phase segregated and triple pole type Provide independent zones of protection (including transfer bus if any). If the bus section is provided then each side of bus section shall have separate set of bus bar protection schemes (i) Include individual high speed electrically reset tripping relays for each feeder. However, in case of distributed Bus bar protection, individual trip relay shall not be required if bay unit is having trip duty contacts for breaker tripping. (j) Be transient free in operation
153
(k) (l)
Include continuous D.C. supplies supervision. Not cause tripping for the differential current below the load current of heaviest loaded feeder. Bidder shall submit application check for the same.
(m)
Shall include necessary C.T. switching relays wherever C.T. switching is involved and have 'CT' selection incomplete alarm
(n) (o)
Include protection 'IN/OUT' switch for each zone Shall include trip relays, CT switching relays(if applicable) , auxiliary CTs (if applicable) as well as additional power supply modules, input modules etc. as may be required to provide a Bus-bar protection scheme for the complete bus arrangement i.e. for all the bay or breakers under this specification as per the Single line diagram for new substations. However for extension of bus bar protection scheme in existing substations, scope shall be limited to the bay or breakers covered under this specification. Suitable panels (if required) to mount these are also included in the scope of the work. 18.4 Built-in Local Breaker Backup protection feature as a part of bus bar protection scheme shall also be acceptable.
18.5
At existing substations, Bus-bar protection scheme with independent zones for each bus, will be available. All necessary co-ordination for 'AC' and 'DC' interconnections between existing schemes (Panels) and the bays proposed under the scope of this contract shall be fully covered by the bidder. Any auxiliary relay, trip relay, flag relay and multi tap auxiliary CTs (in case of biased differential protection) required to facilitate the operation of the bays covered under this contract shall be fully covered in the scope of the bidder..
(a)
The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully enclosed with removable covers and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic material with boxes and barriers moulded integrally. All terminals shall be clearly marked with identification numbers or letters to facilitate connection to external wiring. Terminal block shall have shorting, disconnecting and testing facilities for CT circuits.
19.0 19.1
FAULT RECORDER The fault recorder shall be provided for transmission line and the fault recorder in-built feature of line distance relay is also acceptable provided the requirements of following clauses are met
19.2
Fault recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be used to record the graphic form of instantaneous values of voltage and current in all three phases, open delta voltage & neutral current, open or closed position of relay contacts and breakers during the system disturbances.
19.3
The Fault recorder shall consist of individual acquisition units, one for each feeder and an Evaluation unit which is common for the entire Substation. Whenever, more than one acquisition units are connected to an Volume-II (Section-I), Relay And Protection Panels 154
Evaluation unit, necessary hardware and software shall also be supplied for on line transfer of data from all acquisition units to Evaluation unit. The acquisition unit is connected with evaluation unit being supplied as described in section sub-station automation through bus conforming to IEC 61850. In case of extension sub-station, one set of evaluation software shall be supplied and loaded in existing fault recorder evaluation unit. Automatic uploading of disturbance files from acquisition unit to evaluation unit shall be done through existing station bus only conforming to IEC 61850. Necessary configuration/updation shall be in the scope of the contractor. 19.4 19.5 Fault recorder shall have atleast 8 analogue and 16 digital channels for each feeder. Acquisition units shall acquire the Disturbance data for the pre fault and post fault period and transfer them to Evaluation unit automatically to store in the hard disk. The acquisition units shall be located in the protection panels of the respective feeders. 19.6 The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current transformers with 1A rated secondary and capacitive voltage transformers with 63.5V (phase to neutral voltage) rated secondary. Any device required for processing of input signals in order to make the signals compatible to the Fault recorder equipment shall form an integral part of it. However, such processing of input signals shall in no way distort its waveform. 19.7 The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and protected as may be required for its safe functioning. Also, the Fault recorder shall have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of maintenance and immunity from the effects of the hostile environment of EHV switchyard which are prone to various interference signals typically from large switching transients. 19.8 19.9 The evaluation unit hardware shall be as described in clause no. 4.0 of section substation automation. Necessary software for transferring the data automatically from local evaluation unit to a remote station and receiving the same at the remote station through owners PLCC/VSAT/LEASED LINE shall be provided. 19.10 Evaluation software shall be provided for the analysis and evaluation of the recorded data made available in the PC under DOS/WINDOWS environment. The Software features shall include repositioning of analog and digital signals, selection and amplification of time and amplitude scales of each analog and digital channel, calculation of MAX/MIN frequency, phase difference values, recording of MAX/MIN values etc. of analog channel, group of signal to be drawn on the same axis etc, listing and numbering of all analog and digital channels and current, voltage, frequency and phase difference values at the time of fault/tripping. Also, the software should be capable of carrying out Fourier /Harmonic analysis of the
155
current and voltage wave forms. The Disturbance records shall also be available in COMTRADE format ( IEEE standard- Common Format for Transient data Exchange for Power System ) 19.11 The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the printer to obtain the graphic form of disturbances whenever desired by the operator. 19.12 Fault recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC or 110V DC as available at substation Evaluation unit along with the printer shall normally be connected to 230V, single phase AC supply. In case of failure of AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall be switched automatically to the station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity which shall form a part of Distance recorder system. The inverter of adequate capacity shall be provided to cater the requirement specified in section sub-station automation clause no. 8.0 and DR evaluation unit. 19.13 (a) The acquisition unit shall have the following features Facility shall exist to alarm operator in case of any internal faults in the acquisition units such as power supply fail, processor / memory fail etc and same shall be wired to annunciation system. (b) (c) (d) The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better on upper side. Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/channel or better. Pre-fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system fault occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less than 5.0 seconds (e) The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either through software or externally by providing necessary auxiliary transformers.
(f)
The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record the following digital channels: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Main CB R phase open Main CB Y phase open Main CB B phase open Main-1 carrier received Main-1 protection operated Main/Tie /TBC Auto reclosed operated
156
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (g)
Over Voltage -Stage-1 /2 operated Reactor / Stub/TEE-1/2/UF protection operated Direct Trip received Main-2 carrier received Main- 2/ Back Up protection operated Bus bar protection operated LBB operated of main /tie/TBC circuit breaker Tie/TBC CB R phase open Tie/TBC CB Y phase open Tie/TBC CB B phase open
In case the Fault recorder is in-built part of line distance protection, above digital channels may be interfaced either externally or internally.
(h)
Any digital signal can be programmed to act as trigger for the acquisition unit. Analog channels should have programmable threshold levels for triggers and selection for over or under levels should be possible.
19.14
The printer shall be compatible with the desktop PC and shall use Plain paper. The print out shall contain the Feeder identity, Date and time (in hour, minute and second up to 100th of a second), identity of trigger source and Graphic form of analogue and digital signals of all the channels. Two packets of paper (500 sheets in each packet) suitable forprinter shall be supplied.
19.15
Each Fault recorder shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to 0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run without synchronisation. Further, Fault recorder shall have facility to synchronise its time generator from Time Synchronisation Equipment having output of following types Voltage signal : (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse duration) Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.) IRIG-B RS232C The recorder shall give annunciation in case of absence of synchronising within a specified time.
157
19.16
Substations where Time Synchronisation Equipment is not available, time generator of any one of the Fault recorders can be taken as master and time generators of other Fault recorders and Event loggers in that station shall be synchronised to follow the master.
20.0
DISTURBANCE RECORDING ( for 765 KV FEEDERS ONLY) A separate numerical disturbance recording function shall be provided. The following requirements shall be met:
20.1
The disturbance recorder shall record the analogue values form of the instantaneous values of voltage and current in all three phases, the open delta voltage and the neutral current. The open or closed position of relay contacts and circuit breakers during system disturbances shall also be recorded.
20.2
The disturbance recorder shall comprise distributed individual acquisition units, one for each feeder and an evaluation unit which is common for the entire substation. The acquisition units shall acquire the disturbance data for the pre-fault, fault and post-fault periods and transfer them to the evaluation unit automatically for storage on a mass storage device. The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current transformers with 1 A rated secondaries and capacitive voltage transformers with 63.5 V (phasetoneutral voltage) rated secondaries.
20.3 (a)
The acquisition units shall have the following features: A facility to alert the operator in the case of any internal faults (such as power supply fail, processor/memory fail etc.) in any of the acquisition units and this alarm shall be wired to the station annunciation system.
(b)
The pre-fault time shall not be less than 200 milliseconds and the post fault time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs during a post-fault run time, the recorder shall also be able to record this subsequent disturbance. The scan rate should be selectable in the range from 1000 Hz to 5000 Hz.
(c)
The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either through software or externally by providing necessary auxiliary transformers.
(d)
The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record the following digital channels: 1. Main circuit-breaker R-phase open 2. Main circuit-breaker Y-phase open 3. Main circuit-breaker B-phase open 4. Main 1 carrier received
158
5. Main 1 protection operated 6. Main/Tie auto-reclose operated 7. Overvoltage stage 1/2 operated 8. Reactor/Stub-1/2 protection operated 9. Direct trip received 10. Main 2 carrier received 11. Main 2 protection operated 12. Busbar protection operated 13. Breaker failure protection of main/tie circuit-breaker operated 14. Tie circuit-breaker R-phase open 15. Tie circuit-breaker Y-phase open 16. Tie circuit-breaker B-phase open 20.4 The necessary hardware and software shall also be supplied for the on-line transfer of data from all acquisition units to the evaluation unit. The disturbance recording system shall be capable of handling the full complement of feeders in the substation. 20.5 The disturbance recording equipment shall be screened, shielded, earthed and protected as may be required for its safe and proper functioning. Also, the disturbance recorder shall have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of maintenance and immunity from the effects of the hostile environment of a 765 kV EHV switchyard which is prone to numerous interference signals such as large switching transients. 20.6 The evaluation unit shall comprise all the necessary hardware and software for the proper evaluation of disturbances. The hardware would typically consist of a desktop personal computer (including a large high resolution colour monitor, mouse and keyboard) and a high-speed colour printer. The desktop PC shall have Pentium P4 processor or better and shall have a clock speed of 1600 MHz or better. The mass storage capacity of PC shall not be less than 32 GB and the RAM capacity shall not be less than 1 GB. The evaluation software required for the analysis and evaluation of the recorded data shall run on the PC under Microsoft Windows environment. The software features shall provide: clear and unambiguous display of all channels; the ability to reposition the analog and digital traces; recording of maximum/minimum values etc. of the analog channels;
159
calculation of maximum/minimum frequency and phase difference values; grouping of signals for drawing on the same axis; listing and identification of all analog and digital channels as well as and current, voltage, frequency and phase difference values at the time of fault/tripping;
the capability of carrying out Fourier/Harmonic analysis of the current and voltage waveforms; and,
20.7
the availability of the disturbance records in COMTRADE format.
The evaluation unit shall be permanently connected to the printer so as to obtain the graphic display of disturbances whenever desired by the operator. The printer shall be compatible with the desktop PC and shall use plain paper. The print out shall contain the feeder identity, date and time (in hour, minute and second up to 100th of a second), identity of the trigger source and graphic representation of the analog and digital signals of all the channels.
20.8
The disturbance recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate from the station DC. The evaluation unit along and the printer shall normally be connected to the 230 V, single phase AC supply. In the case of a failure of the AC supply, the evaluation unit and printer shall be automatically switched to the station DC through an inverter of adequate capacity and which shall form part of disturbance recording system.
20.9
The disturbance recorder shall be capable of being triggered by the following user specified quantities: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) external start, both software and hardware cross triggering of groups of channels, either software or hardware or both binary channel (NO and NC contacts) overvoltage and undervoltage overcurrent negative sequence voltage zero sequence voltage rate of change, voltage or current overfrequency or underfrequency logical or Boolean expressions, programmable power swing rate of change of active or reactive power
160
20.10
The disturbance recorder shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to less than 0.5 seconds per day, if allowed to run without synchronisation. Further, the disturbance recorder shall have the facility to synchronise its time generator from the station Time Synchronisation Equipment using IRIG-B. The recorder shall give an alarm in the case of the absence of the synchronising pulse for a pre-determined time.
21.0
DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR a) b) c) d) e) be electronic or microprocessor based type. be 'On-line' type be suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles have built-in display unit the display shall be directly in percent of line length or kilometres without requiring any further calculations f) have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for operating timings measurement of distance relays . g) The above accuracy should not be impaired under the following conditions: presence of remote end infeed predominant D.C. component in fault current high fault arc resistance severe CVT transients h) shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit if fault locator is to be used on double circuit transmission line. i) built in feature of line distance relay is acceptable provided the requirements of above clauses are met.
22.0 22.1
TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUPMENT The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronise equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a substation.
22.2
Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables and processing equipment etc.
161
22.3
It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance recorders and SCADA at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet realised through optic fibre bus.
22.4
Equipment shall operate up to the ambient temperature of 50 degree centigrade and 80% humidity.
22.5
The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy. Equipment shall give real time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like voltage, & temperature variations, propagation & processing delays etc).
22.6 22.7 22.8
Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage & operation. The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of synchronisation signal. The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement.
22.9
The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of output ports shall be selected by the customer, during detailed engineering, from the following : Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli Seconds.) IRIG-B RS232C SNTP Port
22.10 22.11
The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second periodicity. Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC or 110V DC as available at Substation.
22.12
Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour mode) & have a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of control panels having display size of approx. 100 mm height.
23.0 23.1
RELAY TEST KIT One relay test kit shall comprise of the following equipment as detailed here under 3 sets 2 nos. 1 no. Relay tools kits. Test plugs Special type test plugs for using with modular type cases (if applicable)
162
24.0 24.1
TYPE TESTS The reports for following type tests shall be submitted by the bidder for the Protective relays, Fault locator and Disturbance recorder a) b) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5 High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix -E) 61000-4 Class IV (Not applicable for electromechanical relays) c) d) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level IV (Not applicable for electromechanical relays) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255 Steady state Characteristics and operating time Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance protection relays and current differential protection relays e) f) g) For Disturbance recorder, only performance tests are intended under this item. Conformance test as per IEC 61850-10.
Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6 Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6 Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 (not applicable for Distance to fault locator and Disturbance recorder) In case there is a change either in version or in model (Except firmware) of the relay, the contractor has to submit the type test reports for the offered revision/model.
24.2
Steady state & Dynamic characteristics test reports on the distance protection relays, as type test, shall be based on test programme specified in Appendix A on simulator/network analyser/PTL. Alternatively, the files generated using Electromagnetic transient Programme (EMTP) can also be used for carrying out the above tests. Single source dynamic tests on transformer differential relay shall be/ should have been conducted based on general guidelines specified in CIGRE committee 34 report on Evaluation of characteristics and performance of Power system protection relays and protective systems.
25.0
CONFIGURATION OF RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each type of panel. However contractor can optimise the requirement of panels by suitably clubbing the feeder protection and CB relay panels. But the Main-I and Main-I protection cannot be provided in single panel.
163
The Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following protection features/schemes S.NO . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. DESCRIPTION Main-1 Numerical Distance protection scheme Main-2 Numerical Distance protection scheme Over Voltage Protection Scheme Fault Recorder Disturbance Recorder* Distance to fault Locator 3 phase Trip Relays Flag relays , carrier receive relays, aux. Relays timers etc as per scheme requirements Under Voltage protection relay for isolator/earth switch Cutout and wiring with TTB for Owner supplied energy meter Directional back up Overcurrent and E/F protection scheme 765/400kV 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set Lot 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 Set NIL 220 kV 1 Set 1 Set NIL 1 Set NIL 1 Set Lot 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 Set NIL 132 kV 1 Set NIL NIL NIL NIL 1 Set Lot 1 Nos. 2 Nos. 1 Set 1 Set
* Applicable for 765kV Lines Only In a substation where 400kV and 220 KV lines are under the scope of the contract , bidder is required to give identical Main 1 and main 2 distance protection scheme for both voltage levels TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL The protection panel for Auto transformer/Transformer shall consists of the following features/schemes.
S.No. 1. 2.
Description Transformer Differential Protection scheme Restricted Earth fault protection scheme
HV Side 1 Nos. 1 Nos.
MV/LV Side NIL 1 Nos.@
@ Not applicable for autotransformer 3. 4. Directional back up O/C and E/F relay with non directional high set feature Over Fluxing Protection scheme 1 Set 1 Nos. 1 set 1 Nos.$
5. 6.
$ applicable only for 400/220kV Xformer & 765/400 Transformer Overload protection scheme 1 Nos. Three phase trip relays 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
164
7. 8. 9.
CVT
selection
relays as
per
scheme requirement
Lot 1 Set 1 Set
Lot 1 set 1 set
Cutout and wiring with TTB for Owner supplied energy meter Transformer Neutral Current relay for 765/400 KV transformer.
REACTOR PROTECTION PANEL The protection panel for Reactor shall consist of the following protection features/schemes: No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Reactor Differential Protection scheme Restricted Earth fault Protection scheme Reactor back up impedance protection scheme Three phase trip relays(Only for Bus Reactor) CVT selection relay as per scheme requirement Teed protection relay (only for 765kV bus reactor ) Qty. 1 no. 1 no. 1 set 2 nos. Lot 1 no.
BREAKER RELAY PANEL The breaker relay panel shall comprise of the following S.NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Description Breaker failure Protection Scheme DC supply Supervision relay Trip Circuit supervision relays# Autoreclose scheme with check synchronizing and dead line charging relay Flag relays, aux. relays, timers, trip relays as per scheme requirements With A/R 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. Lot With out A/R 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. NIL Lot
# Trip supervision relays shall be 2 numbers for each 132KV Circuit breaker. Note: Equipment/relays to be provided for CB relay panel may be accommodated in the panels to be provided for Transmission Line/Transformer/Reactor as applicable. Capacitor Bank Protection: As specified in Capacitor Bank (Section-L), Clause No.4 LT Transformer Protection: As specified in LT Transformer (Section-F), Clause No.10. PLCC and SDH both systems are available for protection and standby and these should be taken into account by the bidder for control and protection.
165
26.0
ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS All special testing equipment required for the installation and maintenance of the apparatus instruments devices shall be furnished in relevant schedule
27.0
TROPICALISATION Control room will be normally air-cooled/air- conditioned. All equipments shall however be suitable for installation in a tropical monsoon area having hot, humid climate and dry and dusty seasons with ambient conditions specified in the specification. All control wiring, equipment and accessories shall be protected against fungus growth, condensation, vermin and other harmful effects due to tropical environment.
28.0
MONITORING, CONTROL & PROTECTION FOR AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER: Suitable monitoring, control (operation of associated circuit breaker & isolator) and protection for 630/800/1000KVA transformer, connected to tertiary winding of auto transformer for the purpose of auxiliary supply shall be provided by the contractor. Over current and open delta protection is required to be provided for the auxiliary transformer. These protection and control shall be also be acceptable as built in feature either in the bay controller to be provided for the auxiliary system or in the control & protection IEDs to be provided for autotransformer.
166
APPENDIX-A Test program for distance relays General Comments: 1. The fault inception angles are referred to R- N voltage for all types of faults 2. The fault inception angle is zero degree unless otherwise specified 3. Where not stated specifically, the fault resistance (Rf) shall be zero or minimum as possible in simulator 4. Single pole circuit breakers are to be used 5. The power flow in double source test is 500 MW
Details of fault cases to be done: S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Description Dynamic Accuracy for zone 1 Operating time for zone 1 at SIR=4 Operating time for zone II and zone III Switch on to fault feature Operation during current reversal Directional sensitivity Limit for fault resistance Operation at evolving faults Fault locator function, in case the same is offered as built in feature Operation at simultaneous fault
167
SECTION- (J) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM 1.0 1.1. GENERAL The substation automation system shall be offered from a manufacturer who must have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned substation automation system which must be in satisfactory operation on 220kV system or higher for at least 2 (Two) years as on the date of bid opening. 1.2. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor all the sub-station equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from local control centre. The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts: Bay control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and monitoring. Station Human Machine Interface (HMI) Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication infrastructure with hot standby. Gateway for remote control via industrial grade hardware (to RCC) through IEC60870-5-101 protocol. Gateway for remote supervisory control (to RSCC), the gateway should be able to communicate with RSCC on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. The specific protocol to be implemented is enclosed as Appendix-I. For Northern Region I & II, Eastern Region I & II and North Eastern Region interoperability profile shall be as per AREVA inter operability profile and for other regions it shall be as per GEs interoperability profile. It shall be the bidders responsibility to integrate his offered system with existing RSCC system for exchange of desired data. The requirement of IO point shall be worked out by the bidder as per criterion enclosed as Appendix-II for data exchange with RLDCs. Remote HMI. Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse etc. 1.3. It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine interface (HMI) and control software package, which shall contain an extensive range of supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 168
1.4.
It shall include communication gateway, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay control and inter IED communication infrastructure.
1.5.
The communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with remote control centres. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall provide the direct connection to the switchgear without the need of interposing components and perform control, protection, and monitoring functions.
2. 2.1
System design General system design The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and monitoring of the complete substation including future extensions. The systems shall be of the state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical environment present in Extra high voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long-term compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff. The o f f e r e d SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Remote Control centres via gateways. The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background
knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the system. The operator interface shall be intuitive such that operating personnel shall be able to operate the system easily after having received some basic training. The system shall incorporate the control, and monitoring testing and protection functions
specified,
self-monitoring,
signalling
facilities, measuring as well as
memory functions, event recording and evaluationof disturbance records. Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shutdown of the whole substation automation system. Self-monitoring of components, the equipment and minimize maintenance. Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer), bay mimic along with relay and protection panels and PLCC panels housed in air-conditioned modules and communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of
Switchyard Panel Room suitably located in switchyard and Station HMI in Control Room building for overall optimisation in respect of cabling and control room building.. 2.2 System architecture 169
Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence. Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process. The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level. At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control, monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for commands. The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear without any need for additional interposition or transducers. Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station. The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-optic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free communication. The fibre optic cables shall be run in G.I conduit pipes. Data exchange is to be realised using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet communication infrastructure The communication shall be made in fault tolerant ring in redundant mode, excluding the links between individual bay IEDs to switch wherein the redundant connections are not envisaged, such that failure of one setof fiber shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS. However failure of fiber shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fiber optic cable shall have four (4)spare fibers At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level equipment at all times. Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. RCC, station HMI, bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level. The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realized at bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire substation, gateway for the communication with remote control centres. The GPS time synchronizing signal (as specified in the section relay & protection) for the synchronization of the entire system shall be provided. The SAS shall contain the functional parts as described in para 1.2 above. 2.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 170
The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different places: Remote control centres Station HMI. Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time. The operation shall depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interlocking, synchro check, etc. (see description in Bay level control functions). 2.3.1 Select-before-execute For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of the object and command for operation under all mode of operation except emergency operation. Final execution shall take place only when selection and command are actuated. 2.3.2 Command supervision Bay/station interlocking and blocking Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect operation of switchgear causing damage and accidents in case of false operation does not take place. In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlocking are to be provided for: a) Bus Earth switch Interlocking b) Transfer Bus interlocking (if applicable)
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the station with future bays. For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the scenario while an IED of another bay is switched off or fails. A software interlock override function shall be provided which can be enabled to bypass the interlocking function. 2.3.3 Run Time Command cancellation Command execution timer (configurable)must be available for each control level connection. If the control action is not completed within a specified time, the command should get cancelled.
2.3.4 Self-supervision Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be included. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 171
2.3.5 User configuration The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals and binary inputs and relay outputs for all built-in functions and signals shall be possible both locally and remotely. It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic functions, using built-In functions, complex voltage and currents, be possible). The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels: a. Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer) Level Functions b. 3.1. System Level Functions Bay level functions In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level: 3.1.1. Bay control functions including data collection functionality in bay control/protection unit. Bay protection functions Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection function. Bay control functions additional logics (AND-gates, OR gates and timers). (Multi- activation of these additional functions should
3.1.1.1. Overview Functions Control mode selection Select-before-execute principle Command supervision: o o Interlocking and blocking Double command
Synchrocheck, voltage selection Run Time Command cancellation Transformer tap changer control (Raise and lower of tap ) (for power transformer 172
bays) Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System
Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor runtime supervision Operating pressure supervision through digital contacts only Breaker position indication per phase Alarm annunciation Measurement display Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode) Interface to the station HMI. Data storage for at least 200 events Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fibre- optic
communication and process bus 3.1.1.2. Control mode selection Bay level Operation: As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the operation is normally performed via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control unit allows the safe operation of all switching devices via the bay control IED. EMERGENCY Operation It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF push buttons even during the outage of bay IED. REMOTE mode Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre) and the installation can be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels shall not be possible in this operating mode. 3.1.1.3. Synchronism and energizing check The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and distributed to the bay control and/or protection devices. These features are: Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference. Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead linedead bus with no synchro-check function. Synchronizing between live line and live bus with synchro-check Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 173
function Voltage selection The voltages relevant for the Synchro check functions are dependent on the station topology, i.e. On the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch and shall be selected automatically by the bay control and protection IEDs. 3.1.1.4. Transformer tap changer control Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated through Bay controller IED. 3.1.2. Bay protection functions0 3.1.2.1. General The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The protection shall be provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays) and other protection devices as per section Relay & Protection. IEDs, shall be connected to the communication infrastructure for data sharing and meet the real-time communication requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various IEDs shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange requirements. Event and disturbance recording function Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 200 time-tagged events. The disturbance recorder function shall be as per detailed in section C&R 3.1.2.2. Bay Monitoring Function: Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without intermediate transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive power (VAR), frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current (I) shall be calculated in the Bay control/protection unit. 3.2. System level functions 3.2.1. Status supervision The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch, transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected change of position shall be immediately displayed in the single-line diagram on the station HMI screen, recorded in Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 174
the event list and a hard copy printout shall be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes. The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally closed
(NC) and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent or if the time required for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit. The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and control of auxiliaries shall be done through separate one or more IED and all alarm and analogue values shall be monitored and recoded through this IED. 3.2.2. Measurements The analogue values acquired/calculated in bay control/protection unit shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in the control centre. The abnormal values must be discarded. The analogue values shall be updated every 2 seconds. Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications. 3.2.3. Event and alarm handling Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI. Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or a freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event printer. The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms. 3.2.4. Station HMI
3.2.4.1. Substation HMI Operation: On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or interlocking conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and an appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the position indication will show the possible direction, and the appropriate control execution button shall be pressed in order to close or open the corresponding object. Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in this operating mode. 3.2.4.2. Presentation and dialogues General The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall provide basic Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 175
functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks. The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on the screen. Aside from these lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or events in an event log.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms shall be accessible from any screen selected by the operator. The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI: Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values Control dialogues with interlocking or blocking information details. This control dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is permitted or blocked. Measurement dialogues Alarm list, station / bay-oriented Event list, station / bay-oriented System status
3.2.4.3. HMI design principles Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels, dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out. The object status shall be indicated using different status colors for: Selected object under command Selected on the screen Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled Alarm or faulty state Warning or blocked Update blocked or manually updated Control blocked Normal state colors,
3.2.4.4. Process status displays and command procedures Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 176
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages, frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers, isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed in the station single-line diagram. In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a "select-beforeexecute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device on the screen, and all other switchgear shall be blocked. As communication between control centre and device to be controlled is established, the operator shall be prompted to confirm the control action and only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the execution of the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the switch has reached its new position. The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch is not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The interlocking statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme implemented at bay and station level. After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning. 3.2.4.5. System supervision & display The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into serious situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system supervision display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and remote communication links, and printers at the station level, etc. 3.2.4.6. Event list The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and monitoring of the substation. The event and associated time (with1 ms resolution) of its occurrence has to be displayed for each event. The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at any time for the whole substation or sections of it. A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer. The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the computer for at least one month. The information shall be obtainable also from a printed event log. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 177
The chronological event list shall contain: Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices Indication of protective relay operations Fault signals from the switchgear Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower limits. Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on either side of the value or which shall be user defined for each measurands. Loss of communication.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per: Date and time Bay Device Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc. Alarm class
3.2.4.7. Alarm list Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. The date and time of occurrence shall be indicated. The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains: The date and time of the alarm The name of the alarming object A descriptive text The acknowledgement state.
Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the alarm list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm. After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a steady (i.e. not flashing) state and the Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 178
audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear only if the alarm condition has physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm with a reset command. The state of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list (Unacknowledged and persistent, Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged and persistent). Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events. 3.2.4.8. Object picture When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line diagram, the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object picture, all attributes like Type of blocking Authority Local / remote control RSCC / SAS control Errors
shall be displayed. 3.2.4.9. Control dialogues The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located on the single-line diagram. Data entry is performed with the keyboard. Dedicated control dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be available:
Breaker and disconnector Transformer tap-changer
3.2.5. User-authority levels It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object (bays, apparatus...) within a certain user authorization group. Each user shall then be given access rights to each group of objects, e.g.: Display only Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear) Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking) System administrator 179
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorization levels shall be available: No engineering allowed Engineering/configuration allowed Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights. 3.2.6. Reports The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated values. The data displayed shall comprise: Trend reports: Day (mean, peak) Month (mean, peak) Semi-annual (mean, peak) Year (mean, peak)
Historical reports of selected analogue Values: Day (at 15 minutes interval) Week Month Year
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific data are kept in the memory. Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on demand: i. Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the appropriate parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the curve is 24 hours. ii. iii. Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values. Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of occurrence and duration of maximum and minimum values for each analogue parameter for each circuit in 24 hr period. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 180
iv.
Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like number of operation with date and time indications along with the current vale it interrupts (in both condition i.e. manual opening and fault tripping)
v. vi.
Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR, Current, Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions, temperature and status of pumps and fans for transformers.
vii.
Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency and average frequency.
viii.
Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful bidder. available in the SAS database.
The
bidder has to develop these reports. The reports are limited to the formats for which data is
3.2.7. Trend display (historical data) It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input and output data,
binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as column or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen. Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided. It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold values for alarming purposes. 3.2.8. Automatic disturbance file transfer All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disc. 3.2.9. Disturbance analysis The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the required information for proper fault analysis. 3.2.10. IED parameter setting It shall be possible to access all protection and control IEDs for reading the parameters (settings) from the station HMI or from a dedicated monitoring computer. The setting of parameters or the activation of parameter sets shall only be allowed after entering a password. 3.2.11. Automatic sequences Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 181
The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described, (e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate pre-defined automatic sequences by the operator and also define new automatic sequences. 3.3. Gateway 3.3.1 Communication Interface The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent remote master stations, The Substation Automation System shall have communication ports as follows: (a) Two ports for Remote Control Centre (b) Two ports for Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC) The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of defined points within the substation automation system independently for each control centre. The substation automation system shall simultaneously respond to independent scans and commands from employer's control centres (RCC & RSCC). The substation automation system shall support the use of a different communication data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or communication protocol to each remote control centre. Also, each control centres data scan and control commands may be different for different data points within the substation automation system's database. 3.3.2 Remote Control Centre Communication Interface Employer will supply communication channels between the Substation Automation System and the remote control centre. The communication channels provided by Employer will consist either of power line carrier, microwave, optical fiber, VSAT or leased line , the details of which shall be provided during detailed Engineering . 3.3.3 Interface equipment: The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between
Substation Automation system and Remote control centre and between Substation Automation system and Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC). In case of PLCC communication any modem supplied shall not require manual equalization and shall include self-test features such as manual mark/space keying, analogue loop-back, and digital loop-back. The modems shall provide for convenient adjustment of output level and receive sensitivity. The modem should be stand alone complete in all respects including power supply to interface the SAS with communication channel. The configuration of tones and speed shall be programmable and maintained in Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 182
non-volatile memory in the modem. All necessary hardware and software shall also be in the scope of bidder except the communication link along with communication equipment between substation control room and Remote Control Centre. 3.3.4 Communication Protocol The communication protocol for gateway to control centre must be open protocol and shall support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 61850 for all levels of communication for sub-station automation such as Bay to station HMI, gateway to remote station etc.. 4.0 System hardware: 4.1 Redundant Station HMI, Remote HMI and Disturbance Recorder Work station: The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode. The servers used in these work stations shall be of industrial grade. It shall be capable to perform all functions for entire substation including future requirements as indicated in the SLD. It shall use industrial grade components. Processor and RAM shall be selected in such a manner that during normal operation not more than 30% capacity of processing and memory are used. features. The capacity of hard disk shall be selected such that the following requirement should occupy less than 50% of disk space: 1. Storage of all analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval)and digital data including alarm , event and trend data for thirty(30) days, 2. 3. Storage of all necessary software, 20GB space for OWNER'S use. Supplier shall demonstrate these
Supplier shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard disk is sufficient to meet the above requirement. 4.1.1 HMI (Human Machine Interface) The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and complete details of the switchgear with a color display. All event and alarm annunciation shall be selectable in the form of lists. Operation shall be by a user friendly function keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user interface shall be based on WINDOWS concepts with graphics & facility for panning, scrolling, zooming, decluttering etc. 4.1.2 Visual Display Units/TFT's (Thin Film Technology) The display units shall have high resolution and reflection protected picture screen. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 183
High stability of the picture geometry shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 21" diagonally in size and capable of colour graphic displays. The display shall accommodate resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels. 4.1.3 Printer It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per line. The printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB suitable for location in the control room. Printer shall accept and print all ASCII characters via master control computer unit interface. The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shall be indicated in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode selector switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc. All reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix printer shall be exclusively used for hourly log printing. All printers shall be continuously online. 4.1.4 Mass Storage Unit The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational measured values and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit in form of DVD RW The unit should support at least Read (48X), Write(24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with Multi-Session capability. It should support ISO9660, Rockridge and Joliet File systems. It should support formatting and use under the operating system provided for Station HMI. The monthly back up of data shall be taken on disc. The facility of back up of data shall be inherent in the software. 4.1.5 Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure: The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet communication infrastructure for SAS One switch shall be provided to connect all IEDs in one diameter of each 765 and 400kV yard and for two bays of 220kV yard to communication infrastructure. Each switch shall have at least two spare ports for connecting bay level IEDs and one spare port for connecting station bus. 4.2 Bay level unit The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on incorporate select-before-
microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall operate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI. They shall 184
perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay interlocking, data acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide inputs for status indication and outputs for commands. They shall be directly connected to the switchgear. The bay unit shall acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment status, fault indications, measured values, alarms etc.) and transmit these to the other devices in sub-station automation system. In addition, this shall receive the operation commands from station HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall have the capability to store all the data for at least 24 hours. One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each 765, 400 and 220 kV bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer). The Bay level unit shall be equipped with analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling the control, status monitoring and analogue measurement functions. All bay level interlocks are to be incorporated in the Bay level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit/ local bay mimic panel, with all bay interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case of contingencies when the Station HMI is out of service. The bay control unit to be provided for the bays shall be preferably installed in the CB relay panel/feeder protection panel for respective bay. Further in case of one and half breaker schemes, the BCU for Tie CB shall be provided in Tie CB relay panel. The tie CB relay panel shall also house the Ethernet switch(es) to be provided for the diameter. The bay control unit for future bay shall be installed in a separate panel. The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of any single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown. 4.2.1 Input/ Output (I/O) modules The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling to the substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear information (i.e. data coming directly from the switchgear or from switchgear interlocking devices) and transmit commands for operation of the switchgear. The measured values of voltage and current shall be from the secondaries of instrument transformers. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as change of state 4.3 Switchyard Panel Room: Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 185
The switchyard panel room shall be constructed to house Bay level units, bay mimic, relay and protection panels, PLCC panels etc. one each for a diameter in 765/400kVsub-station and for two bays in 220kV Level. In case of incomplete diameter the switchyard panel room shall have necessary space for accommodating the future bay IEDs. The layout of equipment/panel shall be subject to Owners approval. The switchyard panel room shall be provided with necessary illuminations, fire alarm system with at least two detectors with necessary power supply if required and it shall be wired to SAS. The detailed constructional requirement of switchyard panel room is detailed in section civil of technical specification and air conditioning requirement of switchyard panel room shall be as detailed in section Air conditioning system of technical specification. The air conditioner provided in switchyard panel room shall be monitored from substation automation system. 4.4 Extendibility in future Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future for additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and configurations, alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in such a manner that its extension shall be easily performed by the employer. During such event, normal operation of the existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown. The contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with SAS by the user. These software tools shall be able to configure IED, add additional analogue variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/equipment which shall be added in future. 5.0 Software structure The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and strictly divided in various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable points in software to protect the system. An extension of the station shall be possible with lowest possible efforts. Maintenance, modification or an extension of components of any feeder may not force a shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the system adaptation. 5.1.1 Station level software 5.1.1.1 Human-machine interface (HMI) The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS
functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version and operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering and system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt according to Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 186
specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with standard functions and applications. 5.1.2 Bay level software 5.1.1.1 System software The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure system performance and contain basic functions, which shall not be accessible by the application and maintenance engineer for modifications. The system shall support the generation of typical control macros and a process database for user specific data storage. In case of restoration of links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be capable of automatically synchronizing with the remaining system without any manual interface. This shall be demonstrated by contractor during integrated system test. 5.1.1.2 Application software In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the
application software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested. They form part of a library. The application software within the control/protection devices shall be programmed in a functional block language. 5.1.1.3 Network Management System: The contractor shall provide network management system software for following management functions: a. b. c. Configuration Management Fault Management Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and other IEDs in the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR workstation and shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor all the devices in the SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored devices. The NMS shall (a) Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all managed links and devices and present this information via displays, periodic reports and on demand reports. (b) Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 187
(c) Issue alarms when error conditions occurs (d) Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links 5.1.1.4 The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into the system in case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc. 6.0 TESTS The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to following tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard and specified ambient conditions: 6.1 Type Tests: 6.1.1 Control IEDs and Communication Equipment: a. Power Input: i. Auxiliary voltage ii. Current Circuits iii. Voltage Circuits iv. Indications b. Accuracy Tests: i. Operational Measured values ii. Currents iii. Voltages iv. Time resolution c. Insulation Tests: i. Dielectric Tests ii. Impulse Voltage withstand Test d. Influencing Quantities i. Limits of operation ii. Permissible ripples iii. Interruption of input voltage e. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test: i. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 188
ii. Electrostatic Discharge Test iii. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test iv. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test v. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field vi. Magnetic Field Test vii. Emission (Radio interference level) Test. viii. f. Conducted Interference Test
Function Tests: i. Indication ii. Commands iii. Measured value Acquisition iv. Display Indications
g. Environmental tests: i. Cold Temperature ii. Dry Heat iii. Wet heat iv. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle) v. Vibration vi. Bump vii. Shock 6.2 Factory Acceptance Tests: The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test(FAT) bay level IEDs applicable type test certificates shall be submitted. The manufacturing and configuration phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory acceptance test (FAT). The purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes checking to the degree required by the user. The general philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated in a test lab. During FAT the entire Sub-station Automation Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 189 and
commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. For the individual
System including complete control and protection system to be supplied under present scope shall be tested for complete functionality and configuration in factory itself. The extensive testing shall be carried out during FAT. The purpose of Factory Acceptance Testing is to ensure trouble free installation at site. No major configuration setting of system is envisaged at site. If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are already installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system tests. In such a case, the complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site acceptance test (SAT). 6.2.1 Hardware Integration Tests: The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be used for Factory tests when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The operation of each item shall be verified as an integral part of system. Applicable hardware diagnostics shall be used to verify that each hardware configuration component of is completely software operational integration and and assembled into a capable supporting factory testing of the
system. The equipment expansion capability shall also be verified during the hardware integration tests. The vendor specifically demonstrates how to add a device in future in SAS during FAT. The device shall be from a different manufacturer than the SAS supplier. 6.2.2 Integrated System Tests: Integrated system tests shall verify the stability of the hardware and the software. During the tests all functions shall run concurrently and all equipment shall operate a continuous 100 Hours period. The integrated system test shall ensure the SAS is free of improper interactions between software and hardware while the system is operating as a whole. 6.3 Site Acceptance Tests: The site acceptance tests (SAT) shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware and software. The bidder shall submit the detailed SAT procedure and SAT procedure shall be read in conjunction with the specification. 7.0 SYSTEM OPERATION 7.1 Substation Operation 7.1.1 NORMAL OPERATION Operation of the system by the operator from the remote RCC or at the substation shall take place via industry standard HMI(Human Machine interface) subsystem consisting of graphic colour VDU, a standard keyboard and a cursor positioning device (mouse). Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 190
The coloured screen shall be divided into 3 fields : i) Message field with display of present time and date
ii) Display field for single line diagrams iii) Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication
For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node. shall be provided. All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of function keys and cursor keys. The function keys shall have different meanings depending on the operation. The operator shall see the relevant meanings as function tests displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting). For control actions, the switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shall be selectable on the display by means of the cursor keys. The switching element selected shall then appear on the background that shall be flashing in a different color. The operator prompting shall distinguish between:- Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and - prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid display of alarm/message of the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm annunciation lists in which the fault is described more fully. Each operational sequence shall be divided into single operation steps which are initiated by means of the function keys/WINDOW command by mouse. Operator prompting shall be designed in such a manner that only the permissible keys are available in the command field related to the specific operation step. Only those switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are possible. If the operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be supported by additional comments in the message field. The operation status shall be reset to the corresponding preceding step in the operation sequence by pressing one of the function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect operations shall be indicated by comments in the message field and must not be executed. The offer shall include a comprehensive description of the system. The above operation shall also be possible via WINDOWS based system by mouse. 8.0 POWER SUPPLY Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from substation 220V DC system. Inverter of suitable capacity shall be provided for station HMI disturbance recorder evaluation unit and its peripheral devices e.g. printer etc. In the event of Power failure, necessary safeguard software shall be built for proper shutdown. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 191
9.0 DOCUMENTATION The following documents shall be submitted for employers approval during detailed engineering: (a) System Architecture Drawing (b) Hardware Specification (c) Functional Design Document (d) Clear procedure describing how to add an IED/bay/diameter in future covering all major suppliers. The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the project shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All CAD drawings to be provide in dxf format. List of Drawings Substation automation system architecture Block Diagram Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and Guaranteed availability and reliability Calculation for power supply dimensioning I/O Signal lists Schematic diagrams List of Apparatus List of Labels Logic Diagram (hardware & software ) Switchyard Panel Room layout drawing Control Room Lay-out Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) Product Manuals Assembly Drawing Operators Manual Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various elements 192
Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System
Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering
10.0 TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES 10.1 Training Contractor personnel who are experienced instructors and who speak understandable shall conduct training. The all contractor necessary training platform required for successful training and understanding Each trainee in English The
shall arrange on its own cost all hardware India. shall material. receive
Contractor shall provide
training
individual copies of all technical manuals and all other documents used for training. These materials shall be sent to Employer at least two months before the scheduled commencement of the particular training course. Class materials, including the documents sent before the training courses as well as class handouts, shall become the property of Employer. Employer reserves the right to copy such materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training shall utilize equipment identical to that being supplied to Employer. For all training courses, the travel (e.g., airfare) and per-diem expenses will be borne by the bidder. The schedule, location, and detailed contents of each course will be finalized during Employer and Contractor discussions. 10.2 Computer System Hardware Course A computer system hardware course shall be offered, but at the system level only. The training course shall be designed to give Employer hardware personnel sufficient knowledge of the overall design and operation of the system so that they can correct obvious problems, configure the hardware, perform preventive maintenance, run diagnostic programs, and communicate with contract maintenance personnel. The following subjects shall be covered: (a) System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware. (b) Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance techniques and diagnostic procedures for each element of the computer system, e.g., processors, auxiliary memories, LANs, routers and printers. Configuration of all the hardware equipments. (c) System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add equipment such as loggers, monitors, and communication channels. (d) System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the redundant hardware configuration, failover hardware, configuration control panels, and failover switches. Maintenance of protective devices and power supplies. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 193
(e)
Subsystem
Maintenance: Theory
of
design
and
operation, maintenance
techniques and practices, diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable) expansion techniques and procedures. Classes shall include hands-on training for the specific subsystems that are part of Employer's equipment or part of similarly designed and configured subsystems. All interfaces to the computing equipment shall be taught in detail. (f) Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective maintenance of all equipment, including use of special tools and instruments. This training shall be provided on Employer equipment, or on similarly configured systems. 10.3 Computer System Software Course The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the following subjects: (a) System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages and all standalone service and utility packages provided with the system. An introduction to software architecture, Effect of tuning parameters (OS software, Network software, database software etc.) on the performance of the system. (b) Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system, such as program loading and integrating procedures; scheduling, management, service, and utility functions; and system expansion techniques and procedures (c) System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation, and practice (d) Diagnostics: Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the interpretation of diagnostic outputs, (e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of system software documentation. (f) Hands-on Training: One assistance as necessary. 10.4 Application Software Course The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses covering all applications including the database and display building course. The training shall include: (a) Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows. Programming standards and program interface conventions. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 194 week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for
(b)
Application Functions: Functional
capabilities,
design,
and
major algorithms.
Associated maintenance and expansion techniques. (c) Software Development: Techniques and conventions to be used for the preparation and integration of new software functions. (d) Software Generation: Generation of application software from source associated software configuration control procedures. (e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of functional and detailed design documentation and of programmer and user manuals. (f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for assistance as necessary. 10.5 Requirement of training: The contractor shall provide training for Owner personnel comprehensively covering following courses. S. No. 1 2 3 11.0 Maintenance 11.1 Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period. During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the necessary resources such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices etc. for replacement or repair of all defective parts and shall have prime responsibility for keeping the system operational. During guarantee period as specified in tender document, contractor shall arrange bi-monthly visit of their representative to site to review the performance of system and in case any defect/shortcoming etc. is observed during the period, the same shall be set right by the contractor within 15 days. 12.0 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor, or device shall not render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to satisfy the very high demands for reliability and availability concerning: Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 195 Name of Course Computer System Hardware Computer System Software Application Software code and
Mechanical and electrical design Security against electrical interference (EMI) High quality components and boards Modular, well-tested hardware Thoroughly developed and tested modular software Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming Detailed graphical documentation and application software Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions Security Experience of security requirements Process know-how Select before execute at operation Process status representation as double indications
Distributed solution Independent units connected to the local area network Back-up functions Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient
conditions Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise Outage terms 1) Outage
The state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is unavailable for Normal Operation as defined in the clause 7.1 due to an event directly related to the SAS or unit of SAS. In the event, the owner has taken any equipment/ system other than Sub-station Automation System for schedule/forced maintenance, the consequent outage to SAS shall not be considered as outage for the purpose of availability. 2) Actual outage duration (AOD) The time elapsed in hours between the start and the end of an outage. The time shall be counted to the nearest 1/4th of an hour. Time less than 1/4th of an hour shall be counted Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 196
as having duration of 1/4th of an hour. 3) Period Hours (PH) The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period hour are 8760h (8784h for a leap year). 4)Actual Outage hours (AOH) The sum of actual outage duration within the reporting period AOH = AOD 5) Availability: Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time duration minus the actual outage duration to total time duration. 12.1 Guarantees Required The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Bidder shall include in their offer the detailed calculation for the availability. The contractor shall demonstrate their availability guaranteed by conducting the availability test on the total sub-station automation system as a whole after commissioning of total Sub-station Automation system. The test shall verify the reliability and integrity of all sub-systems. Under these conditions the test shall establish an overall availability of 99.98%. After the lapse of 1000 Hours of cumulative test time, test records shall be examined to determine the conformance with availability criterion. In case of any outage during the availability test, the contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the 1000 Hours period start after such rectification. If test object has not been met the test shall continue until the specified availability is achieved. The contractor has to establish the availability in a maximum period of three months from the date of commencement of the availability test. After the satisfactory conclusion of test both contractor and employer shall mutually agree to the test results and if these results satisfy the availability criterion, the test is considered to be completed successfully. After that the system shall be taken over by the employer and then the guarantee period shall start. 13.0 Spares 13.1 Consumables: All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till the SAS is taken over by the owner. Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 197
13.2 Availability Spares: the bidder is required to list the spares, which may be required for ensuring the guaranteed availability during the guaranteed availability period. The final list of spares shall form part of scope of supply and accordingly the price thereof shall be quoted by the bidder and shall be considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed availability period, the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made available to the Contractor for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus, at the end of availability period the inventory of spares with the Employer shall be fully replenished by the Contractor. However, any additional spares required to meet the availability of the system (which are not a part of the above spares supplied by the Contractor) would have to be supplied immediately by the Contractor free of cost to the Employer. 14.0 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed reliability and availability as declared by bidder. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) Station HMI Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-stand by mode) Bay level units along with bay mimic Bay Level Unit for Auxiliary system (as per requirement) Disturbance Recorder Work Station(Maintenance HMI) Colour Laser Printer 1 No. (For Reports & Disturbance records) Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets) All interface equipment for gateway to RCC and RSCC Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers, gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required x) xi) xii) Remote workstation including HMI and along with one printer Modems as per requirement. Any other equipment as necessary.
Annexure-I List of Analogue and Digital inputs Basic Monitoring requirements are: Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 198
Switchgear status indication Measurements (U, I, P, Q, f) Event Alarm Winding temperature of transformers & reactors Ambient temperature Status and display of 415V LT system, 220V & 48V DC system Status of display of Fire protection system and Air conditioning system.
Acquisition of all counters in PLCC panels through potential free contacts from PLCC or independently by counting the receive/send commands Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays Disturbance records Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current and
load current etc. List of Inputs The list of input for typical bays is as below:Analogue inputs i) For line Current R phase Y phase B phase Voltage R-Y phase Y-B phase B-R phase Tap-position of Transformer
ii) For transformer/reactor Current R phase Y phase Volume-II (Section-J), Substation Automation System 199
B phase WTI (for transformer and reactor) Tap position(for transformer only) iii) For TBC and bus coupler Current R phase Y phase B phase iv) Common a) Voltage for Bus-I, Bus-II and Transfer bus wherever applicable Voltage R-Y phase Y-B phase B-R phase b) c) d) e) Frequency for Bus-I and Bus-II Ambient temperature (switchyard) Switchyard Panel Room Temperature. LT system
i) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-I ii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-II iii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Diesel Generator iv) Current from LT transformer-I
v) Current from LT transformer-II vi) Current from Diesel Generator vii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-I viii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-II ix) Current from 220V Battery set-I x) Current from 220V Battery set-II
xi) Current from 220V Battery charger-I xii) Current from 220V Battery charger-I 200
xiii) Voltage of 48V DCDB-I xiv) xv) Voltage of 48V DCDB-II Current from 48V Battery set-I
xvi) Current from 48V Battery set-II xvii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I xviii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I Digital Inputs The list of input for various bays/SYSTEM is as follows: 1. Line bays i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) ii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) xix) Status of each pole of CB. Status of Isolator, Earth switch CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout Pole discrepancy ptd Trip coil faulty v LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd Main bkr auto recloser operated Tie/transfer auto recloser operated A/r lockout Tie/transfer bkr a/r lockout Direct trip-I/II sent Direct trip-I/II received Main I/II blocking Main I/II-Inter trip send Main I/II-Inter trip received O/V STAGE I operated O/V STAGE II operated 201
xx) xxi) xxii) xxiii) xxiv) xxv) xxvi)
FAULT LOCATOR FAULTY MAIN-I/II CVT FUSE FAIL MAIN-I PROTN TRIP MAIN-II PROTN TRIP MAIN-I PSB ALARM MAIN-I SOTF TRIP MAIN-I R-PH TRIP
xxvii) MAIN-I Y-PH TRIP xxviii) MAIN-I B-PH TRIP xxix) xxx) xxxi) MAIN-I START MAIN-I/II Carrier aided trip MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
xxxii) MAIN-I/II ZONE-2 TRIP xxxiii) MAIN-I/II ZONE-3 TRIP xxxiv) MAIN-I/II weak end infeed optd xxxv) MAIN-II PSB alarm xxxvi) MAIN-II SOTF TRIP xxxvii) MAIN-II R-PH TRIP xxxviii) MAIN-II Y-PH TRIP xxxix) MAIN-II B-PH TRIP xl) xli) xlii) xliii) xliv) xlv) xlvi) xlvii) MAIN-II start MAIN-II aided trip MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction Back-up o/c optd Back-up e/f optd 220V DC-I/II source fail SPEECH CHANNEL FAIL PLCC Protection Channel-I FAIL 202
xlviii) PLCC Protection Channel-II FAIL 2. Transformer bays i) Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout Pole discrepancy optd Trip coil faulty LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd
viii) REF OPTD ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) xix) xx) xxi) xxii) DIF OPTD OVERFLUX ALARM (MV) OVERFLUX TRIP (MV) OVERFLUX ALARM (HV) OVERFLUX TRIP (HV) HV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL MV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL OTI ALARM/TRIP PRD OPTD OVERLOAD ALARM BUCHOLZ TRIP BUCHOLZ ALARM OLTC BUCHOLZ ALARM OLTC BUCHOLZ TRIP
3. Transformer bays i) ii) iii) Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout 203
iv) v) vi) vii) ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) xix) 4. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii)
Pole discrepancy optd Trip coil faulty LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd viii) REF OPTD DIF OPTD HV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL OTI ALARM/TRIP PRD OPTD BUCHOLZ TRIP BUCHOLZ ALARM OIL LOW ALARM Back-up impedance relay 220v DC-I/II source fail GR-A PROTN OPTD GR-B PROTN OPTD Line/Bus Reactor bays (as applicable): Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout Pole discrepancy optd Trip coil faulty LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd REF OPTD DIF OPTD Line/ BUS CVT FUSE FAIL OTI ALARM/TRIP PRD OPTD 204
xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) xix) 5. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) 6. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii)
BUCHOLZ TRIP BUCHOLZ ALARM OIL LOW ALARM Back-up impedance relay 220V DC-I/II source fail GR-A PROTN OPTD GR-B PROTN OPTD Bus bar Protection Bus bar main-I trip Bus bar main-II trip Bus bar zone-I CT open Bus bar zone-II CT open Bus transfer CT sup. Optd Bus transfer bus bar protn optd Bus protection relay fail Auxillary System Incomer-1 On/Off Incomer-II On/Off 415V Bus-I/II U/V 415V Bus Coupler breaker On/Off DG ser brk On/Off Alarm/Trip signals as listed in section: DG set LT transformer-I Bunchholz Alarm & Trip LT transformer-II Bunchholz Alarm & Trip LT transformer I WTI alarm & trip LT transformer I OTI alarm & trip LT transformer II OTI alarm & trip PLCC exchange fail 205
xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) 7. i) ii) iii) iv) v)
Time sync.Signal absent Alarm/trip signals as listed in section: Battery and Battery charger 220V DC-I earth fault 220V DC-II earth fault Alarm/trip ignals as listed in section: fire Protection System Switchyard Panel Room: AC Compressor 1 ON/OFF AC Compressor 2 ON/OFF Fire detection 1 ON/OFF Fire detection 2 ON/OFF Switchyard Panel Room Temperature High Alarm
The exact number and description of digital inputs shall be as per details engineering requirement apart from the above mentioned digital inputs, minimum of 200 inputs shall be kept for Owner use in future.
206
SECTION- (K) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF SDH & PLCC SDH SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Fiber Optic System is to be installed & commissioned at all the 400kV sub-station by the contractor. The network architecture to be implemented shall be of ring topology with adequate transmission and synchronization protection scheme to achieve operational requirement. The minimum configuration for OPGW equipment shall be as follows:SDH equipment shall be of STM-4 capacity with 63E-1(alternative 252E-1) channels. a. Provision for extending SDH to 220kV system shall also be made by the contractor. b. The SDH system shall be used for data transfer and standby protection. PLCC 1.0 1.1 GENERAL All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the relevant IEC/IS Specifications or equivalent National Standards, 2.0 2.1 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT The PLCC Equipment and Line traps as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the transmission lines. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the equipment supplied by him with the already existing carrier equipment at the respective sub-stations. Contractor shall also be responsible for collecting all the necessary information/data from the respective substations/ concerned State Electricity Boards for the installation of the equipment. 3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT a) In case of LILO Lines, PLCC cabinets from existing sub-station shall be shifted and commissioned by contractor in one bay of LILO at new sub-station. Further 4 nos. digital PLCC cabinets (Programmable to analogue as well as digital) alongwith associated equipments such as wave trap, LMU, HF cable etc. shall be procured by contractor. Out of these 4 cabinets 2 nos. digital PLCC cabinets shall be commissioned at existing sub-station and other 2 nos. in 2nd bay of LILO line at new sub-station. b) Both end digital PLCC cabinets alongwith associated equipments shall be procured and commissioned by contractor.
Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC
207
c) PLCC cabinets on 220kV & below network shall be provided by UPPTCL ( not in scope of this package ). However, contractor has to provide the space for PLCC cabinets and associated equipments in control room and switchyard respectively for the same. d) 2 digital channels will be required for Main-I and Main-II protection and IIIrd Channel for Data Transfer. e) For line details see Table I 4.0 4.1 FREQUENCY PLANNING For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals Bidders may plan for a minimum receive signal to noise ratio of 25 dB for the speech channels without companders. The noise power in 2.1 kHz band (300-2400 Hz) may be taken as -13 dBm referred to the coupling point of the H.T. line. An additional minus two and a half dB may be assumed for psophometric factor. As far as coupling loss (phase to phase) is concerned the Bidders may assume the same as 6dB at one coupling end for evaluating SNR. For protection channels the minimum SNR shall not be less than 15 dB under adverse weather. A safety margin of 9 dB shall be taken over and above these SNR values in order to cater for variations in line attenuation from the computed value as inhand reserve. Frequency and output power of PLC terminals for protection shall be planned such that the protection signal is received with full reliability even when one of the phase is earthed or is on open circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of 6 dB. The Bidder shall indicate the noise power in the bandwidth used for protection signaling and shall submit the SNR calculations for speech as well as protection channels on all the line section given in at the proposed frequencies. Sample calculations for SNR requirement and power allocation over different channels must be furnished alongwith the bid. Maximum permissible line attenuation shall be clearly brought out in these calculations. Further, Bidder shall submit details of frequency planning done (including computer studies carried out and facilities available) for PLCC links on EHV lines in the past in the relevant schedule of DRS. Bidder must enclose one copy of computer study result done in the past along with the Bid. 4.2 Successful Bidder shall be fully responsible for the coordination required with concerned State Electricity Boards for finalising the frequency plan. 4.3 The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Adviser/DOP Department for clearance and in case any change in the Contractors recommended carrier frequency and power output is proposed by these authorities, the Contractor shall have to modify his proposal accordingly. Change of power output shall, however, not involve repeater stations. Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 208
5.0 5.1
PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT The power line carrier communication equipment required by the Owner is to provide primarily efficient, secure and reliable information link for carrier aided distance protection and direct tripping of remote-end breaker and also for speech communication between 765/400/220 kV sub-stations. It shall include separate carrier terminals of multipurpose type for speech and protection purposes. All carrier terminals including those for protection shall be suitable for point to point speech communication also.
5.2
For security reasons each 400/220kV transmission line shall be protected by Main-I and Main-II protections as given below: Main-I Main-II Numerical Distance protection with permissive inter-tripping. Distance protection of a different measuring technique than that of relay under Main I.
5.3 below:
The requirement of carrier information on each link covered under this specification is as
a)
One protection channel for Main-I and another for Main-II distance protection schemes. Further these channels will also be used as main and back-up channel for direct circuit breaker inter-tripping for 400kV lines. In case of 400kV/220kV lines, speech and data channel can also be used for protection wherever possible.
b)
One speech channel with a facility to superimpose data signals upto 1200Baud. However, the number of channels for protection signaling , speech and data communication for SAS and Load dispatch centre shall be as per the BOQ given in price schedule.
5.4
The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of reliability and speed. It shall be guaranteed to function reliably in the presence of noise impulse caused by isolator or breaker operation. The equipment shall be suitable for direct tripping of remote end breaker for fault in unswitched 400 kV Shunt Reactor & Operation of Buchholz relays of reactor etc. It shall also be possible to effect direct tripping of breaker at one end when the other end breaker opens out either manually or by relays such as Bus fault relay etc.
5.5
The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the transmit side, its transmission over the carrier link, reception at the far end and giving command to the trip relays at the distant end shall not exceed 20 mS. for permissive intertripping and 30 m sec. for direct inter-tripping even for the longest line section.
209
The above timings are inclusive of operating time for auxiliary relays and interposing relays, if any, included in the PLCC equipment. 5.6 The requirement of protection signaling channel is such that security against incorrect signals being received shall be at least two to three orders higher than reliability against a signal not being received. 5.7 For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling for 400 kV D/C & 220kV D/C lines shall be employed. Inter-circuit coupling shall be used for 220 D/C lines. Double differential coupling shall also be considered for double circuit lines. Bidders must furnish detailed write-up on methods of coupling and recommend suitable coupling mode for double-circuit lines alongwith the bids. Coupling mode shall, however, be fully confirmed by Contractor after conducting detailed computer study taking into account the transpositions of 400 kV lines for optimum coupling mode over these line sections. The coupling arrangement shall be fully optimized by the Contractor after conducting detailed study of every line section individually, taking into account the temperature variations, transpositions, earth resistivity, conductor configuration, carrier channels requirements, security and reliability criteria and other relevant details. The line attenuation shall be calculated for complete range of frequencies. The earth resistivity data, existing frequency networks and other relevant details of each line will be furnished to the Contractor for carrying out the computer studies and frequency planning. The Contractor shall complete the computer studies wherever required and submit the frequency plan and optimum coupling details within a period of one month from the date of receipt of above data. 5.8 The 400 kV transmission lines may be transposed. The transmission tower configuration and conductor details shall be forwarded after the award to enable the contractor to make his own computer study assessment of the carrier path based on wave propagation over transposed lines with each transposition point acting as Modal Converter. 5.9 The parameters of the equipment quoted shall be such that the mode of wave propagation on 400 kV power line (with transpositions indicated) shall not impose any limitation on the efficient and reliable performance of information link from protection or communication point of view. 5.10 The Contractor shall have to check and prove through the results of his computer studies that attenuation due to transpositions in the EHV lines is within limits and the offered equipment will perform satisfactorily. 5.11 The Bidder shall submit curves illustrating incorrect tripping and Failure to trip probability plotted against corona noise level, in the presence of impulse noise due to switching of isolator and circuit breaker etc. Details of field tests and laboratory tests for Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 210
successful operation of his equipment, under such adverse conditions shall be furnished by the Bidder. These are to be related to end-to-end signaling and shall take into account the type of communication link e.g. account shall be taken of transpositions in the phase to phase coupled H.T. line. Details of field tests and laboratory tests for successful operation of the equipment under the above circumstances shall be submitted by the Bidder illustrating the above parameters. 7.0 7.1 LINE TRAP Line trap shall be broad band tuned for its entire carrier frequency range. Resistive component of impedance of the line trap within its carrier frequency blocking range shall not be less than 450 ohms for 400 kV system and 570 ohms for 220kV systems. 7.2 Line trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of surge arrestors which shall be designed and arranged such that neither significant alteration in its protective function nor physical damage shall result from either temperature rise or the magnetic field of the main coil at continuous rated current or rated short time current. The protective device shall neither enter into operation nor remain in operation, following transient actuation by the power frequency voltage developed across the line trap by the rated short time current. The lightning arrestor shall be station class current limiting active gap type. Its rated discharge current shall be 10 kA. Coordination, however, shall be done by taking 20 kA at 8/20 micro-sec. discharge current into account. Bidder has to furnish full justification in case the use of gap-less metal oxide arrestor is recommended by them. 7.3 The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap of each rating shall fully comply with the requirements of IS: 3070 Part-I/IEC-60099-I Part-I. It shall conform to type tests as applicable and type test certificate for the same shall be submitted by the Bidder. 7.4 The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap shall be subject to routine and acceptance tests as per IEC-60099-1 (Part-I). 7.5 The line trap on 400 kV line shall show no visual corona discharge at a voltage of 320 KV (rms) power frequency falling voltage. Suitable corona rings may be incorporated in the line trap. Radio interference voltage for 420kV shall not exceed 1000 micro volts at 266kV (rms. 7.6 7.7 Line trap shall be equipped with the bird barriers. Line trap shall conform to IEC 60353 (latest) fulfilling all the technical requirements. The rated short time current for 1 Second shall be 31.5/40/50 kA as per requirement. The mH rating shall be 0.25/0.5/1.0 mH depending on frequency plan. Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 211
7.8 7.9
The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the line trap at 65 deg. C ambient. Reports for the following type tests on each type of line trap shall be submitted: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Measurement of Inductance of the main coil. Measurement of temperature rise. Insulation test. Short time current test. Corona Extinction Voltage test (procedure for this shall be mutually agreed ). Radio Interference Voltage measurement test (procedure for this shall be mutually agreed ).
7.10
The Bidder must enclose with his bid the reports of type and routine tests conducted on similar equipment earlier as per IEC-60353.
7.11
Welding All the welding included in the manufacture of line traps shall be performed by personnel and procedure qualified in accordance with ASME-IX and all the critical welds shall be subject to NDT as applicable.
7.12
Line Trap Mounting 7.12.1 The Line Trap shall be suitable for outdoor pedestal or suspension mounting and shall be mechanically strong enough to withstand the stresses due to maximum wind pressure of 260 kg/square meter. 7.12.2 For pedestal mounting, each line trap shall be mounted on a tripod structure formed by three insulator stacks arranged in a triangular form. All the accessories and hardware, mounting stool including bolts for fixing the line trap on insulators shall be of non-magnetic material and shall be supplied by the Contractor. 7.12.3 For suspension mounting, Contractor shall be required to coordinate the mounting arrangement with the existing arrangement. Non-magnetic suspension hook/link of adequate length and tensile strength to provide necessary magnetic clearance between the line trap and suspension hardware shall be supplied by the Contractor.
7.13
Terminal Connectors 7.13.1 The line traps shall be suitable for connecting to 4" IPS Aluminium tube or 3" IPS Al. tube or ACSR single/twin/Quad bundle conductor with horizontal or vertical takeoff. Necessary connector shall be supplied by the Contractor.
212
7.13.2 Terminal Connectors shall conform to IS:5561. 7.13.3 No part of clamp or connector (including hardware) shall be of magnetic material. 7.13.4 Clamps and connectors shall be designed corona controlled. Visual Corona extinction voltage shall not be less than 320kV (rms) for 420kV respectively. All nuts and bolts shall be suitably shrouded. 7.13.5 Radio interference Voltage for 420/245 kV shall not exceed 1000 microvolts at 266/156 kV (rms) respectively. 7.13.6 Clamps/connectors shall be designed for the same current ratings as line trap and temperature rise shall not exceed 35 deg. C over 50 deg. C ambient. No current carrying part shall be less than 10 mm thick. 7.13.7 Clamps/connectors shall conform to type test as per IS: 5561. Type Test reports shall also be submitted for following additional type tests : a) Visual Corona Extinction Test b) Radio Interference Voltage Measurement 7.13.8 Bidders are required to submit alongwith their bid typical drawings clearly indicating the above mentioned features of the line traps, line trap mounting arrangement and terminal connectors. For suspension mounted line traps, Bidder shall submit drawings showing single point as well as multipoint (normally 3 point) suspension arrangements. 8.0 8.1 COUPLING DEVICE The coupling devices shall be interposed between the capacitor voltage transformer and coaxial line to the PLC transmitter /receiver and in conjunction with the capacitor voltage transformer shall ensure: a) Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier frequency connection and the power line. b) Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts and installation, against the effects of power frequency voltage and transient over voltages. 8.2 type: a) It shall match characteristic impedance of H.T. line to impedance of the carrier frequency connection. The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT shall from an electric filter of band pass
213
b) Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary terminals of the coupling device shall be performed by the above mentioned transformer. c) Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be drained to the earth by a separate inductance termed drain coil of suitable rating. d) Voltage surges coming from the power line at the terminals of the coupling device shall be limited by a non-linear surge arrestor of suitable rating in the primary side. Requirement of a gas type voltage arrestor in secondary side of the coupling device shall have to be fully justified, but in any case the input circuit of PLC. equipment shall have protective devices in the form of zener diodes and surge suppressers. The surge arrester shall have power frequency spark over voltage coordinated with the equipment ahead of it. e) For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals, the coupling device shall be equipped with an earthing switch. The Earth Switch shall be available for earthing of CVT-HT terminals, when the coupling filter units are removed from circuit for maintenance/ replacement. The design shall take due regard of requirements for safety in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules. 8.3 Two numbers phase to earth type coupling filters shall be used to achieve phase to phase/ inter-circuit coupling. Connection between secondaries of the two phase to earth type coupling device shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid such that reliable communication shall be ensured even when one of the coupled phase is earthed or open circuited on the line side. 8.4 Coupling device shall conform to IEC-60481 and shall have the following carrier frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase to earth type coupling device: a) Nominal line side i) 240 ohms for 765kV and 400 kV Quad/triple impedance bundle conductor line. ii) 320 ohms for 400kV twin bundle conductor line. iii) 400 ohms for 220kV line b) c) d) Nominal equipment side impedance Composite loss Return Loss Not more than 2 dB Not less than 12 dB 75 ohms (unbalanced)
214
e)
Bandwidth kHz
Shall suit the frequency plan between 36 and 500
f)
Nominal peak envelope power
Not less than 650 Watt.
(for Inter-modulation product 80 dB down) 8.5 The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting. Temperature of metallic equipment mounted outdoor is expected to rise upto 65 deg. C during the maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg. C specified. The equipment offered by the Bidder shall operate satisfactorily under these conditions. 8.6 The H.T. Terminal of coupling device shall be connected to H.F. Terminal of the CVT by means of 6 mm sq. copper wire with suitable lugs & taped with 11 kV insulation by the contractor. 8.7 Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier equipment connection. Bidder shall confirm that such a parallel connection to coupling device directly will not result in any additional attenuation. 8.8 The coupling device including the drainage coil, surge arrester and earthing switch shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests as per IEC- 60481/IS:8998. Routine tests shall include but not be limited to the following : i) ii) iii) Composite loss and return loss tests on coupling device. Turns ratio test and insulation tests on the balancing transformer. Milli volt drop test, power frequency voltage test and mechanical operation test on earthing switch. iv) 8.9 Power frequency spark over test for lightning arrester as per relevant IS/IEC.
Reports for the following type tests on coupling device shall be submitted : 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Return loss test. Composite loss test. Distortion and inter modulation test . Impulse voltage test. Tests on Arrestors
Bidder shall furnish, alongwith his bid copies of all type and routine test conducted earlier on similar coupling device in accordance with relevant standards. Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 215
9.0 9.1
High Frequency Cable High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in the switchyard to the PLC terminal installed indoor.
9.2
The cable shall be steel armoured and its outer covering shall be protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offer his comments on method employed by him for earthing of screen and submit full justification for the same with due regard to safety requirements. Bidder must enclose in his bid a detailed construction drawing of the cable being offered, with mechanical and electrical parameters.
9.3
Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance of the PLC terminal on one side and to that of the coupling device on the other side over the entire carrier frequency range of 40-500 kHz.
9.4 9.5
Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 16 ohms per Km at 20C. The cable shall be designed to withstand test voltage of 4 kV between conductor and outer sheath for one minute.
9.6
Bidder shall specify attenuation per Km of the cable at various carrier frequencies in the range of 40 to 500 kHz. The typical attenuation figures for H.F. cable shall be in the range of 1 to 5 dB/km in the frequency range of 40-500 kHz.
9.7
The H.F. cable shall conform to type tests and be subjected to routine tests as per IS 11967(Part 2/Sec 1): 1989/IS 5026:1987.
9.8
All HF cables within the scope of this specification shall be laid and termination shall be carried out by the Contractor.
9.9
The cables shall be supplied wound on drums containing nominal length of 500 meters each. However, exact requirement of drum lengths shall be finalized during detailed engineering to avoid joint in HF cable and its wastage.
10.0 10.1
Power Line Carrier Terminal As already indicated the information link shall be provided for speech, protection, telex and data services.
10.2
PLC terminal shall use Amplitude Modulation and shall have single side band transmission mode. These shall be equipped for fixed frequency duplex working. Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLC terminals shall be as per IEC-60495, unless otherwise specified.
10.3
The salient features are detailed out below: 216
a) Mode of transmission
Amplitude Modulation single side band with suppressed carrier or reduced carrier.
b) Carrier frequency c) Nominal carrier frequency d) Power output (PEP) at HF terminal e) Frequency difference and between a pair of carrier. PLC terminals
40 to 500 kHz range 4.0 kHz band in either direction of transmission 20/40/80 Watt Frequency difference between VF signal at the transmitting rece iving ends will not exceed 2 Hz with suppressed With reduced carrier frequency difference shall be zero. This shall include permissible ambient temperature variation and supply frequency and voltage variation of (+) 15% and (-) 10%.
f) Automatic gain the control g) Supply voltage 10.4
For 40 dB change in carrier frequ ency signal level within regulation range, change in VF receive levels of both speech and other signals shall be less than 1dB. 48 V DC + 15%, - 10%. (Positive pole earthed)
All the PLC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The Bidder shall confirm that the total transmission time for teleprotection shall not exceed 20 ms for permissive and 30 ms for direct tripping signals. Speech and teleprotection channels shall independently fulfill the SNR requirements out of the power allocated to its channel from the total power of the PLC terminals. Detailed calculation for SNR requirement and power allocation over different channels should be furnished alongwith the bid.
10.5
In the input circuit of the PLC terminal protective devices shall be provided in the form of zener diodes or surge suppressers in order to eliminate any surge transfer through the coupling device or the surge induced in the connecting path of H.F. cable.
10.6
To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system, compressors and expanders shall be provided. The companders shall have at least 2:1 compression ratio with a corresponding expansion ratio of 1:2. The operating range of compander shall be compatible with the audio power levels specified for 4 wire operation. The improvement gained by
217
companders shall however not be taken into account for power allocation and shall be inhand reserve. 10.7 Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false tripping. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer the methods adopted to ensure above phenomenon. The receiver design shall also provide protection against false tripping from random noise. 10.8 Fail-safe devices shall be provided, so that a malfunction in one unit or subassembly cannot cause damage elsewhere in the system. All plug-in equipment shall be fitted with features to prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables shall not be routed across sharp edges or near sources of high temperature. The adjustments, which are susceptible to misadjustment from accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped with suitable locking devices. 10.9 The PLC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from 0 deg. C to 50 deg. C ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the equipment shall be so designed that the equipment remains operational successfully upto 60 deg. C ambient temperature. Any ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. 10.10 The terminals shall be provided with built-in indicating instrument to facilitate checking of important voltages and current values and signal levels in different parts of the PLC Terminals. Protection fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and fuses shall be so mounted as allow their easy inspection and replacement. All test points shall be easily accessible. The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities. Individual parts of the carrier set should be accessible from front, making it possible to place the carrier cabinets side-by-side. All components and parts of the carrier set shall be suitably tropicalised. 10.11 PLC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal cabinets, suitable for mounting on concrete plinth as well as channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or welding. All the panels shall be properly earthed to the Owners earthing grid by the Contractor. Contractor shall submit detailed drawings for earthing connections. 10.12 All the panels shall be protected against moisture ingress and corrosion during storage. Panels shall be properly dried before they are installed and energized. Bidder shall indicate measures adopted to prevent ingress of moisture during operation. 10.13 All cabinets having PLC terminals shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage for interior illumination with switch. Each panel shall be provided with 240 V AC single phase socket with switch to accept 5 & 15A standard Indian plugs.
218
10.14
A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel function, transmitter frequency and direction etc.
10.15
Reports for the following type tests for PLC Terminals shall be submitted: Tests to determine various characteristics of PLC terminals as per IEC 60495. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u) v) Voltage variation Carrier frequency range band. Frequency accuracy Transmit/Receive frequency difference. Automatic gain control Harmonic distortion Selectivity Output impedence, Return loss&Tapping loss Return loss, Afinputs/Outputs Balance to ground Limiter action Spurious emission Carrier frequency levels and levels Attenuation distortion Noise generated within terminal Near and far end cross talk Group delay distortion Conducted noise Telephone signaling channel Speech levels Voltage withstand test Insulation test
10.16
Heat Soaking of panels All the solid state equipment/system panels shall be subjected to the Heat Soaking as per the
following procedure: Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC
219
All solid state equipment shall be burn-in for minimum of 120 hours continuously under operation condition. During the last 48 hours of testing, the ambient temperature of the test chamber shall be 50C. Each PLC panel shall be complete with all associated sub-systems and the same shall be in operation during the above test. During the last 48 hours of the above test, the temperature inside the panel shall be monitored with all the doors closed. The temperature of the panel interior shall not exceed 65C. 11.0 11.1 SPEECH COMMUNICATION PLC equipment offered shall provide telephone communication between the stations where the transmission lines are terminating. The equipment shall be suitable for providing the following facilities : a) It shall be possible for subscriber at any of the stations to contact the subscriber at all other stations connected in the system as shown in the specification drawing by dialing his call number. To achieve this 32 lines EPAX with 4 wire interface & remote subscriber units shall be provided/available at different stations. b) The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring back tone, dial tone, engage tone & priority tone, and suitable pulses to establish and disconnect communication between subscribers. c) d) The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm circuits and fuses etc. The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either direction and be suitable for providing superimposed data and teleprinter facilities at a later date without major modifications and high cost. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the provision made in his proposal for future development and the extent to which such additional facilities can be added at a later date. e) The system shall be completely automatic with definite number allocated for each telephone. The numbering scheme for telephones, exchange and tie lines shall be developed by the Bidder and indicated in the bid. Final numbering scheme shall be fully coordinated with the existing/ proposed future systems by the Contractor. f) Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided by means of priority keys wherever specified. The over-riding facility shall enable cutting-in ongoing calls with the priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their conversation. The wanted number should then get automatically connected without having to redial the number.
220
g)
All the carrier telephone conversations shall be secret and it should not be possible for anybody to over hear the conversation going on between any two parties excepting those provided with over-riding facilities.
h)
The necessary cables for connecting all the telephone instruments ordered for at each sub-station (including wiring and termination) shall be provided by the Contractor. These telephone instruments shall be located within control room building at respective sub-station.
i)
The cabinets housing the equipment for EPAX, four wire E/M interface & remote subscriber units (four wire) shall have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLC terminals.
j)
All the terminals for speech shall be with Transit Band Pass Filter suitable for tuning at site and shall be wired for addition of VFTs in future.
k)
Equipment for speech communication must be fully compatible with Owners existing equipment. Any interfaces required for proper matching and connection with the Owners existing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
l)
Terminals for protection shall be suitable for speech between two ends of each transmission line or on tandem operation basis with back to back connection at the intermediate stations.
n)
Each PLC terminal for speech as well as protection purposes shall be provided with a plug-in type service telephone and buzzer. Further, 4 wire remote telephone instruments (parallel to service telephone) shall also be provided on one PLC terminal for protection for each link. These instruments shall be located in respective Switchyard control room to enable the operator to make emergency calls on pointto-point basis. Each such instrument shall be equipped with a buzzer and press-tocall key and shall not require any additional power supply units.
11.2
Electronic Private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) 11.2.1 The 32 line Electronic Private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) wherever specified shall be connected to minimum six trunk routes thorough PLCC channels (speech panel) with Four-wire E/M interface unit. This 4-wire interface unit either shall form an integral part of the EPAX system or be suitable for mounting/housing in the carrier panel. The exchange will have its own ringing current and tone generator etc. The exchange shall be suitable for working on 48 V DC Power Supply (positive pole earthed).
221
The exchange shall be fully automatic, solid state, and of modular construction and shall have multiple switching routes (minimum 4-routes). 11.2.2 EPAX shall also be provided with two (2) additional interface units and operate exclusively with Owners leased subscriber lines, of Department of Telecommunication (DOT) and compatible with 2 wire full duplex, voice grade mode of operation. The details of communication protocol, for interfacing of the DOT leased lines, shall be coordinated by the Contractor, with the licensing authority (DOT). 11.3 Remote End Four Wire E/M Interface & Subscriber Unit or Equivalent EPAX (4x4) 11.3.1 The remote end four wire E/M interface & subscriber units, wherever specified, shall be of electronic type and be suitable for working on fixed frequency power line carrier systems with E & M signaling. This shall be housed in the carrier set and be fully wired to the power line carrier terminal equipment. 11.3.2 This unit shall receive and register various signals, on PLCC Channels, from remote end exchanges or other remote end subscriber units and associated four wire interface unit. 11.3.3 The four wire interface unit shall be equipped for routing transit calls and shall be supplied pre-wired to handle calls for minimum eight directions, in a form suitable for transmission over PLCC. 11.3.4 The bidder shall also indicate the total number of trunk-line capacity, available with each four-wire interface unit. The unit shall be suitable for connecting two-wire telephone sets. Further, the associated telephone cables for locating two subscriber lines, within the control room is in the scope of this specification. 11.4 Network Protection Equipment (Protection Coupler) 11.4.1 The Bidder shall offer voice frequency transmission equipment which shall work on frequency shift or coded signal principle for transmission/reception of protection signals as single purpose channel. The equipment shall be suitable for connection to the power line carrier terminal. 11.4.2 The voice frequency transmission equipment shall not only be insensitive to corona noise but shall also remain unaffected by impulse type noise which are generated by electrical discharge and by the opening and closing of circuit breakers, isolators, earthing switches etc. The equipment shall also be made immune to a field strength Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 222
of 10V/m expected to be caused by portable radio transmitters in the range of 201000 MHz. In his offer, bidder shall clearly explain as to what measures have been taken to make the equipment insensitive to corona noise, white noise and to impulse noise of an amplitude larger than the wanted signal and submit full field test and laboratory test reports. The guarantee on design data shall not be acceptable. 11.4.3 The equipment shall be unaffected by spurious tripping signals. The Bidder shall submit proof as to how this is achieved satisfactorily. 11.4.4 The equipment shall be suitable for transmission of direct and permissive trip signal as well as blocking signals for protective gear of power system. The equipment shall be operated in the audio frequency range in speech band or above speech band as superimposed channel in 4 kHz band of SSB carrier. The equipment shall operate with full duplex frequency shift mode of operation or by switching between two frequencies in case of coded signals . The protection signaling equipment shall be of solid state design, modular in construction and have a proven operating record in similar application over EHV systems. Details regarding application of the equipment over 400kV/220kV systems shall be submitted along with the bid. Each protection signaling equipment shall provide: i) ii) Transmission facilities for minimum three protection signals. Reception facilities for minimum three protection signals.
11.4.5 The equipment shall be designed for remote tripping/ blocking on permissive basis and direct tripping for reactor fault and others. The overall time of PLC, VFT and transmission path for permissive trip/blocking shall be 20 m. Sec. or less and for direct tripping 30 m. Sec. or less even for the longest line section. Operating time lower than specified above may be preferred provided they fulfill the requirements of security and reliability as mentioned below : False - trip probability (Noise burst of any amplitude) Fail to trip probability for S/N 6 dB in 3.1 kHz Band (white Noise Measurement) 11.4.6 It may be emphasized that specified time, as mentioned above is composed of the following: a) Back-to-back signal delay in frequency shift or coded signals protection equipment. Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 223 10-2 10-5
b) c) d)
Back-to-back delay in PLC terminal. Delay in transmission line. Operation time of interposing relay, if any, in frequency shift or coding equipment. Reference is invited in this regard to the guide lines expressed in CIGRE Publication Teleprotection report by Committee 34 and 35.
11.4.7 The following transfer criteria shall be provided by the equipment: a) Transmit side One number potential free NO (normally open) contact of protective relays (To be supplied by the Owner) of under noted rating for each of the following functions: i) Permissive trip command ii) Direct trip command Contact Rating: Maximum voltage Maximum current rating Maximum power rating b) Receive Side Voice frequency transmission equipment for network protection shall be provided with one potential free NO (normally open) contact of the under noted rating for each of the following functions: i) Permissive trip command ii) Direct trip command Contact Rating: Rated voltage Rated current Other Parameters c) Alarm : : : 250 Volts DC 0.1 A DC As per IEC-60255-25 : : : 660 Volts 5 amps 1250 W/VA
224
In addition, the voice frequency protection terminal shall provide at least one number potential free change over contact of the following rating for alarm purposes. Rated voltage Rated current Other Parameters : : : 250 volts DC 0.1 A DC As per IEC-60255-25
11.4.8 The Contractor shall submit drawings showing inter-connection between PLCC and protection panels for approval by the Owner. 11.4.9 It has to be ensured that under no circumstances protection channel should share the power. Each protection channel shall be able to transmit power for which system is designed. For example, a 40 W PLC terminal shall transmit 40 Watt (max.) for protection channel alone in the event of fault. Speech and superimposed data channels, in the same protection terminal must get disconnected momentarily during the operation of protection channels. 11.4.10 The equipment shall be constructed such that in permissive line protection system, operational reliability of the protection channel may be checked over the carrier link by means of a loop test. It shall be possible to carry out the above test from either end of the carrier link. During healthy condition of the transmission line, the loop test shall not initiate a tripping command. In the event of a system fault, while loop test is in progress, protection signal shall over-ride the test signal. 11.4.11 The equipment shall be complete with built in counters for counting the number of trip commands sent and number of trip commands received. 11.4.12 Reports for the following tests shall be submitted for approval for protection coupler and the relays associated with PLCC equipment for network protection signaling equipment and interface unit with protective relay units if any : 1) Protection coupler ( As per IEC 60834 -1) a) b) c) d) e) f) Power supply variation Power supply interruption Reflected noise Reverse polarity Interference by discrete frequency Transmission time 225
g) h) g) h) i) j) j) k) l) m)
Interference by frequency deviation. ( Wherever applicable) Alarm function Security Dependability Voltage withstand test Insulation test. Electrical fast transient test (along with carrier terminal) HF disturbance test (along with carrier terminal) Electro static discharge test (along with carrier terminal) Radiated electromagnetic field susceptibility test (along with carrier terminal)
n)
Environment test (as per IS 9000 )
2. Relays. a) Impulse voltage withstand test as per Clause 6.1 of IS:8686 (for a test voltage appropriate to Class III as per Clause 3.2 of IS:8686). b) High Frequency Disturbance test as per Clause 6.2 of IS:8686 (for a test voltage appropriate to Class III as per Clause 3.2 of IS:8686). 12.0 Mandatory Testing & Maintenance Equipment Print testing kit for PLCC terminal, E/M interface & subscriber unit, Protection coupler & EPAX comprising of following items of reputed make in addition to any other special items required for testing and maintenance of this equipment packed in a carrying brief case: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Screw driver set with multi up fixing feature Nose pliers Cutting pliers Ordinary Pliers Adjustable wrench Soldering iron with tip earthed a) b) 150 watts - 1 No. 35 Watts - 1 No 226
c)
10 watts - 1 No.
operated with isolated (step down) transformer having provision for interchangeable taps. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 11.0. Desoldering pump Print extender Print puller Large selection of test leads Solder wire Large selection of plugs, jacks & pistol probes compatible with equipment supplied Dummy load Interface card/print for Tx to Rx loop-back Test oscillator/tone generator with indicating meters - either built in or separate ESD wrist band ESD conducting mat
LIST OF COMMISSIONING TESTS The following tests shall be carried out on complete system/subsystem during
commissioning: 1. 2. 3. Composite loss and return loss on coupling device using dummy load. Composite loss (Attenuation) for HF Cable coupling device. End to end attenuation measurement for verification of optimum coupling mode. Test shall be done for all combinations. 4. End to end return loss for optimum coupling mode. a) open behind line trap. b) grounded behind line trap. 5. If end to end return loss for optimum coupling mode is not satisfactory, same shall be measured for other coupling modes also. 6. 7. Adjustment of Tx/Rx levels on PLCC equipment as per test schedule. AF frequency response (end to end) for the entire 4 kHz Bandwidth for speech and teleoperation channels. Volume-II (Section-K), SDH And PLCC 227
8. 9. 10. 11.
Measurement of noise in 2 kHZ bandwidth with and without line energised. SNR (test-one) with line energised noting down weather conditions. Transmission time for teleprotection and other data channels. Observation of Tx/Rx levels (test-tone) for each channel at both ends by sequential switching on/off parallel channels using dummy load and also with the transmission line.
12. 13.
Observation of end to end and trunk dialing performance. Observation of end-to-end protection signaling (command sent & received) in conjunction with protective relays, noting down transmission/receipt of unwanted commands under switching operations in the switchyard during protective relay testing.
Notes: 1. All measurements for link attenuation, composite loss and return loss shall be carried out for the entire range of carrier frequencies with specific attention to the frequencies. i. ii. iii. 2 within coupling device bandwidth. within line trap bandwidth, and operating frequencies.
Following tests shall be carried out independently at each and i. ii. iii. Composite loss & return loss for coupling device. Attenuation test for HF cable + coupling device. Levels and other local adjustments (on dummy load). Final adjustment shall be on end to end basis. iv. Test for loading by parallel channels with dummy load. This test can be done alongwith tests for coupling device. v. Protection signaling under local loop test (dummy load).
3.
Necessary test instruments required for all the above tests shall be brought by commissioning engineers of the contractor.
12.0
Telecom NMS is to be provided at Indirapuram Substation for Central Network Management. Following 7 substations will be monitored at Indirapuram: a) 765/400/220kV AIS at Greater Noida
228
b) 765/400/220kV AIS at Hapur c) d) 400/220kV AIS at Sikandarabad 400/132kV AIS at Nehtaur
e) 400/220/33kV GIS at Ataur (Gaziabad) f) 400/220/132kV GIS at Dasna g) 400/ 220/33kV GIS at Indirapuram 13.0 Table-I:
Following is the line length
S.No Line Detail . 765kV S/C Mainpuri Hapur line with Quad Bersimis 1. conductor 765kV S/C Mainpuri - Greater Noida with Quad Bersimis 2. conductor 765kV S/C Greater Noida - Hapur line with Quad Bersimis 3. conductor LILO of (2xS/C) 765kV Meerut (PGCIL) - Agra (PGCIL) 4. line at Greater Noida with Quad Bersimis conductor 400kV D/C Greater Noida Sikandrabad line with Quad 5. Moose conductor 400kV D/C (Quad) Hapur Dasna line with Quad Moose 6. conductor 400kV D/C (Quad) Greater Noida Noida (Sector-148) 7. line with Quad Moose conductor LILO of 400kV Moradabad - Muradnagar line at Hapur 8. substation with Twin Moose conductor LILO of 400kV S/C Rishikesh Kashipur line at Nehtaur 9. Substation with Twin Moose conductor 400kV D/C Hapur - Ataur (Ghaziabad) line with Quad 10. Moose conductor
Length 219 Km 202 Km 58 Km 24X2 Km 24 Km 22 Km 16 Km 2 Km 16 Km 55 Km
229
SECTION- (L) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF CAPACITOR BANK 1.0 Technical particulars of capacitor bank is as follows: Nominal Voltage Highest System Voltage Design Voltage Bank Rating Bank Rating at design voltage Sub Bank rating 132kV 145kV 152kV 100 MVAR 132.6 MVAR 16.67MVAR
Capacitor bank should be provided with NCT protection and earthing blade for each group. The complete bank shall be controlled by a suitable circuit breaker. The capacitor bank switching control scheme shall be MANUAL. The capacitor banks shall be of out-door type having internal fuse units, Suitable for operation in the specified climatic conditions and also suitable for mounting on steel racks. The mounting arrangement: could be either a Single /Two or Three tier arrangement. Each group of capacitor banks shall be connected in star formation, as per the protection scheme offered, with their neutral points ungrounded. The number of parallel units in each series group shall be such that failure of one unit shall not preferably create more than 10% voltage rise on other units in the bank. The details of over-voltage imposed on remaining unit with the blowing off of each internal fuses should be clearly mentioned. It should be clearly mentioned as to how many elements can go off without the need to trip the capacitor bank. Individual capacitor units of banks shall be self contained, outdoor type, having single to two bushing with a rating as per manufacturers practice to give the required total bank capacity at 50Hz. The bushings should be of porcelain and shall be joined to the case by solder-sealing method. The creepage distance of bushing shall not be less than 31mm/kV of voltage stress appearing between the terminal & the case. The Bushings shall be suitable for heavily polluted atmospheric conditions.
Volume-II (Section-L), Capacitor Bank
230
The impregnant shall be non-PCB & the impregnation shall be carried out under high degree of vacuum and the units shall be of totally sealed type. Each capacity unit shall be provided with an internal discharge resister designed to drain out the residual charge upto 50 volts within 10 minutes after disconnection from supply. Each capacitor unit shall have internal fuses suitably rated for load current. Each unit shall satisfactorily operate at 130% rated KVAR including the factor of over voltage due to harmonic currents and manufacturing tolerances. Terminal and mounting arrangement may be in accordance with Manufacturers standard practice. The containers of capacitor units shall all be of sufficiently thick sheet Steel, painted with suitable anti-rust synthetic enamel primer paint and two finishing coats of paint as per the manufacturers standard practices. The capacitor banks shall conform to latest edition of IS:13925(Part 1), 1998/IEC70. 2.0 Mounting racks The mounting racks shall be fabricated from suitable steel section duly hot dip galvanised to impart durable weather resistance. The racks shall be complete with rack insulators foundation bolts and other hardwares etc., for assembly into complete banks. Suitable terminal connectors/ clamps for connection with other equipments shall also be provided. All various parts including Bolts & Nuts shall be hot dip galvanised. The height of the racks of capacitor banks shall be such that for making electrical connections with other equipment, proper electrical clearance is maintained. However, the capacitor banks shall be enclosed inside the pale fencing. 3.0 Tests: The equipment shall comply with the requirements of type test as per IS: 2834 and copies of these type test reports should be submitted along with offer. The capacitor offered must have been also endurance tested as per IEC: 871-2/IS: 13925 and copies of reports submitted alongwith offer. The capacitors under the package shall also be type tested as per relevant IS/IEC. Acceptance & routine test: The equipment shall comply with all routine and acceptance tests as per IS 2834. Sampling to be done as per IS 2834. Volume-II (Section-L), Capacitor Bank 231
4.0
132kV/ 33 kV Capacitor Bank Relay Panel i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Capacitor bank unbalance relay A two pole IDMT over current relay & single pole IDMT earth fault relay shall be provided Over voltage relay High speed tripping relay. 2-Trip circuit supervision relay for pre and post closing supervision of trip coil. Suitable size cable gland.
Volume-II (Section-L), Capacitor Bank
232
SECTION-M TECHNICAL DETAILS OF ILLUMINATION SYSTEM 1.0 1.1 LIGHTING SYSTEM LIGHTING SYSTEM FOR SUBSTATION The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of various lighting fixtures complete with lamps, supports and accessories, ceiling fans complete with electronic regulators, exhaust fans for toilets and pantry & accessories, lighting panels, lighting poles complete with distribution boxes, galvanized rigid steel /rigid PVC conduits, lighting wires, G.I. Earthwire, receptacles, tag block & telephone socket, switchboards, switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes complete with accessories, Bidder shall quote unit rate against each item and payment shall be made as per final executed quantity. Street lighting of switchyard shall be done by Solar based energy efficient pole mounted lighting system to achieve the desired lux level specified. Technical specifications of Solar based energy efficient pole mounted lighting system are attached at Annexure-III. The bidder shall quote unit rate for solar street lighting and the payment shall be made as per final executed quantity. In addition to Solar lighting, all street lighting shall also be connected with normal lighting system. A suitable changeover arrangement shall be provided in each street pole to switchover to normal lighting in case of prolonged outage of solar grid. The entire control room building, fire fighting pump house lighting shall be done by LED based low power consumption luminaries to achieve desired lux level specified. The bidder shall quote on lumpsum basis on the basis of design criteria specified for each control room building and Fire Fighting pump house. The lighting of conference room and control room in the control room building shall be powered by solar grid lighting arrangement. A changeover in the panel shall be provided to switchover on normal lighting in case of requirement. The execution of entire arrangement including design, solar grid interface with existing distribution, associated electrical panel, VRLA battery set, cabling etc shall be in the scope of the bidder. 1.2 i) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AC Normal Lighting
Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System
233
AC lights will be connected to AC lighting panels. All the lights connected to the AC lighting system in different areas will be connected to the main lighting distribution boards. ii) AC Emergency Lighting This system will be available in control room building, Fire fighting pump house, & switchyard. AC lighting load will be connected to this system which will be normally ON. The lighting panels of this system will be connected to the Emergency lighting board which is fed from diesel generator during the emergency. 25% of lighting fixtures shall be connected on AC emergency lighting. iii) D.C. Emergency lighting A few DC emergency lighting fixtures operated on the DC system will be provided in the strategic locations including staircase, corridors, electrical rooms, Battery charger room, LT switchgear room in control room building, and Fire fighting pump house so that the operating personnel can safely find their way even during emergency of a total AC failure. These lights will be normally 'OFF' and will be switched 'ON' automatically when under voltage occurs in the AC main lighting distribution board. GLS lamp down lighters in false ceiling area and Bulkhead fixtures in non false ceiling area to be used. iv) Exit Lightings All Exit lightings in the buildings shall be fed by DC lighting panels. All necessary wiring and its termination shall be in the contractors scope. v) The lighting layout for and around Control Room Cum Administrative Office Building & Fire fighting Pump House indicating the type & BOQ for items shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for owners approval during detailed engineering. The lux levels to be maintained shall be as per following: AVERAGE LUX LEVEL S.No. 1. AREA S.No. Area Control Room i) Building, Fire Fighting ii) Pump house iii) Control Room Conference room Battery room, Passage, 100 Lux Pantry, Toilets, Corridors etc All other rooms 200 Lux Average Lus Level At Floor Level & 350 Lux
234
The minimum lux level to average lux level ratio should not be less than 0.6 (i.e Emin/Eav> 0.6). The maintenance factor for indoor illumination design shall be considered as 0.8. The surface reflectance for ceiling/wall/floor shall be 50/30/10. The contractor shall submit detailed calculation for reaching the above Lux level for Employers approval during detailed engineering. Contractor shall conform the Lux levels at different locations of the control room building and fire fighting pump house by measurement. vi) Ceiling fans (1400 mm sweep, AC 230 volts ) shall be provided in , fire fighting pump house and non AC rooms in the control room building as per the requirements. Wall mounted fans shall be provided in the conference room, control room, shift manager and substation incharge rooms in control room building. Exhaust fans shall be provided in toilets and pantry. vii) One no. of aluminum ladder of each size shall be supplied by the contractor for maintenance purpose. viii) The following specific areas are included in the scope of lighting: (a) Switchyard Area. (b) Switchyard Control Room cum Administrative Office Building (c) Fire fighting pump house (d) Street lighting (Street lighting shall be done using Solar based energy efficient pole mounted lighting system) (e) DG area lighting (f) LT Transformer area
ix) For Outdoor Illumination The switchyard and street lighting, detailed drawings showing the lighting layout and Electrical distribution diagram shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for approval. The above layout drawings will include disposition and location of lighting fixtures, receptacles, etc. x) For Indoor Illumination The conduit layout drawing for substation buildings based on the civil tender drawings, Electrical distribution diagram for substation buildings, & for substation yard etc. shall be prepared by the Contractor. All wiring including telephone wiring (tinned two pair copper) shall be in concealed conduit. Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System 235
Concealed MS junction boxes for sockets and light points shall be provided in all the rooms of Control Room cum Administrative Office Building and Fire Fighting pump house. In case where false ceiling surface conducting is permissible, all down run conduits will be concealed in wall below the false ceiling. xi) Each cable run shall be tagged with number that appear in the cable schedules. Cables shall be tagged at their entrance and/or exit from any piece of equipment, junction or pull box, floor opening etc. xii) The tag shall be made up of aluminum with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable by not less than two turns of G.I. wire. Cable tags shall be rectangular in shape for power cables and circular shape for control cables. xiii) Location of cables laid directly under ground shall be indicated clearly by cable marker made of galvanised iron plate embedded in concrete block. xiv) The location of underground cable joints if any, shall be clearly indicated with cable marker with an additional inscription "cable joint". xv) The marker, which is a concrete block, shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every change of direction. It shall also be located on both sides of the road or drain crossing. 2.0 2.1 LIGHTING SYSTEM FOR TOWNSHIP The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 415 V, 400Amp, Main Township Distribution board/Energy meter Boards/Flat DBs etc Power and Control cables, various lighting fixtures complete with lamps, supports and accessories, ceiling fans complete with electronic regulators, exhaust fans for toilets and pantry & accessories, lighting panels, lighting poles complete with distribution boxes, galvanized rigid steel/PVC conduits, lighting wires, G.I. Earthwire, receptacles, tag block & telephone socket, bells, boxes for telephone/television & Airconditioners points, switchboards, switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes for various type of quarters, parking, pump house, recreation centre and transit camp associated with township. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The township lighting system shall comprise of the following: 2.3 EXTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION WORKS The entire External Electrification work including connection to various quarters, recreation centres & transit camp associated with township including street lighting of township shall Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System 236
be in the scope of the contractor. 415V,400A, Main Township distribution board shall be fed from 415V, 1000 A Main switchboard ( being supplied under LT switchgear package) located in MCC room of main Switchyard through 2-3 x300 sqmm XLPE insulated power cable from each source. Supply of MainTownship DB & associated 3 x300 sqmm XLPE cable alongwith its interconnection, installation etc shall be in the scope of contractor. The entire external electrification work comprising of feeder pillars, Cables and associated glands and lugs, steel tubular poles, street lights, MS junction boxes, GI pipes for cable protection, danger plates, Hume pipes, fire extinguishers, cable route markers etc as required shall be in the scope of the contractor.. The exact location of quarters, recreation centre, transit camp, streets etc shall be intimated to successful bidder during detailed engineering. The bidder shall quote unit prices for items under external electrification work as per bill of quantity for the estimated work. 2.4 INTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION WORKS The entire work has to be performed in line with standard electrical layouts. The scope shall broadly consist of entire concealed conduit work, wiring for lights/power/fans/telephones/cables & air-conditioners, supply and fixing of metal boxes, plates, switches, sockets, call bells, buzzers, exhaust fans, ceiling fans, MCBs, MCCBs, light fittings, energy meters boards & flat DBs etc as per the requirements of various quarters, recreation centres and transit camps. In addition to above complete earthing ( through separate earth pit) and lightning protection for each type of quarters ,recreation centre and transit camp shall be provided as per standard guidelines given in relevant Indian standards and code of practices. The complete drawing for earthing and lightning protection shall be submitted to owner for approval. The loop earthing inside the buildings shall be carried out with minimum 1Cx1.5 sqmm PVC stranded Copper wire . All materials required or earthing and lightning protection of township buildings shall be in the scope of contractor. The bidder shall quote lumpsum prices for each type of quarters, recreation centre and transit camp separately, including entire scope pertaining to lighting system, earthing and lightning protection. Any item not specifically outlined in the layouts and specifications enclosed herein shall necessarily be included by the contractor as per applicable buildings codes, statutory electricity rules and code of practices for the completion of scope. 3.0 3.1 DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS FOR SUBSTATION LIGHTING The Contractor shall supply and install the following equipment and accessories in accordance with the specification. Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System 237
3.1.1 i)
LIGHTING PANELS OUTDOOR 415 AC lighting panel with 415V, 63A, 3 phase 4 wire bus and one no. 63A, TPN, MCB with neutral unit as incomer and 20A, SP MCB as outgoing feeders, the details are as follows. Type Of Panel ACP 2 Description Outdoor Detail Of Outgoing Feeders
6 nos- 20 A single pole MCB and 3 No. 32 A Triple pole MCB with Neutral and suitable timer and contactor for automatic switching. Outdoor Street lighting Panel 3 nos.-32A Triple pole MCB ACP 3 with Neutral with suitable timer and contactor for automatic switching Note: The number of outgoing feeders indicated above are the minimum. ii) INDOOR 415 V indoor AC lighting panel ,63 A 3 phase 4 wire bus and one number 63 amp FP MCB with 300ma 63 A FP RCCB. Flush mounted with per phase isolation and LED indication lamps. The DB will be flush mounted and double door type. Type Of Panel ACP 1 Description Indoor Detail Of Outgoing Feeders 18 nos outgoing ,16 Amps SP MCB
220V DC indoor type change over board and 220V DC 32A two wire bus and one 32A contractor backed up by 32A double pole MCB as incomer. The panel shall have local push button controls. Following are the various types of panels required with control timer.
Type Of Panel DCP
Description Indoor
Detail Of Outgoing Feeders 6 nos outgoing ,16 Amps DP MCB
iii)
Sub-Lighting Panels Type Of Panel Description Detail Of Outgoing Feeders
238
SLP
Outdoor
4 pole 32A Isolator suitable for 415V, 50 cycles AC supply, wlith LILO facility using 8 nos terminal blocks suitable for cable upto 16 mm sq cable Enclosure shall be suitable for outdoor use with IP-55 degree of protection as per IS:13947 (Part-1).
3.1.2
Lighting Fixtures Please Refer Annexure-1
3.1.3
Receptacles Type Receptacle RO RP RI Of Description Outdoor Outdoor Indoor Detail Of Outgoing Feeders Outdoor 15A, 240V, Receptacle 2 pole, 3- pin type 63A, 415V, Interlocked switch socket, receptacle 5/15A, 240V, Receptacle 3-pin type ( Modular)
3.1.4
Switch Boards Modular type switches, 5/15 Amp. Receptacles.
3.1.5
Conduits And Accessories Galvanised Rigid steel or Rigid PVC conduits of 20/25 /32 mm for Lighting and Telephone wiring
3.1.6 3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9
Junction Boxes - with 5 Nos.of terminal blocks Lighting Poles - (Type A1 poles & Type E1 poles) FANS-1400 mm Sweep with Electronic regulator and 450 mm Wall Mounted fans Maintenance Equipment i) ii) A type Aluminium ladder of 3 mtr vertical height. Cartwheel mounted aluminium ladder Vertical Extendable from 5.1m to 11m.
3.1.10 Receptacles a) All receptacles shall be of cast steel/aluminium, heavy duty type, suitable for 239
fixing on wall/column and complete with individual switch. Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System
b)
In general the receptacles to be installed are of the following types : i) Type RO-15A, 240V, 2 pole, 3 pin type with third pin grounded, metal clad with gasket having cable gland entry suitable for 2Cx6 sq.mm. PVC/aluminium armoured cable and a metallic cover tied to it with a metallic chain and suitable for installation in moist location and or outdoor. The switch shall be of rotary type. Receptacles shall be housed in an enclosure made out of 2 mm thick Gl sheet with hinged doors with padlocking arrangements. Door shall be lined with good quality gasketing. This shall conform to IP-55. ii) Type RI The 5/15 amp 6 pin receptacles with switches will be of Modular type with flush type switches and electroplated metal enclosures of approved make iii) Type RP - 63A, 415V, 3 phase, 4 pin interlocked plug and switch with earthing contacts. Other requirements shall be same as type RO. The receptacle shall be suitable for 3.5C x 35/3.5Cx70 sq.mm. aluminium conductor cable entry and shall also be suitable for loop-in and loop out connection of cables of identical size. Receptacle shall be suitable for outdoor application. Receptacles shall be housed in a box made out of 2mm thick G.I. sheet, with hinged door with padlocking arrangement. Door shall be lined with good quality gasketing. This shall conform to IP55
3.1.11 Lighting Panels (L.P.) i) Each panel shall be provided with one incoming triple pole MCB with neutral link and outgoing miniature circuit breakers as per clause 3.0. The panels shall conform to IS-8623. ii) Constructional Features a) Panels shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust, weather and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be of thickness not less than 2.00 mm (cold rolled) smoothly finished, levelled and free from flaws. Stiffners shall be provided wherever necessary. The indoor lighting panels will be ready made DB of minimum 1.6 mm sheet thickness . b) The panels shall be of single front construction, front hinged and front connected, suitable for either floor mounting on channels, sills or on
240
walls/columns by suitable M.S. brackets. Indoor panels in control room shall be flush mounted. c) Panels shall have a dead front assembly provided with hinged door(s) and out door panels will be with padlocking arrangement with single key supplied in duplicate. d) All out door panels, removable covers, doors and plates shall be gasket all around with neoprene gaskets. e) The outdoor panels shall be suitable for cable/conduit entry from the top and bottom. Suitable removable cable gland-plate shall be provided on the top and bottom of panels. Necessary number of double compression cable gland shall be supplied, fitted on to this gland plate. The glands shall be screwed on top and made of tinned brass. f) The panels shall be so constructed as to permit free access to connection of terminals and easy replacement of parts. g) Each panel shall have a caution notice fixed on it. h) Each panel will be provided with directory holder in which printed and laminated as built circuit directory would be kept inside a document holder/pasted at site. i) Each Outdoor lighting panel shall be provided with one no. ON indicating lamp for each phase alongwith fuses.For indoor lighting panels din mounted phase indication lamps will be provided , mounted along side of the MCB j) Main Bus Bars Bus bars shall be of aluminium alloy conforming to IS:5082 and shall have adequate cross-section to carry the rated continuous and withstand short circuit currents. Maximum operating temperature of the bus bars shall not exceed 85 deg. C. The bus bars shall be able to withstand a fault level of 9 kA for 1 sec. for AC panels and 4 KA for 1 sec. for DC panels.The Indoor lighting panels shall have copper bus bar iii) Junction Boxes a) The junction boxes shall be concealed type for indoor lighting and suitable for mounting on columns, lighting poles, structures etc., for outdoor lighting.
241
b) Junction boxes shall be of square/rectangular type of 1.6 mm sheet steel with minimum 6 mm thick pressure die cast aluminium material LM-6 and shall have bolted cover with good quality gasket lining. c) The junction box and cover of sheet steel construction shall be hot dip galvanised. d) The junction boxes shall be complete with conduit knockouts/threaded nuts and provided with terminal strips .The junction boxes shall be suitable for termination of Cable glands of dia 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm on all sides. The junction boxes shall be provided with 4 way terminals suitable for two numbers 10 sq. mm. wire & for street lighting/switchyard lighting suitable for 2 numbers 4C x 16 Sq.mm Al. cable. e) The junction boxes shall have the following indelible markings (i) Circuit Nos. on the top. (ii) Circuit Nos. with ferrules (inside) (iii) DANGER sign in case of 415 volt junction box. f) The junction boxes shall be weather proof type with gaskets conforming to IP 55 as per IS:13947 (Part I) . iv) Occupancy Sensors: Sufficient number of occupancy sensors shall be provided in the stairs area and corridors of control room cum administrative building. Each occupancy sensor shall be used for indoor use with time delay programmable in the minimum range of 1 sec. to 10 minutes to control the illumination in the area. v) Led Luminaires Indicative models of LED luminaries are indicated in Annexure-I. The offered luminaries shall have minimum 50 lumens/watt capacity( ie ratio of total output lumens & input power) including driver. The quantity of these luminaries shall be decided on the basis of design criteria specified and lux level required at various rooms/locations. The bidder shall submit complete type test certificates & photometry reports of offered luminaries duly certified/conducted at accredited laboratory for owners acceptance. The luminaries / drivers should generally comply with following relevant standards. 1) CISPR 15/ EN 55015 (for RFI / EMI) 2) IEC 61347 2 13 (for safety) Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System 242
3) IEC 62384 (for performance of controlgear) 4) IEC 61547 (for EMC immunity requirements) 5) IEC 61000- 3 -2 (for harmonics) 4.0 DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS FOR TOWNSHIP LIGHTING 415V, 400 Amp Main Township Distribution Board:400 Amp Main Township Distribution Board required for township lighting system shall conform to standard technical specification for LT switchgear. 4.1 Power and Control Cables:Power and Control cables required under township lighting shall conform to standard technical specification, Section-Power and Control cables annexed with bidding documents. Power and Control cables shall be sourced from approved makes of Power Grid for substation packages. 4.2 Earthing & Lightning Protection:Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and Codes of practice and Regulations existing in the locality where the system is installed. a) b) Code of practice for Earthing IS: 3043 Code of practice for the protection of Building and allied structures against lightning IS: 2309. c) 5.0 5.1 Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments.
DESCRIPTION OF COMMON ITEMS FOR LIGHTING LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES 5.1.1 General All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed for continuous operation under atmospheric conditions existing at site, without reduction in the life or without any deterioration of materials, internal wiring. 5.1.2 Temperature Rise All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed to have a low temperature rise to the relevant Indian Standards. The design ambient temperature shall be taken as 50 deg.C. 5.1.3 Supply Voltage 243
Lighting fixtures and accessories meant for 240V A.C. operation shall be suitable for operation on 240V A.C. 50Hz, supply voltage variation of 10%, frequency variation of 5% and combined voltage and frequency variation of 10%. Lighting fixture and accessories meant for 220V DC operation shall be suitable for operation on 220V DC with variation between 190 to 240 Volts. 5.1.4 a) Lighting Fixtures The lighting fixtures shall be Philips or Bajaj or Crompton Greaves make only except for LED luminaries for which make has been specified elsewhere in this section. The different types of lighting fixtures are also indicated elsewhere in this Section. b) All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The finish of the fixtures shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by reflection. c) All lighting fixtures shall be complete with fluorescent tubes / incandescent lamps/mercury vapour/sodium vapour lamps as specified and shall be suitably wired up. d) All flourescent lamp fixture shall be complete with all accessories like ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors, lamps, starters, holders etc. e) High beam fixtures shall be suitable for pendant mounting and flood lights shall have suitable base plate / frame for mounting on steel structural member. Hook mounted high beam fixtures are not acceptable. f) Each lighting fixture shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connection to 16 SWG GI earthing conductors. g) All light reflecting surfaces shall have optimum light reflecting co-efficient such as to ensure the overall light output as specified by the manufacturer. h) Height of fixtures should be such that it is easy to replace the lamps with normal ladder/stool. In case the ceiling height is very high, the fixtures may be placed on the walls for ground lighting. 5.2 ACCESSORIES 5.2.1 Lamp holders and Starter Holders (a) Lamp holders/starter holders for fluorescent tubes shall be of the spring loaded, low contact resistance, bi-pin rotor type, resistant to wear and suitable for operation at the specified temperature, without deterioration in insulation value,
244
contact resistance or retention of the lamp/starter. They shall hold the lamp/starter in position under normal condition of shock and vibration. (b) Lamp holders/starter for incandescent lamps and HPMV/HPSV lamps shall be of screwed type, manufactured in accordance with relevant standard and designed to give long and satisfactory service. 5.2.2 Ballasts a) All HPSV/HPMV/Metal halide lamp fixtures shall be provided with wire wound ballasts. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with high frequency electronic ballasts.The Ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with relevant standard and function satisfactorily under site condition specified. The ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and low power loss. b) Ballasts shall be mounted using self locking anti-vibration fixing and shall be easy to remove without dismantling the fixtures. They shall be totally enclosed units. c) The wire-wound ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy duty type, filled with thermosetting insulating moisture repellent polyester compound filled under pressure or vacuum. The ballast wiring shall be of copper wire. They shall be free from hum. Ballasts which produce humming sound shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor. Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapour/ HPSV lamps shall be provided with suitable tappings to set the voltage within the range specified. End connections and taps shall be brought out in a suitable terminal block, rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure. d) Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi-lamp fixtures. e) High frequency electronic ballasts shall be capable of satisfactory performance in adverse environment like that of EHV substation. Ballasts shall consist of AC/DC converter, high frequency power oscillator and low pass filter. The ballasts shall be suitable for use of nominal voltage of 240V +/- 10%, 50 Hz supply. The filter circuit shall suppress the feedback of high frequency signals to the mains. The ballast shall be rated for 36/40W fluorescent fixtures. The ballasts shall confirm to IEC 68-2-6FC, IEC 929 for performance, IEC 928 for safety and EN 55015, EN 55022A for RFI and EN 61003. 5.2.3 Capacitors
245
a) The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected across the supply of individual lamp circuits. b) Power factor of fluorescent lamp fixtures with HF electronic ballast shall not be less than 0.90 and that of High pressure Sodium Vapour, Mercury Vapour and Metal Halide lamp fixtures shall not be less than 0.85. The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as specified and shall have a value of capacitance so as to correct the power factors of its corresponding lamp circuit to the extent of 0.98 lag. c) The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in a metal enclosure. 5.2.4 Lamps a) General Lighting Services (GLS) lamps shall be provided with screwed caps and shall be of 'clear' type unless otherwise specified. b) The Bidder shall furnish typical wiring diagram for Fluorescent, HPMV & HPSV fitting including all accessories. The diagram shall include technical details of accessories i.e. starters, chokes, capacitors etc. c) Flexible conduits if required, for any fixture shall be deemed to be included in Contractors scope. 5.2.5 SWITCH AND SWITCHBOARD (a) All Switch board/boxes, 5/15 Amp Receptacles and electronic fan regulators located in office/building areas shall be modular flush mounted type or brick wall with only the switch knob projecting outside. (b) Switch boards/boxes shall have conduit knock outs on all the sides. (c) The exact number of switches including regulator for fans and layout of the same in the switchboard shall be to suit the requirement during installation. (d) The maximum number of luminaires, controlled by one no 6 amp switch would 4 nos. For DC fixtures there will be no switch and the same shall be directly controlled from DC LP (e) The luminaires shall be wired in such a fashion that luminaires on each phase are evenly distributed all over the room. 5.2.6 CONDUITS & CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
246
a) The conduits shall conform to IS:9537 or IS 3419 as applicable. All steel conduits shall be seemed by welding, shall be of heavy gauge and shall be hot dip galvanised. b) Flexible conduits wherever required shall be made with bright, cold rolled annealed and electro-galvanised mild steel strips or PVC/Plastic. c) All conduits accessories shall conform to relevant IS and shall be hot dip galvanized or High quality virgin PVC and shall be ISI marked. 5.2.7 TERMINAL BLOCKS Each terminal shall be suitable for terminating upto 2 Nos. 10 sq.mm. stranded Aluminium Conductors without any damage to the conductors or any looseness of connections. Terminal strips provided in street - lighting poles shall be suitable for terminating upto 2 nos. 4C x 16 sq. mm aluminium cables. 5.2.8 PULL OUT BOXES a) The pull out boxes shall be concealed type for indoor lighting and suitable for mounting on column, structures etc., for outdoor lighting. The supply of bolts, nuts and screws required for the erection shall be included in the installation rates. b) The pull out boxes shall be circular of cast iron or 16 SWG sheet steel and shall have cover with good quality gasket lining. c) The pull out boxes and cover shall be hot dip galvanised. d) The pull out boxes shall be completed with conduit knock outs/threaded hubs and provided at approximately 3 meters intervals in a conduit run. 5.2.9 Residual Current Circuit Breakerss (RCCB) For indoor panels 63A 4pole 300 ma RCCB conforming IS 12640 will be provided along with incomer 5.2.10 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) a) The miniature circuit breakers shall be suitable for manual closing, opening, automatic tripping under overload and short circuit. The MCBs shall also be trip free. MCB of Type C tripping characterstics as per IS 8828 will be used for Switchyard lighting. b) Single pole as well as three pole versions shall be furnished as required in the Schedule of Lighting Panels.
247
c) The MCBs and panel MCCB together shall be rated for full fault level. In case the MCB rating is less than the specified fault level the bidder shall co-ordinate these breaker characteristics with the back up MCCB in such a way that if fault current is higher than breaker rating, the MCCB should blow earlier than the breaker. If the fault current is less than MCB breaking capacity, MCB shall operate first and not the incomer MCCB. d) The MCBs shall be suitable for housing in the lighting panels and shall be suitable for connection with stranded copper wire connection at both the incoming and outgoing side by copper lugs or for bus bar connection on the incoming side. e) The terminals of the MCBs and the open close and trip conditions shall be clearly and indelibly marked. f) The tenderer shall check and co-ordinate the ratings of MCBs with respect to starting characteristics of discharge lamps. The vendor has to furnish overload and short circuit curve of MCB as well as starting characteristics curves of lamps for Employers approval. g) The MCB shall generally conform to IS:8828. 5.2.11 CONTACTORS Contactors shall be of the full voltage, direct-on line air break, single throw, electromagnetic type. They shall be provided with atleast 2-NC and 2NO auxiliary contacts. Contactor shall be provided with the three element, positive acting, ambient temperature compensated time lagged, hand reset type thermal overload relay with adjustable settings to suit the rated current. Hand reset button shall be flush with the front of the cabinet and suitable for resetting with starter compartment door closed. The Contactor shall be suitable for switching on Tungsten filament lamp also. The bidder shall check the adequacy of the Contactors rating wire with respect to lighting load. 5.2.12 PUSH BUTTONS All push buttons shall be of push to actuate type having 2 NO and 2 NC self Technical Specification, make. reset contacts. They shall be provided with integral escutcheon plates engraved with their functions. Push buttons shall be of reputed
248
5.2.13 LABELS a) The lighting panels shall be provided on the front with panel designation labels on a 3 mm thick plastic plate of approved type. The letter shall be black engraved on white back ground. b) All incoming and outgoing circuits shall be provided with labels. Labels shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicold. Labels shall have white letters on black or dark blue background. 5.2.14 EARTHING TERMINALS Panels shall be provided with two separate and distinct earthing terminals suitable to receive the earthing conductors of size 50x6 G.S. Flat. 5.2.15 Type test reports for following tests on all lighting panels shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of SEC-B OF VOL-1 (i) (ii) Wiring continuity test High voltage (2.5 KV for 1 minute) and insulation test
(iii) Operational test (iv) Degree of protection (not less than IP-55 test on outdoor Lighting Panels and IP-52 test on indoor Lighting Panels as per IS 13947 (part I)) (v) Heat run test 5.2.16. LIGHTING POLES a) The Contractor shall supply, store and install the following types of steel tubular lighting poles required for street lighting. i) Type A1 Street Lighting Pole - for one fixture
ii) Type E1 Post top lantern pole - for one fixture b) In front of control room building , and Fire Fighting Buildings, decorative post top lantern (Type E1) poles and Bollards shall be installed. c) Lighting poles shall be complete with fixing brackets and junction boxes. Junction boxes should be mounted one meter above ground level. d) The lighting poles shall be coated with bituminous preservating paint on the inside as well as on the embedded outside surface. Exposed outside surface shall be coated with two coats of metal primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium). Volume-II (Section-M), Illumination System 249
e)
The galvanised sheet steel junction box for the street lighting poles shall be completely weather proof conforming to IP-55 and provided with a lockable door and HRC fuse mounted on a fuse carrier and fuse base assembly. The fuses & junction box shall be as specified in the specification. However, terminals shall be stud type and suitable for 2 nos. 16 sq.mm. cable.
f)
Wiring from junction box at the bottom of the pole to the fixture at the top of the pole shall be done through 2.5 sq. mm wire.
g)
Distance of centre of pole from street edge should be approximately 1000 to 1200 mm.
h)
Earthing of the poles should be connected to the switchyard main earth mat wherever it is available and the same should be earthed through 3M long, 20 mm dia, earth electrode.
5.2.17 CEILING & WALL MOUNTED FANS AND REGULATORS a) The contractor shall supply and install 1400 mm sweep ceiling fans complete with electronic regulator and switch, suspension rod, canopy and accessories.The wall mounted fans shall be of 400 mm sweep b) The contractor shall supply and install the switch, electronic regulator and board for mounting switch and electronic regulator for celling fans. The regulator will be housed in common switchboard for lighting and shall be of similar make and model as that of modular switches. c) Winding of the fans and regulators shall be insulated with Class-E insulating material. Winding shall be of copper wire. d) e) Electronic regulator with stepped control shall be provided. Ceiling Fans and Wall mounted Fans shall be of Alstom / Crompton Greaves / Bajaj Electricals / Usha Electricals make. 5.2.18 LIGHTING WIRES a) b) The wiring used for lighting shall be standard products of reputed manufacturers. The wires shall be of 1100 V grade, PVC insulated product of reputed manufacturers. c) The conductor sizes for wires used for point wiring beyond lighting panels shall be 2.5 sq.mm, 4 sq.mm, 6 sq.mm and 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper wire.
250
d)
The wires used for connection of a lighting fixture from a nearest junction box or for loop-in loop-out connection between two fluorescent fixtures shall be single core copper stranded conductor, 1100V grade flexible PVC insulated cords, unsheathed, conforming to IS:694 with nominal conductor cross sectional areas of 2.5 sq. mm.
e)
The wires shall be colour coded as follows: Red for R - Phase Yellow for Y - Phase Blue for B - Phase Black for Neutral White for DC (Positive) Grey for DC (Negative)
5.2.19 LIGHTING SYSTEM INSTALLATION WORKS i) General In accordance with the specified installation instructions,Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all the electrical equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanship manner so that it is level, plumb square and properly aligned and oriented. All apparatus, connections and cabling shall be designed so as to minimise risk of fire or any damage which will be caused in the event of fire. ii) Conduit System a) Contractor shall supply, store and install conduits required for the lighting installation as specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not limited to pull out boxes (as specified in specification ordinary and inspection tees and elbow, checknuts, male and female bushings (brass or galvanised steel), caps, square headed make plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes, conduits terminal boxes, glands, gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the Contractor. The conduit fittings shall be of the same material as conduits. The contractor shall also supply 20 mm mm PVC conduit and accessories for telephone wiring.
251
b)
All unarmoured cables/wires shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting fixtures, receptacles. etc.
c) d)
Size of conduit shall be suitably selected by the Contractor. Conduit support shall be provided at an interval of 750 mm for horizontal runs and 1000 mm for vertical runs.
e)
Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by saddles or U-bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete or brick work by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonary or concrete for conduit support is not acceptable.
f)
Where conduits are along with cable trays they shall be clamped to supporting steel at an interval of 600 mm.
g)
For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphaltbase compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.
h)
For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate wiring.
i)
Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock nut inside and outside the box.
j)
Conduits joints and connections shall be made through water-tight and rust proof by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for application on embedded conduit and red lead for exposed conduit.
k)
The entire metallic/PVC conduit system, shall be embedded, electrically continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit.
l)
Conduits and fittings shall be properly protected during construction period against mechanical injury. Conduit ends shall be plugged or capped to prevent entry of foreign material.
iii)
Wiring
252
a)
Wiring shall be generally carried out by PVC insulated wires in conduits. All wires in a conduit shall be drawn simultaneously. No subsequent drawings of wires is permissible.
b)
Wires shall not be pulled through more than two equivalent 90 deg. bends in a single conduit run. Where required, suitable junction boxes shall be used.
c)
Wiring shall be spliced only at junction boxes with approved type terminal strip.
d)
For lighting fixtures, connection shall be teed off through suitable round conduit or junction box, so that the connection can be attended without taking down the fixture.
e)
For vertical run of wires in conduit, wires shall be suitably supported by means of wooden/hard rubber plugs at each pull/junction box.
f) g) iv)
Maximum two wires can be terminated to each way of terminal connections. Separate neutral wires are to be provided for each circuit.
Lighting Panels a) The lighting panels shall be erected at the locations to be finalised during detailed engineering. b) Suitable foundations/supporting structures for all outdoor type lighting panels shall be provided by the Contractor.
v)
Foundation & civil works a) Foundation for street lighting poles, panel foundation and transformer foundation shall be done by the Contractor.. b) All final adjustment of foundation levels, chipping and dressing of foundation surfaces, setting and grouting of anchor bolts, sills, inserts and flastening devices shall be carried out by the Contractor including minor modification of civil works as may be required for erection. c) Any cutting of masonary / concrete work, which is necessary shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost and shall be made good to match the original work.
253
ANNEXURE-1 S.No. Type of Lighting Fixture F1 Description Philips Catalogue No TMS 122/228 HF CGL Catalogue No T5GP228EB Bajaj Catalogue No BTIR 228
1.
2x28W T5 type fluorescent lamps in industrial reflector type fixture, complete with accessories and suitable for pendent /surface mounting. 2x28 T5 energy efficient fluorescent lamps with low glare, mirror optics suitable for recess mounting type lighting fixture. 2x28W T5 energy efficient fluorescent lamps with low glare mirror optics suitable for pendent/surface mounting with all accessories Sleek and Functional electronic decobatten suitable for use with 1x'TLD'36W fluorescent lamp with dual tone end caps. Prephosphated & powder coated CRCA steel channel complete with all electrical accessories like electronic ballast, lamp holders all prewired up to a terminal block 60/100w GLS lamp in Bulkhead fixtures with Cast Aluminium alloy body, suitable for column, wall,and ceiling mounting finished stove enameled silver grey outside
2.
FF
TBS 088/228 C5 HF
TSCQ12228E B
BTMRA 228 MATT
3.
FL
TCS 398/228 D6 HF
---------------
BTSMU 228 MSS
4.
TL
TMS500/136 HF
DMLU14EB
BC1R136WEB
5.
IB
NXC101
IBH1110/BC
BJDB100BC
6.
BL
7.
SL
Aesthetic wall/ceiling mounted FMC21/113 luminaire suitable for 1x PL-C 13W OR 11W CFL. Low loss O.C. Copper ballast.Built in high gloss anodized reflector. Twin finish UV stabilised SAN diffuser for protection & elimination of lamp glare. FL343/118 Aesthetic ceiling mounted luminaire for Ecotone crystal/ Dcor CFL of 2x9W or 1x18W. ABS housing pre-wired with porcelain lampholder. Prephospated plated CRCA gear tray.
TLN11
BJC111
CBHE29
-------------
254
8.
BH
Bulkhead luminaire suitable for FXC 101/109 use with PL-S 9W CFL. Single piece pressure diecast aluminium & cover retaining Frame. Opal acrylic cover along with a gasket made of E.P.R. 2X9 Or 1x18 watt CFL bollard light for landscape lighting having FRP/LLDPE housing 2x18 watt CFL Downlighter with HF ballast suitable for recess mounting 1X13 WATT surface mounted CFL Incandescent GLS lamp down light FGC202 /118 FBH145/218L HF FCS100/113 DN622 SWF 330/1X400 RVP302/2x400 W SWF 330/1X250 SWF230/150 MHN-TD HPC-101/125 HPF SRX-51/150
ICBH10
BJBE19
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
BLD DLR DSM IF SF1
CFBL1229 DDLH218TG ----------------DDLV10BC FAI40IH BJFL FHD1424 FAI1125IH FAD1215IH/ MH MPT1112IL/B M/ES SSG2315IH.
BJBOL 03 29 CFL BJDR 65C 218 DL BJDS110/113C WEB BJDR 100W 400SV TS BJENF 22 250 SV TS BGEMF150MH DE BJDPTI MV 125
19* a)*
1 X 400W HPSV lamps in high flood lighting fixture with integral control gear SF2 2 X 400W HP sodium Vapour lamps in high flood lighting, nonintegral control gear: SF3 1 X 250W HPSV lamps in high flood lighting fixture with integral control gear: SF4 150W HP Metal halide MHNTD lamp in flood lighting fixture with integral control gear. SF5 125 HP MV Lamp in weather proof post top lantern for mounting on pole top SC 150W SON-T Tubular Sodium Vapour lamp in street lighting luminaire with toughned glass cover. LED LUMINIARIES Type Description I-LED1 2x2, luminaries with high efficacy and low power consumption suitable for general office lighting, conference room and cabins applications.
BGEST 150 SV
Phillips QUADRA LED BCS705 20xLXML/NW PSU-E-220240V BBS705 20xLXML/NW PSU-E-220240V BBS 805 2xLLM1800/ 840 PSU-E 220240V
Insta Power INSTA PRISMA 45W/OMEGA 45W
255
b)*
I-LED2
19W, Recessed type LED luminaries with high efficacy and low power consumption for passages, corridor and toilet areas. Street lighting luminaries
c)*
S-LED
LUX SPACE BBS480 1XDLED-4000 PSU-E 220240V WH BETA Power BRP320 1x24LEDHP/ CW PSU GR
INSTA DL12W-6SH
VERSAT-2-48
*The conventional luminaries shall also be offered as an alternative.
256
ANNEXURE-2 S.NO. 1. 2. ITEM TELEPHONE BOX/TELEVISION BOX FLAT DB TYPE A ABBREVIA TION TB DB ITEM DESCRIPTION MAKE(S)
Termination box for Approved makeS Television and Telephone 240V Indoor AC Distribution board, 63A or 32A, DP RCCB as Incomer with 12 Nos. 16A SP MCBs as outgoing. DB shall be flush mounted type. According to feeder details Modular switchboard with 5a switches as required MODULAR SWITCHBOARD WITH 5A TWO WAY SWITCH MODULAR SWITCHBOARD WITH 1 No. Socket and 5A SWITCHES AS REQUIRED Modular Socket Modular Socket Legrand/Hagger
3. 4. 5. 6.
METER DB TYPE-A & MB TYPE-B SWITCHBOARD WITHOUT SBA 6A SOCKET TWO WAY SWITCHBOARD SBB FOR STAIRS SWITCHBOARD WITH 6A SOCKET SBC
Approved makes Anchor/Crabtree Anchor/Crabtree Anchor/Crabtree
7. 8. 9. 10.
TELEPHONE POINT TP TELEVISION POINT TV
TP TV
Anchor/Crabtree Anchor/Crabtree
AIRCONDITIONER POINT RAC WITH 15A SWITCH 15A POWER POINT WITH RB 15A SWITCH 5A POWER POINT WITH 5A SWITCH CHANDELIER BELL PUSH BELL EXHAUST FAN CEILING FAN RA CH BP BELL EFC CFC
RAC Socket with Switch Anchor/Crabtree Metal clad Type Modular Socket with Anchor/Crabtree Switch Modular Socket with Switch Decorative fixture with 1 X 60 W GLS Lamp Modular Type Call Bell 300 mm sweep Trans'Air Anchor/Crabtree Any Reputed Make Anchor/Crabtree Anchor/Crabtree CGL/Bajaj/Usha
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
1200 mm sweep with CGL/Bajaj/Usha electronic regulator
257
ANNEXURE-3 SOLAR BASED ENERGY EFFICIENT POLE MOUTED STREET LIGHTING SYSTEM I. SCOPE A stand alone solar based energy efficient pole mounted street lighting system comprising of galvanized steel tubular pole, LED type light source, lead acid tubular type maintenance free battery, photovoltaic (PV) module (s), control electronics, inter-connecting wires / cables, Module mounting hardware, Battery box, any other item for safe and trouble free operation etc shall be provided with each unit.
II.
DUTY CYCLE The system should be designed to automatically switch ON at dusk. operate through out the night and automatically switch OFF at the dawn under average daily insolation of 5.5 kWh /sq.m. on a horizontal surface.
III.
LIGHT SOURCE i. The light source shall be of white LED type, single lamp or multiple lamps can be used. View angles shall be of wider range with a minimum of 120 degre and above above. The luminous performance of LEDs used should not be less than 50 lumen/watt including driver. LEDs which emit ultraviolet light is not acceptable. ii. The light output from the white LED light source should be constant throughout the duty cycle. iii. The lamps should be housed in an assembly suitable for outdoor use. The make, model number, country of origin and technical characteristics of white LEDs used in the lighting system must be furnished.
IV.
BATTERY i. ii. iii. The battery shall be of maintenance free lead acid tubular type. The battery will have a minimum rating of 12V, 75 Ah (at C/10) discharge rate. 75 % of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged & load cut off conditions.
V.
ELECTRONICS i. The inverter should be of quasi sine wave/sine wave type. with frequency in the range of 20 - 35 KHz. Half-wave operation is not acceptable.
258
ii. iii.
The total electronic efficiency should be at least 80 %. No blackening or reduction in the lumen output by more than 10% should be observed after 1000 ON/OFF cycles (two minutes ON followed by four minutes OFF is one cycle)
iv. v.
The idle current consumption should not be more than 10 mA Electronics should operate at 12 V and should have temperature compensation for proper charging of the battery throughout the year.
vi.
Necessary lengths of wires/cables and fuses should be provided. Wires and cables shall be of approved make and shall be BIS marked.
vii.
The PV module will be used to sense the ambient light level for switching ON and OFF the lamp.
VI.
PV MODULE (S) i. The PV module(s) shall contain single or multi crystalline silicon solar cells. Test reports for solar cells being offered shall be duly conducted at accredited laboratory. The module must be manufactured by a company, which has obtained a valid test certificate for module qualification as per prevailing IEC or BIS standards for any of the modules manufactured by that company. A copy of the test certificate must be submitted for owners acceptance. The power output of the module(s) under STC should be a minimum of 74 W Either two module; of minimum 37 W output each or one module of 74 W output should be used. ii. The operating voltage corresponding to the power output mentioned above should be 16.4 V. iii. iv. The open circuit voltage of the PV modules under STC should be at least 21.0 Volts. The terminal box on the module should have a provision for opening for replacing the cable if required v. A strip containing the following details should be laminated inside the module so as to be clearly visible from the front side. a) Name of the Manufacturer or distinctive Logo b) Model or type No c) Serial No & year of manufacturing.
VII.
ELECTRONIC PROTECTIONS
259
i.
Adequate protection is to be incorporated under no -load conditions e.g when the lamp is removed and the system is switched ON.
ii.
The system should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge conditions.
iii. iv.
Fuses should be provided to protect against short circuit conditions. A blocking diode should be provided as part of the electronics, to prevent reverse flow of current through the PV module(s), in case such a diode is not provided with the solar module (s)
v.
Full protection against open circuit accidental short circuit and reverse polarity should e provided.
vi. VIII.
The light output should remain constant with variations in the battery voltages.
MECHANICAL HARDWARE i. A metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) to be fixed on the pole to hold the SPV module(s) The frame structure should have provision to adjust its angle of inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45, so that the module(s) can be oriented at the specified tilt angle ii. The pole should be made of mild steel pipe with a height of 4 metres above the ground level, after grouting and final installation. The pole should have the provision to hold the we proof lamp housing It should be painted with a corrosion resistant paint. iii. A vented, acid proof and corrosion resistant painted metallic box for outdoor use should be provided for housing the battery.
IX.
OTHER FEATURES 1. The system should be provided with 2 LED indicators a green light to indicate charging in progress and a red LED to indicate deep discharge condition of the battery. The green LED should glow only when the battery is actually being charged 2. There will be a Name Plate on the system which will give a) b) 3. Name of the Manufacturer or Distinctive Logo Serial Number & year of manufacture
Components and parts used in the solar street lighting systems should conform to the latest BIS specifications, wherever such specifications are available and applicable.
4.
The PV module(s) will be warranted for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of supply and the street lighting system (including the battery) will be warranted for a 260
period of two years from the date of supply. The Warranty Card to be supplied with the system must contain the details of the system supplied. The manufacturers can also provide additional information about the system and conditions of warranty as necessary. 5. An Operation Instruction and Maintenance Manual , in English and the local language should be provided with the solar street lighting system. The following minimum details must be provided in the Manual a. b. c. d. e. f. About Photovoltaics About solar street lighting system - its components and expected performance About PV module About CFL About battery. Clear instructions about erection of pole and mounting of PV module and lamp housing assembly on the pole. g. h. i. j. About electronics. About charging and significance of indicators DOs and DONTs, Clear instructions on regular maintenance and trouble shooting of the solar street lighting system. k. Name and address of the contact person in case of non-functionality of the solar street lighting system.
Note: The conventional luminaries shall also be offered as an alternative.
261
SECTION- (N) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF SWITCHYARD ERECTION 1.0 GENERAL The detailed scope of work includes design, engineering, manufacture, testing at works, supply on for destination site basis, insurance, handling, storage, erection testing and commissioning of various items and works as detailed herein. This section covers the description of the following items. A. Supply of - String insulators and hardware - AAC / ACSR conductor - Galvanised Steel Earthwire - Aluminium Tubular Bus Bars - Spacers, Clamps & Connectors - Bus post insulators - Earthing & Earthing materials - Lightning protection materials - Cabling material - Other items B. 1.1 Erection Of all items
String Insulators & Hardware The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IEC-60383 and long rod insulators shall conform to IEC-60433. Insulator hardware shall conform to IS:2486. 1.1.1 i) Construction Features For porcelain insulators a) Suspension and tension insulators shall be wet process porcelain with ball and socket connection. Insulators shall be interchangeable and shall be suitable for forming either suspension or tension strings. Each insulator shall have rated strength markings on porcelain printed and applied before firing. b) Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection
262
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. c) Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects. 1.2 i) Long Rod Insulators As an alternative to disc insulator, Bidder can offer long rod porcelain/composite insulators strings, with suitable hardware. The combination should be suitable for application specified and should offer the identical/equivalent parameters as would be available from insulator string comprising disc insulators and hardware combination. ii) All constructional features specified at Clause 1.1.1 of this Section shall also apply to the long rod insulator string. 1.3 Tests In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the suspension and tension strings, insulator and hardware shall be subjected to the following type tests, acceptance tests and routine tests: 1.3.1 Type Tests on Insulator Strings: The test reports for following type tests shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section VOLUME-I, TR. a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control rings under wet condition as per IEC- 60383. b) Switching surge voltage withstand test [400 kV and above class only] under wet condition as per IEC-60383. c) Lightning Impulse voltage withstand test with corona control rings under dry condition as per IEC-60383 d) Voltage distribution test (Dry) The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The voltage across any disc shall not exceed 6.5% for 765 kV suspension and tension insulator strings, 9% and 10% for 400KV suspension string and tension insulator string respectively, 13% for 220KV suspension and tension insulator strings, 20% and 22% for 132KV suspension and tension insulator strings respectively. e) Corona Extinction Voltage test (Dry)
263
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall have a corona extinction voltage of not less than 508 kV (rms) for 765 kV, 320kV (rms) for 400kV and 156kV (rms) for 220kV line to ground under dry condition. There shall be no evidence of Corona on any part of the sample. The atmospheric condition during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC 60383. f) RIV Test (Dry) Under the conditions as specified under (e) above the insulator string alongwith complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below 2500 microvolts at 1 MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC line to ground voltage of 508 kV for 765 kV and 1000 microvolts at 1 MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC line to ground voltage of 320kV for 400kV and 156kV for 220kV string under dry conditions. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IS 8263/IEC 60437. g) Mechanical strength test The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fitting excluding arcing horn, corona control ring, grading ring, tension/suspension clamps shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to dismantle them by hand. Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded. 1.3.2 Type Tests on Insulators Type test report for Thermal Mechanical Performance tests as per IEC - 60575, Clause 3 / IEC: 61109, clause 5.1 (for composite long rod insulators) shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section - VOLUME-I, TR. 1.3.3 a) Acceptance Tests for Insulators: Visual examination as per IEC-60383/ IEC-61109 clause no. 7.2 (for composite long rod insulators). b) Verification of Dimensions as per IEC- 60383. 264
c) d) e) f)
Temperature cycle test as per IEC- 60383. Puncture Test as per IEC-60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators). Galvanizing Test as per IEC- 60383. Mechanical performance test as per IEC-60575 Cl. 4 / IEC-61109 clause no. 7.2 (for composite long rod insulators).
g) h) i) 1.3.4 a) b) c) d) e)
Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling as per IEC-60372(2). Porosity test as per IEC- 60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators). Thermal shock test as per IEC-60383 (Applicable only for glass insulators) Acceptance Test on Hardware Fitting Visual Examination as per Cl. 5.10 of IS:2486 (Part-I). Verification of Dimensions as per Cl. 5.8 of IS : 2486 (Part-I) Galvanising/Electroplating tests as per Cl. 5.9 of IS : 2486 (Part-I). Slip strength test as per Cl 5.4 of IS-2486 (part-I) Shore hardness test for the Elastometer (if applicable as per the value guaranteed by the Bidder).
f)
Mechanical strength test for each component (including corona control rings and arcing horns). The load shall be so applied that the component is stressed in the same way as it would be in actual service.
g) 1.3.5 a) b) c) 1.3.6 a)
Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling as per IEC -60372(2). Routine Test on Insulator Visual Inspection as per IEC-60383 Mechanical Routine Test as per IEC-60383 Electrical Routine Test as per IEC-60383 Routine Test on hardware Fittings Visual examination as per Cl 5.10 of IS : 2486 (Part-I) / IEC-61109 (for composite long rod insulators).
b)
Mechanical strength Test as per Cl. 5.11 of IS : 2486 (Part-I)/ IEC-61109 (for composite long rod insulators).
1.3.7 Test during manufacture on all Components as applicable on insulator Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection
265
a)
Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising: Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS : 209. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.
b)
Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable casting: The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable casting will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance Program.
1.3.8 a)
Test during manufacture on all components as applicable on hardware fittings: Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising: Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS : 209. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%
b)
Chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle for forgings: The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance Programme.
c)
Chemical analysis and mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated hardware: The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated hardware will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance programme.
1.4
Parameters 1.4.1 Disc Insulators 765/400/220/132 kV a) b) Type of insulators Size of insulator units (mm) : : Anti Fog type 255x145 or 280x145
266
c)
Electro mechanical strength
120 kN/ 160kN(As per technical requirements)
d)
Creepage distance of individual
430 mm insulator units (minimum and as required to meet total creepage distance)
e)
Markings i) For Porcelain insulators
: : Markings on porcelain shall be printed and applied before firing
ii) For toughened glass
Markings shall be done insulators on initial parts
f)
Power frequency puncture
1.3 times the actual wet withstand voltage flashover voltage.
*Long rod porcelain/composite insulators should conform to equivalent electrical and mechanical parameters. 1.4.2 S.NO. 1. INSULATOR STRING DESCRIPTION Power frequency withstand voltage of the complete string with corona control ring (wet) KV rms Lightning impulse withstand Voltage of string with corona control rings (dry) - kVp Switching surge withstand voltage of string with corona control rings (wet) - kVp Minimum corona extinction voltage level of string with Corona Control rings (dry) kV Maximum RIV level in micro volts of string with Corona Control rings at 508 kV (rms) for 765 kV, 320 kV (rms) for 400 kV string and 156 kV for 220 kV string across300 Ohms resistor at 1 MHz 765kV 870 400kV 680 220kV 460 132kV 275
2. 3. 4. 5.
2100 1550 508 2500
1550 1050 320 10000
1050 NA 156 1000
650 NA NA NA
267
6. 7.
Minimum total creepage distance of the insulator string (mm) Total no. of discs per strings
20000 42
10500 25
6125 15
3625 16
For tension application, double insulator strings for 765 kV, 400 KV, 220 KV and single insulator strings for 132 kV system shall be used. For suspension purpose single suspension insulator string shall be used for 765 kV, 400 KV, 220 KV & 132 kV system. 2.0 2.1 AAC / ACSR CONDUCTOR Details of AAC Conductor 2.1.1 The Conductor shall conform to IS: 398 (Part V) - 1992 except where otherwise specified herein. Owner has also standardised the guaranteed technical particulars for the conductors which are enclosed in Annexure-E of this Section. The contractor shall supply the conductor as per the standard guaranteed technical particulars. 2.1.2 S.No 1. 2. The details of the AAC Bull and AAC Tarantula conductor are tabulated below: Description Stranding and wire diameter Number of Strands 1st Aluminium Layer 2nd Aluminium Layer 3rd Aluminium Layer 4th Aluminium Layer 5th Aluminium Layer 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.1.3 Total sectional area Overall diameter Approximate weight Calculated d.c. resistance at 20C Minimum UTS Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sq.mm mm kg/ km ohm/km kN 1 6 12 18 24 865.36 38.25 2400 0.0334 139 1 6 12 18 -794.8 36.60 2191 0.03628 120 Unit mm AAC BULL 61/4.25 AAC TARANTULA 37/5.23
The details of Aluminium strand are as follows: 268
S.No 1. 2. 3. 2.2
Description Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding Maximum D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg. Centigrade
Unit KN KN Ohm/KM
AAC BULL 2.23 2.12 3.651
AAC TARANTULA 1.29 1.23 3.627
Details of ACSR Conductor 2.2.1 The Conductor shall conform to IS: 398 (Part V) - 1992 except where otherwise specified herein. 2.2.2 The details of the ACSR Bersimis, ACSR Moose, ACSR Zebra and ACSR Panther conductors are tabulated below: ACSR BERSIMIS & ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR:
S.No 1. 2.
Description Stranding and wire diameter Number of Strands Steel centre 1st Steel Layer 1st Aluminium Layer 2nd Aluminium Layer 3rd Aluminium Layer
Unit mm
ACSR ACSR BERSIMIS MOOSE 42/4.57 54/3.53 (Al)+ (Al)+ 7/3.53 (Steel) 7/2.54 (Steel)
Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sq. mm Sq. mm mm kg/km Ohm/ km kN
1 6 8 14 20 689.5 725.00 35.05 2181 0.04189 154
1 6 12 18 24 528.5 597.00 31.77 2004 0.05552 161.2
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Sectional area of Aluminium Total sectional area Overall diameter Approximate weight Calculated d.c. resistance at 20C Minimum UTS
ACSR ZEBRA & ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR: S.No Description Unit ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER
269
1. 2.
Stranding and wire diameter Number of Strands Steel centre 1st Steel Layer 1st Aluminium Layer 2nd Aluminium Layer 3rd Aluminium Layer
mm
54/3.18(Al)+ 30/3.0 (Al)+ 7/3.18(Steel) 7/3.0 (Steel)
Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sq. mm Sq. mm mm kg/km Ohm/ km kN
1 6 12 18 24 428.90 484.50 35.05 1621 0.06869 130.32
1 6 12 18 212.10 261.50 31.77 974 0.140 89.67
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.2.3
Sectional area of Aluminium Total sectional area Overall diameter Approximate weight Calculated d.c. resistance at 20C Minimum UTS
The details of Aluminium strand are as follows:
ACSR BERSIMIS & ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR: S.No 1. 2. 3. Description Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding Maximum D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg. Centigrade Unit KN KN Ohm/KM ACSR BERSIMIS 2.64 2.51 1.738 ACSR MOOSE 1.57 1.49 2.921
ACSR BERSIMIS & ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR: S.No 1. 2. 3. 2.2.4 Description Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding Maximum D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg. Centigrade The details of steel strand are as follows: Unit KN KN Ohm/KM ACSR ZEBRA 1.29 1.23 3.651 ACSR ZEBRA 1.17 1.11 4.107
ACSR BERSIMIS & ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR: Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 270
S.No 1. 2. 3.
Description Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding Minimum number of twists to be withstood in torsion test when tested on a gauge length of 100 times diameter of wire
Unit KN KN Nos.
ACSR BERSIMIS 6.87 6.53 18 (Before stranding) 16 (Before stranding
ACSR MOOSE 12.86 12.22 18 (Before stranding) 16 (Before stranding
ACSR ZEBRA & ACSR PANTER CONDUCTOR: S.No 1. 2. 3. Description Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding Minimum number of twists to be withstood in torsion test when tested on a gauge length of 100 times diameter of wire Unit KN KN Nos. ACSR ZEBRA 10.43 9.91 18 (Before stranding) 16 (Before stranding ACSR ZEBRA 9.29 8.83 18 (Before stranding) 16 (Before stranding
2.3
Workmanship 2.3.1 The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections including kinks (protusion of wires), wire cross over, over riding, looseness (wire being dislocated by finger/hand pressure and/or unusual bangle noise on tapping), material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spot (on account of reaction with trapped rain water etc.), dirt, grit etc. 2.3.2 All the Aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections, such as spills and splits, diemarks, scratches, abrasions, etc., after drawing. 2.3.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 260 gms/sq.m. after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand minimum three dips in standard Preece test. The finished strands and the individual wires shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in ASTM designation : B 498-74.
271
2.3.4
The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to avoid, damages to galvanisation during pre-forming and post-forming operation.
2.4
Joints in Wires 2.4.1 Aluminium Wires Joints in aluminium wires shall be as per IS:398. 2.4.2 Steel Wires There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished wire entering into the manufacture of the strand. There shall also be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of the completed stranded steel core of the conductor.
2.5
Tolerances The manufacturing tolerances shall be as per IS:398. A. AAC Bull and AAC Tarantala conductor: a) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands AAC BULL Standard Maximu Minimum m Aluminium 4.25 mm 4.29 mm 4.21 mm b) Lay ratio of Conductor AAC BULL Maximum Minimum 16 10 16 10 16 10 14 10 AAC TARANTALA Maximum Minimum 16 10 16 10 16 10 AAC TARANTALA Standard Maximu Minimu m m 5.23 mm 5.28 mm 5.18 mm
Aluminium
6 wire layer 12 wire layer 18 wire layer 24 wire layer
B.
ACSR Bersimis and ACSR Moose conductor: a) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands ACSR BERSIMIS ACSR MOOSE Standard Maximum Minimum Standard Maximum Aluminium 4.57 mm 4.61 mm Steel b) 2.54 mm 2.57 mm Lay ratio of Conductor ACSR BERSIMIS Steel Aluminium Steel 6 wire layer 8/12 wire Maximum 18 17 Minimum 13 10 ACSR MOOSE Maximum 18 14 Minimum 16 12 272 4.53 mm 2.51 mm 3.53 mm 3.53 mm 3.55 mm 3.60 mm Minimum 3.51 mm 3.46 mm
layer 14/18 wire layer 20/24 wire layer
16 14
10 10
13 12
11 10
C.
ACSR ZEBRA and ACSR PANTHER conductor: a) Diameter of Aluminium and Steel Strands ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER Standard Maximum Minimum Standard Maximum Aluminium 3.18 mm 3.21 mm Steel b) 3.18 mm 3.24 mm Lay ratio of Conductor ACSR ZEBRA Steel Aluminium Steel 6 wire layer 12 wire layer 18 wire layer 24 wire layer Maximum 18 17 16 14 Minimum 13 10 10 10 ACSR PANTHER Maximum 28 16 14 Minimum 16 10 10 3.15 mm 3.12 mm 3.00 mm 3.00 mm 3.03 mm 3.3.06 mm Minimum 2.97 mm 2.94 mm
2.6
Materials 2.6.1 Aluminium The aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic aluminium rods having purity not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%. 2.6.2 Steel The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods and shall conform to the following chemical composition: Element Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulphur Silicon 2.6.3 Zinc The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209 -1979. % Composition 0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 1.10 Not more than 0.035 Not more than 0.045 0.10 to 0.35
2.7
Standard Length 273
2.7.1
The conductor shall be supplied as required. No joint shall be allowed within a single span of stringing, jumpers and equipment interconnection.
2.8
Tests: 2.8.1 The following type, acceptance & routine tests and tests during manufacturing shall be carried out on the conductor. 2.8.2 Type Tests In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports of the conductor shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section VOLUME-I, TR. a) b) c) d) 2.8.3 a) UTS test on stranded conductor. Corona extinction voltage test (dry) Radio Interference voltage test (dry) DC resistance test on stranded conductor Acceptance Tests Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and lengths of conductor b) Dimensional check on steel and aluminium strands c) d) e) f) Check for lay ratios of various layers Galvanising test on steel strands Torsion and Elongation test on steel strands Breaking load test on steel and aluminium strands g) Wrap test on steel and aluminium strands ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) IS:398 (Part V) 1982 Clauses 12.5.2, 12.7& 12.8 h) i) DC resistance test on aluminium strands UTS test on welded joint of aluminium strands NOTE: ) ) ) As per Annexure - A -doAs per Annexure - A ) ) ) As per Annexure-A
274
All the above tests except test mentioned at (a) shall be carried out on aluminium and steel strands after stranding only. 2.8.4 a) b) c) Routine Tests Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification. Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands. All acceptance test as mentioned in Clause 2.7.3 above to be carried out on each coil. 2.8.5 a) b) -A making aluminium strands c) Chemical analysis of steel used for making steel strands 2.8.6 Sample Batch for Type Testing The Contractor shall offer material for selection of samples for type testing, only after getting quality assurance plans approved from Owners Quality Assurance Department. The sample shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Plan approved by Owner. 3.0 3.1 Galvanised Steel Earth wire Details of Earth wire 3.1.1 The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the specification of ACSR core wire as mentioned in IS: 398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise specified herein. Owner has also standardised the guaranteed technical particulars for the earthwire which are enclosed in Annexure-E of the technical details, Section Switchyard Erection. The contractor shall supply the earthwire as per the standard guaranteed technical particulars. 3.1.2 S.NO. 1. The basic details of the earth wire are tabulated below: DESCRIPTION Stranding & Wire diameter UNIT mm VALUE 7/3.66 (steel) 275 ) ) ) Tests During Manufacture Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising Chemical analysis of aluminium used for ) ) As per Annexure
2. 3.
Strands a) Steel Core b) Outer layer Total sectional area
No. No. Sq. mm.
1 (one) 6 (six) 73.65
Other technical details are furnished in of Annexure -E of this Specification. 3.2 Workmanship 3.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections, such as spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after stranding. 3.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to appreciable vibration while in use. 3.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip qalvanised (and shall have minimum Zinc coating of 275 gms/sq.m) after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after stranding in standard Preece test. The steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when drawn to the size of the strandsspecified and coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in ASTM designation B498-74. 3.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands while cutting of composite earth wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanisation during preforming and postforming operation. 3.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material shall be provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil. 3.3 Joints in Wires There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the manufacture of the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of the completed stranded earth wire. 3.4 Tolerances The manufacturing tolerance to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted in the diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire: Standard Diameter Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 3.66 mm Maximum 3.75 mm Minimum 3.57 mm 276
Lay length 3.5 Materials 3.5.1 Steel
181 mm
198 mm
165 mm
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods and shall conform to the following requirements as to the chemical composition. Element Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulphur Silicon 3.5.2 Zinc The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS: 209 -1979. 3.6 Standard Length 3.6.1 3.7 TESTS 3.7.1 The following type, routine & acceptance tests and tests during manufacturing shall be carried out on the earthwire. 3.7.2 TYPE TESTS In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports of the earthwire shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section VOLUME-I, TR. a) b) 3.7.3 a) UTS test As per Annexure - B The earth wire shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer. % Composition Not more than 0.55 0.4 to 0.9 Not more than 0.04 Not more than 0.04 0.15 to 0.35
DC resistance test ACCEPTANCE TESTS Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of Earthwire ) ) ) ) ) ) 277 As per Annexure - B
b) c) d)
Dimensional check Galvanising test Lay length check
e) Torsion test Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection
f) g) h) i) j) 3.7.4 a) b) 3.7.5 a)
Elongation test Wrap test DC resistance test Breaking load test Chemical Analysis of steel ROUTINE TESTS
) ) ) ) ) IS:398 (Part-III) - 1976
Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands. Check for correctness of stranding. TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising ) ) ) As per Annexure - B
b) 3.7.6
Chemical analysis of steel SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING
The Contractor shall offer material for sample selection for type testing, only after getting quality assurance programme approved by the Owner. The samples for type testing shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Programme approved by the Owner. 4.0 4.1 TUBULAR BUS CONDUCTORS General Aluminium used shall be grade 63401 WP (range 2) conforming to IS:5082. Owner has also stardardised the guaranteed technical particulars for the aluminium tube which are enclosed in Annexure- E of these technical details. The contractor shall supply the aluminium tube as per the standard guaranteed technical particulars. 4.2 Constructional Features 4.2.1 For outside diameter (OD) & thickness of the tube there shall be no minus tolerance, other requirements being as per IS : 2678 and IS: 2673. 4.2.2 4.2.3 The aluminium tube shall be supplied in suitable cut length to minimize wastage. The welding of aluminium tube shall be done by the qualified welders duly approved by the owner. 4.3 Tests 278
In accordance with stipulations of the specification, Routine tests shall be conducted on tubular bus conductors as per IS:5082. Also the wall thickness and ovality of the tube shall be measured by the ultrasonic method. In addition to the above tests, 0.2% proof tests on both parent metal and Aluminium tube after welding shall be conducted. 4.4 S.NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Technical Parameters DESCRIPTION Size Outer diameter Thickness Cross-sectional area Weight 3 AL. TUBE 3" IPS (EH Type) 88.9 mm 7.62 mm 1945.76 sq.mm 5.25 kg/m 4 AL. TUBE 4" IPS (EH Type) 114.2 mm 8.51 mm 2825.61 sq.mm 7.7 kg/m 4.5 AL. TUBE 4.5" IPS (EH Type) 120.00 mm 12.00 mm 4071.50 sq.mm 11.034 kg/m 5 AL. TUBE 5" IPS (H Type) 141.30 mm 9.53 mm 3945.11 sq.mm 10.652 kg/m
5.0 5.1
EARTHING CONDUCTORS General All conductors buried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors above ground level and earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel, except for cable trench earthing.
5.2
Constructional Features 5.2.1 a) b) Galvanised Steel Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to IS:2629. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 618 gm/sq. m. and minimum thickness shall be 85 microns. c) The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
5.3
Tests In accordance with stipulations of the specifications galvanised steel shall be subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS : 2633.
279
6.0 6.1
SPACERS General Spacers shall conform to IS : 10162. The spacers are to be located at a suitable spacing to limit the short circuit forces as per IEC -60865. Wherever Owners 400 kV & 220 kV standard gantry structures are being used, the spacer span(s) for different conductor / span configurations and corresponding short circuit forces shall be as per Annexure-D. For strung buses, flexible type spacers shall be used whereas for jumpers and other connections rigid type spacers shall be used. Wherever Owners 400 kV & 220 kV standard gantry structures are not being used, necessary spacer span calculation shall be provided by the contractor during detailed engineering for the approval of Owner.
6.2
Constructional Features 6.2.1 No magnetic material shall be used in the fabrication of spacers except for GI bolts and nuts. 6.2.2 Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during installation and maintenance. 6.2.3 The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in contact with any sharp edge.
6.3
Tests Each type of spacers shall be subjected to the following type tests, acceptance tests and routine tests: 6.3.1 Type Tests: Following type test reports shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section - VOLUME-I, TR. a) Clamp slip tests The sample shall be installed on test span of twin conductor bundle string or quadruple conductor bundle string (as applicable) at a tension of 44.2 kN. One of the clamps of the sample when subjected to a longitudinal pull of 2.5 kN parallel to the axis of the conductor shall not slip on the conductor. The permanent displacement between the conductor and the clamp of sample measured after removal of the load shall not exceed 1.0 mm. Similar tests shall be performed on the other clamps of the same sample. b) Fault current test as per Cl 5.14.2 of IS : 10162 280
c)
Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry). This test shall be performed on 765 kV, 400 kV and 220 kV equipment as per procedure mentioned at Annexure - C, Minimum Corona Extinction voltage shall be 508 kV (rms), 320 kV (rms) line to ground and 156 Kv (rms) line to ground for 765 kV, 400 kV and 220 kV spacers respectively.
d)
RIV Test (Dry) This test shall be performed as per procedure mentioned at Annexure - C, Maximum RIV level at 508 kV (rms), 305 kV (rms) line to ground and 156 kV (rms) line to ground for 765 kV, 400 kV and 220 kV spacers respectively shall be 1000 micro volts, across 300 ohm resistor at 1 MHz
e) f) g) h) i)
Resilience test (if applicable) Tension Test Log decremant test (if applicable) Compression test Galvanising test
6.3.2 Acceptance Test (As per IS: 10162 ) a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Visual examination Dimensional verification Movement test Clamp slip test Clamp bolt torque test (if applicable) Assembly torque test Compression test Tension test Galvanising test Hardness test for neoprene (if applicable) The shore hardness of different points on the elastometer surface of cushion grip clamp shall be measured by shore hardness meter. It shall be between 65 to 80. k) Ultimate Tensile Strength Test
281
The UTS of the retaining rods shall be measured. It shall not be less than 35 kg/Sq. mm. 6.3.3 a) b) 7.0 Routine test Visual examination Dimensional verification
BUS POST INSULATORS The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IS : 2544, IEC-60168, IEC 60273 and IEC-60815.
7.1
Constructional Features 7.1.1 Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a metal base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of being mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which they may be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only solid core insulators will be acceptable. 7.1.2 Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. 7.1.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects. 7.1.4 The insulator shall have alternate long and short sheds with aerodynamic profile, The shed profile shall also meet the requirements of IEC-60815 for the specified pollution level. 7.1.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between conductor and insulators which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors or insulators by the formation of substance produced by chemical action. 7.1.6 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. 7.1.7 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the latest edition of IS: 2633, & IS: 2629. The zinc used for galvanising shall be grade Zn 99.95 as per IS : 209. The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux ash, rust stains, bulky white
282
deposits and blisters. The metal parts shall not produce any noise generating corona under the operating conditions. 7.1.8 a) Every bolt shall be provided with a steel washer under the nut so that part of the threaded portion of the bolts is within the thickness of the parts bolted together. b) Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of suitable thickness. Where bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surfaces they shall be provided with square tapered washers of suitable thickness to afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt. c) All bolts and nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads forged from the solid and shall be hot dip galvanised. The nuts shall be good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut when it has been finally tightened up. 7.1.9 Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design including the method of assembly of shells and metals parts, number of shells per insulator, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through shells to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions. 7.2 Tests In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the post insulators shall be subject to type, acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IS : 2544 and IEC-60168. 7.2.1 In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IS: 2544 and IEC-60168, the following tests shall also be carried out. a) b) Ultrasonic test as an acceptance test Soundness test, metallurgical tests and magnetic test on MCI caps and pedestal tests as acceptance test. c) All hot dip galvanised components shall be subject to check for uniformity of thickness and weight of zinc coating on sample basis. d) The bending test shall be carried out at 50% minimum failing load in four directions as a routine test and at 100% minimum failing load in four directions as an acceptance test. e) Acceptance norms for visual defects allowed at site and also at works shall be agreed in the Quality plan.
283
7.2.2
In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports of the post insulators shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section VOLUME-I, TR.
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) 7.3 S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Type
Power frequency withstand test (dry & wet) Lightning impulse test (dry) Switching impulse test (wet) (For 420 kV and above class Insulator only) Measurement of R.I.V (Dry) (As per Annexure C) Corona extinction voltage test (Dry) (As per Annexure C) Test for deflection under load Test for mechanical strength.
Technical Parameters of Bus Post Insulators. DESCRIPTION 800 kV Solid Core 800 - 2100 1550 2500 420 kV Solid Core 420 680 1425 1050 500 245 kV Solid Core 245 460 1050 -500 145 kV Solid Core 145 275 650 -500
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Voltage Class (kV) Dry and wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage(Kv rms) Dry lightning impulse withstand Voltage (kVp) Wet switching surge withstand voltage (kVp) Max. radio interference voltage (in microvolts) at voltage of 508 kV (rms) , 305 kV (rms) and 156 (rms) for 765 kV, 400 kV &220 kV respectively between phase to ground. Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) (min.) Total minimum cantilever strength (Kg) Minimum torsional moment Total height of insulator (mm) P.C.D Top (mm) Bottom (mm) No. of bolts Top Bottom Diameter of bolt/holes (mm) Top
508 800* As per IEC-273 ------
320 800 As per IEC-273 3650 127 300 4 8 M16
156 800 As per IEC-273 2300 127 254 4 8 M16
105 600 As per IEC-273 -----284
14. 15.
Bottom Pollution level as per IEC815 Minimum total creepage distance for Heavy Pollution (mm)
-Heavy(III) 20000
18 Heavy(III) 10500
18 Heavy(III) 6125
-Heavy(III) 3165
* value indicated for 765 kV is minimum, however same is to be increased as per layout requirement , if 7.3.1 required.
If corona extinction voltage is to be achieved with the help of corona ring or any other similar device, the same shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the Contractor.
8.0
EARTHING The bidder shall assume/measure soil resistivity at site for quoting for the package. It may be noted that no price adjustment would be entertained on account of variation of resistivity value later.
8.1
The earthing shall be done in accordance with requirements given hereunder. Spacing for the main earthmat shall be computed by the Contractor and the earthmat layout drawings shall be prepared by the contractor based on the spacing approved bdesign. The resistivity of the stone for spreading over the ground shall be considered as 3000 ohm-m. Contractor shall ensure this value of resistivity of the gravel in a wet saturated stage. The resistivity measurement of stone (to be used for stone spreading) shall also be done by the Contractor to confirm the minimum resistivity value of stone considered in earth mat design. For measurement purpose, one sample of stones from each source (in case stones are supplied from more than one source) shall be used. The main earthmat shall be laid in the switchyard area in accordance with the approved earthmat layout.
8.2
Neutral points of systems of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame works associated with all current carrying equipments and extraneous metal works associated with electric system shall be connected to a single earthing system unless stipulated otherwise.
8.3
Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and Codes of practice and Regulations existing in the locality where the system is installed. a) b) Code of practice for Earthing IS: 3043 Code of practice for the protection of Building and allied structures against lightning IS: 2309.
c) Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments. Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection
285
d) 8.4
Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding.
Details of Earthing System S.NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. ITEM Main Earthing Conductor to be buried in ground Conductor above ground& earthing leads (for equipment) Conductor above ground& earthing leads(for columns & aux. structures) Earthing of indoor LT panels, Control panels and out door marshalling boxes, MOM boxes, Junction boxes& Lighting Panels etc. Rod Earth Electrode Pipe Earth Electrode (in treated earth pit) as per IS. Earthing for motors Earthing conductor along outdoor cable trenches Earthing of Lighting Poles SIZE 40mm dia 75x12mm G.S. flat 75x12mm G.S. flat 50x6 mm G.S. flat MATERIAL Mild Steel rod Galvanised Steel Galvanised Steel Galvanised Steel
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
40mm dia, 3000mm long 40mm dia, 3000mm long 25x3mm GS flat 50x6mm MS flat
Mild Steel Galvanised steel Galvanised steel Mild steel
20 mm dia 3000 Mild steel rod mm long The sizes of the earthing conductor indicated above are the minimum sizes. Earthing Conductor Layout 8.5.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below finished ground level unless stated otherwise. 8.5.2 Wherever earthing conductor crosses cable trenches, underground service ducts, pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc., it shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them and shall be circumvented in case it fouls with equipment/structure foundations. 8.5.3 Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment/structure. 8.5.4 Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder, walls etc. shall be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever it passes through walls, floors etc., galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of the conductor and both ends of the sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves. 8.5.5 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high
8.5
286
temperature is encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid minimum 1500 mm away from such location. 8.5.6 Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at greater depth to suit the site conditions. 8.5.7 Earthing conductors embeded in the concrete shall have approximately 50 mm concrete cover. 8.6 Equipment and Structure Earthing 8.6.1 Earthing pads shall be provided for the apparatus/equipment at accessible position. The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be made by two short earthing leads (one direct and another through the support structure) free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided on the item to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation with Owner. 8.6.2 Steel/RCC columns, metallic stairs etc. shall be connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by two earthing leads. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding different sections of hand-rails and metallic stairs. 8.6.3 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be bonded to ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at regular interval. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning points shall also be connected to earthing system. 8.6.4 8.6.5 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as gas, water, steam conduits, etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be bonded to the same. 8.6.6 Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout switches etc. shall be connected to the earthing conductor running alongwith the supply cable which inturn shall be connected to earthing grid conductor at a minimum two points whether specifically shown or not. 8.6.7 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30m and also at both ends. 8.6.8 Earthing conductor shall be buried 2000 mm outside the switchyard fence. All the gates and every alternate post of the fence shall be connected to earthing grid.
287
The stone spreading shall also be done 2000 mm outside switchyard fence. The criterian for stone spreading shall be followed in line with requirement specified elsewhere in the specification 8.6.9 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts.
8.6.10 All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptacles fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded in compliance with the provision of I.E. rules 8.6.11 A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each conduit run. The conductor shall be connected to each panel ground bus. All junction boxes, receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures etc. shall be connected to this 16 SWG ground conductor. 8.6.12 50mm x 6mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and all along the cable trenches and the same shall be welded to each of the racks. Further this flat shall be earthed at both ends and at an interval of 30 mtrs. The M.S. flat shall be finally painted with two coats of Red oxide primer and two coats of Post Office red enamel paint. 8.6.13 One number 40 mm dia, 3000 mm long MS earth electrode with test link, CI frame and cover shall be provided to connect each down conductor of surge arresters, capacitive voltage transformers, lightning masts and towers with peak. 8.7 Jointing 8.7.1 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti corrosive paint/compound. 8.7.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and between main earthing conductors shall be welded type. For rust protections, the welds should be treated with red lead and afterwards coated with two layers bitumen compound to prevent corrosion. 8.7.3 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent moisture ingression. 8.7.4 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent length of the conductor. 8.7.5 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature before putting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed. Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 288
8.7.6 8.7.7
Bending of earthing rod shall be done preferably by gas heating. All arc welding with large dia. conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content electrodes.
8.7.8
The 75x12mm GS flat shall be clamped with the equipment support structures at 1000mm interval.
8.8
Power Cable Earthing Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both equipment and switchgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power cables shall be earthed at switchgear end only.
8.9
Specific Requirement for Earthing Systems 8.9.1 Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer/Reactor shall be directly connected to two pipe electrodes in treated earth pit (as per IS) which in turn, shall be buried in Cement Concrete pit with a cast iron cover hinged to a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. All accessories associated with transformer/reactor like cooling banks, radiators etc. shall be connected to the earthing grid at minimum two points. 8.9.2 Earthing terminal of each lightning arrester & capacitor voltage transformer shall be directly connected to rod earth electrode which in turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid. 8.9.3 Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of 40mm dia M.S. rods closely spaced (300 mm x 300 mm) conductors shall be provided at depth of 300mm from ground level below the operating handles of the M.O.M. Box of the isolators. M.O.M. boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary earthing mat.
9.0
Main Bus Bars (Applicable for Aluminium tube) The brief description of the bus switching scheme, bus bar layout and equipment connection to be adopted are detailed our in the Volume-1 of the specification. The bus bar arrangements are shown in respective Single Line Diagrams.
9.1
The Contractor shall furnish supporting calculations for the bus bars/conductors to show adequacy of design parameters for: a) b) c) Fibre-stress Cantilever strength of post insulators Aeolain vibrations 289
d) e)
Vertical deflection of bus bars Short circuit forces in bundle conductor and spacer location for each span of ACSR conductor stringing .
9.1.1
The welds in the aluminium tubes shall be kept to the minimum and there shall not be more than one weld per span. The procedure and details of welding shall be subject to Owners approval. Material for welding sleeve shall be same as that of Aluminium tube. Welding sleeve shall be of 600mm length
9.1.2
Corona bells shall be provided wherever the bus extends beyond the clamps and on free ends, for sealing the ends of the tubular conductor against rain and moisture and to reduce the electrostatic discharge loss at the end points. There shall be a small drain hole in the corona bell. The material of Corona bell shall be Aluminium alloy similar to that of clamps & connectors.
9.1.3
To minimise the vibrations in the aluminium tubes, damping conductor shall be provided inside the aluminium tubes.
9.1.4
Details of past experience of the persons proposed to be employed for Aluminium tube welding and the test reports of the welded pieces to prove the electrical and mechanical characteristics shall also be furnished along with the bid. Welding at site shall be done by adopting a qualified procedure and employing qualified welders as per ASME-Section IX.
10.0 10.1
BAY EQUIPMENT The disposition of various bay equipments shall be as per single line diagrams. The layout drawings have to be developed by the Bidder/ Contractor.
10.2
Bay Marshalling Kiosk:One no. of bay marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each 765 kV, 400 kV, 220 kV and 132 kV bay under present scope. For one and half breaker scheme, one number bay marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each controlling feeder (Line/ transformer/ bus reactor etc) of the diameter and no bay marshalling kiosks are required to be provided for the tie bays. In addition to the requirements specified elsewhere in the specification, the bay marshalling kiosk shall have two distinct compartments for the following purpose:(i) To receive two incoming 415V, 3 phase, 63Amps, AC supply with auto changeover and MCB unit and distribute minimum six (four in case of S/S having highest voltage 132kV) outgoing 415V, 3 phase, 16 Amps AC supplies controlled by MCB.
290
(ii)
To distribute minimum ten (six in case of S/S having highest voltage 132kV) outgoing 240V, 10 Amps single phase supplies to be controlled by MCB to be drawn from above 3 phase incomers.
(iii) 200 (100 in case of s/s having highest voltage 132 kV) nos. terminal blocks in vertical formation for interlocking facilities for substations without automation system. 10.3 BAY AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION All the phases are to be identified by Red, Yellow and Blue colour as per asbuilt condition. Phase identification colour is to be provided around the top of the structure with colour of 100 mm width at a height of approximately 2000mm from the finished ground level. 11.0 11.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the EHV switchyard by lightning masts and shield wires. 11.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic service ducts and cab. 11.3 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the conductors of the safety earthing system above ground level. 11.4 11.5 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval. Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via test joint (pad type compression clamp) located approximately 1500 mm above ground level. The rod electrode shall be further joined with the main earthmat. 11.6 12.0 12.1 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits. EQUIPMENT ERECTION DETAILS For equipment interconnection, the surfaces of equipment terminal pads, Aluminium tube, conductor & terminal clamps and connectors shall be properly cleaned. After cleaning, contact grease shall be applied on the contact surfaces of equipment terminal pad, Aluminium tube/conductor and terminal clamps to avoid any air gap in between. Subsequently bolts of the terminal pad/terminal connectors shall be tightened and the surfaces shall be cleaned properly after equipment interconnection. 12.2 12.3 Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow insulators. All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall preferably be handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling capacity.
291
12.4
Bending of Aluminium tube and compressed air piping if any should be done by a bending machine and through cold bending only. Bending shall be such that inner diameter of pipe is not reduced.
12.5
Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends. Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not be used.
12.6
Handling of equipment shall be done strictly as per manufacturers/suppliers instructions/instruction manual.
12.7
Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before erection for
strength. 12.8 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to excessive swing, scratching by sling ropes etc. 13.0 13.1 STORAGE The Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper storage of equipments, where sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All equipments during storage shall be protected against damage due to acts of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment manufacturer/Owner shall be strictly adhered to. 14.0 14.1 CABLING MATERIAL CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS i) Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable and conduit schedule. ii) The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables and of circular shape for control cables. iii) Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of galvanised iron plate. iv) Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional inscription Cable joints. v) The marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
292
vi)
Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each duct/conduit entry and at each end & turning point in cable tray/trench runs. Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centres, control and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable identification, where a number of cables enter together through a gland plate.
14.2
Cable Supports and Cable Tray Mounting Arrangements i) The Contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/walls to secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures. ii) iii) The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members. Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other places these will be at an interval of 2000 mm.
14.3
Cable Termination and Connections 14.3.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with cable and termination kit manufacturers instructions, drawing and/or as directed by the Owner. 14.3.2 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting, taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete the job. 14.3.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be in the scope of Contractor. 14.3.4 The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for cables/conduit entry. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates, painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting. 14.3.5 Control cable cores entering control panel/switchgear/MCCB/MCC/ miscellaneous panels shall be neatly bunched, clamped and tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated strap to keep them in position. 14.3.6 The Contractor shall tag/ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by the Owner. In panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may include the complete cable number as well. 14.3.7 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
293
14.3.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be effectively closed. 14.3.9 Double compression type nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 10 microns) brass cable glands shall be provided by the Contractor for all power and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations. 14.3.10 The cable glands shall conform to BIS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting, machine finished and nickel plated, to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested quality. Cable glands shall be of approved make. 14.3.11 The cable glands shall also be suitable for dust proof and weather proof termination. The test procedure, if required, has to be discussed and agreed to between Owner and cable gland manufacturer. 14.3.12 If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the Contractor, as directed by the Owner. 14.3.13 Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make. 14.3.14 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to IS-8309 & 8394. Bimetallic lugs shall be used depending upon type of cables used. 14.3.15 Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound. The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided. 14.4 Storage and handling of Cable Drums i) Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved manner and rolling of drums shall be avoided as far as possible. For short distances, the drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper direction as marked on the drum. 15.0 i) DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES The Contractor shall construct the cable trenches requried for directly buried cables. The scope of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover, supply and installation of brick or concrete protective covers, back filling and ramming, supply and installation of route markers and joint markers. The Bidder shall ascertain the soil conditions prevailing at site, before submitting the bid.
294
ii)
The cable (power and control) between LT station, control room, DG set location and fire lighting pump house shall be laid in the buried cable trenches. In addition to the above, for lighting purpose also, buried cable trench can be used in outdoor area.
iii)
Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided wherever required. The voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.
16.0 16.1
INSTALLATION OF CABLES Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays while cabling in switchyard area shall be done on angles in the trench.
16.2
All cables from bay cable trench to equipments including and all interpole cables (both power and control) for all equipment, shall be laid in PVC pipes of minimum 50 mm nominal outside diameter of class 4 as per IS 4985 which shall be buried in the ground at a depth of 250mm below finish formation level. Separate PVC pipes shall be laid for control and power cables. Cable pull boxes of adequate size shall be provided if required.
16.3
Cables shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the pipe insert embedded in the floor. In the case of equipments located away from cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the floor connecting the cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small, notch/opening on the wall shall be provided. In all these cases necessary bending radius as recommended by the cable manufacturer shall be maintained.
16.4
Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by two finishing coats of aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform to IS:2074.
16.5
Suitable arrangement should be used between fixed pipe / cable trays and equipment terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated.
16.6
Power and control cables in the cable trench shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall be as follows, for cables other than directly buried. a) b) Power cables on top tiers. Control instrumentation and other service cables in bottom tiers.
16.7
Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of cable between trefoil centre lines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum centre to centre distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable of higher size of cables.
295
16.8
Trefoil clamps for single core cables shall be of pressure die cast aluminium (LM- 6), Nylon -6 or fibre glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts, washer etc. These are required at every 2 metre of cable runs.
16.9
Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self locking type nylon ties with deinterlocking facility at every 5 metre interval for horizontal run. Vertical and inclined cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick aluminium strip clamps at every 2m.
16.10
Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible limits are as follows: Table of Cable and Power cable Control cable D is overall diameter of cable Minimum bending radius 12D 10 D
16.11
Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, these shall be laid in reinforced spun concrete or steel pipes buried at not less than one metre depth.
16.12
In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one (for LT cables)/two (for H.T. cables) straight through joints to be made in case the cable develop fault at a later date.
16.13
Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight through joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the Owner. If straight through joints are unavoidable, the Contractor shall use the straight through joints kit of reputed make.
16.14
Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so that changing of termination in terminal blocks can be done without requiring any splicing.
16.15
Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever required by the Owner.
16.16 16.17
Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two metres while pulling cables. All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due to twist, kinks, sharp bends, etc.
16.18
Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage. In cable vault, fire resistant seal shall be provided underneath the panels.
296
16.19
Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance with IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
16.20
Wherever cable pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions, GI/PVC wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to damage the cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the Contractor at no extra charges.
16.21
Contractor shall remove the RCC/Steel trench covers before taking up the work and shall replace all the trench covers after the erection-work in that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be taken up for some time.
16.22
Contractor shall furnish three copies of the report on work carried out in a particular week, indicating cable numbers, date on which laid, actual length and route, testing carried out, terminations carried out, along with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection drawing wherever any modifications are made.
16.23 m. 16.24
Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an interval of 10
In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the Contractor shall repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Owner. In case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced by a healthy cable at no extra cost to the Owner, i.e. the Contractor shall not be paid for installation and removal of the damaged cable.
16.25
All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections. The Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating tape, sleeve or paint.
16.26 i) ii)
Cable trays ( shall be used for indoor installations) The cable trays shall be of G.S.sheet and minimum thickness of sheet shall be 2mm. The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection to ensure that material and workmanship are according to the relevant standards. Contractor shall have to demonstrate all tests as per specification and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the specification. a) Test for galvanising (Acceptance Test) The test shall be done as per approved standards. b) Deflection Test : (Type Test) 297
A 2.5 metre straight section of 300mm, 600mm wide cable tray shall be simply supported at two ends. A uniform distributed load of 76 kg/m shall be applied along the length of the tray. The maximum deflection at the mid-span shall not exceed 7mm. 16.27 a) Conduits, Pipes and Duct Installation Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes,flexible conduits, hume pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials such as tees, elbows, check nuts, bushing, reducers, enlargers, coupling cap, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc as specified and to be shown in detailed drawing. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be selected on the basis of 40% fill criterion. b) Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the conduits at site. Cold bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be made smooth without leaving any sharp edges. Anticorrosive paint shall be applied at all field threaded portions. c) All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The fabrication and installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in the scope of work by Contractor. d) When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running threads equal to twice the length of coupling shall be provided on each conduit to facilitate easy dismantling of two conduits. e) Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of special approved type of earthing clamps. GI pull wire of adequate size shall be laid in all conduits before installation. Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the drawings such that it can be identified at each end. f) g) h) Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm. Conduit run sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end. Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for connection. Flexible conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end with the help of bushings. Bushings shall have rounded edges so as not to damage the cables. i) Where embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination dimensions if any, shall be taken to represent the position of the straight extension of the conduit external to and immediately following the bend. At least one half of the arc length of the bend shall be embedded. j) All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cables are pulled.
298
After cables are pulled, the ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved manner to prevent damage to threaded portions and entrance of moisture and foreign material. k) l) For underground runs, Contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary. Contractor shall supply, unload, store and install conduits required for the lighting installation as specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not limited to pull out boxes, ordinary and inspection tees and elbow, checknuts, male and female bushings (brass or galvanised steel), caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings ,pull boxes, conduits terminal boxes, gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the Contractor. The conduit fittings shall be of the same material as conduits. m) All unarmoured cables shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting fixtures, receptacles etc. n) o) Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected by the Contractor during detailed engineering. Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns, beams and walls. Unnecessary bends and crossings shall be avoided to present a neat appearance. Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs and 1000mm for vertical runs. Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by saddles or U- bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete or brick work by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonary or concrete for conduit support is not acceptable. q) Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement. In fixing embedded conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care should be taken to avoid any injury to the inner surface of the conduit. Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete between them. Where conduits are placed alongwith cable trays, they shall be clamped to supporting steel at an interval of 600mm. r) For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place. s) Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from trapped condensation. Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300mm away from hot pipes, heating devices etc. when it is evident that such proximity may reduce the service life of cables.
299
t)
Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or where long run of exposed conduits are installed, so that temperature change will cause no distortion due to expansion or contraction of conduit run.
u)
For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate wiring. Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock nut inside and outside the box.
v)
Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust proof by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for application on embedded conduit and red lead for exposed conduit.
w) Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter. All bends shall be free of kinks, indentations of flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be applied in making any conduit bend. Separate bends may be used for this purpose. The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be electrically continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit. x) After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air before pulling in the wire. y) Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the main conduit run. 17.0 a) JUNCTION BOX The Contractor shall supply and install junction boxes complete with terminals as required. The brackets, bolts, nuts, screws etc required for erection are also included in the scope of the Contractor. b) Junction boxes having volume less than 1600 cubic centimeters may be installed without any support other than that resulting from connecting conduits where two or more rigid metallic conduits enter and accurately position the box. Boxes shall be installed so that they are level, plumb and properly aligned to present a pleasing appearance. c) Boxes with volumes equal to or greater than 1600 cubic cm, and smaller boxes terminating on less than two rigid metallic conduits or for other reasons not rigidly held, shall be adequately supported by auxiliary steel of standard steel shapes or plates to be fabricated and installed. The Contractor shall perform all drilling, cutting, welding, shimming and bolting required for attachment of supports. Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 300
18.0 18.1
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING An indicative list of tests for testing and commissioning is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialities of the items as per the field Q.P./instructions of the equipment Contractor or Owner without any extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall arrange all equipments instruments and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning of equipments alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Owner for approval.
18.2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
GENERAL CHECKS Check for physical damage. Visual examination of zinc coating/plating. Check from name plate that all items are as per order/specification. Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals using torque wrenches. For oil filled equipment, check for oil leakage, if any. Also check oil level and top up wherever necessary.
(f)
Check ground connections for quality of weld and application of zinc rich paint over weld joint of galvanised surfaces.
(g) (h)
Check cleanliness of insulator and bushings. All checks and tests specified by the manufacturers in their drawings and manuals as well as all tests specified in the relevant code of erection.
(i) (j) 18.3 a) b) c) d) e) 18.4
Check for surface finish of grading rings (Corona control ring). Pressure test on all pneumatic lines at 18.5 times the rated pressure shall be conducted. STATION EARTHING Check soil resistivity Check continuity of grid wires Check earth resistance of the entire grid as well as various sections of the same. Check for weld joint and application of zinc rich paint on galvanized surfaces. Dip test on earth conductor prior to use. AAC/ ACSR STRINGING WORK, TUBULAR BUS WORK AND POWER CONNECTORS
a)
Physical check for finish 301
b) c) d) e) 18.5 a) b) c) c) 18.6
Electrical clearance check Testing of torque by torque wrenches on all bus bar power connectors and other accessories. Millivolt drop test on all power connectors. Sag and tension check on conductors. ALUMINIUM TUBE WELDING Physical check Millivolt drop test on all joints. Dye penetration test & Radiography test on 10% sample basis on weld joints. Test check on 5% sample joints after cutting the weld piece to observe any voids etc. INSULATOR Visual examination for finish, damage, creepage distance etc.
18.7
All pre/commissioning activities and works work for substation equipment shall be carried out in accordance with owner approved ''Pre- Commissioning procedures and formats for substation bay equipments". The detailed procedures shall be submitted by the Contractor.
302
ANNEXURE A (Testing Procedure for ACSR MOOSE Conductor) 1.0 UTS Test on Stranded Conductor Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places on a sample of conductor of minimum 5 m length suitably compressed with dead end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 80 kN and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to Relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be increased at a steady rate to 161.2 kN and held for one minute. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded. 2.0 Corona Extinction Voltage Test Two samples of conductor of 5m length shall be strung with a spacing of 450 mm between them at a height not exceeding 8.0 m above ground. This assembly shall be tested as per Annexure-C, Corona extinction voltage shall not be less than 510 kV (rms) & 320 KV (RMS) Line to ground for 765 kV & 400 kV respectively. 3.0 Radio Interference Voltage Test The sample assembly similar to that specified under (2.0) above shall be tested as per Annexure - C. Maximum RIV level (across 300 ohm resistor at 1 MHz) at 510 kV & 305 KV (RMS) line to ground voltage for 765 kV & 400 kV voltage respectively, shall be 1000 micro volts. 4.0 D.C Resistance Test on Stranded Conductor On a conductor sample of minimum 5 m length two contact clamps shall be fixed with a predetermined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero metre and subsequently one metre apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20C as per clause no. 12.8 of IS:398 (Part V)-1982. The resistance corrected at 20C shall conform to the requirements of this specification. 5.0 Chemical Analysis of Zinc Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification. 6.0 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Steel
303
Samples
taken
from
the
Aluminium
ingots/coils/strands
shall
be
chemically/spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification. 7.0 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc. Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The inspector shall visually check for scratches, joints, etc. and that the conductor generally conform to the requirements of this specification. The length of conductor wound on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter during rewinding. 8.0 Dimensional Check for Steel and Aluminium Strands. The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this specification. 9.0 Check for Lay-ratios of various Layers. The lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this specification and clause no. 9.4 and 9.5 of IS-398 (Part - V) 1982. 10.0 Galvanising Test The test procedure shall be as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall conform to the requirements of this specification. 11.0 Torsion and Elongation Tests on Steel Strands The test procedures shall be as per relevant clause of IS:398 (Part V), 1982. In torsion test, the number of complete twists before fracture shall not be less than 18 on a length equal to 100 times the standard diameter of the strand before stranding & 16 after stranding. In case test sample length of less or more than 100 times the standard diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twist will be proportionate to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be rounded off to next higher whole number. In elongation test, the elongation of the strand shall not be less than 4% for a gauge length of 200 mm. 12.0 Breaking load test on welded Aluminium strand: Two Aluminium wires, shall be welded as per the approved quality plan and shall be subjected to tensile load. The welded point of the wire shall be able to withstand the minimum breaking load of the individual strand guaranteed by the bidder.
304
ANNEXURE B (Testing procedure for Galvanised Steel Earthwire) 1. UTS TEST Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earthwire shall be marked at two places on a sample of earthwire of minimum 5m length suitably compressed with dead end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at steady rate upto 34 KN and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to relative movement of strands. Thereafter, the load shall be increased at a steady rate of 68.4 KN and held for one minute. The earthwire sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and value recorded. 2. D.C. RESISTANCE TEST On an earthwire sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed with a predetermined Bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double-bridge by placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one meter apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20C shall conform to the requirements of this specification. 3. Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of earthwire Earthwire drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The inspector shall visually check for joints, scratches etc. and see that the earthwire generally conforms to the requirements of this specification. The length of earthwire wound on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter during rewinding. 4. TORSION AND ELONGATION TESTS The test procedure shall be as per relevant clause of IS:398 (Part-V). The minimum number of twists which a single steel strand shall withstand during torsion test shall be eighteen for a length equal to 100 times the standard diameter of the strand. In case the test sample length is less or more than 100 times the standard diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be proportionate to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be rounded off to next higher whole number. In elongation test, the elongation of the strand shall not be less than 64% or a gauge length of 200 mm. 5. DIMENSIONAL CHECK The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this specification. Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 305
6.
LAY LENGTH CHECK The lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this specification.
7.
GALVANISING TEST The test procedure shall as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall conform to the requirements of this specification.
8.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ZINC USED FOR GALVANIZING Samples taken from zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification.
9.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL Samples taken from steel ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/ spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification.
306
ANNEXURE-C CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST 1. General Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors, where applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage (RIV). 2. Test Levels: The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification. 3. 3.1 Test Methods for RIV: RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International SpecialCommittee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1(1993) Part -1. The measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 Mhz but other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts. 3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication No. 1071964, except otherwise noted herein. 3.3 In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fittings of identical type supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals. 3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100% and 110% of the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The specified RIV test voltage for 765 kV, 400 kV, 220 KV is listed in the detailed specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts. 3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
307
3.6
The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noisel meter.
4.
Test Methods for Visible Corona The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus, connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test voltage shall be raised to 110% of RIV test voltage and maintained there for five minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, test shall be stopped, otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity) disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkeness shall be taken under test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, and 110%. Additional photographs shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The photographic process shall be such that prints are available for inspection and comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors. The photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no cutoff. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, voltage shall not be increased further and corona extinction voltage shall be considered adequate.
4.1
The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be taken from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test object to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.
4.2
In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides.
308
Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be approved by Purchasers inspector, after determining the best camera locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona. 4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels. 4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the sample between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of Purchasers inspector if, in his opinion, it will not prejudice other test.
5.
Test Records: In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report: a) b) c) d) Background noise before and after test. Detailed procedure of application of test voltage. Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each level. Results and observations with regard to location and type of interference sources detected at each step. e) Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100 microvolts in each direction. f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall be recorded.
309
ANNEXURE D A. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 765kV GANTRY STRUCTURE Sl. No. I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Max. Span Conductor Configuration Ph-Ph Spacing Normal Tension SCF per Phase Spacer span
For Fault Level of 40 kA for 1 sec. 54.0 mtr 56.0 mtr 87.9 mtr 104.0 mtr 108.61 mtr QUAD AAC BULL QUAD AAC BULL QUAD AAC BULL QUAD AAC BULL QUAD AAC BULL 15 mtr 15 mtr 15 mtr 15 mtr 15 mtr 3.96 T 4.52 T 8.35 T 9.00 T 9.00 T 5.98 T 6.77 T 11.22 T 12.72 T 12.72 T 3.5 mtr 4.0 mtr 6.5 mtr 7.5 mtr 8.0 mtr
B. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 400kV GANTRY STRUCTURE Sl. No. I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. II. 1. 2. 3. III. Max. Span Conductor Configuration Ph-Ph Spacing Normal Tension SCF per Phase Spacer span
For Fault Level of 40 kA for 1 sec. 54 mtr 70 mtr 54 mtr 70 mtr 48 mtr 52.5 mtr 56.5 mtr 52.5 mtr 56.5 mtr QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR QUAD ACSR QUAD ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR TWIN ACSR 7 mtr 7 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 5.64 T 5.64 T 5.10 T 5.10 T 4.82T 4.85T 4.88T 4.97T 5.00 T 6 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr 5 mtr
For Fault Level of 50 kA for 1 sec. 48 mtr 52.5 mtr 56.5 mtr QUAD AAC BULL QUAD ACSR QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 6 mtr 6 mtr 4T 4T 4T 5.10 T 5.18 T 5.20 T 4 mtr 4 mtr 4 mtr
For Fault Level of 63 kA for 1 sec. 6 mtr 6 mtr 4T 4T 6.00 T 6.33 T 4 mtr 4 mtr
Volume-II (Section-N), Switchyard Erection 1. 48 mtr QUAD AAC BULL

2. 52.5 mtr QUAD ACSR
310
3.
56.5 mtr
QUAD ACSR
6 mtr
4T
6.37 T
4 mtr
C. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 220 kV GANTRY STRUCTURE Sl. No. Max. Span Conductor Configuration Ph-Ph Spacing Normal Tension SCF per Phase Spacer span
I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. II. 1. 2. 3. NOTE:
For Fault Level of 40 kA for 1 sec. 54 mtr 54 mtr 74 mtr 54 mtr 54 mtr 74 mtr 48 mtr 52 mtr 68 mtr 56 mtr 72 mtr QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR TWIN ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR TWIN ACSR QUAD ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR 4.5 mtr 4.5 mtr 4.5 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4T 2T 4T 4T 2T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 5.00 T 3.50 T 5.00 T 5.70 T 3.50 T 5.70 T 5.30 T 5.35 T 5.20 T 5.50 T 5.27 T 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr 2.5 mtr
For Fault Level of 50 kA for 1 sec. 48 mtr 52 mtr 36 mtr QUAD ACSR QUAD ACSR TWIN ACSR 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4.0 mtr 4T 4T 2T 5.41 T 5.50 T 3.50 T 2.0 mtr 2.0 mtr 2.0 mtr
ACSR conductor as mentioned above indicates that it is suitable for both ACSR MOOSE as well as ACSR BERSIMIS conductor.
311
ANNEXURE-E STANDARD TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS FOR AAC/ACSR CONDUCTORS, GS EARTHWIRE AND ALUMINIUM TUBE 1.0 GENERAL Owner has stardardised the guaranteed technical particulars for the following AAC/ACSR conductors, Galvanised steel earthwire and aluminum tube. The contractor shall supply the conductors as per the standard GTP mentioned below. Any deviation to the following GTP shall be clearly brought out by the bidder in their bid.
1.1 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) for conductors: A. GTP of AAC BULL and AAC TARANTULA conductor:
S.No. 1.0 2.0 2.1
Description Applicable Standard Raw Materials Steel Wire / Rods
Unit
AAC BULL
AAC TARANTULA IS:398
2.1.1 Aluminium a) Minimum purity of % Aluminium b) Maximum copper % content 3.0 Aluminum strands after stranding 3.1 Diameter a) Nominal b) Maximum c) Minimum 3.2 a) Before stranding b) After stranding 3.3 Maximum resistance of 1 m length of strand at 20 deg. C 4.0 AAC Conductor 4.1. a) Stranding b) Number of Strands i. 1st Aluminium Layer ii. 2nd Aluminium Layer iii. 3rd Aluminium Layer iv. 4th Aluminium Layer Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. mm mm mm KN KN Ohm
99.50 0.04
99.50 0.04
4.25 4.29 4.21 2.23 2.12 0.00203
5.23 5.28 5.18 3.44 3.27 0.001341
Minimum breaking load of strand
Al 61/4.25 mm 1 6 12 18
Al 37/ 5.23 mm 1 6 12 18
312
S.No.
Description
Unit Nos. Sq. mm Sq. mm Kg/m mm kN mm mm
AAC BULL 24 865.36 865.36 2.4 38.25 139 (Min.) Max Min 16 10 16 10 16 10 14 10 0.03340 1000 (+/-) 5 Right Hand
v. 5th Aluminium Layer 4.2 Sectional Area of aluminium 4.3 Total sectional area 4.4 4.5 Approximate Weight Diameter of the conductor 4.6 UTS of the conductor 4.7 Lay ratio of the conductor a) 6 wire Aluminium layer
AAC TARANTULA 794.80 794.80 2.191 36.60 120 (Min.) Max Min 16 16 14 0.03628 1000 (+/-) 5 Right Hand 10 10 10 -
b) 12 wire Aluminium mm layer c) 18 wire Aluminium mm layer d) 24 wire Aluminium mm layer 4.8 DC resistance of the ohm/ conductor at 20C km 4.9 Standard length of the m conductor 4.10 Tolerance on Standard % length 4.11 Direction of lay of outer layer 4.12 Linear mass of the conductor a) Standard kg/ km b) Minimum kg/ km c) Maximum kg/ km 4.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq .mm 4.14 Co-efficient of Linear Per Expansion Deg. C 4.15 Minimum Corona KV Extinction Voltage (rms) 4.16 RIV at 1 Mhz Micro volts 5.0 Drum Dimensions a) Flange Diameter b) Traverse width c) Barrel Diameter mm mm mm
2400 2355 2445 4709 (Initial) 5869 (Final) -6 23.0x10
2192 2150 2234 4709 (Initial) 5869 (Final) -6 23.0x10
508 Less than 1000
320 Less than 1000 at
at 508 kV (rms) 320 kV (rms) Generally conforms to IS:1778 1855 925 850 1855 925 850
313
S.No. d) B.
Description Flange thickness
Unit mm
AAC BULL 50x50
AAC TARANTULA 50x50
GTP of ACSR BERSIMIS and ACSR MOOSE conductor: S.No. 1.0 2.0 2.1 a) b) 2.2 a) b) c) d) e) 2.3 a) 3.0 3.1 a) b) c) 3.2 a) b) 3.3 Description Applicable Standard Raw Materials Aluminium Minimum purity of Aluminium Maximum copper content Steel wires/ rods Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulphur Silicon Zinc Minimum purity of Zinc Diameter Nominal Maximum Minimum Before stranding mm mm mm KN 4.57 4.61 4.53 2.64 2.51 0.001738 3.53 3.55 3.51 1.57 1.49 0.002921 % 99.95 99.95 Aluminum strands after stranding % % 99.50 0.04 99.50 0.04 Unit ACSR ACSR MOOSE BERSIMIS IS:398 / IEC - 1089
% % % % %
0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 1.10 Not more than 0.035 Not more than 0.045 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.)
0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 1.10 Not more than 0.035 Not more than 0.045 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.)
Minimum breaking load of strand After stranding KN Maximum resistance of Ohm 1 m length of strand at 20 deg. C Steel strand after stranding Diameter a) b) c) Nominal Maximum Minimum mm mm mm 2.54 2.57 2.51 3.53 3.60 3.46
4.0 4.1
314
S.No. 4.2
Description
Unit
ACSR BERSIMIS 6.87 6.53 260
ACSR MOOSE
Minimum breaking load of strand a) Before stranding b) After stranding KN KN gm Nos. 12.86 12.22 260
4.3
Galvanising a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per sq.m. b) Minimum number of dips that the galvanised strand can withstand in the standard preece test c) Min. No. of twists in guage length equal 100 times the dia. of wire which the strand can withstand in the torsion test (after stranding) 5.0 ACSR Conductor 5.1.a) Stranding b) i. ii. iii. iv. v. 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Number of Strands Steel centre 1st Steel Layer 1st Aluminium Layer 2nd Aluminium Layer 3rd Aluminium Layer Sectional Area of aluminium Total sectional area
2 dips of one 2 dips of one minute & 1 dip of minute & 1 dip of half minute half minute
Nos 16 (After stranding) 18 (Before

stranding)
16 (After stranding) 18 (Before

stranding)
Al -42/4.57 mm+ Steel-7/2.54 mm Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sq. mm Sq. mm Kg/m mm kN mm mm mm mm mm 1 6 8 14 20 689.50 725.00 2.181 35.05 154 (Min.) Max 24 16 17 10 16 10 13 10
Al -54/3.53 mm+ Steel-7/3.53 mm 1 6 12 18 24 528.50 597.00 2.004 31.77 161.20 (Min.) Max Min 18 14 13 12 16 12 11 10
Approximate Weight Diameter of the conductor 5.6 UTS of the conductor 5.7 Lay ratio of the conductor a) Outer Steel layer b) 8/12 wire Aluminium layer c) 14/ 18 wire Aluminium layer d) 20/24 wire Aluminium layer
315
S.No. 5.8
Description
Unit
DC resistance of the ohm/ 0.05552 conductor at 20C km 5.9 Standard length of the m 1800 1800 conductor 5.10 Tolerance on Standard % (+/-) 5 (+/-) 5 length 5.11 Direction of lay of Right Hand Right Hand outer layer 5.12 Linear mass of the conductor a) Standard kg/ 2181 2004 km b) Minimum kg/ 2142 1965 km c) Maximum kg/ 2221 2045 km 5.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq 6860 (Final State) .mm -6 -6 5.14 Co-efficient of Linear Per 21.5x10 19.3x10 Expansion Deg. C 5.15 Minimum Corona KV 320 320 Extinction Voltage (rms) 5.16 RIV at 1 Mhz under Micro Max. 1000 at Max. 1000 at 320 dry condition volts 320 kV (rms) kV (rms) 6.0 Drum Dimensions Generally conforms to IS:1778 a) Flange Diameter b) Traverse width c) Barrel Diameter d) Flange thickness C. mm mm mm mm 1800 950 650 50x50 1800 950 650 50x50
ACSR BERSIMIS 0.04242
ACSR MOOSE
B. GTP of ACSR ZEBRA and ACSR PANTHER conductor: S.No. 1.0 2.0 Description Applicable Standard Raw Materials % % 99.50 0.04 99.50 0.04 Unit ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER
IS:398 / IEC-1089
2.1 Aluminium a) Minimum purity of Aluminium b) Maximum copper content 2.2 Steel wires/ rods a) Carbon b) Manganese c) Phosphorous
% % %
0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 1.10 Not more than 0.035
0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 1.10 Not more than 0.035
316
S.No. Description d) Sulphur e) Silicon 2.3 3.0 3.1 Zinc a) Minimum purity of Zinc Diameter a) Nominal b) Maximum c) Minimum 3.2 a) Before stranding
Unit % %
ACSR ZEBRA Not more than 0.045 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.) 99.95
ACSR PANTHER Not more than 0.045 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.) 99.95
Aluminum strands after stranding mm mm mm KN 3.18 3.21 3.15 1.29 1.23 0.003626 3.00 3.03 2.97 1.17 1.11 0.004107
b) After stranding KN 3.3 Maximum resistance of Ohm 1 m length of strand at 20 deg. C 4.0 Steel strand after stranding 4.1 Diameter a) Nominal b) Maximum c) Minimum 4.2 a) Before stranding b) After stranding 4.3 Galvanising a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per sq.m. b) Minimum number of dips that the galvanised strand can withstand in The standard preece test c) Min. No. of twists in guage length equal 100 times the dia. of wire which the strand can withstand in the torsion test (after stranding) ACSR Conductor mm mm mm KN KN gm Nos.
3.18 3.24 3.12 10.43 9.91 260 2 dips of one minute & 1 dip of half minute
3.00 3.06 2.94 9.29 8.85 260 2 dips of one minute & 1 dip of half minute
Nos
16 (After
stranding)
16 (After stranding) 18 (Before

stranding)
18 (Before
stranding)
5.0
317
S.No. Description 5.1.a) Stranding b) i. ii. iii. iv. v. 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Number of Strands Steel centre 1st Steel Layer 1st Aluminium Layer 2nd Aluminium Layer 3rd Aluminium Layer Sectional Area of aluminium Total sectional area
Unit
ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER Al -54/3.18 mm+ Al -30/3.00 mm+ Steel-7/3.18 mm Steel-7/3.00 mm 1 6 12 18 24 428.9 484.5 1.621 28.62 130.32 (Min.) Max Min 28 13 1 6 12 18 NA 212.10 261.50 0.974 21.00 89.67 (Min.) Max Min 28 16 14 NA NA 0.140 1800 (+/-) 5 Right Hand 16 10 10
Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sq. mm Sq. mm Kg/m Mm kN mm mm
Approximate Weight Diameter of the conductor 5.6 UTS of the conductor 5.7 Lay ratio of the conductor a) Outer Steel layer
b) 12 wire Aluminium mm 17 10 layer c) 18 wire Aluminium mm 16 10 layer d) 24 wire Aluminium mm 14 10 layer 5.8 DC resistance of the ohm/ 0.06868 conductor at 20C km 5.9 Standard length of the m 1800 conductor 5.10 Tolerance on Standard % (+/-) 5 length 5.11 Direction of lay of Right Hand outer layer 5.12 Linear mass of the conductor a) Standard kg/ 1621 km b) Minimum kg/ 1589 km c) Maximum kg/ 1653 km 5.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq .mm 5.14 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion Per Deg. C 19.3x10
-6
974 954 993 8158 17.8x10

-6
318
Sl. 5.15 5.16 6.0
Description Minimum Corona Extinction Voltage RIV at 1 Mhz Drum Dimensions a) Flange Diameter b) Traverse width c) Barrel Diameter d) Flange thickness
Unit ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER KV 154 92 (rms) Micro Less than 1000 Less than 500 volts at 154 kV (rms) at 92 kV (rms) Generally conforms to IS:1778 mm mm mm mm 1850 925 650 50x50 1850 925 650 50x50
1.2
Guaranteed technical particulars of Galvanised Steel Earthwire Description 1.0 1.1 a) b) c) d) e) 1.2 Raw Materials Steel wires / rods Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulphur Silicon Zinc % % % % % % Not more than 0.55 0.40 to 0.90 Not more than 0.04 Not more than 0.04 0.15 to 0.35 99.95 Unit Standard Values
a) Minimum purity of Zinc 2.0 Steel strands 2.1 Diameter
a) Nominal mm b) Maximum mm c) Minimum mm 2.2. Minimum breaking load of strand a) After stranding 2.3 Galvanising KN
3.66 3.74 3.58 10.58
a) Minimum weight of zinc coating gms. per sq.m. after stranding b) Minimum number of dips that the Nos. galvanized strand can withstand in the standard preece test c) Minimum number of twists in a Nos. gauge length equal to 100 times diameter of wire which the strand can withstand in the torsion test, after stranding 3.0 Stranded Earth wire
275 3 dips of 1 minute and one dip of minute 18
319
3.1 3.2
UTS of Earth wire Lay length of outer steel layer
KN
68.4 (min.)
a) Standard b) Maximum c) Minimum 3.3 Maximum DC resistance of 0 earth wire at 20 C 3.4 Standard length of earth wire 3.5 3.6 Tolerance on standard length Direction of lay for outside layer 3.7 Linear mass a) Standard b) Maximum c) Minimum 3.8 Overall diameter 1.3
mm mm mm Ohm/km M %
181 198 165 3.375 2000 or actual quantity whichever is less. 5 Right hand
Kg/km Kg/km Kg/km mm
583 552 600 10.98
Guaranteed Technical Parameters of Aluminum Tube A. GTP for 3 IPS & 4 IPS AL. TUBE Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. i) ii) iii) iv) v) Vi) 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Description Size Material Chemical Composition Cu Mg Si Fe Mn Al Outer diameter Tolerance on outer diameter Thickness Tolerance on thickness Cross-sectional area Weight Moment of Inertia Section Modulus Minimum Ultimate Tensile Strength Temperature co-efficient of resistance Minimum Electrical Conductivity at 20 deg.C Linear Temperature Coefficient of Expansion (20 Deg.C -200 Deg.C) 3 AL. TUBE 4 AL. TUBE 3" IPS (EH Type) 4" IPS (EH Type) Aluminium Alloy 6101 T6 confirms to 63401 WP (range 2) of IS 5082 : 1998 0.05 Max 0.4 to 0.9 0.3 to 0.7 0.5 Max 0.03 Max Remainder 88.90 mm 114.2 mm +2.2 m, - 0.0 m +2.2 m, - 0.0 m 7.62 mm 8.51 mm +2.2 m, - 0.0 m +2.2 m, - 0.0 m 1945.76 sq.mm 2825.61 sq.mm 5.25 kg/m 7.7 kg/m 4 4 3970979.837 mm 3999760.0 mm 3 3 69989.0 mm 69544.3 mm 20.5 Kg/sq.mm 0.00364 per Deg.C 55% of IACS 0.000023
320
16. 17. 18. 19. 20 21
Modulus of Elasticity 6700 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Elongation on 50 10% mm Thermal Conductivity at 100 0.43 Calories/sec/sq.mm/cm/deg.C Deg.C Minimum 0.2% proof stress 17.34 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Yield point 17.50 Kg/sq.mm 17.50 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Breaking Strength 20.42 Kg/sq.mm 20.42 Kg/sq.mm
B. GTP for 4.5 IPS & 5 IPS AL. TUBE Sl. No. Description 1. Size 2. Material 3. i) ii) iii) iv) v) Vi) 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Chemical Composition Cu Mg Si Fe Mn Al Outer diameter Tolerance on outer diameter Thickness Tolerance on thickness Cross-sectional area Weight Moment of Inertia 4.5 AL. TUBE 5 AL. TUBE 4.5" IPS (EH Type) 5" IPS Aluminium Alloy 6101 T6 confirms to 63401 WP (range 2) of IS 5082 : 1998 0.05 Max 0.4 to 0.9 0.3 to 0.7 0.5 Max 0.03 Max Remainder 120.0 mm 141.3 mm +1.5 m, - 0.0 m +2.8 m, - 0.0 m 12.0 mm +1.0 m, - 0.0 m 4071.50 sq.mm 10.993 kg/m 9.53 mm +0.8 m, - 0.0 m 3945.11 sq.mm 10.652 kg/m 4 59998841.86 mm 3970979.837 4 mm 3 3 69544.3 mm 99980.70 mm 20.5 Kg/sq.mm
16. 17. 18. 19. 20 21
Section Modulus Minimum Ultimate Tensile Strength Temperature co-efficient of 0.00364 per Deg.C resistance Minimum Electrical 55% of IACS Conductivity at 20 deg.C Linear Temperature Co0.000023 efficient of Expansion (20 Deg.C -200 Deg.C) Modulus of Elasticity 6700 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Elongation on 50 10% mm Thermal Conductivity at 100 0.43 Calories/sec/sq.mm/cm/deg.C Deg.C Minimum 0.2% proof stress 17.34 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Yield point 14.50 Kg/sq.mm 17.50 Kg/sq.mm Minimum Breaking Strength 17.50 Kg/sq.mm 20.42 Kg/sq.mm
321
SECTION- (O) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF STRUCTURES 1.0 1.1 GENERAL The scope of specification covers fabrication, proto-assembly, supply and erection of galvanized steel structures for towers, girders, lightning masts and equipment support structures. Towers, girders, lightning masts and equipment support structures. Towers, girders and lightning masts shall be lattice type structure fabricated from structural steel conforming to IS 2062(latest).All equipment support structures shall be fabricated from GI pipe conforming to YST 22 or of higher grade as per IS 806 except for 132 kV and below for which the equipment structure shall be of Lattice type. The fabrication drawings along with BOM shall be provided to the successful bidder after the award. Contractor shall only use these standard drawings for fabrication. Support structure for circuit breaker is not standardized and shall be designed by the Contractor and approved by the owner. Any other structures of 765/400kV/220/132kV class necessary to suit the layout for a particular substation to complete the work in all its requirements shall be designed by the owner at detailed Engineering stage. Design & drawing of structure other than 400kV/220kV class shall also be prepared by the owner at detailed engineering stage. It is the intent of the owner to provide structures which allow interchangeability of equipments at a later stage. Accordingly equipment support structure standardization has been carried out with the provision of stool. Stools shall be provided by the Contractor between the equipment and its support structure to match the bus bar height. The top of stool shall be connected to the equipment and the bottom of the stool shall be connected to the support structure. Details of the stools shall be submitted to Owner for approval. The scope shall include supply and erection of all types of structures including bolts, nuts, washers, hangers, shackles, clamps ant climbing devices, bird guards, step bolts, inserts in concrete, gusset plates, equipment mounting bolts, structure earthling bolts, foundation bolts, spring washers, fixing plates, ground mounted marshalling boxes (AC/DC Marshalling box & equipment control cabinets), structure mounted marshalling boxes and any other items as required to complete the job. The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates and embedded anchor/foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor/foundation bolts shall be fully galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 0.610kg/m2 for anchor
Volume-II (Section-O), Structures
322
bolts/foundation bolts and for structural members. One additional nut shall be provided below the base plate which may be used for the purpose of leveling. Suitable modification shall be carried out in the drawings of equipment support structures by the Contractor in order to suit fixation of accessories such as marshalling boxes, MOM boxes Control Cabinets, Junction box, surge counter, etc. in the standard structure fabrication drawings. Drawings of fixing of such accessories shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval. 2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES NOT COVERED IN STANDARDISED LIST 2.1 For design of steel structures loads such as dead loads, live loads, wind loads etc. shall be based on IS:875, Part I to V 2.2 For materials and permissible stresses IS: 802, Part-I, Section-2 shall be followed in general. However, additional requirements given in following paragraphs shall be also considered. 2.3 Minimum thickness of galvanized tower member shall be as follows: Minimum thickness (mm) Leg members, Ground wire Peak members/Main members 5
Members
Other members
Redundant members 2.4
Maximum slenderness rations for leg members, other stressed members and redundant members for compression force shall be as per IS-802.
2.5
Minimum distance from hole center to edge shall be 1.5 x bolt diameter. Minimum distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5 x bolt diameter.
2.6 2.7
All bolts shall be M16 of higher as per design requirement. Step Bolts
323
In order to facilitate inspection an maintenance, the structures shall be provide with climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with M16 step bolts 175mm long spaced not more than 450mm apart, staggered on faces one leg extending from about 0.5 meters above ground level to the top of the tower. The step bolt shall conform to IS: 10238. Ladders along with safety guard shall be provided for the Lightening Mast Tower. 2.8 Design criteria (To be referred only for structures for which design is included in the scope of the Contractor) A) All structures shall be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, live loads, wind loads as per code IS:875, seismic forces as per code IS:1893 (latest), Importance factor of 1.5, loads due to deviation of conductor, load due to unbalanced tension in conductor, torsional load due to unbalanced vertical and horizontal forces, erection loads, short circuit forces including snatch in the case of bundled conductors etc. Short circuit forces shall be calculated considering a fault level of 40.0kA. IEC-865 may be followed for evaluation of short circuit forces. B) Switchyard gantry structures shall be designed for the tow conditions i.e. normal condition and short circuit condition. In both conditions the design of all structures shall be based on the assumption that stringing is done only on one side i.e. all the three (phase) conductors broken on the other side. Factor of safety of 2.0 under normal conditions and 1.5 under short circuit condition shall be considered on all external loads for the design of switchtyard structures. C) Vertical load of half the span of conductors/string and the earth wires on either side of the beam shall be taken into account for the purpose of design. Weight of man with tools shall be considered as 150kgs. For the design of structures. D) Terminal/line take off gantries shall be designed for a minimum conductor tension of 4 metric tonnes per phase for 400 kv and 2 metric tonnes per phase for 220kv, 1 tonne per phase for 132kV or as per requirements whichever is higher. The distance between terminal gantry and dead end tower shall be taken as 200 meters. The design of these terminal gantries shall also be checked considering +/-30 deg deviation of conductor in both vertical and horizontal planes. For other gantries the structural layout requirements shall be adopted in design. E) The girders shall be connected with lattice columns by bolted joints.
324
F)
All Pipe support used for supporting equipments shall be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, erection load. Wind load/seismic forces, short circuit forces and operating forces acting on the equipment and associated bus bars as per IS:806. The material specification shall be as per IS: 1161 read in conjunction with IS: 806.
G)
If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/towers, then the proper loading for the same shall be considered while designing. Also holes for fixing the brackets for luminaries should be provided wherever required.
H) I)
Foundation bolts shall be designed for the loads for which the structures are designed. Lightning Mast shall be 50m in height (47.5m lattice structure plus 2.5m pipe) and designed for diagonal wind condition. Lightning masts shall be provided with a structural steel ladder within its base up to a height of 25 meter. The ladder shall be provided with protection rings. Tow platforms shall be provided one each at 12.5m and 25.0m height for mounting of lighting fixtures. The platforms shall also have protection railing. The details of lighting fixtures would be as per the approved drawings.
3.0 3.1 3.1.1
DESIGN DRAWINGS, BILL OF MATETRIALS AND DOCUMENTS FOR STANDARD STRUCTURES Towers, girders, lightning masts, equipment support structures etc of 400/220kV class have all been standardized by the owner and fabrication drawings (structure assembly drawing) along with Bill of Material shall be provided by the owner for all these standard structures to the successful bidder after letter of award based on which structures shall be supplied.
3.1.2
Contractor shall however not be relieved of his responsibility for the safety of the structure and good connections and any loss or damage occurring due to defective fabrication, erection or workmanship shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.2
FOR STRUCTURES DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR (To be referred only for structures for which design is included in the scope of the Contractor)
3.2.1
The Contractor shall furnish design, drawing and BOMs and shop manufacturing drawings for every member to the owner after award of the Contract. The design drawing should indicate not only profile, but section, numbers and sizes of bolts and details of typical joints. In case owner feels that any design drawing, BOM are to be modified even after its approval, Contractor shall modify the designs & drawings and resubmit the design drawing, BOM as required in the specification.
325
3.2.2
The fabrication drawings to be prepared and furnished by the Contractor shall be based on the design approved by the owner. These fabrication drawings shall indicate complete details of fabrication and erection including all erection splicing details and typical fabrication splicing details, lacing details, weld sizes and lengths. Bolt details and all customary details in accordance with standard structural engineering practice whether or not given by the owner. The fabrication drawings shall be submitted to the owner. Proto shall be made only after approval of fabrication drawings.
3.2.3
Such approval shall, however, not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety of the structure and good connections and any loss or damage occurring due to defective fabrication, design or workmanship shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.3
The Mass fabrication work shall start only after the final approval to the proto corrected Fabrication drawing is accorded y the owner. Proto- assembly shall be required to be carried out only for those structures that have not been proto-assembled by the same fabricators for this contract or for earlier contracts from OWNER. Wherever proto-assembly is not to be repeated, proto-corrected drawings shall be submitted directly with a note on the drawing stating that protoassembly has been carried out under a particular previous contract.
4.0 4.1
FABRICATION OF STEEL MEMBERS The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in accordance with IS 802. A reference however may be made to IS 800 in case of non-stipulation of some particular provision in IS 802. All materials shall be completely shop fabricated and finished with proper connection material and erection marks for ready assembly in the field.
5.0
PROTO- ASSEMBLY i) The components parts shall be assembled in such manner that they are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specified camber, if any, is provided. In order to minimize distortion in member the component parts shall be positioned by using the clamps, clips,dogs,jigs and other suitable means and fasteners(bolts and welds) shall be placed in a balanced pattern. If the individual components are to be bolted, paralleled and tapered drifts shall be used to align the part so that the bolts can be accurately positioned. ii) Sample towers, beams and lightning masts and equipment support structures shall be trial assembled in the fabrication shop and shall be inspected and cleared-by Contractor based
326
on the approved fabrication drawing before mass fabrication. Owner may opt to witness such trial assembly. For all structures, B.O.Ms along with proto corrected fabrication drawings shall be prepared and submitted to owner as document for information. Such BOM, which shall be duly certified by the Contractor for its conformity to the drawings issued by Owner, shall be the basis for owner to carry out inspection.
6.0
BOLTING i) Every bolt shall be provided with a washer under the nut so that no part of the threaded portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the parts bolted together. ii) iii) All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized. 2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.
7.0
WELDING The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings which shall clearly indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of weld, whether shop or site weld etc. Symbols for welding on erection and shop drawings shall be according to IS: 813. Efforts shall be made to reduce site welding so as to avoid improper joints due to constructional difficulties.
8.0 8.1
FOUNDATION BOLTS Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and elsewhere shall be embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is cast. The Contractor shall ensure the proper alignment of these bolts to match the holes in the base plate.
8.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all steel work on site ensures that the towers/structures are plumb.
8.3 8.4
All foundation bolts for lattice structure, pipe structure are to be supplied by the Contractor. All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanized so as to achieve 0.61kg. per Sq.m. of Zinc Coating as per specifications.
8.5
All foundation bolts shall conform to IS 5624 but the material, however shall be MS conforming to IS: 2062.
327
9.0
STABILITY OF STRUCTURE The supplier shall be responsible for the stability of the structure at all stages of its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of temporary bracings and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and also to loads due to erection equipment and their operations.
10.0
GROUTING The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of owner and shall be such as to ensure a complete uniformity of contact over the whole area of the steel base. The Contractor will be fully responsible for the grouting operations.
11.0 11.1 11.2
GALVANISING All structural steel works and pipe supports shall be galvanized after fabrication. Zinc required for galvanizing shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer. Purity of zinc to be used shall be 99.95% as per IS: 209.
11.3
The contractor shall be required to make arrangement for frequesnt inspection by the owner as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of the owner, if so desired for fabrication work.
12.0
TOUCH-UP PANTING The touch up primers and paints shall consist of Red Oxide/Zinc chromate conforming to the requirements of IS: 2074 with a pigment to be specified by the owner.
13.0
INSPENTION BEFORE DISPATCH Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected as per approved quality plans and certified by the owner or his authorized representative as satisfactory before it is dispatched to the erection site. Such certification shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility regarding adequacy and completeness of fabrication.
14.0
TEST CERTIFICATE Copies of all test certificates relating to material procured by the Contractor for the works shall be forwarded to the owner.
15.0
ERECTION
328
The Contractor should arrange on his own all plant and equipment, welding set, tools and tackles, scaffolding, trestles equipments and all other accessories and ancillaries required for carrying out erection without causing any stresses in the members which may cause deformation and permanent damage.
16.0
MODE OF MEASURMENT The measurement of the standard lattice and pipe structures for towers, beams, equipment support structure etc. shall be made in numbers for each type of structures. This will include foundation bolts and nuts and therefore no separate payment shall be made for the same. The unit rate quoted for each type of structures shall be inclusive of supply, fabrication, galvanizing, erection, nuts, bolts, wastages etc. complete. Nothing extra shall be payable for substitution necessitated due to non- availability of section indicated in the standard drawing. Nothing extra shall be payable for modifications or steel added to suit the contractors fixing arrangements for accessories etc. The measurement of the non-standard lattice and pipe structure of tower structure, beam, equipment structure etc. shall be measured in MT including the weight of foundation bolt. The unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of supply, fabrication, galvanizing, erection, nuts, bolts, (excluding foundation bolts), washers, wastages etc complete.
17.0
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The Contractor shall strictly follow at all stages of fabrication, transportation and erection of steel structures, raw materials and other tools and tackles, the stipulations contained in Indian Standard Code for Safety during erection of structural steel work-IS: 7205.
18.0
All tests mentioned in standard field quality plans have to be carried out and conformity of materials and workmanship shall be ascertained.
329
SECTION- (P) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 1.0 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION This section covers the design and performance requirements of the following types of fire protection systems; a. Hydrant System b. High Velocity Water (H.V.W) Spray System c. Fire Detection and alarm System d. Portable Fire Extinguishers e. Wheel/ Trolley mounted Fire Extinguishers 1.1 It is not the intent to completely specify all details of design and construction. Nevertheless, the system design and equipment shall conform in all respects to high standard of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The system design shall also conform to TAC/ NFPA norms. 1.2 The scope of work include complete earthwork (i.e. excavation, backfilling etc.) for the entire buried piping for the system, valve pits and pipe supports for buried, entrenched and over ground piping. 1.3 The equipment offered shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards. The equipment conforming to any other approved international standards shall meet the requirement called for in the latest revision of relevant Indian Standard or shall be superior. The Deluge valves, HVW spray nozzles & quartzoid bulb detectors shall have the approval of any of the following agencies; a. UL of USA. b. F M of USA c. LPCB of UK or d. VDS of Germany, 1.4 1.5 Ambient temperature for design of all equipment shall be considered as 50C. The piping and instruments diagram for Hydrant and HVW spray system for
765kV/400kV/220kV/132kVsubstations shall be prepare by successful bidder. Detailed layout
Volume-II (Section-P), Fire Protection System
330
and piping drawing based on this drawing and other drawings such as road, drainage, cable trench, switch yard layout, etc. as furnished by the Employer during detailed engineering. 1.6 Equipment under the fire protection system should be supplied from the suppliers approved by Owner. All equipment shall conform to the data sheets attached in Appendix1 and/or relevant subsections/clauses of this specification. In case of contradiction between data specification sheets and relevant subsections/clauses, then stipulations of the data sheets will prevail. 2.0 2.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Hydrant System Hydrant system of fire protection essentially consists of a large network of pipe, both underground and over ground which feeds pressurized water to a number of hydrant valves, indoor (if applicable) as well as outdoor. These hydrant valves are located at strategic locations near buildings, Transformers and Reactors. Hose pipes of suitable length and fitted with standard accessories like branch pipes, nozzles etc. are kept in Hose boxes. In case of emergency, these hoses are coupled to the respective hydrant valves through instantaneous couplings and jet of water is directed on the equipment on fire. Hydrant protection shall be provided for the following in substations of voltage levels 400kV and above. At least one hydrant post shall be provided for every 60m of external wall measurement of buildings. a) Control room building b) L.T. Transformer area c) Fire Fighting pump House. d) Stores e) Transformers f) Shunt Reactors/ Bus Reactors. 2.1.1 *Each transformer and reactor is to be protected by H.V.W. spray type fire protection essentially consisting of a network of projectors and an array of heat detectors around the system .The system shall be designed in such a way that the same can be extended to protect additional Transformer/ Reactor to be installed in future. However, for the purpose of design it shall be assumed that only one Transformer/ Reactor will be on fire. The main header pipe size in the yard shall be 250mmNB and the branch to the equipment (shall not be more than 20metres length) shall be of the same size as of deluge valve.
331
Note: * Nitrogen injection fire protection has also to be quoted as an alternative offer. However techno commercial comparison of both should be given by the bidder. 2.1.2 A warning plate shall be placed near the hydrant points for the transformers and reactors and the pump in 220kV substations to clearly indicate that water shall be sprayed only after ensuring that the power to the transformer/ reactor which is on fire is switched off and there are no live parts within 20metres of distance from the personnel using the hydrant. 2.2 HIGH VELOCITY WATER (H.V.W) SPRAY SYSTEM H.V.W. spray type fire protection essentially consists of a network of projectors and an array of heat detectors around the Transformer/Reactor to be protected. On operation of one or more of heat detectors, Water under pressure is directed to the projector network through a Deluge valve from the pipe network laid for this system. This shall be provided for transformers and reactors in 765kV and 400kV substations. Wet detection initiation system shall be employed for automatic operation. The system shall be designed in such a way that the same can be extended to protect additional Transformer/ Reactor to be installed in future. However, for the purpose of design it shall be assumed that only one Transformer/ Reactor will be on fire. The main header pipe size in the yard shall be 250mmNB and the branch to the equipment (shall not be more than 20metres length) shall be of the same size as of deluge valve. 2.2.1 The Electrical clearance between the Emulsifier system pipe work and live parts of the protected equipment shall not be less than the values given below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2.2 765 kV bushing 4900 mm 420 kV bushing 3500 mm 245 kV bushing 2150 mm 145 kV bushing 1300 mm 36 kV bushing 320 mm System shall be designed in such a way that the Water pressure available at any spray nozzle shall be between 3.5bar and 5.0bar and shall be demonstrated through hydraulic calculations. Water shall be applied at a minimum rate of 10.2 LPM/M2 of the surface area of the transformer / Reactor including radiator, conservator, oil pipes, bushing turrets, etc. (including bottom surface for transformer). The nozzle arrangement shall ensure direct impingement of water on all exterior surfaces of transformer tank, bushing
332
turrets, conservator and oil pipes, except underneath the transformer, where horizontal spray may be provided. 2.2.3 Deluge Valve Deluge Valve shall be water pressure operated manual reset type. The Deluge valve shall be closed water tight when water pressure in the heat detector pipe work is healthy and the entire pipe work shall be charged with water under pressure upto the inlet of the Deluge valve. On fall of water pressure due to opening of one or more heat detectors, the valve shall open and water shall rush to the spray water network through the open Deluge valve. The valves shall be manually reset to initial position after completion of operation. Each Deluge Valve shall be provided with a water motor gong which shall sound an alarm when water after passing through the Deluge valve, is tapped through the water motor. Each Deluge valve shall be provided with a local panel with provision of opening of Deluge valve from local and remote from control room/ remote centre. In addition to this, each valve shall be provided with local operation latch. Deluge valves of 100mmNB size shall be used if the flow requirement is 200m3/hr and 150mmNB size shall be used for flow requirement >200m3/hr. Test valves shall simulate the operation of Deluge valves and shall be of quick opening type. The general construction shall conform to requirements under clause no.7.00.00 for piping, valves and specialities. 2.2.4 High Velocity Spray Nozzles (Projectors) High velocity spray system shall be designed and installed to discharge water in the form of a conical spray consisting of droplets of water travelling at high velocity, which shall strike the burning surface with sufficient impact to ensure the formation of an emulsion. At the same time the spray shall efficiently cut off oxygen supply and provide sufficient cooling. 2.2.5 Minimum set point of the heat detectors used in the HVW spray system shall be 79C. The optimum rating shall, however, be selected by the Bidder, keeping in mind the maximum and minimum temperature attained at site. 2.3 Fire Detection and alarm System This system shall be provided for control room building and Switchyard panel rooms of substations.
333
2.3.1
Suitable fire detection system using smoke detectors and/or heat detectors shall be provided for the entire building, including corridor and toilets. Fire detectors shall be located at strategic locations in various rooms of the building. Each Switchyard panel room shall be considered a separate zone. Adequate number of extra zones shall be provided for Switchyard panel rooms for future bays identified in Single line diagram of the substation. The operation of any of the fire detectors/ manual call point should result in the following; 1. A visual signal exhibited in the annunciation panels indicating the area where the fire is detected. 2. An audible alarm sounded in the panel, and 3. An external audible alarm sounded in the building, location of which shall be decided during detailed engineering. 4. If the zone comprises of more than one room, a visual signal shall be exhibited on the outer wall of each room.
2.3.2
Each zone shall be provided with two zone cards in the panel so that system will remain healthy even if one of the cards becomes defective.
2.3.3
Coverage area of each smoke detector shall not be more than 80 m2 and that of heat detectors shall not be more than 40 m2. Ionisation type smoke detectors shall be provided in all areas except pantry room where heat detectors shall be provided. If a detector is concealed, a remote visual indication of its operation shall be provided. Manual call points (Break glass Alarm Stations) shall be provided at strategic locations in the control room building. All cabling shall be done through concealed conduits.
2.3.4
Cables used should be exclusively for fire detection and alarm system and shall be 2Cx1.5sq.mm Cu. cables. Un-armoured PVC insulated FR cables conforming to IS 1554 (Part 1) shall be used.
2.4
Portable and Wheel/ Trolley mounted Fire Extinguishers 2.4.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers Adequate number of portable fire extinguishers of pressurised water, dry chemical powder, and Carbon dioxide type shall be provided in suitable locations in control room building and FFPH building. In addition to this one (1) CO2 type fire extinguisher of
334
4.5kg capacity shall be provided for each Switchyard panel room. These extinguishers will be used during the early phases of fire to prevent its spread and costly damage. 2.4.2 Wheel/ Trolley mounted Fire Extinguishers Wheel/Trolley mounted Mechanical foam type fire extinguishers of 50litre capacity, conforming to IS: 13386, shall be provided for the protection of the following: 1. Transformers and reactors in 220kV and 132 kV substations. Two (2) nos. for each 220kV or 132kV transformer and reactor. 2. LT transformers in all substations. One (1) no. for each transformer. The design, construction & testing of Mechanical foam type 50 litre capacity shall meet the requirements of relevant IS Codes. 2.5 Water Supply System (for substations of voltage levels 400kV and above) Water for hydrant & HVW system shall be supplied by one electrical motor driven pump of rated capacity 410m3/hr. at 70MWC head, with another pump of same capacity , driven by diesel engine, shall be used as standby. Water storage tank with two compartments of adequate capacity shall be provided. Pumps shall work under positive suction head. Annunciations of the hydrant & HVW spray systems shall be provided in fire water pump house and repeated in 765kV/ 400 kV control room. The outdoor piping for the system in general shall be laid above ground on concrete pedestals with proper supporting arrangement. However, at road/rail crossings, in front/access of buildings, places where movement of cranes/vehicles is expected and at any other place where above ground piping is not advisable, the pipes shall be laid underground. Such locations shall be finalised during detailed engineering. The whole system will be kept pressurised by providing combination of air vessel and jockey pump of 10.8M3/hr. capacity at 80MWC. The capacity of air vessel shall not be less than 3m3. Minor leakage will be met by Jockey pump. One additional jockey pump shall be provided as standby. All pumps shall be of horizontal centrifugal type. Pumps and air vessel with all auxiliary equipment will be located in firewater pump house. A pressure relief valve of suitable rating shall be provided in water header to release excess pressure due to atmospheric temperature variations. Operation of all the pumps shall be automatic and pumps shall be brought into operation at preset pressure. Fire pumps shall only be stopped manually. Manual start/stop provision shall be provided in local control panel. 2.5.1 The general design of the fire fighting pump sets shall meet the requirements for Horizontal centrifugal pumps, Diesel engines and Electrical motors.
335
2.5.2
Each pump shall be provided with a nameplate indicating suction lift/delivery head, capacity and number of revolutions per minute.
2.5.3
Design, construction, erection, testing and trial operation of piping, valves, strainers, hydrant valves, hoses, nozzles, branch pipes, hose boxes, expansion joints etc. shall conform to the requirements.
2.6
Instrumentation and Control System 2.6.1 All instruments like pressure indicators, differential pressure indicators, pressure switches, level indicators, level switches, temperature indicators, alarms and all other instruments and panels as indicated in the specification and those needed for safe and efficient operation of the whole system shall be furnished according to the requirements of clause 11.00.00. Pump running/ fails to start signal shall be taken from the pressure switch immediately after the discharge of the pump. 2.6.2 Control Panel Power feeder for motors will be from switchgear board located in control building but control supply for all local control panels, annunciation panels, battery charger units, space heaters etc. shall be fed from the AC and DC distribution boards located in pump house. These AC & DC distribution boards will be fed from the switchgears and DCDBs located in control building. a) Panel for motor driven fire water pump The panel shall be provided with the following: 1. TPN switch 2. Auto/manual switch 3. Start/Stop Push buttons with indication lamp 4. DOL starter with thermal O/L relay 5. Indicating lamp showing power ON 6. ndication lamp with drive ON/OF 7. Indication lamp showing Motor Trip 1 No. 1 No. 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 No.
336
Main power cable from breaker feeder of main switchboard shall be terminated in this panel and another cable shall emanate from this panel which shall be terminated at motor terminals. b) Panel for Two nos. Jockey Pump The panel shall be provided with the following : 1. Fuse-switch unit for Jockey pumps 2. Auto/manual switch for 3. Selector switch for selecting either jockey pump 4. D.O.L. starter with overload each relay self-resetting type, for all the drives. 5. Start/stop push button for Jockey Pump with indication lamp with pad-locking arrangements in stop position 6. Indication lamp for trip indication c) Panel for 2 Nos. battery charger & Diesel Engine driven fire water pump The panel shall be provided with the following : 1. Auto/Manual switch for Diesel Engine driven pump 2. Start/Stop push buttons with indication lamp 3. Indicating lamp showing drive ON/OFF 4. D.C. Voltmeter/Ammeter in the battery charger circuit 5. Battery charger will be as per specification described 6. Selector switch for selecting either of battery chargers for the battery sets. 7. Selector switch for selecting either set of batteries for Diesel engine starting. 8. Selector switch for boost 1 No. 1 Set 1 Set 1 No. each 1 Set 1 No. 1No. 1 Set 1 Set for each pump 1 No. for each pump 1 No. 1 No. each 1 Set for each pump 1No.
1 No. each for pump 1 No.
337
charging/Trickle charging of battery set. d) Individual local control panel is to be considered for each transformer/ Reactor deluge system wherever these equipment are envisaged. This panel shall contain push buttons with indicating lamps for spray ON/OFF operation in the valve operation circuit. Push buttons shall be concealed behind glass covers, which shall be broken to operate the buttons. Provision shall be made in the panel for the field signal for the annunciations such as spray ON and fire in the Transformer/Reactor. A signal for spray ON shall also be provided in the control room fire alarm panel for employers event logger. Remote operation facility to open the Deluge valve from control room/ remote centre shall also be provided. 2.6.3 Annunciation Panels
a) Location: Fire Water Pump House i) Indicating lamps showing power supply "ON". ii) Annunciation windows complete with buttons. Details are as follows: S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Description Electric motor driven fire water pump running Electric motor driven fire water pump fails to start Diesel engine driven fire water pump running Diesel engine driven water pump fails Jockey pump-1 running Jockey pump-1 fails to start Jockey pump-2 running Jockey pump-2 fails to start Fire in Transformer/ Reactor Deluge system operating for Transformer/Reactor Header pressure low Fire in smoke detection system zone Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 for each equipment 1 for each equipment 1 1
338
(Common Fire Signal) 13. 14. 15. Water storage tank water level low High speed diesel tank level low Spare 2 1 10
b) Location 400 kV Control Room i) Indication lamp showing power supply 'ON' ii) Provision shall be made in the panel for a signal for spray ON for each Transformer/Reactor for owner's use for event logger. iii) Each Switchyard panel room shall be considered as separate zone for fire detection and alarm system. iv) Following annunciations shall be provided: S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Fire in Transformer/ Reactor Diesel engine driven fire water pump in operation Motor driven fire water pump in operation Jockey pump in operation Fire fighting Water storage tank level Low Fire/Fault (zone alarm module) Number 1 for each equipment 1 1 1 2 1+1(duplicate) For each zone as applicable 7. 8. Spare windows complete in all respect, with relays Spare zone alarm modules 10 Number of future A/c Kiosks required for the bays identified as per SLD
c) Each annunciation panel shall be provided with a hooter.
339
d) Indication for fault in respective areas shall also be provided. Each zone alarm module shall exhibit 'FIRE and 'FAULT' conditions separately. 2.6.4 The control and interlock system for the fire protection system shall meet the following requirements: 1. Electric Motor Driven Fire water Pump Pump should start automatically when the System header pressure is low. Pump should be stopped manually only. Pump should also be started manually if required from local control panel. 2. Diesel Engine Driven Standby Pump The pump should automatically start under any of the following conditions: a) System Header pressure low. b) Electric motor operated fire water pump fails to start. Pump should be stopped manually only. Pump should also be started manually if required from the local control panel. The battery set which is connected for starting of Diesel engine shall not be subjected to boost charge. 3. Jockey Pump It shall be possible to select any one of the Jockey pumps as main and the other as standby. Main Jockey pump shall start automatically when water pressure in header falls below the set value. If the main jockey pump fails to start then the standby should start. Jockey pump shall stop automatically when the pressure is restored to its normal value. Manual starting/stopping shall be possible from the local control panel. 3.0 3.1 TESTS Shop Tests 3.1.1 Shop tests of all major equipment centrifugal pumps, diesel engines, electrical drive motors, piping, valves and specialties, pressure and storage vessels, MCC, electrical panels, controls, instrumentation etc. shall be conducted as specified in various clauses and as per applicable standards/codes. 3.1.2 Shop tests shall include all tests to be carried out at Contractor's works, works of his subcontractor and at works where raw materials supplied for manufacture of equipment are
340
fabricated. The tests to be carried out shall include but not be limited to the tests described as follows: a) Materials analysis and testing. b) Hydrostatic pressure test of all pressure parts, piping, etc. c) Dimensional and visual check. d) Balancing test of rotating components. e) Response of heat/smoke detectors. f) Performance characteristics of HVW spray nozzles (projectors). g) Flow rate and operational test on Flow control valves. h) Operational test of alarm valve (water-motor gang). i) j) Calibration tests on instruments and tests on control panel. Destruction/burst tests on 2% or minimum one (1) no. of hoses and portable type fire extinguishers for each type as applicable. Any fraction number shall be counted as next higher integer. k) Performance test on fire extinguishers as required in the code. 3.1.3 In the absence of any Code/Standard, equipment shall be tested as per mutually agreed procedure between the supplier and the Employer. 3.1.4 A comprehensive visual and functional check for panels would be conducted and will include a thorough check up of panel dimensions, material of construction, panel finish, compliance with tubing and wiring specifications, quality of workmanship, proper tagging & locations of instruments/accessories. The wiring check shall be complete point to point ring out and check for agreement with installation drawings and equipment vendor prints of the complete system and an inspection of all field connection terminals and levelling. 3.1.5 3.1.6 All test certificates and reports shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. The Employer's representative shall be given full access to all tests. The manufacturer shall inform the Employer allowing adequate time so that, if the Employer so desires, his representatives can witness the test. 3.2 Pre-commissioning Tests
341
3.2.1 a)
General All piping and valves, after installation will be tested hydraulically at a pressure of 16kg/cm2 for a period of 30 minutes to check against leak tightness.
b)
All manually operated valves/gates shall be operated throughout 100% of the travel and these should function without any trouble whatsoever, to the satisfaction of the Employer.
c)
All pumps shall be run with the specified fluid from shut off condition to valve wide open condition. Head developed will be checked from the discharge pressure gauge reading. During the test, the pumps and drives shall run smoothly without any undue vibration, leakage through gland, temperature rise in the bearing parts, noise, flow pulsation etc.
d)
All pressure vessels should be tested hydraulically at the specified test pressure, singly or in the system.
e) f)
Painting shall be checked by dry type thickness gauges. Visual check on all structural components, welding, painting etc. and if doubt arises, these will be tested again.
g)
All test instruments and equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer.
h) i) j)
Automatic starting of all the fire pumps by operating the test valves. Automatic operation of the Jockey pump Operation of the Deluge valve by breaking a detector as well as manual and remote operation of the deluge valve.
k)
Operation of entire annunciation system.
Replacement of fused/damaged quartzoid bulb detectors during the test shall be responsibility of contractor. 3.2.2 After erection at site, the complete HVW spray protection and hydrant system shall be subject to tests to show satisfactory performance for which detailed procedure shall be submitted for Employer's approval. Full flow tests with water shall be done for the system piping as a means of checking the nozzle layout, discharge pattern and coverage, any obstructions and determination of relation between design criteria and actual performance, also to ensure against clogging of the smaller piping and the discharge
342
devices by foreign matter carried by the water. Rigidity of pipe supports shall also be checked during the water flow. 3.2.3 All the detectors installed shall be tested for actuation by bringing a suitable source of heat/smoke near the detector and creating a stream of hot air/ smoke over the detector. The exact procedure of this test shall be detailed out by the Employer to the successful Bidder. 4.0 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall indicate in his scope of supply all the mandatory spares in the relevant schedules.. 5.0 HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS This clause covers the design, performance, manufacturing, construction features and testing of horizontal centrifugal pumps used for the purpose of fire fighting. 5.1 The materials of the various components shall conform to the applicable IS/BS/ASTM/DIN Standards. 5.1.1 In case of any contradiction with the aforesaid standards and the stipulations as per the technical specification as specified hereinafter, the stipulations of the technical specification shall prevail. 5.2 General Performance Requirements 5.2.1 The pump set shall be suitable for continuous operation at any point within the "Range of operation". 5.2.2 Pumps shall have a continuously rising head capacity characteristics from the specified duty point towards shut off point, the maximum being at shut off. 5.2.3 Pumps shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150% of rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head. Range of operation shall be 20% of rated flow to 150% of rated flow. 5.2.4 The pump-motor set shall be designed in such a way that there is no damage due to the reverse flow through the pump which may occur due to any mal-operation of the system. 5.2.5 Drive Rating The drive rating shall not be less than the maximum power requirement at any point within the "Range of Operation" specified.
343
During starting under reverse flow condition, the motor shall be capable of bringing the pump to rated speed at normal direction with 90% rated voltage at motor terminals. 5.2.6 Pump set along with its drive shall run smooth without undue noise and vibration. Acceptable peak to peak vibration limits shall generally be guided by Hydraulic Institute Standards. 5.2.7 The Contractor under this specification shall assume full responsibility in the operation of the pump and drive as one unit. 5.3 Design & Construction 5.3.1 Pump casing may be axially or radially split. The casing shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure developed by the pump at the pumping temperature. 5.3.2 Pump casing shall be provided with adequate number of vent and priming connections with valves, unless the pump is made self-venting & priming. Casing drain, as required, shall be provided complete with drain valves. 5.3.3 Under certain conditions, the pump casing nozzles will be subjected to reactions from external piping. Pump design must ensure that the nozzles are capable of withstanding external reactions not less than those specified in API-610. 5.3.4 Pump shall preferably be of such construction that it is possible to service the internals of the pump without disturbing suction and discharge piping connections. 5.3.5 Impeller The impeller shall be secured to the shaft and shall be retained against circumferential movement by keying, pinning or lock rings. On pumps with overhung shaft impellers shall be secured to the shaft by an additional locknut or cap screw. All screwed fasteners shall tighten in the direction of normal rotation. 5.3.6 Wearing Rings Replaceable type wearing rings shall be furnished to prevent damage to impeller and casing. Suitable method of locking the wearing ring shall be used.
5.3.7
Shaft
344
Shaft size selected shall take into consideration the critical speed, which shall be at least 20% away from the operating speed. The critical speed shall also be atleast 10% away from runaway speed. 5.3.8 Shaft Sleeves Renewable type fine finished shaft sleeves shall be provided at the stuffing boxes/mechanical seals. Length of the shaft sleeves must extend beyond the outer faces of gland packing or seal and plate so as to distinguish between the leakage between shaft & shaft sleeve and that past the seals/gland. 5.3.9 Shaft sleeves shall be securely fastened to the shaft to prevent any leakage or loosening. Shaft and shaft sleeve assembly should ensure concentric rotation. 5.3.10 Bearings Bearings of adequate design shall be furnished for taking the entire pump load arising from all probable conditions of continuous operation throughout its "Range of Operation" and also at the shut-off condition. The bearing shall be designed on the basis of 20,000 working hours minimum for the load corresponding to the duty point. Bearings shall be easily accessible without disturbing the pump assembly. A drain plug shall be provided at the bottom of each bearing housing. 5.3.11 Stuffing Boxes Stuffing box design shall permit replacement of packing without removing any part other than the gland. Stuffing boxes shall be sealed/cooled by the fluid being pumped and necessary piping, fittings, valves, instruments, etc. shall form an integral part of the pump assembly. 5.3.12 Shaft Couplings All shafts shall be connected with adequately sized flexible couplings of suitable design. Necessary guards shall be provided for the couplings. 5.3.13 Base Plates & Sole Plate A common base plate mounting both for the pump and drive shall be furnished. The base plate shall be of rigid construction, suitably ribbed and reinforced. Base plate and pump supports shall be so constructed and the pumping unit so mounted as to minimize
345
misalignment caused by mechanical forces such as normal piping strain, hydraulic piping thrust etc. Suitable drain taps and drip lip shall be provided. 5.3.14 Material of Construction All materials used for pump construction shall be of tested quality. Material of construction of the major parts of the pumps shall be as given below: a) b) c) d) e) Casing Impeller Wearing ring Shaft Shaft sleeve Casting Grade FG: 260 of IS 210 Bronze Grade LTB 2 of IS: 318 Bronze Grade LTB 2 of IS: 318 Grade 40C8 of IS 1570 (Part 2, section 1.): 1979. Bronze Grade LTB 2 of IS: 318 or Chrome steel 07Cr13 of IS 1570 (part 5) :1985. f) g) Stuffing box Gland 2.5% Nickel CI Grade FG 260 of IS:210 --- do ---
5.3.15 Balancing All rotating components shall be statically and dynamically balanced at shop. 5.3.16 All the components of pumps of identical parameters supplied under this specification shall be interchangeable. 5.4 Tests and Inspection 5.4.1 The manufacturer shall conduct all routine tests required to ensure that the equipment furnished conform to the requirements of this specification and are in compliance with the requirements of applicable Codes and Standards. The particulars of the proposed tests and the procedures for the tests shall be submitted to the Employer/Engineer for approval before conducting the tests. 5.4.2 Where stage inspection is to be witnessed by Employer, in addition to above, the Bidder shall submit to the Employer/Engineer at the beginning of the contract, the detailed PERT-Chart showing the manufacturing programme and indicating the period where Employer or his authorised inspecting agency are required at the shop.
346
5.4.3
Material of Construction All materials used for pump construction shall be of tested quality. Materials shall be tested as per the relevant standards and test certificates shall be made available to the Employer/Engineer.
5.4.4
Where stage inspection is to be witnessed by Employer, all material test certificates shall be correlated and verified with the actual material used for construction before starting fabrication, by Employer's Inspector who shall stamp the material. In case mill test certificates for the material are not available, the Contractor shall carry out physical and chemical tests at his own cost from a testing agency approved by the Employer, as per the requirements of specified material standard. The samples for physical and chemical tests shall be drawn up in presence of Employer's inspector who shall also witness the tests.
5.4.5
Shaft shall be subjected to 100% ultrasonic test and machined portion of the impeller shall be subject to 100% DP test. On finished shaft DP test will also be carried out.
5.4.6
Hydraulic test at shop All pressure parts shall be subjected to hydraulic testing at a pressure of 150% of maximum pressure generated by the pump at rated speed or 200% of total dynamic head whichever is higher, for a period not less than one (1) hour.
5.4.7
Performance test at shop Pumps shall be subjected to routine tests to determine the performance of the pumps. These tests shall be conducted in presence of Employer/Engineer's representative as per the requirements of the Hydraulic Institute Standards/ASME Power Test Code PTC 8.2/BS- 599/I.S.S., latest edition. Routine tests shall be done on all the pumps.
5.4.8
Performance tests shall be conducted to cover the entire range of operation of the pumps. These shall be carried out to span 150% of rated capacity upto pump shut-off condition. A minimum of five combinations of head and capacity are to be achieved during testing to establish the performance curves, including the design capacity point and the two extremities of the Range of operation specified.
5.4.9
Tests shall preferably be conducted alongwith the actual drives being supplied.
5.4.10 The Bidders shall submit in his proposal the facilities available at his works to conduct performance testing. If because of limitations of available facilities, a reduced speed test
347
or model test has to be resorted to establish pump performance, the same has to be highlighted in the offer. 5.4.11 In case of model testing, the stipulations of latest edition of Hydraulic Institute Standards shall be binding. Prototype or model tests, however, shall be conducted with the suction condition identical to the field conditions i.e. sigma values of prototype and model is to be kept same. 5.4.12 Prior to conducting model testing, calculations establishing model parameters, sizes and test procedure will be submitted to Employer/Engineer for approval. 5.4.13 All rotating components of the pumps shall be subjected to static and dynamic balancing tests. 5.4.14 The Employer or his authorised representative shall have full access to all tests. Prior to performance tests, the Contractor shall intimate the Employer allowing adequate time so that if the Employer so desires, his representative can witness the test. 5.4.15 Report and test certificates of the above tests shall be submitted to the Employer/Engineer for approval. 5.4.16 Pre commissioning tests. After installation, pumps offered may be subjected to testing at field also by Employer. If the performances at field are not found to meet the requirement, then the equipment shall be rectified by the Contractor without any extra cost. Prior to performance testing, the procedure for such tests will be mutually agreed between Employer and Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments, accessories and personnel for testing. Prior to testing, the calibration curves of all instruments and permissible tolerance limit of instruments shall be mutually agreed upon. 6.0 DIESEL ENGINES This Clause covers the design, performance, manufacturing construction features and testing of compression ignition diesel engines, used primarily for driving centrifugal pumps, used for the purpose of fire fighting. 6.1 Design and Construction General
348
6.1.1
The diesel engine shall be of multicylinder type four-stroke cycle with mechanical (airless) injection, cold starting type.
6.1.2
The continuous engine brake horse power rating (after accounting for all auxiliary power consumption) at the site conditions shall be atleast 20% greater than the requirement at the duty point of pump at rated RPM and in no case, less than the maximum power requirement at any condition of operation of pump.
6.1.3
Reference conditions for rated output of engine shall be as per IS: 10000, part II or ISO:3046, part I.
6.1.4
The engine shall be designed with regard to ease of maintenance, repair, cleaning and inspection.
6.1.5
All parts subjected to substantial temperature changes shall be designed and supported to permit free expansion and contraction without resulting in leakage, harmful distortion or misalignment.
6.1.6
Starting The engine shall be capable of both automatic and manual start. The normal mode of starting is automatic but in the event of failure of automatic start or at the discretion of the operator, the engine can be started manually from the LCP. Since the fire pumping unit driven by the diesel engine is not required to run continuously for long periods and the operation will not be frequent, special features shall be built into the engine to allow it to start within a very short period against full load even if it has remained idle for a considerable period.
6.1.7
If provision for manual start (cranking) is provided, all controls/ mechanisms, which have to be operated during the starting process, shall be within easy reach of the operator.
6.1.8
Automatic cranking shall be effected by a D.C. motor having high starting torque to overcome full engine compression. Starting power will be supplied from either of the two (2) sets of storage batteries. The automatic starting arrangement shall include a 'Repeat Start' feature for 3 attempts. The battery capacity shall be adequate for 3 (three) consecutive starts without recharging with a cold engine under full compression.
6.1.9
The batteries shall be used exclusively for starting the diesel engine and be kept fully charged all the time in position. Arrangement for both trickle and booster charge shall be provided.
349
Diesel engine shall be provided with two (2) battery charger units of aircooled design. The charger unit shall be capable of charging one (1) set of battery at a time. Provision shall, however, be made so that any one of the charger units can be utilised for charging either of the two (2) batteries. 6.1.10 For detail design of battery and battery charger, sub- section Electrical may be referred to. 6.1.11 Governing System: The engine shall be fitted with a speed control device, which will control the speed under all conditions of load. 6.1.12 The governor shall offer following features: a) Engine should be provided with an adjustable governor capable of regulating engine speed within 5% of its rated speed under any condition of load between shut-off and maximum load conditions of the pumps. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load. b) Engine shall be provided with an over speed shutdown device. It shall be arranged to shut-down the engine at a speed approximately 20% above rated engine speed and for manual reset, such that the automatic engine controller will continue to show an over speed signal until the device is manually reset to normal operating position (Vol.II, NFPA, 1978). 6.1.13 The governor shall be suitable for operation without external power supply. 6.1.14 Fuel System The diesel engine will run on High Speed Diesel. 6.1.15 The engine shall be provided with fuel oil tank of 250 litres capacity. The fuel oil tank shall preferably be mounted near the engine. No fuel oil tank will be provided by the Employer. 6.1.16 The fuel oil tank shall be of welded steel constructed to relevant standards for mild steel drums. The outlet of the tank shall be above the inlet of fuel injection pump of the diesel engine to ensure adequate pressure at suction of injection pump. 6.1.17 The fuel oil tank shall be designed in such a way that the sludge and sediment settles down to the tank bottom and is not carried to the injection pump. A small sump shall be
350
provided and fitted with drain plug to take out sludge/sediment and to drain oil. Adequate hand holes (greater than 80 mm size) shall be provided to facilitate maintenance. 6.1.18 Pipeline carrying fuel oil shall be gradually sloped from the tank to the injection pump. Any valve in the fuel feed pipe between the fuel tank and the engine shall be placed adjacent to the tank and it shall be locked in the open position. A filter shall be incorporated in this pipeline, in addition to other filters in the fuel oil system. Pipe joints shall not be soldered and plastic tubing shall not be used. Reinforced flexible pipes may also be used. 6.1.19 The complete fuel oil system shall be designed to avoid any air pocket in any part of the pipe work, fuel pump, sprayers/injectors, filter system etc. No air relief cock is permitted. However, where air relief is essential, plugs may be used. 6.1.20 A manual fuel pump shall be provided for priming and releasing of air from the fuel pipelines. 6.1.21 Lubricating Oil System Automatic pressure lubrication shall be provided by a pump driven by the crank shaft, taking suction from a sump and delivering pressurized oil through cooler and fine mesh filters to a main supply header fitted in the bed plate casing. High pressure oil shall be supplied to the main and big end bearings, cam-shaft bearings, cam-shaft chain and gear drives, governor, auxiliary drive gears etc. Valve gear shall be lubricated at reduced pressure through a reducing valve and the cams by an oil bath. 6.1.22 Cooling Water System Direct cooling or heat exchanger type cooling system shall be employed for the diesel engine. Water shall be tapped from the fire pump discharge. This water shall be led through duplex strainer, pressure breakdown orifice and then after passing through the engine, the water at the outlet shall be taken directly to the sump through an elevated funnel. 6.2 Testing & Inspection 6.2.1 The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required, to ensure that the equipment furnished conforms to the requirement of this sub-sectionand in compliance with requirements of applicable codes. The particulars of the proposed tests and the procedure for the tests shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before conducting the tests.
351
6.2.2
At manufacturer's works, tests shall be carried out during and after completion of manufacture of different component/parts and the assembly as applicable. Following tests shall be conducted.
6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Material analysis and testing. Hydrostatic pressure testing of all pressure parts. Static and dynamic balance tests of rotating parts at applicable overspeed and determination of vibration level.
6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11
MPI/DPT on machined parts of piston and cylinder. Ultrasonic testing of crankshaft and connecting rod after heat treatment. Dimensional check of close tolerance components like piston, cylinder bore etc. Calibration tests of all fuel pumps, injectors, standard orifices, nozzles, instruments etc. Over speed test of the assembly at 120% of rated speed. Power run test.
6.2.12 Performance test of the diesel engine to determine its torque, power and specific fuel consumption as function of shaft speed. Performance test of the engine shall be carried for 12 hours out of which 1 hour at full load and one hour at 110% overload. 6.2.13 Measurement of vibration & noise. (i) Measurement of vibration The vibration shall be measured during full load test as well as during the overload test and limit shall be 100 microns. (ii) Measurement of noise level The equivalent 'A' weighted sound level measured at a distance of 1.5 M above floor level in elevation and 1.0 M horizontally from the base of the equipment, expressed in dB to a reference of 0.0002 microbar shall not exceed 93 dBA. Above tests for vibration shall be repeated at site as pre-commissioning tests. 6.2.14 Adjustment of speed governor as per BS: 5514. 6.2.15 Diesel engine shall be subjected to routine tests as per IS: 10000/BS:5514. 7.0 PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALITIES
352
This clause covers the design, manufacture, shop testing, erection, testing and commissioning of piping, valves and specialities. 7.2 Scope The piping system which shall include but not be limited to the following: i) Plain run of piping, bends, elbows, tees, branches, laterals, crosses, reducing unions, couplings, caps, expansion joints, flanges, blank flanges, thrust blocks, anchors, hangers, supports, saddles, shoes, vibration dampeners, sampling connections, hume pipes etc. ii) Gaskets, ring joints, backing rings, jointing material etc. as required.Also all welding electrodes and welding consumables including special ones, if any. iii) iv) Instrument tapping connections, stubs etc. Gate and globe valves to start/stop and regulate flow and swing check valves for one directional flow. v) vi) Basket strainers and Y-type strainers Bolts, nuts, fasteners as required for interconnecting piping, valves and fittings as well as for terminal points. For pipe connections into Owner's R.C.C. works, Bidder will furnish all inserts. vii) Painting, anti-corrosive coatings etc. of pipes and equipment. Adequate number of air release valves shall be provided at the highest points in the piping system to vent any trapped air in the system. 7.3 Design 7.3.1 Material of construction of various pipes shall be as follows :
(a) Buried Pipes Mild steel black pipes as per IS:1239, Part-I medium grade (for pipes of sizes 200 NB and above) suitably lagged on the outside to prevent soil corrosion, as specified elsewhere. (b) Overground Pipes normally full of water Mild steel black pipes as per IS:1239, Part-I medium grade (for pipes for sizes 150 NB and below) or IS:3589, Fe 410 grade (for pipes of sizes 200 NB and above).
353
(c) Overground pipes normally empty, but periodic charge of water and for detector line for HVW System. Mild steel galvanised pipes as per IS:1239, Part-I medium grade (for pipes of sizes 150 NB and below) or IS:3589, Fe 410 grade (for pipes of sizes 200 NB and above). 7.3.2 All fittings to be used in connection with steel pipe lines upto a size of 80 mm shall be as per IS:1239. Part-II Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings, Heavy grade. Fittings with sizes above 80 mm upto 150 mm shall be fabricated from IS:1239 Heavy grade pipes or steel plates having thickness not less than those of IS:1239 Part-I Heavy grade pipes. Fittings with sizes above 150 mm shall be fabricated from IS:3589 Class-2 pipes. All fitting used in GI piping shall be threaded type. Welding shall not be permitted on GI piping.
7.3.3 7.3.4
For steel pipeline, welded construction should be adopted unless specified otherwise. All piping system shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure arising from any condition of operation and testing including water hammer effects.
7.3.5
Gate/sluice valve shall be used for isolation of flow in pipe lines and shall be as per 778 (for size upto 40 mm) and IS:14846 (for sizes above 40 mm). Valves shall be of rising spindle type and of PN 1.6 class
7.3.6
Gate Valves shall be provided with the following : (a) Hand wheel. (b) Position indicator. (c) Locking facility (where necessary).
7.3.7
Gate valves shall be provided with back seating bush to facilitate gland removal during full open condition.
7.3.8
Globe valves shall be provided with contoured plug to facilitate regulation and control of flow. All other requirements should generally follow those of gate valve.
7.3.9
Non-return valves shall be swing check type. Valves will have a permanent "arrow" inscription on its body to indicate direction of flow of the fluid. These valves shall generally conform to IS: 5312.
354
7.3.10 Whenever any valve is found to be so located that it cannot be approached manually from the nearest floor/gallery/platform hand wheel with floor stand or chain operator shall be provided for the same. 7.3.11 Valves below 50 mm size shall have screwed ends while those of 50 mm and higher sizes shall have flanged connections. 7.3.12 Basket Strainer a) Basket strainers shall be of 30mesh and have the following materials of construction : Body: Fabricated mild steel as per IS:2062 (Tested Quality). Strainer Wires: stainless steel (AISI : 316), 30 SWG, suitably reinforced. b) Inside of basket body shall be protected by two (2) coats of heavy duty bitumastic paint. c) Strainers shall be Simplex design. Suitable vent and drain connections with valves shall be provided. d) e) Screen open area shall be at least 4 times pipe cross sectional area at inlet. Pressure drop across strainer in clean condition shall not exceed 1.5 MWC at 410 M3/hr flow. Pressure drop test report of strainer of same design shall be furnished. 7.3.13 Y-type On-line Strainer Body shall be constructed of mild steel as per IS:2062 (tested quality). Strainer wires shall be of stainless steel AISI:316, 30 SWG, 30 mesh. Blowing arrangement shall be provided with removable plug at the outlet. Screen open area shall be atleast 4 times pipe cross-sectional area at inlet. Pressure drop test report of strainer of same design shall be furnished. 7.3.14 Hydrant Valve (Outdoor) and Indoor Hydrant Valves (Internal Landing Valves). The general arrangement of outdoor stand post assembly, consisting of a column pipe and a hydrant valve with a quick coupling end shall be as per TAC requirement. Materials of construction shall be as follows : a) b) Column pipe M.S. IS:1239 med. grade. Hydrant Valve
355
i) ii)
Body Gun metal. Trim Leaded tin bronze as per IS:318, Grade-LTB 2.
iii) Hand Wheel Cast Iron as per IS:210, Grade FG:200. iv) Washer, gasket, etc. Rubber as per IS:638. v) Quick coupling Leaded tin bronze as per connection IS: 318, Grade-LTB 2.
vi) Spring Phosphor Bronze as per IS: 7608. vii) Cap and chain Leaded tin bronze as per IS:318, Grade-LTB etc.2. The general design of hydrant valve shall conform to IS: 5290. 7.3.15 Hoses, Nozzles, Branch pipes and Hose boxes (a) Hose pipes shall be of reinforced rubber-lined canvas construction as per type A of IS:636 with nominal size of 63 MM (2 1/2") and lengths of 15 metre or 7.5 metre, as indicated elsewhere. All hoses shall be ISI marked. (b) Hosepipes shall be capable of withstanding an internal water pressure of not less than 35.7 kg/cm2 without bursting. It must also withstand a working pressure of 8.5 kg/cm2 without undue leakage or sweating. (c) Each hose shall be fitted with instantaneous spring lock type couplings at both ends. Hose shall be fixed to the coupling ends by copper rivets and the joint shall be reinforced by 1.5 mm galvanized mild steel wires and leather bands. (d) Branch pipes shall be constructed of copper and have rings of leaded tin bronze (as per IS:318 Grade-2) at both ends. One end of the branch pipe will receive the quick coupling while the nozzles will be fixed to the other end. (e) (f) Nozzles shall be constructed of leaded tin bronze as per IS:318, Grade-2. Suitable spanners of approved design shall be provided in adequate numbers for easy assembly and dismantling of various components like branch pipes, nozzles, quick coupling ends etc. (g) Hose pipes fitted with quick coupling ends, branch pipes, nozzles spanner etc. will be kept in a hose box, which will be located near point of use. The furnished design must meet the approval of Tariff Advisory Committee.
356
(h)
All instantaneous couplings, as mentioned under clause Nos.3.03.19, 3.03.20 and 3.03.21 above shall be of identical design (both male and female) so that any one can be interchanged with another. One male, female combination shall get locked in by mere pushing of the two halves together but will provide leak tightness at a pressure of 8 kg/cm2 of water. Designs employing screwing or turning to have engagement shall not be accepted.
7.4
Fabrication & Erection 7.4.1 The contractor shall fabricate all the pipe work strictly in accordance with the related approved drawings. 7.4.2 (a) (b) (c) End Preparation For steel pipes, end preparation for butt welding shall be done by machining. Socket weld end preparation shall be sawing/machining. For tees, laterals, mitre bends, and other irregular details cutting templates shall be used for accurate cut. 7.4.3 (a) Pipe Joints In general, pipes having sizes over 25 mm shall be joined by butt welding. Pipes having 25 mm size or less shall be joined by socket welding/screwed connections. Galvanised pipes of all sizes shall have screwed joints. No welding shall be permitted on GI pipes. Screwed joints shall have tapered threads and shall be assured of leak tightness without using any sealing compound. (b) Flanged joints shall be used for connections to vessels, equipment, flanged valves and also on suitable straight lengths of pipe line of strategic points to facilitate erection and subsequent maintenance work. 7.4.4 (a) Overground Piping Piping to be laid overground shall be supported on pipe rack/supports. Rack/supports details shall have to be approved by Employer/Engineer. (b) Surface of overground pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of mill scale, rust etc. by wire brushing. Thereafter one (1) coat of red lead primer shall be applied. Finally two (2) coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour shall be applied. 7.4.5 Buried Pipe Lines
357
(a)
Pipes to be buried underground shall be provided with protection against soil corrosion by coating and wrapping with two coats of coal tar hot enamel paint and two wraps of reinforced fibre glass tissue. The total thickness of coating and wrapping shall not be less than 3 mm. Alternatively corrosion resistant tapes can also be used for protection of pipes against corrosion.
(b) (c) (d)
Coating and wrapping and holiday testing shall be in line with IS:10221. Buried pipelines shall be laid with the top of pipe one meter below ground level. At site, during erection, all coated and wrapped pipes shall be tested with an approved Holiday detector equipment with a positive signalling device to indicate any fault hole breaks or conductive particle in the protective coating.
7.5
General Instruction for Piping Design and Construction 7.5.1 While erecting field run pipes, the contractor shall check, the accessibility of valves, instrument tapping points, and maintain minimum headroom requirement and other necessary clearance from the adjoining work areas. 7.5.2 Modification of prefabricated pipes, if any, shall have to be carried out by the contractor at no extra charge to the Employer. 7.5.3 (i) (ii) Welding Welding shall be done by qualified welders only. Before welding, the ends shall be cleaned by wire brushing, filing or machine grinding. Each weld-run shall be cleaned of slag before the next run is deposited. (iii) Welding at any joint shall be completed uninterrupted. If this cannot be followed for some reason, the weld shall be insulated for slow and uniform cooling. (iv) Welding shall be done by manual oxyacetylene or manual shielded metal arc process. Automatic or semi-automatic welding processes may be done only with the specific approval of Employer/ Consultant. (v) As far as possible welding shall be carried out in flat position. If not possible, welding shall be done in a position as close to flat position as possible. (vi) No backing ring shall be used for circumferential butt welds.
(vii) Welding carried out in ambient temperature of 5C or below shall be heat-treated.
358
(viii) Tack welding for the alignment of pipe joints shall be done only by qualified welders. Since tack welds form part of final welding, they shall be executed carefully and shall be free from defects. Defective welds shall be removed prior to the welding of joints. Electrodes size for tack welding shall be selected depending upon the root opening. (ix) Tacks should be equally spaced as follows: for 65 NB and smaller pipes for 80 NB to 300 NB pipes for 350 NB and larger pipes (x) : : : 2 tacks 4 tacks 6 tacks
Root run shall be made with respective electrodes/filler wires. The size of the electrodes/filler wires. The size of the electrodes shall not be greater than 3.25 mm (10 SWG) and should preferably be 2.3 mm (12 SWG). Welding shall be done with direct current values recommended by the electrode manufacturers.
(xi)
Upward technique shall be adopted for welding pipes in horizontally fixed position. For pipes with wall thickness less than 3 mm, oxyacetylene welding is recommended.
(xii) The root run of butt joints shall be such as to achieve full penetration with the complete fusion of root edges. The weld projection shall not exceed 3 mm inside the pipe. (xiii) On completion of each run craters, weld irregularities, slag etc. shall be removed by grinding or chipping. (xiv) Fillet welds shall be made by shielded metal arc process regardless of thickness and class of piping. Electrode size shall not exceed 10 SWG. (3.25 mm). At least two runs shall be made on socket weld joints. 7.6 Tests at Works a) Pipes (i) Mechanical and chemical tests shall be performed as required in the codes/standards. (ii) All pipes shall be subjected to hydrostatic tests as required in the codes/standards. (iii) 10% spot Radiography test on welds of buried pipes shall be carried out as per ASME VIII. b) Valves
359
(i) Mechanical and chemical tests shall be conducted on materials of the valve as required in the codes/standards. (ii) All valves shall be tested hydrostatically for the seat as well as required in the code/standards for a period of ten minutes. (iii) Air test shall be conducted to detect seat leakage. (iv) Visual check on the valve and simple operational test in which the valve will be operated thrice from full open to full close condition. (v) No repair work on CI valve body, bonnet or wedge shall be allowed. c) Strainers (i) Mechanical and chemical tests shall be conducted on materials of the strainer. (ii) Strainers shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5 times the design pressure or 10 kg/cm2g whichever is higher for a period of one hour. d) Hydrant valves and Indoor Hydrant Valves (Internal Landing Valves) (i) The stand post assembly along with the hydrant valve (valve being open and outlet closed) shall be pressure tested at a hydrostatic pressure of 21 kg/cm2g to detect any leakage through defects of casting. (ii) Flow test shall be conducted on the hydrant valves at a pressure of 7 kg/cm2g and the flow through the valve shall not be less than 900 litres/min. (iii) Leak tightness test of the valve seat shall be conducted at a hydrostatic test pressure of 14 kg/cm2g. e) Hoses, Nozzles, Branch Pipes and Hose Boxes Reinforced rubber-lined canvas hoses shall be tested hydrostatically. Following tests shall be included as per IS:636. a) Hydrostatic proof pressure test at 21.4 kgf/cm2g b) Internal diameter The branch pipe, coupling and nozzles shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure of 21 kg/cm2g for a period of 21/2 minutes and shall not show any sign of leakage or sweating. Dimensional checks shall be made on the hose boxes and nozzle spanners.
360
8.0 8.1
AIR VESSELS Air vessels shall be designed and fabricated of mild steel as class-II vessels as per IS:2825 for a pressure of 14kg/cm2 and shall be minimum 3 m3 capacity.
8.2 8.3
Inside surface of the tank shall be protected by anti-corrosive paints/coatings/linings as required. Outside surfaces of the vessels shall be provided with one (1) coat of red lead primer with two (2) coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour and characteristics.
8.4
Tests & Inspection i) ii) Air vessels shall be hydraulically tested at 21kg/cm2 for a period not less than one (1) hour. All materials used for fabrication shall be of tested quality and test certificates shall be made available to the Owner. iii) Welding procedure and Welder's qualification tests will be carried out as per relevant IS Standard. iv) NDE tests, which will include 100% Radiography on longitudinal seams and spot Radiography for circumferential seams, for pressure vessel will be carried out.
9.0 9.1
HEAT DETECTORS/FIRE DETECTORS AND SPRAY NOZZLES Intent of Specification This specification lays down the requirements of the smoke detectors, heat detectors and spray nozzles for use in various sub-systems of the fire protection system.
9.2
Codes and Standards All equipment supplied shall conform to internationally accepted codes and standards. All equipment offered by Bidders should be TAC approved or have been in use in installations which have been approved by TAC.
9.3
Heat Detectors, Quartzoid bulb type. (Used in HVW spray system) a) Heat detectors shall be of any approved and tested type. Fusible chemical pellet type heat detectors are however not acceptable. b) Temperature rating of the heat detector shall be selected by the Bidder taking into consideration the environment in which the detectors shall operate. Minimum set point shall, however, be 79C.
361
c)
Heat detectors shall be guaranteed to function properly without any maintenance work for a period of not less than twenty five (25) years.
d)
The heat detectors shall be mounted on a pipe network charged with water at suitable pressure. On receipt of heat from fire, the heat detector will release the water pressure from the network. This drop in water pressure will actuate the Deluge valve.
9.4
HVW Spray Nozzles (Projectors) High velocity water spray system shall be designed and installed to discharge water in the form of a conical spray consisting of droplets of water travelling at high velocity which shall strike the burning surface with sufficient impact to ensure the formation of an emulsion. At the same time the spray shall efficiently cut off oxygen supply and provide sufficient cooling. Integral nonferrous strainers shall be provided in the projectors ahead of the orifice to arrest higher size particle, which are not allowed to pass through the projectors.
9.5
Fire Detectors (Used in fire detection and alarm system) i) ii) Fire detectors shall be approved by FOC-London or similar international authorities. Both smoke and heat type fire detectors shall be used. Bidder shall clearly indicate the mode of operation of detectors in his proposal. iii) The set point shall be selected after giving due consideration for ventilating air velocity and cable insulation. iv) Fire detectors shall be equipped with an integral L.E.D. so that it shall be possible to know which of the detectors has been operated. The detectors, which are to be placed in the space above the false ceiling or in the floor void shall not have the response indicators on the body but shall be provided with remote response indicators. v) Approval from Department of Atomic Energy (DAE), Government of India shall be made available for ionisation type smoke detectors. All accessories required to satisfy DAE shall also be included in the scope of supply. vi) Fire detectors shall be guaranteed to function properly without any maintenance work for a period of not less than ten (10) years.
10.0 10.1
PORTABLE AND WHEEL/ TROLLEY MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS This specification lays down the requirement regarding fire extinguishers of following types:
362
Portable fire extinguishers. a) b) c) Pressurised water type. Dry chemical powder type Carbon Dioxide type
Wheel/ Trolley mounted fire extinguishers. a) 10.2 10.3 Mechanical foam type
All the extinguishers offered by the Bidder shall be of reputed make and shall be ISI marked. Design and Construction i) All the portable extinguishers shall be of freestanding type and shall be capable of discharging freely and completely in upright position. ii) Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its body itself. iii) iv) All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required. Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on walls or columns. v) All extinguishers shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour conforming to relevant Indian Standards. vi) Pressurisation of water type fire extinguishers shall either be done by compressed air or by using gas cartridge. The constant air pressure type shall conform to IS:6234 and the gas pressure type shall conform to IS:940. Both these extinguishers shall be ISI marked. vii) Dry chemical powder type portable extinguisher shall conform to IS: 2171.
viii) Carbon Dioxide type portable extinguisher shall conform to IS:2878. ix) Wheel/ trolley mounted fire extinguishers of 50 litre capacity Mechanical foam type shall conform to IS:13386 10.2 Tests and Inspection i) A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1) number whichever is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Contractor. All consumable and
363
replaceable items require for this test would be supplied by the Contractor without any extra cost to Employer. ii) Performance testing of extinguisher shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards. In case where no Indian Standard is applicable for a particular type of extinguisher, the method of testing shall be mutually discussed and agreed to before placement of order for the extinguishers. 10.3 Painting Each fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour conforming to relevant Indian Standards. 11.0 11.1 INSTRUMENTS Intent of Specification The requirements given in the sub-section shall be applicable to all the instruments being furnished under this specification. 11.2 All field mounted instruments shall be weather and dust tight, suitable for use under ambient conditions prevalent in the subject plant. All field mounted instruments shall be mounted in suitable locations where maximum accessibility for maintenance can be achieved. 11.3 Local Instruments Pressure/ Differential Gauges & Switches. 1) 2) The pressure sensing elements shall be continuous 'C' bourdon type. The sensing elements for all gauges/switches shall be properly aged and factory tested to remove all residual stresses. They shall be able to withstand atleast twice the full scale pressure/vacuum without any damage or permanent deformation. 3) For all instruments, connection between the pressure sensing element and socket shall be braced or hard soldered. 4) Gauges shall be of 150 mm diameter dial with die-cast aluminium, stoved enamel black finish case, aluminium screwed ring and clear plastic crystal cover glass. Upper range pointer limit stop for all gauges shall be provided. 5) All gauges shall be with stainless steel bourdon having rotary geared stainless steel movements.
364
6)
Weatherproof type construction shall be provided for all gauges. This type of construction shall be fully dust tight, drip tight, weather resistant and splash proof with anti-corrosive painting conforming to NEMA- 4.
7) 8)
All gauges shall have micrometer type zero adjuster. Neoprene safety diaphragm shall be provided on the back of the instruments casing for pressure gauges of ranges 0-10 Kg/cm2 and above.
9) 10) 11)
Scales shall be concentric, white with black lettering and shall be in metric units. Accuracy shall be + 1.0 percent of full range or better. Scale range shall be selected so that normal process pressure is approximately 75 percent of full scale reading. For pressure gauges and pressure switches, the range shall not be less than 0 -16 Kg/cm2
12) 13) 14)
All gauges shall have 1/2 inch NPT bottom connection. All instruments shall conform to IS: 3624 - 1966. All instruments shall be provided with 3 way gauge isolation valve or cock. Union nut, nipple and tail pipe shall be provided wherever required.
15)
Switch element contact shall have two (2) NO and two (2) NC contacts rated for 240 Volts, 10 Amperes A.C. or 220 Volts, 5 Amperes D.C. Actuation set point shall be adjustable throughout the range. ON-OFF differential (difference between switch actuation and deactuation pressures) shall be adjustable. Adjustable range shall be suitable for switch application.
16)
Switches shall be sealed diaphragm, piston actuated type with snap action switch element. Diaphragm shall be of 316 SS.
17) 11.4
Necessary accessories shall be furnished.
Timers i) The timers shall be electro-mechanical type with adjustable delay on pick-up or reset as required. ii) Each timer shall have two pairs of contacts in required combination of NO and NC.
11.5 a)
Level Gauges/Indicator/Switches Level Gauges
365
i) ii)
Gauge glasses shall be used for local level indication wherever shown in the flow diagram. Gauge glasses, in general, shall be flag glass type with bolted cover. Body and cover material shall be of carbon steel with rubber lining.
iii)
Level coverage shall be in accordance with operating requirements. Maximum length of a single gauge glass shall not exceed 1.4 M. Should a larger gauge glass be required, multiple gauges of preferably equal length shall be used with 50 mm overlap in visibility.
iv)
Reflex type gauge glasses shall be used for colourless liquids and transparent type gauge glasses shall be used for all liquids having colour.
v)
Each gauge glass shall be complete with a pair of offset valves. Valves shall have union bonnet, female union level connection, flanged tank connection, and vent and drain plug.
vi)
Offset valves shall have corrosion resistant ball-check to prevent fluid loss in the event of gauge glass breakage. Valve body shall have a working pressure of 200 percent of the maximum static pressure at the maximum process fluid temperature. Valve body materials shall be of carbon steel with rubber lining.
b)
Level Indicators i) Float type mechanical level gauges with linear scale type indicator shall be offered for measuring level of tanks wherever shown in the flow diagram. ii) AISI-316 stainless steel float, guide rope and tape shall be used. Housing shall be of mild steel painted with anti-corrosive painting. iii) iv) The scale indicator shall be provided at a suitable height for ease of reading. Accuracy shall be + 1% of scale range or better.
c)
Level Switches i) ii) Level switches shall be of ball float operated magnetic type complete with cage. Materials of construction shall be suitable for process and ambient conditions. The float material shall be AISI-316 stainless steel. iii) Actuating switches shall be either hermetically sealed mercury type or snap acting microswitches. Actuation set point shall be adjustable. ON-OFF differential (difference between switch actuation and de-actuation levels) shall be adjustable. Adjustable range shall be suitable for switch application. All switches shall be repeatable within + 1.0 percent of
366
liquid level change required to activate switch. Contacts shall be rated for 50 watts resistive at 240 V A.C. Number of contacts shall be two NO and two NC for each level switch. 11.6 Solenoid Valves i) ii) The body of the valves shall be Forged brass or stainless steel. The coil shall be continuous duty, epoxy moulded type Class-F, suitable for high temperature operation. iii) 11.7 11.8 The enclosure shall be watertight, dust-tight and shall conform to NEMA-4 Standard.
The valves shall be suitable for mounting in any position. Switches, Lamps, Meters Etc. All electrical components on the panel namely push buttons, switches, lamps, meters etc. shall meet the requirements of sub-section Electrical enclosed with the specification.
11.9 11.10 12.0 12.1
All local instruments shall be inspected by Employer/Consultant as per the agreed quality plan. Makes of control panel and local instruments, accessories shall be as per Employer's approval. ELECTRIC MOTORS General i) This clause covers the requirements of three phase squirrel cage induction motors and single-phase induction motors. ii) The motors to be furnished, erected and commissioned as covered under this specification shall be engineered, designed, manufactured, erected, tested as per the requirements specified herein. These requirements shall however be read along with the requirements of the respective driven equipment being supplied under the specification of which this specification forms a part. iii) The motor supplied under this specification shall conform to the standards specified in GTR. iv) Terminal point for all motors supplied under this specification shall be at the respective terminal boxes. v) Materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but are necessary for satisfactory operation of the motor shall be deemed to be included in the scope of supply of this specification.
367
vi)
Notwithstanding anything stated in this motor specification, the motor has to satisfy the requirement of the mechanical system during normal and abnormal conditions. For this the motor manufacturer has to coordinate with the mechanical equipment supplier and shall ensure that the motor being offered meets the requirements.
12.2
Codes & Standards i) The design, manufacture, installation and performance of motors shall conform to the provisions of latest Indian Electricity Act and Indian Electricity Rules. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility. ii) In case of contradiction between this specifications and IS or IEC, the stipulations of this specification shall be treated as applicable. iii) National Electrical code for hazardous location and relevant NEMA standard shall also be applicable for motors located in hazardous location.
12.3
Design Features 12.3.1 Rating and type (i) The induction motors shall be of squirrel cage type unless specified otherwise.
(ii) The motors shall be suitable for continuous duty in the specified ambient temperature. (iii) The MCR KW rating of the motors for 50oC ambient shall not be less than the power requirement imposed at the motor shaft by the driven equipment under the most onerous operation conditions as defined elsewhere, when the supply frequency is 51.5 Hz (and the motor is running at 103% of its rated speed). (iv) Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the following particulars: a) Rated terminal voltage From 0.2 to 200 KW Below 0.2 KW Variation in voltage b) Frequency c) Any combination of (a) & (b) 12.3.2 Enclosure 415V (3 Phase, solidly earthed) 240 V (1 Phase, solidly earthed) 6%. 50 Hz 3%.
368
Motors to be installed outdoor and semi-outdoor shall have hose proof enclosure equivalent to IP-55 as per IS: 4691. For motors to be installed indoor, the enclosure shall be dust proof equivalent to IP-54 as per IS: 4691. 12.3.3 Cooling method Motors shall be TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled) type.
12.3.4 Starting requirements (i) Induction motor a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct on-line starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage. b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electro-dynamic stresses and heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value. c) The starting current of the motor at rated voltage shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load current subject to tolerance as given in IS : 325. d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque under the supply voltage condition specified under Clause 12.3.1 (iv) (a) shall be capable of withstanding at least two successive starts with coasting to rest between starts and motor initially at the rated load operating temperature. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts per hour, the motor initially at a temperature not exceeding the rated operating temperature. e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage shall be more than the starting time with the driven equipment at minimum permissible voltage (clause 12.3.4 (i) (a) by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall remain closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.
369
12.3.5 Running requirements (i) When the motors are operating at extreme condition of voltage and frequency given under clause no.12.3.1 (iv) the maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of 50C shall be within the limits specified in IS : 325 after adjustment due to increase ambient temperature specified herein. (ii) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in IS: 4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings. (iii) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a period of 5 minutes with rated load commencing from hot condition. (iv) Induction motors shall be so designed as to be capable of withstanding the voltage and torque stresses developed due to the difference between the motor residual voltage and incoming supply voltage during fast changeover of buses. The necessary feature incorporated in the design to comply with this requirement shall be clearly indicated in the proposal. (v) Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even when the supply voltage drops to 70% of rated voltage. Such operation is envisaged for a period of one second. The pull out torque of the induction motors to meet this requirement shall not be less than 205% of full load torque. (vi) The motors shall be capable of withstanding for 10 seconds without stalling or abrupt change in speed (under gradual increase of torque) an excess torque of 60 percent of their rated torque, the voltage and frequency being maintained at their rated value. (vii) Guaranteed performance of the motors shall be met with tolerances specified in respective standards. 12.4 Construction Features 12.4.1 Stator (i) Stator frame The stator frames and all external parts of the motors shall be rigid fabricated steel or of casting. They shall be suitably annealed to eliminate any residual stresses introduced during the process of fabrication and machining.
370
(ii) Stator core The stator laminations shall be made from suitable grade magnetic sheet steel varnished on both sides. They shall be pressed and clamped adequately to reduce the core and teeth vibration to minimum.
(iii) Insulation and winding All insulated winding conductor shall be of copper. The overall motor winding insulation for all 415 volts motors shall be of epoxy thermosetting type i.e., class 'F' but limited to class-B operating from temperature rise consideration. Other motors may be of conventional class-B type. The windings shall be suitable for successful operation in hot, humid, tropical climate with the ambient temperature of 50C. 12.4.2 Rotor (i) Rotors shall be so designed as to keep the combined critical speed with the driven equipment away from the running speed by atleast 20%. (ii) Rotors shall also be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for 2 minutes in either direction of rotation. 12.4.3 Terminal box leads (i) For motors of 415 Volts and below a single terminal box may be provided for power and accessories leads. (ii) Terminal boxes shall be of weatherproof construction designed for outdoor service. To eliminate entry of dust and water, gaskets of neoprene or approved equivalent shall be provided at cover joints and between box and motor frame. (iii) Terminal box shall be suitable for top and bottom entry of cables. (iv) Unless otherwise approved, the terminal box shall be capable of being turned through 360 in steps in 90. (v) The terminals shall be complete with all accessories for connecting external cables. They shall be designed for the current carrying capacity and shall ensure ample phase to phase to ground clearances.
371
(vi) Suitable tinned brass compression type cable glands and cable lugs shall be supplied by the Contractor to match Employer's cable. (vii) Terminal box for single core cable shall be of non- magnetic material. (viii) Marking of all terminals shall be in accordance with IS: 4728.
12.4.4 Rating Plates (i) Rating plates shall be provided for all motors giving the details as called for in IS:325 (for three phase squirrel cage induction motors). (ii) In addition to above, the rating plate shall indicate the following : a) Temperature rise in C under normal working conditions. b) Phase sequence corresponding to the direction of rotation for the application. c) Bearing identification number (in case of ball/ roller bearing) and recommended lubricants. 12.4.5 Other Constructional Features (i) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor for bolted connection of Employer's earthing conductor to be specified to the successful Bidder. (ii) Motor weighing more than 25 kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other means to facilitate lifting. 12.5 Paint and Finish 12.5.1 Motor external parts shall be finished and painted to produce a neat and durable surface, which would prevent rusting and corrosion. The equipment shall be thoroughly degreased, all sharp edges and scales removed and treated with one coat of primer and two coats of grey enamel paint. 12.5.2 Motor fans shall also be painted to withstand corrosion. 12.5.3 All fasteners used in the construction of the equipment shall be either of corrosion resistant material or heavy cadmium plated. 12.5.4 Current carrying fasteners shall be either of stainless steel or high tensile brass.
372
12.6
Tests at Manufacturers Works 12.6.1 Motors shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with IS: 325 & IS : 4029 standards. 12.6.2 In addition, the following tests shall also be carried out: a) 20% over speed test for 2 minutes on all rotors. b) Measurement of vibration. c) Measurement of noise level. d) Phase sequence and polarity checks relative to mechanical rotation.
12.6.3 Tests after installation at site (i) After installation and commissioning at site, the motors alongwith the driven equipment shall be subject to tests to ascertain their conformity with the requirement of this specification and those of the driven equipment specification and the performance data quoted by the Bidder. (ii) In case of non-conformity of the motor with these specifications and performance requirement, the Engineer may at his discretion reject or ask for necessary rectification/replacement. 13.0 BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGERS This clause covers the design, performance, manufacturing, construction features and testing of Battery and Battery charger used primarily for starting the diesel engine driving the fire water pumps. Battery Chargers shall be housed in Diesel Engine Panel. 13.1 General Information i) The equipment specified hereinafter are required for starting the diesel engines and other operation of the plant as required. ii) For each diesel engine there shall be two (2) sets of Battery and two (2) sets of Battery Charger. iii) The D.C. voltage shall be obtained normally after necessary rectification by battery charger. The Battery Charging system shall be capable of meeting the following requirements : a) Float charging the Battery. b) Boost Charging the Battery.
373
vi)
The battery shall be large enough to crank the engine 3 times without charging in between and without getting drained to an extent which will affect its life.
vii)
The Bidder shall indicate the battery voltage and battery capacity in Ampere- Hour at ten (10) hour discharge rate. The battery voltage at any time during operation shall not be less than the minimum voltage required for operation of the D.C. loads.
13.2
General Design The Battery shall be located indoor 13.2.1 Battery (i) The cells shall be lead-acid type. The Battery shall be automotive type.
(ii) The cells shall be sealed in type with anti-splash type vent plug. (iii) The cell terminal posts shall be provided with connector bolts and nuts, effectively coated with lead to prevent corrosion. Lead or lead coated copper connectors shall be furnished to connect up cells of battery set. (iv) Positive and Negative terminal posts shall be clearly and indelibly marked for easy identification. (v) The electrolyte shall be of battery grade Sulphuric Acid conforming to IS : 226-2962. Water for storage batteries conforming to IS: 1069 shall be used in the preparation of the electrolyte. 13.2.2 Battery Charger (i) The Bidder shall furnish the battery charging scheme complete with all necessary accessories such as transformers, switches, fuses, starters, contactors, diodes, ammeters, voltmeters and other devices as required for trouble free operation. All devices and equipment shall conform to relevant Indian Standard or shall be Superior to it. (ii) The scheme of the battery charger shall be such that the battery can be charged automatically as well as manually. (iii) The boost charger shall have sufficient capacity to restore a fully discharged Battery to a state of full charge in eight (8) hours with some spare margin over maximum charging
374
rate. Suitable provision shall be kept so that, for a particular engine, any of the two (2) charger units can be used for charging any of the two (2) batteries. (iv) The instruments, switches and lamps shall be flush/semi-flush mounted on the front panel. Name plate of approved type shall be provided for each of these equipment. (v) The panel shall be complete with internal wiring and input-output terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be clip on type of suitable rating. All equipment and wire terminals shall be identified by symbols corresponding to applicable schematic/wiring diagram. (vi) Space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation in the panel. 13.3 i) Testing The Battery Charger shall also be subjected to the following tests at manufacturer's works as per IS - 4540 ii) Insulation test.
iii) Connection checking. iv) Measurement of voltage regulation. v) Auxiliary of devices.
vi) Alternating current measurement. vii) Performance test. viii) Temperature rise test. ix) Following acceptance tests shall be carried out in batteries as per IS:1651. a) Marking and packing b) Verification of dimensions c) Test for capacity d) Test for voltage during discharge Battery and battery charger shall be checked for auto charging and providing sufficient power for three consecutive starting kicks to diesel engine within five minutes with A.C. supply switched off. 14.0 CONTROL & ANNUNCIATION PANELS
375
14.1
Intent of Specification The following requirement shall be applicable to the control and annunciation panels furnished under these specifications.
14.2 i)
General Information The equipment specified herein are required for controlling, metering, monitoring and indication of electrical systems of the plant offered.
ii)
The selection and design of all the equipment shall be so as to ensure reliable and safe operation of the plant and shall be subjected to approval by the Employer.
iii) The reference ambient temperature outside the panel shall be taken as 50C and relative humidity 100%. 14.3 Equipment to be Furnished Control & annunciation panels shall be furnished complete with all accessories and wiring for safe and trouble free operation of the plant. 14.4 i) Constructional Details The panel frames shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or pressed and shaped cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.5 mm. Frames shall be enclosed in coldrolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6 mm. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary. ii) Panels shall be of free standing type and shall be provided with hinged door with locking arrangement. The access doors, cutest and covers shall be equipped with neoprene/synthetic rubber gaskets (conforming to IS 11149-1984) all around and the latches sufficiently strong to hold them in alignment when closed. The panels to be installed outdoor or semi outdoor shall have a degree of protection of IP:55 and those installed indoor shall have a degree of protection of IP:52 as per IS:13947 Part-1. iii) If a panel consists of a number of panels, each panel should be mounted side by side and bolted together to form a compact unit, when two panels meet, the joints shall be smooth, close fittings and unobstructive. iv) Removable eye bolt or lifting lugs shall be provided on all panels to facilitate easy lifting. v) The heights of all operating equipment on the panel shall be between 800 mm to 1600 mm from the finished floor level. The proper supporting arrangement shall be provided by the Contractor.
376
vi) Cable entries to the panel may be from bottom or top. The cable entry required will be intimated to the successful Bidder. A suitable removable gland plate of 3 mm thick shall be mounted not less than 200 mm above the floor level. vii) All equipment mounted on the front face of the panels shall be flush or semi-flush type. All equipment shall be so located that their terminal and adjustment are readily accessible for inspection or maintenance and their removal and replacement can be done without interruption of service to other equipment. The contractor shall submit the panel general arrangement drawings clearly bringing out internal mounting details, dimensions of equipment, clearance between the equipment and the edges of the panel, for approval. 14.5 i) Name Plates and Labels Each panel shall be provided with prominent, engraved identification plates for all front mounted equipment. Panel identification name plate shall be provided at front and rear as required. ii) All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicold, with white engraved lettering on black background. Inscription and lettering sizes shall be subjected to Employer's approval. iii) Suitable plastic sticker labels shall be provided for easy identification of all equipment located inside the panel. These labels shall be positioned so as to be clearly visible and shall give the device number, as mentioned in the wiring drawings. 14.6 i) AC/DC Power Supply The Employer will provide one feeder each for AC and DC to the panel. The Contractor shall make for his own arrangements for providing these power supplies to different panels. ii) The Contractor shall provide suitable isolating switch fuse unit in the control panel for receiving the above incoming AC and DC supplies. Fuse and link shall be provided for isolating of individual circuit without disturbing other circuits. 14.7 i) Wiring All inter panel wiring and connections between panels (if there is group of panels) including all bus wiring for AC & DC supplies shall be provided by the Contractor. ii) All internal wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, 1.5 square mm or larger stranded copper wires having colour-coded PVC insulation. CT circuits shall be wired with 2.5 square mm copper wires, otherwise similar to the above. iii) Extra-flexible wire shall be used for wiring to devices mounted on moving parts such as doors.
377
iv) Spare contacts of auxiliary relays, timers and switches shall be wired out to the terminal blocks as required by the Employer/Engineer at the time of detailed engineering. 14.8 i) Terminal Blocks Terminal Blocks shall be of 650V grade, rated for 10 Amps and in onepiece moulding. It shall be complete with insulating barriers, clip-ontype terminals, and identification strips. Marking on terminal strip shall correspond to the terminal numbering on wiring diagrams. It shall be similar to 'Elmex-Standard' type terminals. ii) Terminal blocks shall be arranged with at least 100 mm clearance between two sets of terminal block. iii) The terminal blocks shall have at least 20% spare terminals. 14.9 Grounding A continuous copper bus 25 x 3 mm size shall be provided along the bottom of the panel structure. It shall run continuously throughout the length of the panel and shall have provision at both ends for connection to the station grounding grid (25 x 6 mm MS Flat). 14.10 i) ii) Space Heater and Lighting Space heaters shall be provided in the panels for preventing harmful moisture condensation. The space heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation on 240V AC, 50 Hz, single phase supply and shall be automatically controlled by thermostat. Necessary isolating switches and fuses shall also be provided. iii) Free standing panel shall have a 240V AC, plug point and a fluorescent light operated by door switch. 14.11 i) Control and Selector Switches Control and selector switches shall be of rotary type, with escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the function and positions. ii) Control/selector switches shall be spring return or stay put type as per the requirements. Handles of control/selector switches shall be black in colour. Shape and type of handles shall be to the approval of the Employer. iii) The contact ratings shall be at least the following : a) Make and carry continuously 10 Amp.
378
b) c)
Breaking current at 240V DC Breaking current at 240V DC
1Amp. (Inductive) 5 Amp. at 0.3 p.f. lagging
14.12 i)
Push Buttons Push buttons shall be spring return, push to actuate type and rated to continuously carry and break 10A at 240V AC and 0.5A (Inductive) at 220V DC. The push buttons shall have at least 1 NO and 1 NC contact. All contact faces shall be of silver or silver alloy.
ii)
All push buttons shall be provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its function.
iii) The colour of buttons shall be as follows : Green Red Black For motor START, Breaker CLOSE, Valve/ damper OPEN. For motor TRIP, Breaker OPEN, Valve/ damper CLOSE. For all annunciation functions, overload reset and miscellaneous.
iv) Red push buttons shall always be located to the left of green push buttons. In case of clinker grinder etc. the push buttons would be blackred- green from left to right. 14.13 i) Indicating Lamps Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting, filament type and of low-watt consumption. Lamps shall be provided with series resistors preferably built-in- the lamps assembly. The lamps shall have escutcheon plates marked with its function, wherever necessary. ii) Lamp shall have translucent lamp covers of the following colours : Red Green White Blue For motor OFF, Valve/damper OPEN, Breaker CLOSED. For motor ON, Valve/damper CLOSED, Breaker OPEN. For motor AUTO-TRIP. For all healthy conditions (e.g. control supply, lub oil pressure and also for spring charged). Amber For all ALARM conditions (e.g. pressure low, over load and also for 'service' and 'Test' position indication). iii) Bulbs and lamps covers shall be easily replaceable from the front of the panel.
379
iv) Indicating lamps should be located directly above the associated push button/control switches. Red lamps shall variably be located to the right of the green lamp. In case a white lamp is also provided, it shall be placed between the red and green lamps. Blue and amber lamps should normally be located above the red and green lamps. 14.14 i) Fuses All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge plug-in-type and shall be of suitable rating, depending upon circuit requirements. ii) 14.15 i) All fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers, which shall be mounted on fuse-bases. Contactors Contactors shall be of air break, electromagnetic type rated as per requirement. These shall be of utilisation category AC 3 as per IS:2959. ii) Operating coils of AC contactors shall be of 240V AC or 220V DC as required. AC contactors shall operate satisfactorily between 85% to 110% of the rated voltage. The Contactor shall not drop out at 70% of the rated voltage. iii) DC contactors shall have a coil voltage of 220V DC and shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation at 80% to 110% of the rated voltage. 14.16 i) Relays and Timers All auxiliary relays & timers shall be of proven design and of reputed make. Contacts of relays and timers shall be of solid silver or silver cadmium oxide or solid silver faced. Timers shall have the provision to adjust the delay on pick-up or reset as required. ii) All relays and timers shall have at least two NO and two NC contacts.
iii) All relays and timers shall be suitable for 240V AC and 220V DC as required. DC relays shall operate satisfactorily between 70% to 110% and AC relays shall be suitable for voltage variation between 80% to 110%. 14.17 i) Indication Instruments All indicating and integrating meters shall be flush mounted on panel front. The instruments shall be of at least 96 mm square size with 90 degree scales and shall have an accuracy class of 2.0 or better. The covers and cases of instruments and meters shall provide a dust and vermin proof construction.
380
ii)
All instruments shall be compensated for temperature errors and factory calibrated to directly read the primary quantities. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment removing or dismantling the instruments.
iii) All instruments shall have white dials with black numerals and lettering. Black knife edge pointer with parallax free dials will be preferred. iv) Ammeters provided on motor feeders shall have a compressed scale at the upper current region to cover the starting current. 14.18 Annunciation System i) The annunciation system shall be complete with all necessary relays, flashers and other accessories required for the proper operation of the equipment and shall be completely solid state. The control circuit shall be mounted on plug-in type glass epoxy printed circuit boards. Audible alarms for the system shall be mounted inside the panel. One set of acknowledge, test and reset push buttons shall be mounted on the panel. ii) Indications shall be engraved on Acrylic inscription plate window and shall be visible clearly when the indication lamp is lighted (black letters on white background). Each window shall be provided with two lamps. iii) Audible hooter shall sound when a trouble contact operates and shall continue to sound until the acknowledge button is pressed. In addition to the hooters provided on annunciation panels, a hooter shall be provided outside FFPH which shall sound in any fire alarm condition. iv) Indication lamps shall flash when trouble contact operates and shall continue flashing until acknowledge button is pressed. v) After acknowledge button is pressed, the hooter and flashing shall stop but the indication lamp shall remain lighted. vi) After trouble is cleared indication lamps shall be ready and shall go off only when reset. vii) Silencing the hooter in conjunction with one trouble contact shall not stop and hooter sounding if another trouble contact operates. viii) When test button is pressed, all lamps shall flash and hooter shall sound. ix) Annunciator systems shall operate on 220V DC Systems. x) The annunciation system shall include alarm for AC control system failure (working on DC supply), DC supply failure (working on AC supply) and test facilities for these alarms.
381
xi) List of annunciations required on the panels has been listed elsewhere. The Contractor shall also provide additional annunciations if desired by the Employer/Engineer during Vendor drawing review stage and for such additional annunciations no extra charges shall be claimed by the Contractor, if the number of such additions are within 10% of the number stipulated in this specification. xii) 20% spare windows shall be provided on the panel. 14.19 Painting All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated, in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005, Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Dust and scale shall be removed by pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating shall be "Class-C" as specified in IS:6005. The phosphated surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint on panels shall be applied. Electrostatic painting shall also be acceptable. Finishing paint on panels shall be shade 692 (smoke grey) of IS:5 unless required otherwise by the Employer. The inside of the panels shall be glossy white. Each coat of finishing shall be properly stoved. The paint thickness shall not be less than 50 microns. Finished parts shall be coated by peelable compound by spraying method to protect the finished surface from scratches, grease, dirt and oily spots during testing, transportation handling and erection. 14.20 i) Tests Following tests/inspection shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of Employer's representative: (A) Factory Tests 1. Compliance with approved drawings, data and specification. 2. Visual check for workmanship. 3. Wiring continuity and functional checks. 4. Calibration of instruments, relays and metres wherever required by inspector. 5. HV test 6. Insulation resistance measurement before and after HV test.
382
(B) Inspection/Testing at site : 1. IR test before and after HV test 2. HV Test 3. Functional Testing. (C) 1. The Fire detection and annunciation panel shall be subjected to functional tests. 2. The Annunciation System shall be routine tested
Appendix-1 TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS DATA SHEET FOR DELUGE VALVE 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.1 Manufacturer Number & size Type. Rating Flow in M3/hr. 1. 150 mm 2. 100 mm Pressure Pressure drop in equivalent length 1. 150 mm 2. 100 mm Material of construction Body Valve internal Seat Seal Diaphragm Differential pressure required for operation Water Motor Gong provided Type Material of Construction: 170 to 650 50 to 225 Working Pressure 12.3 kg/cm2 Test Pressure - 25 kg/cm2. 19M 11M CI IS:210 Gr. FG 260 Cast Bronze IS:318-LTB 2 Neoprene Rubber Neoprene Rubber Differential Ratio 50% Yes Hydraulic type Owner Approved make As per approved system drawings. Differential Diaphragm type
4.2 4.3 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 6.0 7.0 7.1 7.2
383
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 8.0 9.0 10.0
Housing Cover/Rotor./Gong Manual actuation lever provided? Remote actuation with Solenoid Valve provided? Resetting type
Al. Alloy-IS:617 Aluminium to IS:737 Yes Yes Manual resetting type
Deluge valve complete with test and Yes drain valves, manual operation arrangement, supporting structures and all necessary accessories. Approval of Deluge Valve. FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of U.K. or VDS of Germany
11.0
DATASHEET FOR HVW SPRAY NOZZLE 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 Make Type Working pressure Material K factor Quantity Integral non-ferrous strainer provide Approval of HVW spray Nozzle Owner Approved make High velocity water spray type 3.5 bar to 5 bar Brass As per approved design & drawings As per approved design & drawings Yes FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of U.K. or VDS of Germany
DATA SHEET FOR QUARTZOID BULB DETECTORS 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 6.0 7.0 8.0 Make Type Rated pressure Hydrotest pressure Material of construction Frame Bulb Deflector Temperature rating Quantity Approval of Detector Owner Approved make Quartzoid bulb type 12.3 kg/ cm2 (175 PSI). 30kg/cm2 Brass Bronze Glass Copper 79C As per approved drawings FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of
384
U.K. or VDS of Germany
DATA SHEET FOR OPTICAL SMOKE DECTECTOR 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Manufacturer Principle of operation Max. recommended spacing Normal operating temperature Guaranteed to function properly without any maintenance work for a period of not less than ten (10) years Approval of detector Owner Approved make Light scattering by smoke particles. 9 m. -10C to 60C Yes. Accumulated dust to be removed periodically by blowing air. FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of U.K. or VDS of Germany 2C x 1.5 sq.mm. Un-armoured PVC insulated FR cables conforming to IS 1554 (Part 1).
6.0
5.2
Cabling.
DATA SHEET FOR HEAT DECTECTOR 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Manufacturer Principle of operation Max. recommended spacing Normal operating temperature Guaranteed to function properly without any maintenance work for a period of not less than ten (10) years Set point of operation Approval of detector Cabling. Owner Approved make Rate of rise-cum-fixed temperature type. 6 m. -20C to 70C Yes. Accumulated dust to be removed periodically by blowing air. 5C per minute / 55C FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of U.K. or VDS of Germany 2C x 1.5 sq.mm. Un-armoured PVC insulated FR cables conforming to IS 1554 (Part 1).
6.0 7.0 8.0
DATA SHEET FOR IONISATION SMOKE DECTECTOR 1.0 2.0 Manufacturer Principle of operation Owner Approved make Ionisation of air by Radio-active source.
385
3.0 4.0 5.0
Max. recommended spacing Normal operating temperature Guaranteed to function properly without any maintenance work for a period of not less than ten (10) years Approval of detector Cabling.
9 m. -10C to 60C Yes. Accumulated dust to be removed periodically by blowing air. FM of USA, UL of USA, LPCB of U.K. or VDS of Germany 2C x 1.5 sq.mm. Un-armoured PVC insulated FR cables conforming to IS 1554 (Part 1).
7.0 8.0
DATA SHEET FOR 2C x 1.5sq.mm Un-armoured cable. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Manufacturer Type Number of cores Size Voltage Grade Applicable standard Conductor Material Conductor construction Conductor resistance. Insulation material Insulation thickness Identification Inner sheath material Inner sheath thickness Outer sheath material Outer sheath thickness Outer Sheath Colour Overall Diameter Owner Approved make Control Cable Two (2) 1.5 sq. mm. 1.1 kV IS:1554 Part 1 Plain annealed electrolytic copper Stranded 12.1 Ohms/kM at 20 C PVC insulation Type A as per IS:5831 0.8 mm Nominal Red & Black PVC compound Type ST1 as per IS:5831 0.3 mm Minimum PVC compound Type ST2 as per IS:5381,FR. 1.8 mm Nominal. Grey As per manufacturer design data
DATA SHEET FOR MANUAL CALL POINT 1 Manufacturer Owner Approved make
386
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Construction Type Operating Voltage Type of control Degree of protection Material of housing. Colour Accessories
Deep drawn sheet steel Break glass with push button. 24V DC 10% Pole- NO/NC IP 52 M.S. 18 Gauge FIRE RED Hammer & Chain assembly
DATA SHEET FOR MANUAL CALL POINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Manufacturer Construction Type Operating Voltage Type of control Degree of protection Material of housing. Colour Accessories Owner Approved make Deep drawn sheet steel Break glass with push button. 24V DC 10% Pole- NO/NC IP 52 M.S. 18 Gauge FIRE RED Hammer & Chain assembly
DATA SHEET FOR FIRE ALARM SOUNDER (HOOTER) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 Manufacturer Construction Type Operating Voltage Output Output frequency range Material of housing Operating time Colour Marking Owner Approved make Deep drawn sheet steel Dual tone/ Single tone 24V DC 10% Not less than 80dB(A) but not more than 120dB(A) at 1.5m distance. 500Hz. to 1000 Hz. M.S. 18 Gauge 50 minutes (Minimum) FIRE RED FIRE ALARM.
387
DATA SHEET FOR GLOBE VALVE. 1 2 3 4 5 i) ii) iii) iv) 6 7 8 9 i) ii) Nominal size in mm Make Type Number Material of construction Body Hand wheel Bonnet & Bonnet Wedge Trim End connection Standard Rating Hydrostatic test pressure Body Seat 24 kg/cm2 16 kg/cm2 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Grey cast iron, grade FG200 of IS 210 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Screwed IS:778 PN 1.6 15 TO 40 Owner Approved make Globe As per approved system drawings
DATA SHEET FOR GUN METAL GATE/ SLUICE VALVE 1 2 3 4 5 i) ii) iii) iv) 6 7 8 9 i) Nominal size in mm Make Type Number Material of construction Body Hand wheel Bonnet & Bonnet Wedge Trim End connection Standard Rating Hydrostatic test pressure Body 24 kg/cm2 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Grey cast iron, grade FG200 of IS 210 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Bronze to IS 318 Grade LTB 2 Screwed IS:778 PN 1.6 15 TO 40 Owner Approved make Globe As per approved system drawings
388
ii)
Seat
16 kg/cm2 DATA SHEET FOR FLOAT OPERATED VALVE
1 2 3 4 5 i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) 6 i) ii) 7
Manufacturer Size Type Quantity 2 nos. Material of construction Body Seat Ring Disc Ring Spindle Piston Lever Float Fulcrum Pilot Valve Gland Packing Bonnet Hydrostatic test pressure Body Seat End connection
Owner Approved make 100 MM Float operated valve 24V DC 10% Cast Iron (IS:210 FG:200) Gun Metal (IS:318, LTB-2) Gun Metal (IS:318, LTB-2) 13% Cr. Stainless steel Cast Iron (IS:210, FG:200) Mild Steel (IS:226) Tin Coated Copper Mild Steel (IS:226) Stainless Steel (AISI-304) Graphited Asbestos Rope Cast Iron (IS:210, FG:200) 15 kg / cm2 10 kg / cm2 Flanged connection
DATA SHEET FOR CHECK VALVES (NON-RETURN VALVES) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 i) ii) Make Type Standard followed Rating Material of construction, Dimensions Inlet Outlet details Hydraulic test pressure, kg/cm2 Body Seat 24 16 Owner Approved make Swing Check Type IS:5312 PN 1.6 As per IS:5312 Flanged
389
VENDOR LIST FOR FIRE PROTECTION PACKAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Pumps (Horizontal Centrifugal) Motors (L.T.) Diesel Engine Air Compressor Batteries M.S./G.I Pipes C. I. Valves (Gate & Check) Gun Metal Valves (Globe) Float operated Gate Valve Deluge Valve Strainer (Y-Type & Basket Type) Hume pipe H. V. Spray Nozzles Q. B. Detectors Pressure Gauge Pressure Switches Level Switches Level Indicator Level Gauge Hydrant Valves & Accessories Hoses (Flax Canvas) Solenoid Valves Heat & Smoke Detectors Cables Fire Extinguishers Fire alarm Panels Annunciators Dished Ends KBL/M&P/B&C RAJENDRA ELECT.IND./GEC SIEMENS/ ABB/CROMPTON Ruston & Hornsby (Greaves)/ KIRLOSKAR OIL ENGINE LTD KGK/ELGI/INGERSOL RAND EXIDE/AMCO/AMARA RAJA JINDAL/PRAKASH/ SAIL/ LLOYD METALS & ENGINEERS LTD H. Sarkar/Venus/Kalpana Leader Levcon/Sigma ACE Turnkey/H.D. Fire Grandprix/Jaypee/Multitex/ Gujarat Otofilt Indian Hume Pipe/Pargate Concrete Udyog Delhi H.D. Fire/ACE Turnkey H.D Fire/ACE Turnkey H. Guru/General Instrument Indfos/Switzer/Verma Trafag Levcon/Sigma Levcon/Sigma Levcon/Sigma Sukan/Shah Bhogilal Jayshree Calcutta/Newage AVCON/ROTEX Apollo, U.K. /Pyrotonics / System Sensor/ Nittan Polycab/PRWE/GEMSCAB/ KEI/PARAMOUNT Nitin/Vijay Fire/Lightex/ Zenith/ Minimax ECD Peacon/Piri/Procon Anoop Engg./Motilal/Kanara
390
29 30
Local control panels & Annunciation panels Response Indicators/Hooters Break Glass Units
Suchitra/ Vikas Engg./UNILEC/JASPER/ MIKA/ Bose corporation. M.C. Engineering Delhi/ Maths, Bombay/ Mehta & Associates, Ahmedabad.
391
SECTION- (Q) TECHNICAL DETAILS FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL This specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning and handing over to OWNER of Air conditioning system for the control room building and switchyard panel rooms. Air conditioning units for control room building shall be set to maintain the inside DBT at 24.4C 2C and the air conditioning system for switchyard panel rooms shall be designed to maintain DBT inside switchyard panel rooms below 24C. 2.0 2.1 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR CONTROL ROOM BUILDING The following rooms shall be air conditioned. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. 2.2 Control room Conference Room Officers room Battery room Electronics test lab PLCC Room Air conditioning requirement of rooms indicated at clause no.2.1 shall be met using split AC units. High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each with high wall type indoor evaporator unit shall be used for all rooms. 2.3 SCOPE The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be provided under the contract are outlined hereinafter and the same is to be read in conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/ clauses. The scope of the work under the contract shall be deemed to include all such items, which although are not specifically mentioned in the bid documents and/or in Bidder's proposal, but are required to make the equipment/system complete for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation. 2.3.1 Suitable number of high wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each complete with air cooled outdoor condensing unit having hermetically sealed compressor and high wall type indoor evaporator unit with cordless remote controller.
Volume-II (Section-Q), Air Conditioning System
392
2.3.1
Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor and remote outdoor condensers as required.
2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.4
PVC drain piping from the indoor units upto the nearest drain point. Power and control cabling between the indoor unit and outdoor unit and earthing. MS Brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
SPECIFICATION FOR SPLIT AC UNITS 2.4.1 The split AC units will be complete with indoor evaporator unit, outdoor condensing units and cordless remote control units. 2.4.2 Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically sealed reciprocating/ rotary compressors mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow fans and copper tube aluminium finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal casing. The casing and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be weatherproof type. They shall be compact in size and shall have horizontal discharge of air. 2.4.3 The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be compact and shall have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise centrifugal blowers driven by special motors and copper tube aluminium finned cooling coils. Removable and washable polypropylene filters shall be provided. They shall be complete with multi function cordless remote control unit with special features like programmable timer, sleep mode and soft dry mode etc. 2.4.4 The Split AC units shall be of Carrier, Voltas, Blue Star, Hitachi, Daikin, LG, National, OGeneral or Samsung make.
3.0 3.1
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR SWITCHYARD PANEL ROOMS Air conditioning system shall be provided in the switchyard panel rooms used for housing control and protection panels. These panel rooms will be located in the switchyard area and generally unmanned. Therefore, the air-conditioning system shall be rugged, reliable, maintenance free and designed for long life.
3.2
Air conditioning system is required for maintaining the temperature for critical sub-station control and protection panels. This shall be achieved by providing adequate number of Environmental control units (ECU) to maintain the temperature below 24C. The system
393
shall be designed for 24 Hours, 365 Days of the year operation to maintain the inside Switchyard panel rooms temperature for proper operation of the critical equipment. 3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL UNITS (ECU) 3.3.1 Each Environmental control unit (ECU) shall comprise of two nos. of air conditioners (1 main + 1 standby), working in conjunction through a micro processor based controller for desired operation. One of the air-conditioner shall be running at a time and shall maintain the required temperature. On failure of the running air-conditioner or as described hereunder, the other air-conditioner shall start automatically. To ensure longer life of the system, the redundant airconditioner shall also be running in cyclic operation through the controller. However, during running of one air-conditioner, if inside temperature of the room reaches 35C due to any emergency condition, the other air-conditioner shall start running to maintain the temperature less than 24C and gives alarm for such situation. After achieving this temperature, the other unit shall again shut off. The ECU shall be switched off if the temperature falls below 20C. No heating or humidification is envisaged for the air conditioning system inside the Switchyard panel rooms. 3.4 AIR CONDITIONERS USED IN ECU 3.4.1 Construction The air conditioner shall be completely self-contained. All components of the units shall be enclosed in a powder coated cabinet. The unit shall be assembled, wired, piped, charged with refrigerant and fully factory tested as a system to ensure trouble free installation and start up. Suitable isolation or other by-passing arrangement shall be provided such that any unit/component could be maintained/ repaired without affecting the running standby unit. The maintenance of unit shall be possible from outside the Switchyard panel room. 3.4.2 Sequence of Operation Suitable arrangement shall be made to operate the unit in the following order. However, the actual operation arrangement shall be finalised during detailed engineering. 1. Evaporator Fan 2. Condenser Fan 3. Compressor 3.4.3 Required Features of Various Components
394
The compressor shall be very reliable, trouble free and long life i.e. hermetically sealed Scroll type of reputed make suitable for continuous operation. Compressor should be installed on vibration isolated mountings or manufacturers recommended approved mounting. Valve shall be provided for charging/topping up of refrigerant. The bidder shall furnish details of their compressor indicating the MTBF, life of compressor and continuous run time of compressor without failure. The contractor shall also furnish details of all accessories i.e. refrigeration system, evaporator coil, condenser coil, evaporator blower filter, cabinet, indoor supply and return grill etc. during detailed engineering.
395
SECTION- (R) TECHNICAL DETAILS FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET 1.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 1.1.1 The scope covers supply of. Diesel Generator set of stationary type having a net electrical output of 250kVA capacity at specified site conditions of 50C ambient temperature and 100% relative humidity on FOR site basis. DG set shall be equipped with: (i) (ii) Diesel engine complete with all accessories. An alternator directly coupled to the engine through coupling, complete with all accessories. (iii) Automatic voltage regulator. (iv) (v) (vi) Complete starting arrangement, including two nos. batteries & chargers. Base frame, foundation bolts etc. Day tank of 990 Litre capacity.
(vii) Engine Cooling and lubrication system. (viii) Engine air filtering system. (ix) (x) Exhaust silencer package. Set of GI pipes, valves, strainers, unloading hose pipes as required for fuel transfer system from storage area to fuel tank including electrically driven fuel pump. (xi) All lubricants, consumable, touch up paints etc. for first filing, testing & commissioning at site. The fuel oil for first commissioning will also be provided by the contractor. (xii) AMF panel for control, metering and alarm. (xiii) Enclosure for silent type D.G. Set 1.2 SCOPE OF SERVICE 1.2.1 a) b) The Contractor shall provide following services: Design, manufacture, shop testing including assembly test. Despatch, transportation to site.
Volume-II (Section-R), Diesel Generator
396
c)
Erection, testing & commissioning with all equipments/materials required for the purpose.
d)
Drawings, data, design calculations and printed erection, operation & maintenance manual.
e)
Certification and compliance for meeting noise level & emission parameters and other requirements in accordance with latest Notification of MOEF.
1.3.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 i) The rating of DG sets are as follows: DG set net out put after considering deration for engine and alternator separately due to temperature rise in side the enclosure and on account of power reduction due to auxiliaries shall be 250kVA, 1500RPM, 0.8Pf, 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz. The above ratings are the minimum requirements. However for 132kV substations the net output of DG Set shall be 100kVA. ii) DG sets shall also be rated for 110% of full load for 1 hour in every twelve hrs of continuous running. 1.3.2 The output voltage, frequency and limits of variation from open circuit to full load shall be as follows : a) Voltage variation +5% of the set value provision shall exist to adjust the set value between 90% to 110% of nominal Generator voltage of 415V. b) 1.3.3. Frequency 50Hz +2%
The Diesel Generator and other auxiliary motor shall be of H class with temperature rise limited to Class-F for temperature rise consideration.
1.3.4.
NOISE LEVEL & EMISSION PARAMETERS: These shall be as per latest Notification of MOEF
1.4.
PLANT DESIGN 1.4.1. i) ii) DIESEL ENGINE The engine shall comply with the IS 10002/BS 5514/ISO 3046; latest edition Diesel engine shall be turbo charged multicylinder V-type in line type with mechanical fuel injection system.
397
iii)
The engine with all accessories shall be enclosed in a enclosure to make it work silently (within permissible noise level) without any degradation in its performance.
iv)
The Diesel Engines shall be directly water cooled. Cooling of water through radiator and fan as envisaged.
v)
The fuel used shall be High Speed Diesel oil (HSD) or Light Diesel Oil (LDO) as per IS:1460.
1.4.2. i)
Air Suction & Filtration Suction of air shall be from indoor for ventilation and exhaust flue gasses will be let out to outside atmosphere, Condensate traps shall be provided on the exhaust pipe.
ii) 1.4.3
Filter shall be dry type air filter with replaceable elements. FUEL AND LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM The engine shall have closed loop lubricating system. No moving parts shall require lubrication by hand prior to the start of engine or while it is in operation.
1.4.4.
ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM Automatic electric starting by DC starter motor shall be provided.
1.4.5. i) ii)
FUEL INJECTION AND REGULATOR The engine shall be fitted with electronic governor suitable for class A-1 as per IS 10000. The engine shall be fitted with a heavy, dynamically balanced fly wheel suitable for constant speed governor duty.
1.4.6. i) ii)
ALTERNATOR The alternator shall comply with BS 2613/IS 4722/IEC 34; latest edition. The alternator shall be of continuously rated duty, suitable for 415 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz. Power development having brush-less, synchronous, self-excited, self-regulating system.
iii) iv) v) vi)
The alternator shall be drip-proof, screen protected as per IP-23 degree of Protection. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced to minimize vibration. The alternator shall be fitted with shaft mounted centrifugal fan. It shall have the winding of class H but limited to Class-F for temperature rise consideration.
398
vii)
The Alternator regulator shall be directly coupled to the engine and shall be complete with the excitation system, automatic voltage regulation of +/- 1%, voltage adjusting potentiometer and under/over speed protection.
viii) Terminal Box a) Six (6) output terminals shall be provided in alternator terminal box. Terminals shall be Suitable for 1 No. of single core, 630 mm2 XLPE cables per phase for 250kVA DG set and 3Core 300 mm2 XLPE cable for 100kVA DG set. The neutral shall be formed in AMF panel. The generator terminal box shall be suitable to house necessary cables and should be made of non-magnetic material. b) The alternator with all accessories shall be enclosed in a enclosure to make it work Silently (within permissible noise level) 1.4.7. i) COUPLING The engine and alternator shall be directly coupled by means of self-aligning flexible flange coupling to avoid misalignment. ii) 1.4.8. i) The coupling shall be provided with a protecting guard to avoid accidental contract. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT The engine and alternator shall be mounted on a common heavy duty, rigid fabricated steel base frame constructed from ISMC of suitable sections. ii) Adequate number of anti-vibration mounting pads shall be fixed on the common base frame on which the engine and the alternator shall be mounted to isolate the vibration from passing on to the common base frame or the foundation of the D.G. Set. 1.4.9. i) PERIPHERALS FUEL TANK a) The Fuel tank of 990 Litre capacity shall be provided on a suitably fabricated steel platform. The tank shall be complete with level indicator marked in litres, filling inlet with removable screen, an outlet, a drain plug, an air vent, an air breather and necessary piping. The tank shall be painted with oil resistant paint and shall be erected in accordance with Indian explosive act of 1932. Fuel tank shall be kept outside of enclosure. The fuel piping shall be carried out to connect the D.G set kept inside.
399
b) For transferring fuel to Fuel tank transfer pump is envisaged. The capacity of transfer pump shall be adequate to fill the day tank in about 30 minutes. Fuel pump shall be electrically driven. ii) BATTERY and BATTERY CHARGER a) Two nos. 24V batteries complete with all leads, terminals and stand shall be provided. Each battery shall have sufficient capacity to give 10 nos. successive starting impulse to the diesel engine. b) The battery charger shall be complete with transformer, suitable rating (415 V, 3 Ph., 50 Hz./230V, 1Ph., 50 Hz) rectifier circuit, charge rate selector switch for trickle/boost charge, D.C. ammeter & voltmeter, annunciation panel for battery charge indication / loading / failures. c) The charger shall float and Boost Charge the battery as per recommendation of manufacturer of battery. The charger shall be able to charge a fully discharged battery to a state of full charge in 8 Hrs. with 25% spare capacity. d) Manual control for coarse and fine voltage variation shall be provided. Float charger shall have built-in load limiting features. e) Ripple shall not be more than 1%(r.m.s) to get smooth DC voltage shall be provided. f) Charger shall be provided with Out-put Voltmeter & Ammeter. g) Changeover scheme for selecting battery and battery charger by changeover switch should be provided. 1.5. CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION 1.5.1. Each D.G. Set shall be provided with suitable instruments, interlock and protection arrangement, suitable annunciation and indications etc. for proper start up, control, monitoring and safe operation of the unit. One local AMF control panel alongwith each D.G. set shall be provided by the Supplier to accommodate these instruments, protective relays, indication lamps etc. The AMF Panel shall have IP-52 degree of Protection as per IS:12063. 1.5.2. The D.G. sets shall be provided with automatic start facility to make it possible to take full load within 30 seconds of Power Supply failure. 1.5.3. Testing facility for automatic operation of D.G.Set shall be provided in AMF panel.
400
1.5.4.
A three attempt starting facility using two impulse timers and summation timer for engine shall be proved and if the voltage fails to develop within 40 sec. from receiving the first impulse, the set shall block and alarm to this effect shall be provided in the AMF panel.
1.5.5. a) b) c) d) 1.5.6.
Following instruments shall be provided with Diesel Engine Lub oil pressure gauge Water temperature thermometers Engine tachometer/HR Any other instruments necessary for DG Set operation shall be provided. DG set shall be capable of being started/ stopped manually from remote as well as local. (Remote START/STOP push button shall be provided in 415V ACDB). However, interlock shall be provided to prevent shutting down operation as long as D.G. Circuit breaker is closed.
1.5.7.
The diesel generator shall commence a shutdown sequence whenever any of the following conditions appear in the system :
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j)
Overspeed Overload High temperature of engine and cooling water. High temperature inside enclosure Low lube oil pressure Generator differential protection Short circuit protection Under voltage Over voltage Further interlocking of breaker shall be provided to prevent parallel operation of DG set with normal station supply.
401
1.5.8.
Following indication lamps for purposes mentioned as under shall be provided in AMF panel :
i)
Pilot indicating lamp for the following: a) b) c) d) e) Mains ON Alternator ON Charger ON/OFF Breaker ON/OFF Main LT Supply ON/OFF
ii)
Visual annunciation shall be provided for set shut down due to : a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Engine overheating Low oil pressure Lack of fuel Set failed to start in 30 secs after receiving the first start impulse High cooling water temperature Low level in daily service fuel tank Overspeed trip Audio & visual Annunciation for alternator fault.
1.5.9.
Thermostatically controlled space heaters and cubicle illumination operated by Door Switch shall be provided in AMF panel. Necessary isolating switches and fuses shall also be provided.
1.5.10. AMF panel shall have facility for adjustment of speed and voltage including fine adjustments in remote as well as in local mode. Following shall also be provided in AMF panel: a) b) Frequency meter 3 Nos. single phase CT's for metering
402
c)
3 Nos. (Provided by LT swgr manufacturer) single phase CT's with KPV 300V & RCT 0.25 ohm for differential protection of DG Set on neutral side only for 250kVA.
d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p)
One (1) DC Ammeter (0-40A) One (1) DC Voltmeter (0-30V) One (1) Voltmeter Selector switch One (1) AC Ammeter One (1) AC Voltmeter Three (3) Timers (24V DC) Two (2) Auto/Manual Selector Switch Two (2) Auto/test/Manual Selector Switch Eleven (11) Aux. Contactors suitable for 24V DC One (1) Motorised potentiometer for voltage adjustment Two (2) Set Battery charger as specified in Technical details One (1) Set Phase & Neutral busbars. Any other item required for completion of Control scheme shall be deemed to be included.
1.6.
D.G. SET Enclosure 1.6.1. i) General requirements Diesel engine, alternator, AMF panel, Batteries and Chargers shall be installed outdoor in a suitable weather-proof enclosure which shall be provided for protection from rain, sun, dust etc. Further, in addition to the weather proofing, acoustic enclosures shall also be provided such that the noise level of acoustic enclosure DG set shall meet the requirement of MOEF The diesel generator sets should also conform to Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 as amended. An exhaust fan with louvers shall be installed in the enclosure for temperature control inside the enclosure. The enclosure shall allow sufficient ventilation to the enclosed D.G. Set so that the body temperature is limit to 50C. The air flow of the exhaust fan shall be from inside to the outside the shelter. The exhaust fan shall be powered from the DG set supply output so that it starts with the
403
starting of the DG set and stops with the stopping of the DG set. The enclosure shall have suitable viewing glass to view the local parameters on the engine. ii) Fresh air intake for the Engine shall be available abundantly; without making the Engine to gasp for air intake. A chicken mess shall be provided for air inlet at suitable location in enclosure which shall be finalised during detailed engineering. iii) The Enclosure shall be designed and the layout of the equipment inside it shall be such that there is easy access to all the serviceable parts. iv) Engine and Alternator used inside the Enclosure shall carry their manufacturers Warranty for their respective Models and this shall not degrade their performance. v) Exhaust from the Engine shall be let off through Silencer arrangement to keep the noise level within desired limits. Interconnection between silencer and engine should be through stainless steel flexible hose/ pipe. 1.6.2. All the Controls for Operation of the D.G. Set shall be easily assessable. There should be provision for emergency shutdown from outside the enclosure. 1.6.3. 1.6.4. i) Arrangement shall be made for housing the Battery set in a tray inside the Enclosure. Construction Features: The enclosure shall be fabricated from at least 14 Gauge CRCA sheet steel and of Modular construction for easy assembling and dismantling. The sheet metal components shall be pre-treated by Seven Tank Process and Powder coated (PURO Polyester based) both-in side and out side for long life. The hard-ware and accessories shall be high tensile grade. Enclosure shall be given a lasting anti-rust treatment and finished with pleasant environment friendly paint. All the hardware and fixtures shall be rust proof and able to withstand the weather conditions. ii) Doors shall be large sized for easy access and provided with long lasting gasket to make the enclosure sound proof. All the door handles shall be lockable type. iii) The Enclosure shall be provided with anti-vibration pads (suitable for the loads and vibration they are required to carry) with minimum vibration transmitted to the surface the set is resting on. iv) High quality rock wool of required density and thickness shall be used with fire retardant thermo setting resin to make the Enclosure sound proof.
404
1.6.5.
Provision for Neutral/Body Earthing Points shall be available at two side of the enclosure with the help of flexible copper wires from alternator neutral, and electrical panel body respectively. The earthing point shall be isolated through insulator mounted on enclosure.
1.7.
INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENT 1.7.1. DG set enclosed in enclosure shall be installed on Concrete Pedestal 300mm above FGL
1.8.
DOCUMENTS 1.8.1. Following drawings and data sheet shall be submitted for approval by Contractor: (i) (ii) Data sheet for Engine, Alternator, Battery, AMF panel and Enclosure GA drawing of DG set
(iii) Layout of DGset in the enclosure along with sections (iv) (v) 1.8.2. GA and schematic of AMF panel Arrangement of inclined roof and pedestal.
The D G Set shall be supplied with (i) (ii) D G Set test certificate Engine Operation & maintenance Manual.
(iii) Engine Parts Catalogue. (iv) (v) 1.9. TESTS a) The Diesel generator sets shall be tested for routine and acceptance tests as per the relevant IS/IEC standards. b) For the new makes type test reports as per relevant standard shall be submitted for purchasers approval. Alternator Operation, maintenance & Spare parts Manual. Alternator test certificate.
405
1.10.
Commissioning Checks In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall carryout the following commissioning tests to be carried out at site.
1.
Load Test The engine shall be given test run for a period of atleast 6 hours. The set shall be subjected to the maximum achievable load as decided by Purchaser without exceeding the specified DG Set rating: During the load test, half hourly records of the following shall be taken : a) b) c) Ambient temperature. Exhaust temperature if exhaust thermometer is fitted. Cooling water temperature at a convenient point adjacent to the water output from the engine jacket. d) e) f) g) h) i) Lubricating oil temperature where oil cooler fitted. Lubricating oil pressure. Colour of exhaust gas Speed Voltage, wattage and current output. Oil tank level
The necessary load to carry out the test shall be provided by the purchaser. 2. Insulation Resistance Test for Alternator Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the alternator when tested with a 500V megger shall not be less than IR=2x(rated voltage in KV)+1 3. Check of Fuel Consumption A check of the fuel consumption shall be made during the load run test. This test shall be conducted for the purpose of proper tuning of the engine.
406
4.
Insulation Resistance of Wiring Insulation resistance of control panel wiring shall be checked by 500V Megger. The IR shall not be less than one mega ohm.
5.
Functional Tests a) b) c) d) Functional tests on control panel. Functional test on starting provision on the engine. Functional tests on all Field devices. Functional tests on AVR and speed governor.
6.
Measurement of Vibration The vibration shall be measured at load as close to maximum achievable load and shall not exceed 250microns.
7. 8.
Noise Level check as per relevant standard The tests shall be carried out with the DG set operating at rated speed and at maximum achievable load. Necessary correction for Test environment condition & background noise will be applied as per IS:12065.
407
SECTION- (S) TECHNICAL DETAILS OF CIVIL 1.0 GENERAL The intent of this technical specification covers the following: All civil works shall be carried out as per design/drawings standardised by the Owner and these specification provided by the Owner. In case any item is not covered under specification then the same shall be carried out as per CPWD specification and applicable Standards and Codes. Any item for which specification is not provided herein and is not covered under CPWD specification shall be executed as per manufacturer guidelines. All materials shall be of best quality conforming to relevant Indian Standards and Codes. In case of any conflict between Standards/ Code and Technical Specification, the provisions of Technical Specification shall prevail. The Contractor shall furnish all labour, tools, equipment, materials, temporary works, constructional plant and machinery, fuel supply, transportation and all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the Works in accordance with drawings, specifications and direction of Owner. All materials including cement, reinforcement steel and structural steel etc. shall be arranged by the Contractor. All testing required shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost. The contractor shall execute the work as per the Field Quality Plan (FQP) attached with this document. The bidder shall fully appraise himself of the prevailing conditions at the proposed site. Climatic conditions including monsoon patterns, local conditions and site specific parameters and shall include for all such conditions and contingent measures in the bid, including those which may not have been specifically brought out in the specifications. 2.0 Drawings Bidder should provide construction drawings for the following: i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Building Roads & rail cum Road Chain link fencing Soak pit and gate Septic tank Fire fighting pump house building and fire water tank. Rain water harvesting
Volume-II (Section-S), Civil
408
2.3
Tower & equipment foundations Drawings for any non-standard tower or equipment foundation, if required, shall be designed by the Owner and made available to the Contractor during detailed Engineering. Foundations for any miscellaneous requirements like electric poles, marshalling box, control cubicles, etc. shall be engineered by the Contractor and the design and drawings shall be submitted for owners approval. Drawings for transformer, reactor foundations and fire wall are not enclosed and shall be made available to the contractor by the owner during detailed engineering. In case the site conditions warrant any special type of foundations to be used, the same shall be designed and issued by the owner to the contractor during detailed engineering.
2.4
Drains The contractor shall develop an overall drainage layout for the new sub-station/ extension of substation during detailed engineering. The type of drains used shall be of the sections standardized.
2.5
Under Ground Water Tank The scope includes supplying and erection of 2 numbers ISI marked centrifugal water pump (Monoblock) at 415 Voltage 3 phase 50 cycle/per second of 7.5 HP along with all necessary accessories.
2.6
External Sewage System of Township The drawing for the Sewage system consisting of glazed stoneware pipes Grade-A with all round cement grade 1:5:10 including manholes, road crossing, gali trap connections etc for connecting each fittings with the septic tank shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted to Engineerin-Charge for approval before execution. Manholes of suitable size as per CPWD standard design and depth shall be provided at all turning points and junction with spacing between 2 manholes not exceeding 30m. Heavy duty covers shall be provided for the manholes in case it comes on the
2.7
External water supply from bore-well to fire water tank The drawing for the water supply from bore-well to fire water tank shall be developed by the contractor and submitted to owner for approval. Water supply will be made available to the Contractor from a bore-well by the Owner at any one location within the substation. 80 mm dia GI pipe shall be provided by the Contractor from the bore-well to the fire water tank. From this a
409
25 mm dia tap off shall be connected by the Contractor to the roof water tank provided for the control room building. 2.8 Stone spreading and antiweed treatment The layout of the area where anti-weed treatment and stone spreading is to be provided shall be made available to the contractor during detailed engineering. 3.0 SITE PREPARATION: Levelled/sloped site shall be handed over to the contractor. The finished ground level (FGL) shall be the finished formation level furnished by the owner. The layout and levels of all structure etc shall be made by the Contractor at his own cost from the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide all assistance in instruments, materials and personnel to the Owner for checking the detailed layout and shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the layout and levels. 3.1 SCOPE This clause covers the execution of the work for site preparation, such as clearing of the site, the supply and compaction of fill material, excavationand compaction of backfill for foundation, road construction, drainage, trenches and final topping by stone (broken hard stone). 3.2 GENERAL 1) Material unsuitable for founding of foundations shall be removed and replaced by suitable fill material and to be approved by the Owner. 2) Backfill material around foundations or other works shall be suitable for the purpose for which it is used and compacted to the density described under Compaction. Excavated material not suitable or not required for backfill, shall be disposed off in area's as directed by Owner up to a maximum lead of 2 km. 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1. Excavation and backfill for foundations shall be in accordance with the relevant code. 2. Whenever water table is met during the excavation, it shall be dewatered and water table shall be maintained below the bottom of the excavation level during excavation, concreting and backfilling. 3. Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts, retaining walls and similar structures shall be constructed by compacting the material in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding
410
20 cm in thickness. (of loose material before compaction). Each layer shall be compacted as required by means of mechanical tampers approved by the Owner. Rocks larger than 10 cm in any direction shall not be placed in embankment adjacent to structures. 4. Earth embankments of roadways and site areas adjacent to buildings shall be placed in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness in loose stage measurement and compacted to the full width specified. The upper surface of the embankment shall be shaped so as to provide complete drainage of surface water at all times. 3.4 COMPACTION 1. The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per relevant IS and as per direction of Owner. All compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as practicable. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctors density at OMC. The subgrade for the roads and embankment filling shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctors density at OMC. Cohesion less material subgrade shall be compacted to 70% relative density (minimum). 2. At all times unfinished construction shall have adequate drainage. Upon completion of the roads surface course, adjacent shoulders shall be given a final shaping, true alignment and grade. 3. Each layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum moisture content as practicable. Embankment material which does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain proper compaction shall be wetted. If the material contains any excess moisture, then it shall be allowed to dry before rolling. The rolling shall begin at the edges overlapping half the width of the roller each time and progress to the center of the road or towards the building as applicable. Rolling will also be required on rockfills. No compaction shall be carried out in rainy weather. 3.5 REQUIREMENT FOR FILL MATERIAL UNDER FOUNDATION The thickness of fill material under the foundations shall be such that the maximum pressure from the footing, transferred through the fill material and distributed onto the original undisturbed soil will not exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of the original undisturbed soil. For expansive soils the fill materials and other protections etc. to be used under the foundation is to be got approved by the Owner.
411
4.0 4.1
ANTIWEED TREATMENT & STONE SPREADING SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of the work in accordance with the specification and direction of the Owner. Stone spreading along with cement concrete layer shall be done in the areas of the switchyard under present scope of work. However the stone spreading along with cement concrete layer in future areas within fenced area shall also be provided in case step potential without stone layer is not well within safe limits.
4.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENT The material required for site surfacing/stone filling shall be free from all types of organic materials and shall be of standard quality, and as approved by the Owner. 4.2.1 The material to be used for stone filling/site surfacing shall be uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 40mm nominal size (ungraded single size) conforming to Table 2 of IS:383 1970. Hardness, flakiness shall be as required for wearing courses are given below: (a) Sieve Analysis limits (Gradation) (IS : 383 Table 2) Sieve Size 63mm 40mm 20mm 10mm % passing by weight 100 85-100 0-20 0-5
One Test shall be conducted for every 500 cu.m. (b) Hardness Abrasion value (IS:2386 Part-IV) not more than 40% Impact value (IS:2386 Part-IV) not more than 30% and frequency shall be one test per 500 cu.m. with a minimum of one test per source.
412
(c)
Flakiness Index One test shall be conducted per 500 cu.m. of aggregate as per IS:2386 Part I and maximum value is 25%.
4.2.2
After all the structures/equipments are erected, antiweed treatment shall be applied in the switchyard where ever stone spreading along with cement concrete is to be done and the area shall be thoroughly de-weeded including removal of roots. The recommendation of local agriculture or horticulture department may be sought where ever feasible while choosing the type of chemical to be used. The antiweed chemical shall be procured from reputed manufacturers. The doses and application of chemical shall be strictly done as per manufacturers recommendation. Nevertheless the effectiveness of the chemical shall be demonstrated by the contractor in a test area of 10MX10M (appx) and shall be sprinkled with water at least once in the afternoon everyday after forty eight hours of application of chemical. The treated area shall be monitored over a period of two to three weeks for any growth of weeds by the Engineer in- charge. The final approval shall be given by Engineer in charge based on the results.
4.2.3
Engineer-in-charge shall decide final formation level so as to ensure that the site appears uniform devoid of undulations. The final formation level shall however be very close to the formation level indicated in the approved drawing.
4.2.4
After antiweed treatment is complete, the surface of the switchyard area shall be maintained, rolled/compacted to the lines and grades as decided by Engineer-incharge. The sub grade shall be consolidated by using half ton roller with suitable water sprinkling arrangement to form a smooth and compact surface. The roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass.
4.2.5
In areas that are considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be too congested with foundations and structures for proper rolling of the site surfacing material by normal rolling equipments, the material shall be compacted by hand, if necessary. Due care shall be exercised so as not to damage any foundation structures or equipment during rolling compaction.
4.2.6
The sub grade shall be in moist condition at the time the cement concrete is placed. If necessary, it should be saturated with water for not less than 6 hours but not exceeding 20 hours before placing of cement concrete. If it becomes dry prior to the actual placing of
413
cement concrete, it shall be sprinkled with water and it shall be ensured that no pools of water or soft patches are formed on the surface. 4.2.7 Over the prepared sub grade, 75mm thick base layer of cement concrete in 1:5:10 (1 cement :5 fine/coarse sand : 10 burnt brick aggregate. shall be provided in the area excluding roads, drains, cable trenches. For easy drainage of water, the slope of 1:1000 is to be provided from the ridge to the nearest drain. The ridge shall be suitably located at the centre of the area between the nearest drains. The above slope shall be provided at the top of base layer of cement concrete in 1:5:10. A layer of cement slurry of mix 1:6 (1 cement: 6 fine sand) shall be laid uniformly over cement concrete layer. The cement consumption for cement slurry shall not be less than 150 kg. Per 100 sq.m. 4.2.8 A final layer of 100mm thickness of uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 40 nominal size (ungraded size) shall be spread uniformly over cement concrete layer after curing is complete. 5.0 5.1 RAINWATER HARVESTING: In addition to drainage of rainwater, the contractor shall make arrangement for rainwater harvesting also. 5.2 Rainwater harvesting shall be done by providing two numbers recharge structures with bore wells. The recharge structures shall be suitably located within the substation. Branch drains from the main drain carrying rainwater from entire switchyard shall be connected to the recharge structures. 5.3 The internal diameter of recharge shafts shall be 4.5 meter with 230mm thick lining of brick work upto a depth of 2.0 meter from ground level and 345mm thick brickwork below 2.0 meter depth. The brickwork shall be constructed with cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand). The overall depth of shaft shall be 5.0 meter below invert level of drain. The shaft shall be covered with RCC slab for a live load of 300 kg. per sq.m. Two openings of size 0.7 x 0.7 meter shall be provided in the RCC cover slab. An iron cover made of 5mm thick chequered plate with hinges shall be provided on the openings. Galvanized M.S. rungs of 20mm diameter at spacing of 300 mm shall be provided in the wall of shaft below the opening in the RCC slab to facilitate cleaning of shaft. 5.4 A 300 mm diameter bore well shall be drilled in the centre of the shaft. The depth of bore well shall be 5.0 meter more than the depth of sub soil water.
414
5.5
A 100 mm dia medium duty MS pipe conforming to IS 1161 shall be lowered in the bore well keeping bail plug towards bottom of bore well. The pipe shall have 1.58mm holes for 4.0 meter length starting from 1.0 meter from bottom of bore well. Holes of 3.0mm dia shall be provided for a length of 2.0 meter starting from the bottom level of coarse sand and down wards. The overall length of pipe shall be equal to total depth of bore well plus depth of shaft.
5.6
Gravel of size 3mm to 6mm shall be filled around 100 dia MS pipe in the borewell. The shaft shall be filled with 500 mm thick layers each from the bottom of shaft with boulders of size 50mm to 150mm, gravel of size 5mm to 10mm, coarse sand having particle size 1.5mm to 2.0mm and boulders of size not less than 200mm respectively.
6.0 6.1 6.2
ROADS AND CULVERTS All the roads in the scope of contract shall be of concrete road. There would be two types of Roads. The wider road shall be 5.5m wide and the other road shall be 3.75m wide. The road outside the switchyard fenced area shall have shoulder of 1.75m in case of 5.5m wide road and 1.3 m in case of 3.75m wide road with kerb stone at the two side ends of the road. Interlocking tiles shall be laid on this shoulder. Kerb stone with channel are to be provided at both the side of the roads. The kerb stone on both side of the roads shall be painted yellow and black alternatively. In case of switchyard road the shoulder would be compacted earth 600mm wide on the sides of both types of road.
6.3
Layout of the roads shall be shown in the General Arrangement drawing for the substation. Adequate turning space for vehicles shall be provided and bend radii shall be set accordingly. Road to the Autotransformer/Reactor shall be as short and straight as possible.
6.4
The road shall have 100mm thick RCC (1:1.5:3 nominal mix with reinforcement of 8mm dia. 300 C/C bothways) on the top. Below it 100mm thick PCC (1:4:8) shall be provided. 300mm thick water bound macadam (WBM) in three equal layers of 100mm each at the bottom. PCC and WBM shall extend upto the shoulder width on both sides of the road outside switchyard area. In case of road within the switchyard PCC and WBM shall placed only upto the width of the road. Polythene sheet of 125 microns shall be placed between the RCC and PCC slab. Expansion joint (12mm thick) shall be provided at every 8.0 m. In addition, in case of 5.5 m wide road,
415
expansion joint shall also be provided longitudinally at the center. 100mm dia RCC hume pipe (NP-3) shall be provided at every 100m interval across the length of the road for cable crossing. The concrete shall be laid and finished with screed board, vibration, vacuum dewatering process and finishing by floating brooming with wire brush etc. 6.5 7.0 7.1 The shoulder of the road in case of extension shall match with the shoulder of the existing road. FOUNDATION /RCC CONSTRUCTION GENERAL 1. Work covered under this Clause of the Specification comprises the construction of foundations and other RCC constructions for switchyard structures, equipment supports, trenches, drains, jacking pad, pulling block, control cubicles, bus supports, Autotransformer/Reactors, marshalling kiosks, auxiliary equipments & systems buildings, tanks or for any other equipment or service and any other foundation required to complete the work. This clause is as well applicable to the other RCC constructions. 2. Concrete shall conform to the requirements mentioned in IS:456 and all the tests shall be conducted as per relevant Indian Standard Codes as mentioned in Standard field quality plan appended with the specification. However, a minimum grade of M20 concrete (1: 1.5: 3 nominal volumetric mix) shall be used for all structural/load bearing members 3. If the site is sloping, the foundation height will be adjusted to maintain the exact level of the top of structures to compensate such slopes. The switchyard foundations plinths and building plinths shall be minimum 300mm and 500mm above finished ground level respectively. 5. Minimum 75mm thick lean concrete (1:4:8) shall be provided below all underground structures, foundations, trenches etc. to provide a base for construction. 6. Concrete made with Portland slag cement shall be carefully cured and special importance shall be given during the placing of concrete and removal of shuttering. 7. The design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the approved soil data and sub-soil conditions as well as for all possible critical loads and the combinations thereof. The Spread footings foundation or pile foundation as may be required based on soil/subsoil conditions and superimposed loads shall be provided. 8. If pile foundations are adopted, the same shall be cast-in-situ bored or pre-cast or under reamed type as per relevant parts of IS 2911. Only RCC piles shall be provided. Necessary
416
initial load test shall be carried out by the Contractor at their cost to establish the piles design capacity. Only after the design capacity of piles have been established, the Contractor shall take up the job of piling. Routine tests for the piles shall also be conducted as per IS-2911. All the testing work shall be planned in such a way that these shall not cause any delay in project completion. 7.2 DESIGN The following clauses shall be applicable only for the foundation / structure which the contractor may have to design as mentioned at Clause 2.3. 1. All foundation shall be of reinforced cement concrete. The design and construction of RCC structures shall be carried out as per IS:456 and minimum grade of concrete shall be M-20. This M20 shall correspond to nominal volumetric mix of 1:1.5:3. 2. Limit state method of design shall be adopted unless specified specification. 3. For detailing of reinforcement IS: 2502 and SP:34 shall be followed. Cold twisted deformed bars (Fe=415 N/mm2) conforming to IS: 1786, or equivalent TMT bars of equivalent or higher grade as per CPWD specifications shall be used as reinforcement. However, in specific areas, mild steel (Grade I) conforming to IS: 432 can also be used. Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and outer face) shall be provided for wall & slab sections having thickness of 150 mm and above. Clear cover to reinforcement shall be as per IS:456 (latest). 4. RCC water retaining structures like storage tanks, etc. shall be designed as uncracked section in accordance with IS:3370 (Part I to IV) by working stress method. However, water channels shall be designed as cracked section with limited steel stresses as per IS:3370 (Part I to IV) by working stress method. 5. The procedure used for the design of the foundations shall be the most critical loading combination of the steel structure and or equipment and/or superstructure and other conditions which produces the maximum stresses in the foundation or the foundation component and as per the relevant IS Codes of foundation design. Detailed design calculations shall be submitted by the bidder showing complete details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used. otherwise in the
417
6.
Design shall consider any sub-soil water pressure that may be encountered following relevant standard strictly.
7.
Necessary protection to the foundation work, if required shall be provided to take care of any special requirements for aggressive alkaline soil, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental/harmful to the concrete foundations.
8. 9.
RCC columns shall be provided with rigid connection at the base. All sub-structures shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability during both construction and operating conditions for various combinations of loads. Factors of safety for these cases shall be taken as mentioned in relevant IS Codes or as stipulated elsewhere in the Specifications. For checking against overturning, weight of soil vertically above footing shall be taken and inverted frustum of pyramid of earth on the foundation should not be considered.
10.
Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using co-efficient of earth pressure at rest, co-efficient of active or passive earth pressure (whichever is applicable). However, for the design of substructures of any underground enclosures, earth pressure at rest shall be considered.
11.
In addition to earth pressure and ground water pressure etc., a surcharge load of 2T/Sq.m shall also be considered for the design of all underground structures including channels, sumps, tanks, trenches, substructure of any underground hollow enclosure etc., for the vehicular traffic in the vicinity of the structure.
12.
Following conditions shall be considered for the design of watertank in pumps house, channels, sumps, trenches and other underground structures: a) Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure & ground water pressure & surcharge pressure from outside (application only to structures which are liable to be filled up with water or any other liquid). b) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure and ground water pressure from outside and no water pressure from inside. c) Design shall also be checked against buoyancy due to the ground water during construction and maintenance stages. Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the superimposed loadings.
418
13.
Base slab of any underground enclosure shall also be designed for empty condition during construction and maintenance stages with maximum ground water table (GWT). Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the super-imposed loadings.
14.
Base slab of any underground enclosure like water storage tank shall also be designed for the condition of different combination of pump sumps being empty during maintenance stages with maximum GWT. Intermediate dividing piers of such enclosures shall be designed considering water in one pump sump only and the other pumps sump being empty for maintenance.
15.
The foundations shall be proportioned so that the estimated total and differential movements of the foundations are not greater than the movements that the structure or equipment is designed to accommodate.
16.
The foundations of transformer/reactor and circuit breaker shall be of block type foundation. Minimum reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS:456.
17.
The tower and equipment foundations shall be checked for a partial factor of safety of 2.2 for normal condition and 1.65 for short circuit condition.
18
The Contractor shall provide a RCC Rail cum road system integrated with the Autotransformer / Reactor foundation to enable installation and the replacement of any failed unit. The transfer track system shall be suitable to permit the movement of any failed unit fully assembled (including OLTC, bushings) with oil. This system shall enable the removal of any failed unit from its foundation to the nearest road. If trench/drain crossings are required then suitable R.C.C. culverts shall be provided in accordance with I.R.C. standard / relevant IS. The Contractor shall provide a pylon support system for supporting the fire fighting system. Each Autotransformer/Reactor including oil conservator tank and cooler banks etc. shall be placed in a self-sufficient pit surrounded by retaining walls (Pit walls). The clear distance of the retaining wall of the pit from the Autotransformer/Reactor shall be 20% of the Autotransformer/Reactor height or 0.8m whichever is more. The oil collection pit thus formed shall have a void volume equal to 200% volume of total oil in the Autotransformer/Reactor. The minimum height of the retaining walls shall be 15 cm above the finished level of the ground to avoid outside water pouring inside the pit. The bottom of the pit shall have an uniform slope towards the sump pit.
419
While designing the oil collection pit, the movement of the autotransformer / reactor must be taken into account. The grating shall be made of MS flat of size 40mmx 5mm placed at 30mm centre to centre and 25mmx5mm MS flat at an spacing of 150mm at right angle to each other. Maximum length of grating shall be 2000mm and width shall not be more than 500mm. The gratings, supported on ISMB 150mm, shall be placed at the formation level and will be covered with 100mm thick layer of broken/crushed/non-crushed stone having size 40mm to 60mm which acts as an extinguisher for flaming oil. Each oil collection pit shall be drained towards a sump pit of size 1000X750mm and 500mm deep below the floor level within the collection pit whose role is to drain water and oil due to leakage within the collection pit so that collection pit remains dry. 19. FIRE PROTECTION WALLS Fire protection walls shall be provided, if required The firewall shall have a minimum fire resistance of 4 hours. The partitions, which are made to reduce the noise level, shall have the same fire resistance. The walls of the building, which are used as firewalls, shall also have a minimum fire resistance of 4 hours. The firewall shall be designed to protect against the effect of radiant heat and flying debris from an adjacent fire. The firewall shall extend 600 mm on each side of the Autotransformer / Reactors and 600 mm above the conservator tank or safety vent. A minimum of 2.0meter clearance shall be provided between the equipments e.g. Autotransformer/Reactors and firewalls. In case of space constraints, these dimensions can be reduced as per the approval of owner. The building walls, which act as firewalls, shall extend at least 1 m above the roof in order to protect it. The firewall will be made of reinforced concrete (1:1.5:3 nominal mix). 7.3 ADMIXTURES & ADDITIVES 1. Only approved admixtures shall be used in the concrete for the Works. When more than one admixture is to be used, each admixture shall be batched in its own batch and added to the mixing water separately before discharging into the mixer. Admixtures shall be delivered in suitably labelled containers to enable identification. 2. Admixtures in concrete shall conform to IS:9103. The water proofing cement additives shall conform to IS:2645. Concrete Admixtures/ Additives shall be approved by Owner.
420
3.
The Contractor may propose and the Owner may approve the use of a water-reducing setretarding admixture in some of the concrete. The use of such an admixture will not be approved to overcome problems associated with inadequate concrete plant capacity or improperly planned placing operations and shall only be approved as an aid to overcoming unusual circumstances and placing conditions.
4.
The water-reducing set-retarding admixture shall be an approved brand of Lignosulphonate type admixture.
5. 8.0
The water proofing cement additives shall be used as required/ advised by the Owner.
Chainlink Fencing and Gate: Fencing and Gate shall be provided at the suitable locations. Separate gate shall be provided for men and equipment. Fence shall also be provided for the various equipments (if) mounted on ground or a height lower than 2.5m. Necessary gates shall be provided for each area so surrounded. Chain link galvanised fence fabric with 3.15mm dia wire and 75mm mesh size conforming to IS: 2721 shall be used. MS tube used shall be of grade YST22 and conform to IS: 1161. All other structural steel shall conform to IS: 2062. The whole assembly of tubular post shall be hot dip galvanized. The zinc coating shall be minimum 610 gram per sq. meter. The purity of zinc shall be 99.95% as per IS: 209. Frame of panels of chain link fencing shall be painted with two or more coats of approved standard synthetic enamel paint over approved standard steel primer. The gate shall be made of medium duty M.S. pipe with welded joints. The main frame (outer frame) of the gate shall be made of 40mm dia pipe and vertical pipes of 15mm dia @ 125mm spacing (maximum) shall be welded with the main frame. Gate shall be painted with one coat of approved steel primmer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint to give an even shade. The height of the fencing shall be 1500mm on a toe wall of 300mm.
9.0 (i)
WATER SUPPLY (EXTERNAL) Water shall be made available by Owner (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) at any feasible point near scope boundary at single point to the contractor. Contractor shall state the total water requirement both in terms of quantity and head to the Owner.
(ii)
The contractor shall carry out all the external plumbing/erection works required for supply of water to the control room building beyond the single point as at (i).
421
(iii) The contractor shall carry out all the plumbing/erection works required for supply of water to fire water tank beyond the single point as at (i). (v) A scheme shall be prepared by the contractor indicating the layout and details of water supply which shall be got approved from the Owner before actual start of work including all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the works. (vi) 10.0 1. Bore well is not in the scope of contractor. TECHNICAL DETAILS OF THE BUILDINGS 12mm cement plaster of mix 1:6 ( 1 cement : 6 coarse sand ) shall be provided on the smooth side of internal walls. 2. 3. 6 mm cement plaster of mix 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand) to all ceiling. 18mm Cement plaster of mix (1 cement: 5Coarse Sand) with under layer 12mm thick and top layer of 6mm thick for external plaster. 4. 12 mm thick pre-laminated three layer medium density (exterior grade) particle board Grade-I, Type II conforming to IS:12823 bonded with phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin, of approved brand and manufacture shall be provided in panelling fixed in aluminium doors, windows shutters and partition frames with C.P brass/stainless steel screws etc. for control room. 5. Distempering on all internal walls and ceilings with oil bound washable distemper of approved brand and manufacture to give an even shade ( two or more coats ) over and including priming coat with cement primer for control room. 6. Plaster of Paris (Putty) of 2mm thickness over the plaster surface to prepare the surface even and smooth complete with distempering with first quality acrylic washable distemper (ready mix) of approved manufacturer with two or more coats of new work of required shade and colour complete as per manufacturers specification. 7. Enamel Painting with synthetic enamel paint of approved brand and manufacture of required colour to give an even shade shall be provided on the steel glazed doors, windows, ventilators and rolling shutters in various buildings. Two or more coats over an under coat of suitable shade with primer paint of approved brand and manufacture. 8. Two or more coats of French spirit polishing with a coat of wood filler shall be provided on the wooden doors.
422
9.
Cement plaster skirting (up to 15 cm height) with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mixed with metallic concrete hardener in same ratio as for floor finished with a floating coat of neat cement. 21 mm thick in ACDB/DCDB room
10.
Polished vitrified tiles in 60x60 cm size (thickness to be specified by the manufacturer) in flooring and skirting, with water absorptions less than 0.08% and conforming to IS: 15622 of approved make in all colours and shades, laid on cement mortar 20mm thick for flooring & 12mm thick for skirting 1:4 (1 cement: 4coarse sand) including grouting the joints with white cement and matching pigments etc., complete.
11
Glazed Ceramic floor tiles 300x300mm (thickness to be specified by the manufacturer) of 1st quality conforming to IS:15622 of approved make in colours as approved by Engineer-in-charge in toilet and pantries area on 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4coarse sand) including grouting the joints with white cement and matching pigments etc., complete.
12.
Ceramic glazed wall tiles of 1st quality conforming to IS;15622 (thickness to be specified by the manufacture) of approved make in all colours, shades as approved by Engineer-in-Charge in skirting, risers of steps and dados over 12mm thick bed of cement Mortar 1:3 (1 Cement: 3 Coarse sand) and jointing with grey cement slurry @ 3.3kg per sqm including pointing in white cement mixed with pigment of matching shade complete.
13.
Pre-cast terrazzo tiles 20mm thick with graded marble chips of sizes upto 12mm laid in floors, landings, skirting and riser of light shade using white cement jointed with neat cement slurry mix with pigment to match the shade of the tiles including rubbing and polishing complete with precast tiles on Cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand) with (20mm thick for flooring and 12mm thick for skirting).
14.
Rajnagar plain white marble/Udaipur Grade Marble/Zebra black marble work gang socket (Polish and machine cut) of thickness 18mm for staircase in cement mortar 1:3 (1 Cement : 3 coarse sand) including rubbing, curing, pointing with an additional mixture of pigment to match the marble shade.
15.
18mm polished granite in cement mortar 1:4, 20mm thick made to a level cut to size shall be provided. The joints are filled with jointing compound matching to the tiles. Wherever granite tiles are specified for the floor, 100mm granite skirting shall be provided with the walls. The granite outer surface shall be flushed to the plaster finish of the wall.
423
16.
Granite counter shall be provided and fixed with 18mm granite slab mounted on 75mm RCC slab supported by 115mm brick wall plastered on all sides. The shelves shall be made of 18mm thick well cut and polished white marble slabs. The outer side of the brick wall and the RCC slab visible in the front shall be finished with 18mm granite with edges moulded on the exposed end.
17.
All Brickwork shall be provided with cement mortar 1:6 (1cement: 6 coarse sand). Half brick work masonry shall be provided with cement mortar 1:4 (1cement: 4coarse sand). FPS Bricks of clay/Fly ash used shall be of class 75.
18. 19.
Anti termite treatment shall be carried out for all buildings. M.S. Rolling shutters shall be provided and fixed interlocked together through their entire length and jointed together at the end by end locks mounted on specially designed pipe shaft with brackets along with ball bearing for rolling shutter, side guides and arrangements for inside and outside locking with push & pull operation including the cost of providing and fixing necessary 27.5 cm long wire springs grade No. 2 and M. S top cover of required thickness for rolling shutters. 80 x 1.25 mm M. S laths with 1.25 mm thick top cover.
20.
Circular/hexagonal M.S. sheet ceiling fan box shall be provided in the ceiling with clamp of internal dia. 140 mm, 73 mm height, 3 mm thick rim, top and bottom lid of 1.5 mm M.S. Sheet. Lids shall be screwed in to M. S. box by means of 3 mm round headed screws, clamps shall be made of 12 mm dia. M. S. bar bent to shape with overall length as 80 cm.
21.
Powder Coated (minimum thickness 50 micron) aluminum work for doors, windows, ventilators and partitions shall be provided and fixed in building with extruded built up standard tubular and other sections of approved make conforming to IS:733 and IS : 1285, fixed with rawl plugs and screws or with fixing clips, or with expansion hold fasteners including necessary filling up of gaps at junctions at top, bottom and sides with required PVC/neoprene felt etc and joined mechanically wherever required including cleat angle, Aluminium snap beading for glazing / panelling, C.P. brass/ stainless steel screws including glazing and fittings as specified. All doors except for toilet and kitchen shall have 100mm 6 lever CP Brass mortice latch and lock with a pair of lever handle. Sliding door bolt of ISI marked (300x16mm) size shall be provided for toilet, kitchen and main door of control room/residential buildings.
22.
Cement based water proofing treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc. shall be provided with average thickness of 120mm and minimum thickness at Khurra as 65mm and laid consisting of following operations:
424
(a) A slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/m2 of cement admixed with proprietary water proofing compounds conforming to IS: 2645 shall be applied and grouted over the RCC slab including cleaning the surface before treatment. (b) Plain Cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 Cement: 5 fine sand: 10 burnt brick aggregate of 40mm nominal size) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 over 20mm thick layer of cement mortar of min 1:5 (Cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 to required slope and treating similarly the adjoining walls upto 300mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs. (c) After two days of proper curing , a second coat of cement slurry admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 shall be applied. (d) The surface shall be finished with 20mm thick joint less cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement : 4 course sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 and finally the surface shall be finished with trowel with neat cement slurry and making of 300 x 300 mm square. (e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of two weeks for curing and for final test. All above operations shall be done in order and as directed and specified by the Engineer-in-charge. 23. Unplasticised rigid PVC rain water pipes of 110mm dia shall be provided and fixed on the wall face conforming to IS:13592 type A including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS: 5382 leaving 10mm gap for thermal expansion single socketed pipes including all fittings like bends, bat clamps gratings etc.. 24. Unplasticised PVC Moulded fittings/accessories including 110mm bend and 110mm shoes shall be provided and fixed for unplasticised rigid PVC rain water pipes conforming to IS:13592 type A including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS: 5382 leaving 10mm gap for thermal expansion. 25. Unplasticised PVC pipe clips of approved design shall be provided and fixed to unplasticised 110mm PVC rain water pipes by means of 50x50x50mm hard wood plugs, screwed with MS screws of required length including cutting brick work and fixing in cement mortar1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) and making good the wall etc.
425
26.
Double action hydraulic floor spring of approved brand and manufacture IS:6315 marked "hardwyn" make(Model 3000) or equivalent for doors shall be provided and fixed at the following door including cost of cutting floors as required, embedding in floors and cover plates with brass pivot and single piece MS sheet outer box with slide plate etc. as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge. With stainless steel cover plate : a. b. c. d. Main Entrance to Control Room Building / Transit Camp/Recreation Centre. DGM room in control room. Conference Room Control Room
27.
Plinth protection 50 mm thick of cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone) aggregate 20 mm nominal size) shall be laid over 75 mm bed of dry brick ballast 40 mm nominal size well rammed and consolidated and shall be grouted with fine sand including finishing the top smooth.
28.
Coloured vitreous china pedestal type water closet (European type)shall be provided with seat and lid, 10 liter low level vitreous china flushing cistern & C.P. flush bend with fittings and C.I. brackets, 40mm flush bend, overflow arrangement and mosquito proof coupling of including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls and floors wherever required.
29.
Providing and fixing coloured wash basin counter type of (630x450mm size) and flat back wash basin of (550 x400mm size) with CI. Brackets 15mm C.P. brass pillar taps, close hole basin mixer 32mm C.P. brass waste and bottle trap of standard pattern, including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls wherever required.
30.
All urinals shall be coloured vitreous china flat back half stall urinal of 580x380x350mm with 10 litre PVC automatic flushing cistern, Parryware/ Hindware/ Seabird/ Orient (Coral) with fittings, standard size C.P. brass flush pipe, spreaders with unions and clamps (all in C.P. brass) with waste fitting as per IS: 2556 C.I. trap with outlet grating and other couplings in C.P. brass including painting of fittings and cutting and making good the walls and floors wherever required.
31.
Following fittings shall be provided in the toilets: i) Toilet paper roll holder.
426
ii)
Double type coat & hat hooks with flanges, fixed to wall / shutter, etc. with necessary screws, washers & plugs.
iii)
CP liquid soap holder of approved make fixed with each wash basin to the wall with necessary CP brackets, CP screws, washers, plugs etc.
iv)
100mm dia vitreous chinaware half round channel of approved make fixed to correct grade, level, opening for floor trap below urinals set in CM 1:3 & pointed using white cement etc .
v) vi)
CP brass bib cock 15mm nominal bore of approved quality conforming to IS :8931 . CP brass angle valve of 15mm nominal bore provided and fixed in position for basin and cistern points of approved quality conforming IS :8931.
vii)
Best quality marble partition slab provided and fixed in position for urinals, of size 610x1150mm, 20mm thick, polished on both sides & machine cut, exposed corners rounded etc.
viii) Towel rail of approved make of 600mm length, 25mm dia with a pair of brackets or flanges provided and fixed to wall beside each wash basin/set of wash basin with necessary screws, plugs, etc. ix) 6mm thick beveled edge mirror 1000x600mm shall be provided and fixed mounted on 12mm thick water proof plywood backing and hardwood beading all-round and mirror fixed to the backing with 4 Nos. of CP cap screws & washers, including fixing the mirror to the wall with necessary screws, plugs & washers etc, with each wash basin. 32. Stainless steel AISI 304 (18/8) Kitchen sink of 460x915 mm bowl with depth of 178mm with drain board shall be provided and fixed as per IS 13983 with C.I brackets, and stainless steel plug 40mm with provision of 2 nos. CP brass long body bib cock conforming to IS Standard and weighing not less than 650 gm for CP bottle trap etc. including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the wall. 33. GI Pipe work for Internal and External works: i) All GI types and fittings shall conform to IS-1239 Part I & II for medium grade. All accessories shall be ISI Marked. ii) All concealed GI pipe shall be painted with anticorrosive bitumastic paint including cutting of chases and making good the wall.
427
iii)
All exposed GI pipes and fittings shall be painted with synthetic enamel paint of desired shade over a ready mixed priming coat, both of approved quality for new work.
iv)
Wherever GI pipes are buried the same shall be provided and laid in position including trenching sand cushion and refilling, painted with anticorrosive bitumastic paint etc.
v)
Gun metal ball valve with operating levers, non-return valves conforming to IS specification shall be provided.
34.
Masonry chamber for sluice valve shall be 600x600mm size in plan and depth 750mm, or matching with the site condition inside with 50 class designation brick work in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 fine sand) with CI surface box 100 mm. Top diameter, 160 mm bottom dia and 180 mm deep (inside) with chained lid and RCC top slab 1:2:4 mix (1cement : 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) necessary excavation foundation concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) and inside plastering with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) 12 mm thick finished with a floating coat of neat cement complete as per standard design with FPS bricks of class 75.
35.
Polyethylene water storage tanks conforming to ISI: 12701 shall be provided of approved brand and manufacture with cover and suitable locking arrangement, float valve and making necessary holes for inlet, outlet and overflow pipes. Capacity of water tank shall be 2x2000 litres for control room, 2000 litres for Transit Camp, 1000 litres for D type & Recreation Centre and 500 litres each for other dwelling unit.
36.
PVC floor traps of self cleansing design shall be provided & fixed in position with outlet size of 75mm diameter of approved make, including making connection with PVC soil/waste pipes using rubber gaskets, embedding the trap in 150 mm thick PCC 1:2:4, providing & fixing of top tile & strainer of CP or PVC on top of the trap etc.
37.
Square-mouth SW gully trap grade 'A' 100x100mm size P type with FPS Bricks class designation 75 shall be provided and fixed complete with CI grating brick masonry chamber with water tight C.I. cover with frame of 300X300mm size (inside) the weight of cover to be not less than 4.5 Kg and frame to be not less than 2.70 Kg as per standard design
38.
Brick Masonry road gully chamber of 50x45x60cm shall be provided with brick with cement mortar 1:4 including 500x450mm pre cast RCC Horizontal/vertical grating with frame complete.
428
39.
Glazed stoneware pipes of 150mm diameter grade 'A' shall be provided, laid and jointed with stiff mixture of cement mortar in the proportion of 1:1 (1cement :1 fine sand ) including testing of joints etc. complete.
40.
Cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) shall be provided and laid around S.W pipes including bed concrete.
41.
Brick masonry manhole shall be constructed in cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement :4 coarse sand ) RCC top slab with 1:2:4 mix ( 1 cement : 2coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size ) foundation concrete 1:4:8 mix ( 1cement : 4 coarse sand :8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size ) inside plastering 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand ) finished with floating coat of neat cement and making channels in cement concrete 1:2:4 ( 1 cement: 2 coarse sand :4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size ) finished with a floating coat of neat cement complete as per standard design. a) Inside size shall be 90 x 80 cm and 60 cm deep including CI cover with frame (light duty) 455 x 610 mm internal dimensions total weight of cover and frame shall not be less than 38 kg (weight of cover 23 kg and weight of frame 15 kg) and shall be constructed with F.P.S./fly ash bricks with class designation 75. b) Inside size shall be 120 x 90 cm and 90 cm or more deep including CI cover with frame (medium duty) 500mm internal diameter total weight of cover and frame to be not less than 116 kg (weight of cover 58 kg and weight of frame 58 kg) with FPS Bricks class designation 75.
42.
MS foot of 20 x 20mm square rests shall be provided and fixed in manholes with 20 x 20 x 10 cm cement concrete blocks 1:3:6 ( 1 cement :3 coarse sand :6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size ) as per standard design.
43.
Steel glazed doors, windows and ventilators of standard rolled steel sections shall be provided and fixed in Township pumphouse and FFPH building, jointed and welded with 15 x 3 mm lugs, 10cm long, embedded in cement concrete blocks 15 x 10 x10 cm of 1:3:6 (1 cement 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) or with wooden plugs and screws or rawl plugs and screws or with fixing clips or with bolts and nuts as required, including providing and fixing of glass panes with glazing clips and special metal sash putty of approved make complete including applying a priming coat of approved steel primer, necessary hinges or pivots as required to complete the work.
429
44.
Pressed steel door frames manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of 1.25mm thickness shall be provided and fixed in Township pumphouse and FFPH building including hinges jamb, lock jamb, bead and if required angle threshold of mild steel angle of section 50x25mm, or base ties of 1.25 mm pressed mild steel welded or rigidly mixed together by mechanical means, adjustable lugs with split end tail to each jamb including steel butt hinges 2.5mm thick with mortar guards, lock strike-plate and shock absorbers as specified and applying a coat of approved steel primer after pretreatment of the surface as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
45.
Asbestos cement 6mm thick corrugated sheets roofing shall be provided and fixed with G, I, J or L hooks, bolts and nuts 8mm diameter G, I plain and bitumen washers complete excluding the cost of purlins, rafters and trusses for water tank.
46.
Water closet squatting pan (Indian type W.C. pan ) (white vitreous china Orissa pattern W.C. pan of size 580x440mm with integral type foot rests) shall be provided with 100mm sand cast iron P or S trap. 10 litre low level white P.V.C flushing cistern with manually controlled device (handle lever) conforming to IS:7231, with all fittings and fixtures complete including cutting and making good the walls and floors wherever required.
47.
Coloured vitreous china pedestal type water closet (European type) shall be provided with seat and lid, 10 litre low level white vitreous china flushing cistern & C.P. flush bend with fittings and C.I. brackets, 40mm flush bend, overflow arrangement with specials of standard make and mosquito proof coupling of approved municipal design complete including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls and floors wherever required.
48.
Coloured vitreous china flat back half stall urinal of size 580x380x350mm shall be provided with 5 litre PVC automatic flushing cistern, with fittings, standard size C.P. brass flush pipe, spreaders with unions and clamps (all in C.P. brass) with waste fitting as per IS:2556 C.I. trap with outlet grating and other couplings in C.P. brass including painting of fittings and cutting and making good the walls and floors wherever required.
49.
Wash basin counter type (630x450mm) and flat back wash basin (550 x400mm) shall be provided with CI. Brackets 15mm C.P. brass pillar taps, close hole basin mixer 32mm C.P. brass waste and bottle trap of standard pattern, including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls wherever required.
50.
Hardware fittings shall have 100mm CP brass handle, 50mm CP Brass cup-board locks, Nickel Plated finishing, Piano hinges as per IS:3818, Magnetic catchers, heavy type hanger rods of 20mm dia, Anodized (Grade AC-10) Aluminium tower bolts(10o x10m) of ISI marked of
430
required shade. All doors of recreation center and Transit Camp shall have tubular type Hydraulic Door Closer conforming to IS-3564. 51. All doors except toilet and kitchen shall have 100mm 6 liver mortice lock and a pair of lever handles with necessary screws complete etc. 52. Aluminium sliding door with ISI marked anodized transparent and dyed to required colour or shade shall be provided at main entry door, toilets and kitchen. 53. Pelmet shall be provided 18mm thick 150mm wide of coir veneer board ISI marked including top cover of 6mm of coir veneer board and lipping, Nickel plated MS pipe 20mm dia (heavy type0 curtain road with Nickel plated (including fixing with 25x 3mm MS flat 10cm long and rawl plug all complete. 54. Cement Jaali of (1:2:4) ( 1 Cement: 2 fine aggregate : 4 coarse aggregate ) 50mm thick, shall be reinforced with 1.6mm dia with Mild steel wire including centring and shuttering cleaning fixing and furnishing with cement mortar 1:3). 55. Providing and fixing 15mm thick approximately 600 X 600mm Mineral fibre board panel along with false ceiling and making cut-outs for electrical fixtures, AC diffusers, openable access etc with silhouette profile system with 15mm wide flange incorporating 6mm central recess white / black main runners at 1200mm centre-centre and not greater than 600mm from the adjacent wall. The cross tees shall be provided to make a module of approximately 600mm X 600mm by fitting 600 mm long cross tees centrally placed between 1200 mm long cross tees .Cross tees also have 15mm wide flange incorporating 6mm central recess white/black. The module formed above shall be anchored to the slab with channels or angles, suspenders as per manufacturers specifications. It shall be provided in all the AC area of Control Room and in the Transit Camp of Township. 56. The Tiles / Paver Blocks shall be made of white cement in order to accentuate the vibrancy of colours and to ensure the increased natural sheen of the tile / block with regular use and maintenance with an aggregate mix not leaner than 1:3 and shall be free from the use of undesirable substitutes such as slag / red mud. Moreover the pigments used in each and every tile / block shall be imported Bayer pigments which have a higher colour consistency and fade resistance. Moreover the pigments shall also have higher UV stability and should not fade / crack in the exterior weather conditions.
431
The Contractor shall ensure that the material is brought on site in a packed condition with minimal / no damages or breakages in transit. The thickness of Floor Tiles shall be 22mm and that of Flexi Paver Block shall be 60mm. The Concrete Tiles & Flexi Pavers shall be laid over cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4Coarse sand) over an average thickness of 25mm. The base shall be 100mm thick PCC 1:4:8. The jointing shall be done with white cement mixed with pigment matching to the tiles. 11.0 11.1 MODE OF MEASUREMENT Earthwork This shall include excavation in all kinds of soil including rock, all leads and lifts including back filling, compacting, dewatering (if required) and disposal of surplus earth to a suitable location. The quantity of excavation for foundations of towers, equipment structures, all transformers, firewall, cable trenches, water tank, reactors, buildings and underground water tanks, covered car parking shall only be measured. The quantity of excavation for roads, rail cum road, drains, rainwater harvesting, septic tank, soak pit, external water supply system, site surfacing, chain link fencing (including gate) shall not be measured separately and shall be deemed to be included in the composite rates quoted by the bidder for the respective works. All other excavation required for the completion of the work including fixing of lamp posts, plinth protection, flooring, sewerage system, manholes, pipes, earthmat etc. shall also not be paid for. The measurement of excavation of all concrete works shall be made considering dimension of the pit leaving 150mm gap around the base pad (lean concrete) or actually excavated pit, whichever is less. The quantity shall be measured in cubic metres. 11.2 PCC Providing and laying Plain Cement Concrete of all types and at all locations including all leads and lifts. The quantity shall be measured incubic meters as per lines and levels. i) PCC 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 sand : 4 coarse aggregate 20 mm nominal size) shall be measured in flooring of buildings, plinth protection, fencing, transformer foundation, reactor foundation, rail track, drain, culverts, septic tank, chain link fencing, gate etc. ii) PCC 1:4:8 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 stone aggregate, 40mm nominal size) shall be measured below all foundations of buildings, underground water tanks, covered car parking cable trench, roads, under flooring, railcum- road, transformer foundation, reactor foundation, drain, water tank, culverts, gate etc.
432
iii)
PCC 1:5:10 (1 Cement: 5 sand brick aggregate, 40mm nominal size) shall be provided for site surfacing in switchyard, roof water proofing etc. All other PCC required for the completion of the work including hold fasts of doors/windows/rolling shutters, fixing of plumbing pipes, bedding concrete for sewer lines, embedment of electrical conduits etc. shall not be measured and deemed included in the composite rates quoted by the bidder for respective works. Water proofing compound wherever specified shall be added without any extra cost.
11.3
RCC Measurement of reinforced cement concrete at all locations shall be made and shall include all leads, lifts, formwork, grouting of pockets and underpinning, (but shall exclude reinforcement), of nominal mix 1:1.5:3 (1cement : 1.5 coarse sand : 3 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). This shall also include pre-cast RCC work and addition of water proofing compound wherever required for which no additional payment shall be made. The quantity shall be measured in cubic meters as per lines and levels. No deduction shall be made for volume occupied by reinforcement/inserts/sleeves and for openings having crosssectional area up to 0.1 sq.m.
11.4
Steel Reinforcement Reinforcement shall be measured in length including hooks, if any, separately for different diameters as actually used in work, excluding overlaps. From the length so measured, the weight of reinforcement shall be calculated in tones on the basis of sectional weights as adopted by Indian Standards. Wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars, chairs, stays, hangers and annealed steel wire or other methods for binding and placing shall not be measured and cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the rates for reinforcement.
11.5
Stone filling Measurement of stone (40mm nominal size) for transformer foundations shall be made as per theoretical volume of the space to be filled in the transformer foundation. This shall be measured in cu.m.
11.6
Miscellaneous structural steel Measurement for Supply, fabrication, transportation and erection of all miscellaneous structural steel work for mono rails (RS joists), rails for transformers/ reactors, trusses, frame work, purlins, gratings, steel tubes, built up sections along with all other steel fittings and fixtures, inserts and embedment in concrete shall be made. The unit rate for this item shall be inclusive of cutting,
433
grinding, drilling, bolting, welding, pre- heating of the welded joints, applying a priming coat of steel primer and anti corrosive bitumastic paint/ synthetic enamel paint etc. (wherever specified), setting of all types of embedment in concrete, etc. Steel required for foundation bolts, nuts and bolt, doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, rolling shutters, chain link fencing, gratings in drains, soil pipes, plumbing pipes, floor traps, embedments required for rainwater harvesting, septic tank, soak pit, roof truss and purlins required for fire water tank, etc. shall not be considered for payment and measurements. Quantity shall be measured in Kg. 11.7 Roads A) The measurement for the concrete road shall be made on the basis of area in square meter (M2) of top concrete completed surface of the road and shall be deemed to include all items such as excavation, compaction, rolling, watering, WBM, Kerb stone, grating, shoulder, interlocking tiles etc but excluding concreting and reinforcement. B) The measurement of bituminous road shall be made on the basis of area in square meter (M2), of the top bituminous completed surface of the road and shall include all items such as excavation, compaction, rolling, watering, sub base course, WBM, shoulder, premix carpet etc. 11.9 Antiweed Treatment and Stone Spreading The measurement shall be done for the actual area in square metres of stone spreading provided in the switchyard and shall include antiweed treatment including material and providing and spreading of 100mm thickness of uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 40mm nominal size as per the specification for the specified area. 11.10 Chain Link Fencing and gate The measurement shall be made in running metres of the fence. The rate shall be including the post, fencing, MS Flat etc. complete but excluding the concrete. The gate shall be measured in numbers. 11.11 External Finishing: This is a lump sum item. Contractor has to assess the quantity of Control room cum administrative building, Fire Fighting Pump House, switchyard panel room, township buildings, covered parking and quote for the same for each building separately. This shall include following items.
434
1)
External plastering: 18 mm cement plaster of mix: 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) including all grooves as specified.
2)
Providing and applying two or more coats with of Acrylic exterior flat paint over an under coat of suitable primer on new cement plaster surfaces of the control room / FFPH building. It shall be inclusive of required tools, scaffolding, materials and other painting accessories etc. as per recommendations of manufacturer.
11.12
Hume Pipe Hume pipe shall be measured diameter-wise and shall be measured in running metres. The item shall be inclusive of excavation, laying, back filling, jointing etc. but excluding concrete and reinforcement (if any).
11.13
Building This is a lump sum item for each building. However, the quantity of excavation, concrete, reinforcement below the plinth level shall be measured as per item nos. 11.1, 11.2, 11.3 & 11.4 described above. Quantity of concrete and reinforcement above the plinth level of the buildings shall be measured and paid under item no. 11.2, 11.3 & 11.4 mentioned above respectively. External Finishing shall be measured and paid as per item no. 11.11 mentioned above. The rest of the entire work required to complete the building in all respect, shall be deemed to be included in this lump sum rate.
11.14
Rain Water Harvesting This is a lump sum item. The contractor shall be required to complete the work. All the items including excavation, miscellaneous steel, brick work, fillings of boulders, gravel, sand, pipes etc. shall be deemed to be included in this lump sum rate. However, the concrete (all types) and the reinforcement shall be measured and paid under the item no. 11.2, 11.3 & 11.4 mentioned above.
11.15
Rail cum Road The measurement for the rail cum road shall be made in square metres of top concrete completed surface of the rail cum road and shall include all items such as excavation, compaction, rolling, watering, WBM etc. but excluding concrete, reinforcement, structural steel and rails.
11.16
Septic Tank and Soak Pit This is a lump sum item. All the items including excavation, masonry work, all types of fillings, all types of pipes including plumbing and vent pipes, all type of fittings etc. shall be deemed to be
435
included in this lump sum rate. However, the concrete (all types) and the reinforcement shall be measured and paid under the item no. 11.2, 11.3 & 11.4 mentioned above. 11.17 Fire Water Tank This is a lump sum item. All the items including excavation, compaction, brick work, roof truss, corrugated AC Sheet roofing, all types of miscellaneous steel, internal and external plastering, painting etc. shall be deemed to be included in this lump sum cost. However, the concrete (all types), reinforcement and the steel embedments (except roof truss and purlins) shall be measured and paid under the item no. 11.2, 11.3 and 11.6 mentioned above. 11.18 External water supply from Bore-well to Fire water tank, Control Room Building and township buildings. The external water supply from Bore-well shall be measured diameter-wise in running metres. It shall include all the items such as excavation, piping, pipe fittings, painting, brickwork, sand filling, concrete, valves, chambers cutting chases in walls, openings in RCC and repairs, etc. required to complete the job. 11.19 External Sewage System of the township shall be measured diametric ways in running meters. It shall include all the items such as excavation, piping, pipe fittings, manholes, gali trap, gali chamber casing in concrete and repairs etc required to complete the job. Any modification in the existing sewage system, if required, shall be done by the Contractor without any extra cost implicated to Employer. 11.20 Township Pumphouse This is a lump sum item including pumphouse, pumps & accessories, piping within pumphouse, inserts in water pump etc. complete. However, the concrete (all types), reinforcement and the steel embedments shall be measured and paid under the item no. 11.2, 11.3 11.4 and 11.6 mentioned above. 12.0 12.1 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Dense concrete with controlled water cement ratio as per IS-code shall be used for all underground concrete structures such as pump-house, tanks, water retaining structures, cable and pipe trenches etc. for achieving water-tightness. 12.2 All joints including construction and expansion joints for the water retaining structures shall be made water tight by using PVC ribbed water stops with central bulb. However, kicker type (externally placed) PVC water stops shall be used for the base slab and in other areas where it is
436
required to facilitate concreting. The minimum thickness of PVC water stops shall be 5 mm and minimum width shall be 230 mm. 12.3 All mild steel parts used in the water retaining structures shall be hot-double dip galvanised. The minimum coating of the zinc shall be 750 gm/sq. m. for galvanised structures and shall comply with IS:2629 and IS:2633. Galvanizing shall be checked and tested in accordance with IS: 2633. The galvanizing shall be followed by the application of an etching primer and dipping in black bitumen in accordance with BS: 3416. 12.4 FPS Bricks of clay/ fly ash having minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressive strength can only be used for masonry work. Contractor shall ascertain himself at site regarding the availability of bricks of minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressive strength before submitting his offer. 12.5 Angles 50x50x5 mm (minimum) with lugs shall be provided for edge protection all round cut outs/openings in floor slab, edges of drains supporting grating covers, edges of RCC cable/pipe trenches supporting covers, edges of manholes supporting covers, supporting edges of manhole precast cover and any other place where breakage of corners of concrete is expected. 12.6 Anti termite chemical treatment shall be given to column pits, wall trenches, foundations of buildings, filling below the floors etc. as per IS: 6313 and other relevant Indian Standards. 12.7 The protections required to be carried out for aggressive alkaline soil, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental/harmful to the concrete foundations shall be payable separately. 12.8 For all civil works covered under this specification, nominal mix by volume batching as per CPWD specification is intended. The relationship of grade of concrete and ratio of ingredients shall be as below: Coarse aggregate of 20 mm down S.No. 1. 2. 3. Mix M 10 M 15 M 20 Cement 1 1 1 Sand 3 2 1.5 grade as per IS 383 6 4 3
437
The material specification, workmanship and acceptance criteria shall be as per approved standard Field Quality Plan attached with this document. In case certain item is not covered in FQP, it shall be constructed as per CPWD specification.. 12.9 Ready mix concrete pertaining to M20 grade of reputed manufacturer such as Lafarge, ACC, Ultra Tech, RMC Readymix India etc. or manufacturer of similar repute shall also be accepted for use in construction activity. Materials specification, workmanship and acceptance criteria of readymix concrete shall be as per IS-456. 12.10 Items/components of buildings not explicitly covered in the specification but required for completion of the project shall be deemed to be included in the scope. 13.0 INTERFACING The proper coordination & execution of all interfacing civil works activities like fixing of conduits in roofs/walls/floors, fixing of foundation bolts, fixing of lighting fixtures, fixing of supports/embedment, provision of cut outs etc. shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. He shall plan all such activities in advance and execute in such a manner that interfacing activities do not become bottlenecks and dismantling, breakage etc. is reduced to minimum. 14.0 14.1 STATUTORY RULES Contractor shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factories act (as applicable for the State). Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee. Water Act for pollution control etc. 14.2 Statutory clearance and norms of State Pollution Control Board shall be followed as per Water Act for effluent quality from plant. 14.3 Requirement of sulphate resistant cement (SRC) for sub structural works shall be decided in accordance with the Indian Standards based on the findings of the detailed soil investigation. 14.4 All building/construction materials shall conform to the best quality specified in CPWD specifications if not otherwise mentioned in this specification. 14.5 All tests as required in the standard field quality plans have to be carried out.
438
VOLUME-III
Following formats should be filled by the Bidder. Section-A Section-B Section-C. Guaranteed Technical Particulars Schedule of Deviations Bill Of Quantity
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars CIRCUIT BREAKER ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2.
Name of the Manufacturer & Address a) b) Type of Circuit Breaker Type of tank (Live / Dead)
1. 2.a.) b) 3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Manufacturer's type designation Standards Applicable Rated Voltage ( kVrms ) Rated continuous current at design temperature of 50 deg.C (Amps) Rated frequency (Hz) Number of breaks per poles Whether 3 pole or single pole unit Rated short circuit breaking current i) Symmetrical component at highest system voltage (kA) ii) DC Component (%) iii) Asymmetrical breaking current at highest system voltage (kA)
7. 8. 9. 10.
7. 8. 9. 10. i)
ii)
iii) .
11.
Rated Making Capacity i) ii) at higher rated voltage (kAp) at lower rated voltage ( kAp)
11. i) . ii) 12.i)
12.
i). Maximum total break time under any duty condition for any current upto rated breaking current with limiting conditions of voltage and pressure (ms)
ii) Rated break time as per IEC condition (ms) iii) Closing time (ms) iv) Maximum opening time under any condition with limiting voltage and pressures (ms)
ii) iii) iv)
v) Maximum close open time under any (ms) v) condition with limiting voltages and pressures 13. 14. 15. 16. First pole to clear factor Short time current rating for 1 second (kA) Rated operating duty Maximum line charging breaking current with temporary over voltage upto 1.4 p.u (kA) Maximum period between closing of first contact & last contact in a pole (ms) Maximum pole discrepancy (ms) Small fault current breaking capacity (Amps) 13. .. 14. 15. 16.
17.i)
17.i)
ii) 18. 19.
ii) 18.
Maximum temperature rise for main contacts over 19. design ambient temperature of 50C (Deg. C) Rated pressure and limits of pressure of extinguishing medium ( kg/sq.cm) 20.
20.
21.
Minimum dead time for i) ii) Three phase reclosing (ms) Single phase reclosing (ms)
21. i) ii) 22.
22.
Dielectric Withstand Voltage of Complete Breaker
i)
One minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage Between live terminal and ground (kV rms) a) Between terminals with breaker contacts Open ( kVrms) 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand test voltage. Between live terminals and ground (kVp) Between terminals with breaker contacts Open (kVp) 250/2500 micro second switching surge withstand test voltage Between live terminals and ground (kVp) Between terminals with breaker contacts Open (kVp) Corona extinction voltage ` a) b) a) b) b)
a) b)
ii)
a) b)
iii)
a) b)
iv)
iv)
v)
Maximum radio interference voltage at 1.1 v) Ur/root 3 Total creepage distance a) To ground b) Between terminals a) b) 23.
vi)
23.
Operating Mechanism a) Type of operating mechanism for i) Closing
i)
ii) Opening 24. SF6 Circuit Breakers a) Quantity of SF6 per pole at rated pressure (cu. m) Guaranteed maximum leakage rate per year ( kg / sq. cm) Rated pressure of SF6 in operating chamber ( kg / sq.cm) Limits of pressure at which breaker operates correctly ( kg /sq.cm) Mimimum time interval between each Make / break operation (ms)
ii) 24. a)
b)
b)
c)
c)
d)
d)
e)
e)
25.
General a) Weight of complete3 phase breaker for foundation design (kg) b) c) d) e) Impact loading Foundation design
25. a)
b)
Seismic level for which Breaker is designed (g) c) Min. safety clearance from earthed objects Noise level in Base of the breaker (dB) and upto 50m distance from base Minimum clearance In air i) between live parts (mm) ii) live parts to earth (mm) iii) live parts to ground level (mm) d) e)
f)
f) i) ii) iii) g)
g)
Compliance to technical specification w.r.t parameters specified for
i) Control Cabinet ii) Bushing/support Insulator iii)Terminal connector. iv) SF6 Gas 26. Detailed Literature a) Whether similar equipment are type tested as per IEC/IS and are in successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years (If yes, furnish type test reports)
i) ii) iii) iv) 26.
YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO
a)
b)
Furnish data on capabilities of circuit b) breaker in terms of time and number of operations at duties ranging from 100 % fault currents to load currents of the lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or checks Furnish details of effect of non simultanity c) between contacts within a pole or between poles and also show how it is covered in the guaranteed rated break time. d)
c)
d) Overall General Arrangement drawing of circuit breaker is to be enclosed.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Isolators ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
Name and address of the Manufacturer 2. 3. 4. 5. Manufacturers type designation Standard applicable Rated Voltage, Ur Rated Current under site conditions at 50 deg.C ambient (Amps) Rated frequency (Hz) Number of poles Whether all 3 poles are ganged /mechanically coupled. Pole to pole spacing (mm) Rated short time current of isolator and Earth switch for 1(one) second and dynamic current Opening time of isolator and earth switch Closing time of isolator and earth switch Rated mechanical terminal load Dielectric withstand capacity of completely assembled isolator/ earth switch One minute dry power frequency withstand test voltage i) against ground (kVrms) ii) 16. across isolating distance (kVrms)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
6. 7. 8. Yes/No
9. 10.
9. 10.
11. 12. 13. 14.
11. 12. 13. 14.
15.
15. i) ii) 16. i)
1.2/50 micro sec impulse withstand test voltage i) against ground (kVp)
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Isolators ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
ii) 17. 18.
across isolating distance (kVp)
ii) 17. 18.
Corona Extinction voltage (kVrms) Radio interference level at 1.1 Ur/ root 3 (in micro volts) at 1 MHz Operating Mechanism i) ii) For main blades For earth switches
19.
19. i) ii)
20.
Confirm whether similar equipment are type tested 20. as per IEC / IS and are in successful operation for at least 2 (two) years( furnish type test report) Overall General Arrangement drawing of Isolator/ Earthswitch is to be enclosed. 21.
21.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Instrument Transformer ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Name and address of manufacturer Standards applicable Type of CT ( Live or Dead Tank Type) Rated frequency (Hz) Rated voltage Ur (kV) Rated current i) ii) Rated continuous current (Amps) Rated extended primary current (Amps)
1 . 2. . 3. 4. 5. 6. i) ii) 7.
7.
Short time thermal current withstand for 1 sec(kA) Dynamic current withstand (kAp)
8. 9. 10.
8.
1.2/50 micro sec impulse withstand voltage (kVp) 9. .. 250/2500 micro sec switching surge withstand voltage (dry and wet) (kVp) One minute dry and wet power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) No. of primary winding No. of cores per CT Current ratio (for all cores) Output Burden (for all cores) Accuracy class (for all cores) Knee point voltage at different taps (V) (for all cores) Maximum exciting current at Knee 10.
11.
11.
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
18.
18. . .
19.
point voltage at different ratios ( for all cores) (mA) Secondary winding resistance for all ratios and cores. Instrument security factor at different ratios for metering cores Radio interference voltage at 1.1 Ur/3 at 1.0 MHz (Micro Volts) Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) Partial discharge level (PC) Standard to which oil conforms generally Total weight (kg)
19. .
20.
20.
21.
21.
22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
22. 23. 24. 25.
Confirm whether similar equipment are type tested 26. and in successful operation for at least 2 years ratios (for all cores) (Ohms) ( Furnish type test report ) Overall General arrangement drawing of CT is to be enclosed. 27. .
27.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type designation Standards applicable Rated primary voltage Ur (kV) Rated secondary voltages (kV) Number of secondaries Rated frequency (Hz) Rated output of each secondary winding (VA) Total simultaneous burden (VA) Rated total thermal burden (VA) Highest system voltage (kV) Rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time Accuracy class of each secondary winding Capacitance i. of high voltage capacitor (pF) ii. of intermediate voltage capacitor (pF)
1. .. 2. .. 3. .. 4. .. 5. .. 6. .. 7. .. 8. .. 9. .. 10. .. 11. .. 12. ..
13. 14.
13. .. 14. i) .. ii) .. 15. .. 16. .. 17. ..
15. 16. 17.
Carrier frequency coupling (pF) Band width (kHz) One minute power frequency test voltage of secondary winding (kV rms) One minute power frequency test voltage of H.F. terminal (kV rms)
18.
18. ..
19.
One minute power frequency test voltage of capacitor (kV rms) (dry & wet) 1.2/50 micro sec impulse withstand test voltage of Capacitor (kVp) Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) Max. Radio Interference voltage at 1.1 Ur/ Root 3 at 1.0 MHz (Micro volts) Total weight (kg) Quantity of oil (litres) Whether CVTs are hermetically sealed. If so. Furnish arrangement of sealing. Whether similar equipment is type tested as per IEC 186 and in successful operation for at least. 2 (two) years (Furnish type test report) Overall General Arrangement drawing of CVT is to be enclosed.
19. ..
20.
20. ..
21. 22.
21. .. 22. .
23. 24. 25.
23. .. 24. .. 25. ..
26.
26.
YES / NO
31.
31. ..
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Surge Arrestor ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturers type designation Applicable standards Arrester class and type Rated arrester voltage (kV) Rated system voltage (kV) Maximum continuous operating voltage (COV) at 50 deg.C ambient temperature (kV) Nominal discharge current(8/20 micro sec.wave) (kA) Minimum discharge capability ( kJ / kV) a) Maximum residual voltage at nominal discharge current (kVpeak) b) Minimum residual voltage at nominal discharge current (kVpeak)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
8.
9. 10.
9. 10.a)
10.b)
11.
a) Maximum residual voltage at 50 % nominal discharge current (kVpeak)
11.a)
b) Maximum residual voltage at 200% nominal 11.b) discharge current (kVpeak) 12. Steep fronted wave residual voltage at 1 KA (kVpeak) Long duration discharge class Impulse current withstand a) High current short duration (4/10 micro-sec wave) in kVpeak b) Low current long duration (2000 microsec.) Current for pressure relief test (kA) 12.
13. 14.
13. 14. a) b) 15.
15.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Surge Arrestor ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
16. 17.
Pressure relief class ( as per IEC 99) One minute power frequency (dry) withstand voltage of arrester housing (kVrms)
16. 17.
18.
Lightning Impulse withstand test voltage of 18. arrester housing with 1.2/50 microsec wave (kVp) Total creepage distance of whole arrester housing ( mm) Cantilever strength of complete arrester (N) Total height of the arrestor (mm) Total weight of the arrestor (Kg) Maximum radio interference voltage at 1.1 Ur/ root 3 voltage at 1 MHz ( microvolts) Partial discharge at 1.05 continuous operating voltage (pC) Minimum prospective symmetrical fault current (kArms) ZnO block details a) Confirm whether equipment type tested with offered type of ZnO block 19.
19.
20. 21. 22. 23.
20. 21. 22. 23.
24.
24.
25.
25.
26.
26 a)
27.
Confirm whether similar equipment are type tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard and are in successful operation for at least two years. Overall General Arrangement drawing of Surge arrester is to enclosed.
27
28.
28.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Battery And Battery Charger ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
A: 1. 2.
BATTERIES Manufacturers Name and address Confirm whether Manufacturers have manufactured, tested, supplied, installed and commissioned batteries of 220V, 600AH capacity similar to the offered batteries and are in operation for at least 2(Two) years Type of battery Capacity of battery at 27C 1. ------------------------------2. -------------------------------
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. -------------------------------4. --------------------------------
Confirm whether batteries are type tested as per IS 5. Recommended value of float charging voltage 6. --------------------------------
BATTERIES CHARGERS 1. 2. Manufacturers Name and address Confirm whether Manufacturers have manufactured, tested, supplied, installed and commissioned battery Chargers to 10 Kw capacity similar to the offered battery Chargers. Capacity of battery chargers (AH) Charger rate / output current Float charging mode (A) Boost Charging Mode (A) Ripple content in output voltage (%) Confirm whether battery chargers are type tested as per specification 1. -------------------------------2.
3. 4 5. 6. 7. 8.
3. -------------------------------4. -------------------------------5. -------------------------------6. --------------------------------7. -------------------------------8. ---------------------------------
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars LT Transformer ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Name & Address of Manufacturer Voltage Ratio Rating Standards applicable Rated frequency Number of phases Vector Group Type of cooling Tap changing equipment i) ii) Type No. of steps & tap range
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. i) ii) 10.
10.
Positive sequence impedance at 75 C with 100% rating at a) b) c) Principal tap Maximum tap Minimum tap
a) b) c) 11. a) b)
11. Temperature rise over an ambient of 50 deg.C a) b) Top oil deg.C Windings (by resistance measurement method ) deg.C
1 2.
Guaranteed losses a) b) Maximum no load loss on principal tap at rated voltage and frequency.(kW) Maximum load loss at rated current at
12. a ). b)
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars LT Transformer ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
principal tap at 75 deg C(kW)
13.
Withstand time for three phase short circuit at terminals (secs.) Insulation level a) i. ii. Full wave lightning impulse withstanding HV Winding (kVp) LV Winding (kVp)
13.
14.
14. a) i. ii.
15.
Confirm whether similar equipment are type tested 15. and are in successful operation for atleast two years. Confirm whether similar equipment is tested for dynamic short circuit withstand capability. ( furnish details) 16.
16.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars LT Switchgear ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2.
Manufacturers Name & Address Confirm whether Manufacturers have supplied 50 Nos drawout Air circuit breaker Panels out of which 5 Nos. are with CT and relaying scheme. Confirm whether Manufacturers have supplied 50 Nos. MCC panels similar to the offered panels. Confirm whether 100 nos.(at least) circuit breakers of the make and type being offered are already been operating satisfactorily. Rated short circuit current Symmetrical short circuit withstand current at rated voltage of switchgear cubicle Peak short circuit withstand current Degree of protection Breaker/MCC/AC & DC Distribution Cubicles Busbar chamber Standard height, width & depth of typical panel Circuit Breaker Panel MCC panel AC/DC Distribution Board Width of cable alley Confirm whether equipment offered are from manufacturer and they are type tested as per IS/ International standard and are
1. 2.
3.
3. .
4.
4..
5. 5.1
5. 5.1.
5.2 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 8. 9.
5.2. 6. 6.1. 6.2 6.3 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 8. 9..
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars LT Switchgear ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
in successful operation for two years.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Power and Control Cable ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Manufacturer's name and address Type of cable Applicable standards Rated Voltage (Volts) Suitable for earthed or unearthed system?
1. . .. ... 2. . .. ... 3. . .. ... 4. . .. ... 5. . .. ...
Continuous current rating when laid in air 6. . .. ... in an ambient temp. of 50deg.C and for maximum conductor temp. of 70 deg.C for PVC cable Short Circuit Capacity i. ii. iii. iv. Short Circuit Current (kArms) Duration of short circuit. (Sec.) 7. i. . .. ... ii. . .. ...
7.
Conductor temp. allowed for the iii. . ..... short circuit duty ( Deg. C) Formula relating short circuit current (rms) iv. . .. ... and duration (Sec.) 8. i. . .. ... ii. . .. ... iii. . .. ... iv. . .. ... 9. i. . .. ... ii. . .. ...
8.
Conductor i. ii. iii. iv. Material (Copper or aluminium) Grade Normal cross section area (Sq.mm) Number and diameter of wire (No./mm)
9.
Insulation i. ii. Composition of insulation Nominal thickness of insulation (mm)
10.
Inner Sheath
10.
i. ii.
Material Calculated diameter over the laid up cores, (mm) Thickness of Sheath (minimum) mm
i. . .. ... ii. . .. ...
iii. 11.
iii. . .. ... 11. i. . .. ... ii. . .. ... iii. . .. ... iv. . .. ... v. . .. ... vi. . .. ... 12. i. . .. ... ii. . .. ... 13. . .. ...
Armour i.
ii.
Type and material of armour (wire / strip) Calculated diameter under armour (mm) Nominal diameter of round armour wire Nominal size of wire / strip Short circuit capacity armour alongwith formulae Maximum D.C. resistance at 20deg.C
iii. iv. v. vi. 12.
Outer Sheath i. ii. Material Calculated diameter under sheath
13.
Safe pulling force when pulled by pulling eye on the conductor (Kg) Test Voltage i. ii. High Voltage test voltage (kV) Water immersion test voltage (kV)
14.
14. . .. ... i. . .. ... ii. . .. ... 15. . .. ... 16.
15. 16.
Minimum bending radius permissible Confirm that are all the cables approved by BIS or other international standard organizations and marked as such
17.
Whether the cables are type tested as per IS /international Standard.
17.
Yes/No
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Relay and Protection Panel ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Name and address of Manufacturer of panels1.. Manufacturer's type and designation Type of construction (Simplex/duplex) Thickness of sheet steel (i) (ii) (iii) Front Back Sides 2... 3. .. 4. i) .. ii) . iii) . 5. .. 6. .. 7. . 8. .. 9. ..
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Degree of protection Name of the manufacturer of relays DC voltage of the relays make and Model of static ( 0.2 accuracy class type) energy meters Confirm whether offered manufacturer of C&R panels and protective relays have tested commissioned & they are in successful operation for at least two years in 400 kV system. TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION Numerical Distance protection Scheme -I
1. 2. 3.
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Switched or Non- switched type ( is it with separate measurements for single/three phase faults) Setting range of offset feature Whether the relay is having self monitoring feature Whether relay is compatible for PLCC equipment and can be used for Permissive Under reach/over
1.. 2. 3.
4.. 5. 6.
4. 5. 6
reach /Blocking scheme etc 7. 8. 9. 10 Suitable for single and three phase Trip? Type of shaped characteristic No of tripping contacts with making capacity of 30 amp for 0.2 seconds In case 16 contacts as per above clause are not available with the distance relay offered , type of tripping relay being offered Maximum operating time for at 50% of the reach setting of 2 ohms and 10/20 ohms (with CVT) including all trip relays ,if any (Bidder is required to enclose isochronic curve with CVT on line) a) b) c) 12 at SIR=4 at SIR=15, (3 phase faults) at SIR=15 (other faults) 7.. 8 9 10..
11
11
a).. b). c). 12
IDMT earth fault relay Meeting Normal Inverse Characteristics as per IEC 60253 is being offered ass built in feature for 220 KV lines If no, type of IDMT relay being offered Built in features offered with the relay (YES/NO) a) Disturbance recorder b) Fault locator c) Over voltage (one stage only) d) Auto reclose along with Dead line charging and check synchronisng Numerical Distance protection Scheme -II
13. 14.
13 14. a). b) c) d)
1. 2.
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation
1.. 2.
3.
Switched or Non- switched type ( is it with separate measurements for single/three phase faults) Setting range of offset feature Whether the relay is having self monitoring feature Whether relay is compatible for PLCC equipment and can be used for Permissive Under reach/over reach /Blocking scheme etc Suitable for single and three phase Trip? Type of shaped characteristic No of tripping contacts with making capacity of 30 amp for 0.2 seconds In case 16 contacts as per above clause are not available with the distance relay offered , type of tripping relay being offered Maximum operating time for at 50% of the reach setting of 2 ohms and 10/20 ohms (with CVT) including all trip relays ,if any (Bidder is required to enclose isochronic curve with CVT on line) a) b) d) at SIR=4 at SIR=15, (3 phase faults) at SIR=15 (other faults)
3.
4.. 5. 7.
4. 5. 6
7. 8. 10. 13
7.. 8 9 10..
14
11
a).. b). c). 12
15
IDMT earth fault relay Meeting Normal Inverse Characteristics as per IEC 60253 is being offered ass built in feature for 220 KV lines If no, type of IDMT relay being offered Built in features offered with the relay (YES/NO) a) Disturbance recorder b) Fault locator c) Over voltage (one stage only)
13. 14.
13 14. a). b) c)
d) Auto reclose along with Dead line charging and check synchronisng BACKUP DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT
d)
AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION SCHEME 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 8. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturers type and designation Three over current and one E/F elements Are whether independent or composite unit 1 2.. 3. .
Type of relay (Elecromechanical/static/Numerical) 4.. Directional sensitivity Whether characteristic conform to IEC 255-3 Over current unit setting range inverse time Earth fault unit setting range inverse time VT Fuse failure relay/ feature included for alarm 5. 6.. 7 8 9
LINE OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturers type and designation 1 2..
Type of relay (Elecromechanical/static/Numerical) 3.. Operation indicator provided? Operating time Resetting time Whether monitors all three phases? Built in feature of Main1/Main 2 distance relay is offered . If so , which stage is offered as built in 4 5. 6.. 7 8
DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturers type and designation Built in feature of Main1/Main 2 distance relay is offered Maximum registering time Whether direct display unit provided? Whether both phase to phase fault and phase to earth fault measuring units included? Whether On-Line type Accuracy for the typical conditions defined under technical specification DISTURBANCE RECORDER a. Acquisition unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 8. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation No. of analogue channels No. of digital recording channels Built in feature of Main1/Main 2 distance relay is offered Pre-fault memory (milli seconds) Post fault memory(seconds) Total storage memory in seconds Sampling Frequency Resolution of the event channels (ms) Time display present? 1. 2.. 3.. 4. 5. 6.. 7. 8.. 9 10.. 11. 1. 2. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6.. 7. 8
12.
Data out put in COMTRADE is available b.Evaluation Unit
12.
1 2 3 4
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation
1. 2..
No of acquisition unit that can be connected 3... to One evaluation unit Technical Parameters of evaluation unit A Processor and speed B RAM and hard disk capacity C Additional facilities D Details of printer 4 A. B. C. D. 6..
5.
Details of power supply arrangement for Acquisition unit (including printer) AUTO RECLOSE RELAY
1. 2. 3. 3.
Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Electromechanical /static/numerical Auto reclose relay along with Dead line charging and check synchronisng relay (For 132 KV lines) offered as a part of distance relay Suitable for single and three phase? Single phase dead time setting Range Three phase dead time setting range Reclaim time setting range TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
5. 6. 7 8
Differential relay 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Second harmonic restraint provided Whether three instantaneous units provided Operating Current setting range Bias setting range Operating time at 5X setting current Resetting time How ratio / phase angle corrections are being done(inter posing transformer/internal feature in the relay) Restricted Earth Fault Protection 1. 2. 3. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Operating time at 2 x setting Over Fluxing relays 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Whether inverse time operating characteristics Maximum operating time Accuracy of operating time Resetting time 1.. 2.. 5.. 6.. 7.. 8.. 1.. 2.. 3.. 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6.. 7.. 8.. 9..
Directional O/C and E/F relays 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Whether Characteristic will confirm to IEC255-3 Directional sensitivity Over current unit setting range a) Inverse time b) High set 6. Earth fault unit setting range a) Inverse time b) High set 1.. 2.. 4.. 5.. 6 a) . b) .. 7 a) .. b) ..
GENERAL PROTECTION /MONITORING EQUIPMENT Trip Circuit Supervision relay 1. 2. 3. 4. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Whether pre-closing and post closing supervision provided? Time delay High Speed Trip Relays 1. 2. 3. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Contact ratings a) Make and carry continuously b) Make and carry for 0.5 sec. c) Break 1.. 2.. 3. a) . b) .. c) .. 1.. 2.. 3.. 4..
i). Resistive load ii) Inductive load (With L/R=40milli sec.) 4. 5. 6. Operating time at rated voltage (maximum) Resetting time Whether supervisory relays included Local breaker back-up protection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Operating time Resetting time Setting ranges a) Current b) Time Bus bar Protection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name and address of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Type of relay (Elecromechanical/static/Numerical) Principle of operation(Biased/High impedance) Operating time Resetting time Setting ranges (i) (ii) Current Time
i) .. ii) .. 4.. 5.. 6..
1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5 a) .. b) ..
1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6.. 7. i) .. ii) ..
Whether will it cause tripping for the differential current below the load current of heavily loaded feeder (Bidder shall submit application check for the same )
8..
CONTROL PANEL EQUIPMENT Bay Control unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Type of mounting Standards Applicable Rated auxiliary voltage No. of analog variable (specify voltage & current separately Rated Frequency No. of binary inputs No. of outputs Language Type of communication protocol supported No. & Type of communication ports Operating temperature range System Response Time Recording Meter for voltage 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Accuracy class Full span response time Is it strip type recorder /digital type If it is digital type 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6. 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6.. 7... 8... 9... 10... 11... 12... 13... 14...
i) No of channels being used ii)Whether time tagged information is available iii)Whether EMC/EMI compatibility is tested Recording Meter for frequency 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Accuracy class Full span response time Is it strip type recorder /digital type If it is digital type i) No of channels being used ii) Whether time tagged information is available iii) Whether EMC/EMI compatibility is tested Terminal Block 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Rated current Rated voltage Minimum no. of conductors of area 2.5 mm2 suitable for connection. (i) (ii) All circuits except CT.Circuits C.T. Circuits
i) .. ii) .. iii) ..
1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6 (i) .. (ii) .. (iii) ..
1. .. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. (i) .. (ii) ..
Control Switches
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Number of positions provided (Trip/Normal after trip, close, normal after close) No. of contacts Type of handle Rating of contacts a) Make and carry continuously b) Make and carry for 0.5 sec. c) Break resistive load, in Amps (d.c.) d )Break inductive load with L/R=40 m. sec in Amps. (d.c).
1.. 2.. 3. 4.. 5.. 6. a) .. b) .. c) .. d) .. 7..
4.
Life of switch in terms of million mechanical operations Push Buttons
1. 2. 3. 4.
Name of Manufacturer Manufacturer's type and designation Contact ratings No. of contacts Annunciators
1.. 2.. 3.. 4..
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Make Type & Model No. Static/electromechanical No of lamps per window Lamps
1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5
a) Voltage b) Wattage 6. 8. Minimum duration of impulse for initiating contact in millisecond Type of reset self/manual
(a) .. (b) .. 7.. 8..
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars SDH & PLCC ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
COUPLING DEVICE (Phase to Phase Type) Name of Manufacturer and Country Type, Model and Catalogue Number Nominal primary side impedance Nominal secondary side impedance Composite loss with in pass-band Return loss with in pass-band Available Bandwidth (with 4400/6600/8800 pF CVTS) Nominal Peak Envelope Power (with Distortion and Inter modulation Products 80 dB down) Maximum number of PLC terminals that can be connected in parallel: a) 20 W (PEP) PlC terminals b) 40 W (PEP)PLC terminals c) 100 W(PEP) PLC terminals Power Frequency Impedance between primary terminal and Earth Terminals of Coupling Device. No of H.F. terminals provided for carrier equipment connection HIGH FREQUENCY CABLE 1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7...
8.
8..
9.
9... a).. b).. c).. 10.
10.
11.
11.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Name of Manufacturer and country Type, Model and Catalogue no. Applicable standards Maximum attenuation per km of cable for carrier Frequency range 40 to 500 kHz Maximum loop resistance/ km of cable
1... 2.. 3.. 4..
5.
5..
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL FOR SPEECH AND DATA TRANSMISSION OR NETWORK PROTECTION Name of Manufacturer and country Type, Model and Catalogue no. Type of Modulation Mode of transmission Carrier Frequency Range
1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
Nominal carrier frequency band in either direction 6... of transmission Return loss within the nominal carrier frequency band Effectively transmitted V.F. band a) For speech b) For telephone signaling Return Loss within the effectively transmitted voice frequency band Maximum H.F Amplifier output with single /Multiple tone keying (Peak Envelope Power ) Nominal carrier frequency power (peak envelop power) at output terminals. VF TRANSMISSION TERMINAL FOR NETWORK PROTECTION SIGNALS (PROTECTION COUPLER) 7..
7.
8.
8...
9.
9...
10.
10.
11.
11.
1. 2. 3.
Name of Manufacturer and country Type, Model and catalogue number Whether equipment works on frequency shift principle of coded signal principle Whether Equipment is suitable for independently protecting two circuits
1.. 2.. 3..
4.
4...
5.
Frequencies used in the equipment for transmission of signal for un-coded signal transmission a) Guard frequency c) Working frequency (Trip system-I) d) Working frequency (Trip system-II) e) Working frequency (Trip system (I&II) Criteria used for command transmission Transmission time corresponding to telegraph speed for transmission on PLCC channel of coded signal a) 600 Bds. b) 400 Bds. c) 200 Bds.
5..
a) b) c) d)
.. .. .. ..
6. 7.
6.. 7..
a). b). c). 8.. 9..
8. 9.
Mode of transmission of guard signal Whether equipment is suitable for Direct circuit breaker tripping. Whether loop test is possible
10. 11.
10.
Whether the equipment is suitable for transmitting 11. and receiving more than two independent commands (please furnish details) Whether receiver design provides protection against false tripping from random noise LINE TRAPS 12.
12.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Name of Manufacturer and country Type & Model System Voltage Rating Continuous current rating at 50C ambient Continuous current rating at 65C
1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
6.
Maximum Symmetrical short circuit current rating 6... for 1 sec. duration Asymmetric peak value of first half wave of rated short time current Rated Inductance Blocking Range Minimum Guaranteed Resistive component in blocking frequency range Details of protection of capacitors and coils against voltage surges. Indicate type of protective device. Rated voltage of the arrestor (protective device ) ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE (EPAX) 7...
7.
8. 9. 10.
8... 9... 10.
11.
11.
12.
12.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Name of manufacturer Type and model Capacity of exchange (Subscribers & trunk lines) Whether compatible to both i.e PLCC & DOT lines for communication
1.. 2.. 3.. 4..
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Illumination System ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
Lighting Fixtures & Accessories 1. Manufacturer's Name and address a) b) 2 Fixtures Accessories
A. 1. a). b). 2. a). b). B.
Applicable Standards for a) b) Fixtures Accessories
B.
Conduits & Accessories (For each type & size) Manufacturer's name and address Applicable standard Junction Boxes (For each type & size) Manufacturer's name and address Degree of protection for enclosure. Lighting Panels (For each type & size) Manufacturer's name and address Degree of Protection Lighting Transformer Manufacturer's name and address Rating (KVA) Standards Applicable
1. 2. C.
1. 2. C.
1. 2. D.
1. 2. D.
1. 2. E. 1. 2. 3.
1. 2. E. 1. 2. 3.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Illumination System ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
4.
Degree of protection for enclosure
4.
F. 1. 2. G. 1. 2. 3.
Lighting poles Manufacturer's name and address Dimensions Lighting Wires Manufacturer's name and address Voltage grade Cross section of conductor
F. 1. 2. G. 1. 2. 3.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Fire Protection System ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1.
Name and Address of the fire protection system supplier Number of Fire Protection System executed by the supplier and duration of successful operation as on date of bid opening for each type fire protection system a) Automatic HVW / MVW spray type fire protection system Automatic Hydrant type fire protection system
1.
2.
2.
a) .
b)
b) .
3.
Confirm that fire protection system supplier have designed, erected, tested & commissioned fire protection system of each type as in 2(a), (b) & (c) above as per the recommendations of TAC of India or any other international reputed authority like (FOC, London or NFPA, USA et) and are in successful operation for at least two years.
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Air Conditioning ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1.
Name and Address of Air Conditioning system supplier Number of A/C system executed by the supplier and duration of successful operation as on date of bid opening . Window type air conditioning Unit a) b) c) d) e) Make & Model Nominal Capacity (TR/Kcal/Hr.) Nominal Air quantity (cu.m/hr -CFM) Number of units offered Guaranteed power consumption for each unit
1.
2.
2. .
3.
3. a) . b) . c) . d) . e)..
Section-A Guaranteed Technical Particulars Diesel Generator ----------------------------(Bidders Name)
1. Manufacturers Name and Address for a) Diesel Engine alongwith accessories . b) Alternator . c) Exciter . d) Battery . e) Battery Charger . f) D.G.Set control Panel . 2. ENGINE: a) Rating . b) RPM . c) No. of strokes . d) Time required for starting from cold . e) Type of Governor . f) Guaranteed fuel consumption
1. a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
2. a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f) i.
i. At full load .
ii. At load . iii. At load . iv. At load . g) Lubricating oil consumption . h) Mechanical efficiency . i) Thermal efficiency . j) Total weight . (%)
ii.
iii.
iv.
g)
h)
(%)
i)
(in Kg)
j)
k) Space required including clearances . 3. ALTERNATOR a) Rated KW capacity . b) Rated Terminal Voltage . c) Rated Power Factor . d) Rated Speed . e) Rated frequency . f) No. of phases .
k) 3. a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g) Efficiencies and power factor at . 110%, 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of full load h) Permissible Temperature rise i. Armature winding . ii. Field winding . i) Overload capacity . j) Applicable standards . 4. AMF ( Auto Mains Failure) PANEL a) Degree of Protection . b) Whether the offered DG is type tested
g)
h) i.
ii.
i).
j)
a)
b)
YES / NO
SECTION-B DEVIATION SCHEDULE

Thefollowingarethedeviationsfromthespecification: S.No. ClauseNo.ofspecification ClauseDetails DeviationTaken
Sign: NameOfTheSignatory: NameOfTheBidder/company:
SECTION-C BILL OF QUANTITY
Sl. No.
Item Description
Unit HAPUR S/S
QUANTITY G.NOIDA S/S SIKANDRABAD NEHTAUR S/S S/S
NOTE: For filling the BOQ format following may be noted:

a)
A comprehensive BOQ shall be furmished. As an illustration for Circuit Breaker- Quantities for breakers with & without PIR, with & without controlled switching etc. should separately be mentioned seperately. Similarly, for isolators- quantities based on current ratings & on the basis of number of earth switches should be elaborated. The current & Voltage transformers should clearly indicate the cores & ratings. Other equipment details to be mentioned on similar lines. Wherever single phase transformer are being used, spared transformer also would be taken. Necessary equipment and scheme should be clearly brought out in offers.
b)
SECTION-D
MANDATORY SPARES FOR AIS SUBSTATION Sl.No. Description Unit Quantity/Substation
I 1.0
SF6 Circuit Breaker
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SF6 Gas Trip coils with resistor Closing coils with resistor Terminal pad (if applicable) Molecular filter for SF6 Circuit for 1 pole of CB Density/Pressure monitor, Pressure switches and Pressure gauges alongwith their coupling devices (set consisting of replacement for one pole of CB) Corona rings(set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Relays, power contactors, switch fuse units, limit switches, push buttons, timers & MCB (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Closing Coil Assembly (including valve wherever applicable) Trip Coil Assembly (including valve wherever applicable) Aux. contact assembly Operation counter Micro Filter, if applicable (set consisting of replacement for one complete CB) All types of coupling for SF6 gas (set consisting of replacement for one complete CB) Pipe length for SF6 gas system (set consisting of replacement for one complete CB) One complete pole of 3150A CB(with closing resistor) with grading capacitor complete with pole column and interrupter with operating mechanism and mechanism box but without support structure One complete pole of 3150A CB(without closing resistor) with grading capacitor complete with pole column and interrupter with operating mechanism and mechanism box but without support structure Pneumatic operating mechanism (If applicable) (INDIVIDUAL COMPRESSOR UNIT) All types of Valves for Pneumatric operating mechanism (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) "O" rings, gaskets & Seals for operating mechanism (set consisting of requirement for one pole of CB) Hydraulic operating mechanism (If applicable) "O" rings, gaskets & Seals for operating mechanism (set consisting of replacement for one complete CB) All types of Valves for Hydraulic operating mechanism (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Pressure Transducer Accumulator Hydraulic oil Hydraulic filter (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Hydraulic operating mechanism with drive motor (set consisting of replacement for one pole of CB) Spring operated mechanism (If applicable) Closing dashpot
Kg Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Set Set Set Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Set Set Set
250 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
16
Nos.
17 1.1 1 2 1.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1.3 1
Nos.
Set Set
1 1
Set Set No. No. Lit Set Set No.
1 1 1 1 250 3 1 1
2 3 4 5 II 1 1.1
Opening dashpot Opening Catchgear Closing Catchgear Complete Spring operating Mechanism replacement for one pole of CB)
No. No. No. (set consisting of Set
1 1 1 1
3 4 5
Isolators Copper contact fingers for female & male contacts for 3150A Isolator (set consisting of replacement for one complete Isolator) Relays, power contactors, MCBs, switch fuses, push buttons, resistors, timers, key interlock, limit switches and auxiliary switches for electrical control circuit as per approved schematic (Set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Motor with bevel gear assembly (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Corona Shield rings (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) One complete pole of 3150A Isolator with 1 E/S with operating mechanism for main Isolator and Earth switch but without support structure Relay and Protection panels Breaker Relay panel spares Breaker failure relay(if stand alone) Trip circuit supervision relay Self reset trip relay (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Hand reset trip relay (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Timer relay (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) DC Supervision relay (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Flag relays (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Auxiliary relays (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Autoreclose relay with checksynchronizing relay and dead line charging relay (if stand alone) Line Protection Panel Equipment spares Main-I Numerical distance relay (excluding external trip relay) with software & cable for front panel communication to PC Main-II Numerical distance relay (excluding external trip relay) with software & cable for front panel communication to PC Disturbance Recorder comprising of acquisition unit and evaluation with software(if stand alone) Distance to fault locator including mutual compensation unit(if stand alone) Over Voltage Protection relay with timers(Stage-I & Stage-II) (if stand alone) Reactor Protection Panel spares Reactor differential protection relay including aux. CTs and associated software in case of numerical relay Restricted Earth Fault protection relay with non-linear resistor Reactor back-up impedance protection relay Transformer Protection Panel spares Transformer differential protection relay including aux. CTs and associated software in case of numerical relay with modem(if Restricted Earth Fault protection relay with non-linear resistor
Set
Set
Set Set No.
1 1 1
III 1.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2.0 1 2 3 4 5 3.0 1 2 3 4.0 1 2
Nos. Nos. Set Set Set Set Set Set Nos.
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos
1 1 1 1 1
Nos. Nos. Nos.
1 1 1
Nos. Nos.
1 1
3 4 5 6 IV 1 1.2 1.3 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) I) j) k) l) m) n) o) VI 1 2 3 VII 1 2 VIII 1 2 3 4
Back-up impedance protection relay with 3 O/C and E./F relay CVT Selection relay Over fluxing relay Overload relay with timer Sub-station Automation system Bay control unit (1 no. of each type) Ethernet switch ( 1no. Of each type) Fibre optic cable of longest length alongwith end terminations LT Switchgear Relays (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) CT, PT (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Switches and meters (set consisting of 2 nos. of each type and size) Push buttons (set consisting of 5 nos. of each type and color) TPN Switch/MCB/MCCB (set consisting opf 1 No. of each rating and type) LT CB spares for each rating Spring charging motor Aux. Contactor (set consisting of requirement for one CB) Bus bar seal off insulator Arc chutes Moving contact Arcing contact Bus bar insulator Inter phase barrier Spring (closing/opening) (each type) Closing coil Tripping coil Limit switch Jaw contact Aux. Finger contacts (set consisting of requirement for one CB) Bus bar strip 1mm (Al.) L.T.Transformer All bushings with metal parts (Set consisting of requirement for one transformer) Oil temperature indicator Silicagel container Fire Fighting System Quartzoid bulb detector Projectors (Nozzles) PLCC Equipments Coupling Device (Ph to Ph) Co-axial connector Set of cards for carrier equipment (set consisting of 1 no. of each type) Set of cards for protection coupler (set consisting of 1 no. of each type)
Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos.
1 1 1 1
Set Set No.
1 1 1
Set Set Set Set Set Nos. Set Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Set Mtr.
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 800kVA Trf.
Set No. No.
1 1 1
No. No.
10% of total population 10% of total population
Nos. Nos. Set Set
0 0 0 0
IX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
DG Set Set of filters (Lub oil/fuel/air) (Set consisting of complete requirement for DG set) Solenoid Coil assembly Self starter assembly with clutch engaging and disengaging arrangements complete with motor Lube oil pressure safety control High water temp. safety control Diode AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator)/AVR card
Set Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos.
1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Erection Hardware Items 5% spares of the actual quantities for Insulator strings & hardwares, clamps & connectors (including equipment connectors), spacers, corona bell, welding sleeves, QUAD AAC Bull, ACSR No spares are to be considered for ACSR Moose conductor, 4" IPS Al tube, BMB, grounding conductors, cable tray, Pipes(GI/PVC/hume), angles, channels and Junction Boxes Illumination system 5% of each type of lighting fixture supplied
XI
SECTION-E
GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES The Indian Electricity Act 2003 Indian Electricity Rules Indian Factories Act IS-5, IS-335, IS-617, Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels. New Insulating Oils. Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and Castings for General Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 (P1 to P 145) IS-2071 (P1 to P3) IS-12063
Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products. Methods of High Voltage Testing. Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical equipment.
IS-2165 P1:1997 P2:1983 IS-3043 IS-6103 Code of Practice for Earthing Method of Test for Specific Resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical Insulating Liquids IS-6104 Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the Ring Method IS-6262 Method of test for Power factor & Dielectric Constant of Electrical Insulating Liquids. IS-6792 IS-5578 IS-11353 Method for determination of electric strength of insulating oils. Guide for marking of insulated conductors. Guide for uniform system of marking & identification of Insulation Coordination.
conductors & apparatus terminals. IS-8263 IS-9224 (Part 1, 2 & 4) IEC-60 (Part 1 to P4) IEC 66 IEC-117 IEC-156, Methods for Radio Interference Test on High voltage Insulators. Low Voltage Fuses High Voltage Test Techniques Environmental Test Graphical Symbols Method for the Determination of the Electrical Strength of Insulation Oils. IEC-270, IEC-376 IEC-437 IEC-506, IEC-507 Partial Discharge Measurements. Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur Hexafluoride Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators. Switching Impulse Tests on High Voltage Insulators. Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on AC Systems. IEC-6094 Common Specification for High Voltage Switchgear & Control gear Standards. IEC-815 Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted Conditions. IEC-865 (P1 & P2) ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70 ANSI-C37.90A ANSI-C63.21, C63.3 C36.4ANSI-C68.1 ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects. National Electrical Code
Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and Field Strength Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1 GHZ Techniques for Dielectric Tests Standard General Requirements and Test Procedure for Outdoor Apparatus Bushings.
ANSI-SI-4 ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 ANSI-Z55.11
Specification for Sound Level Meters Drawing Symbols Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment No. 61 Light Gray
NEMA-107T NEMA-ICS-II
Methods of Measurements of RIV of High Voltage apparatus General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems part ICSI 109
CISPR-1
Specification for CISPR Radio Interference Measuring Apparatus for the frequency range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz
CSA-Z299.1-1978h CSA-Z299.2-1979h CSA-Z299.3-1979h CSA-Z299.4-1979h
Quality Assurance Program Requirements Quality Control Program Requirements Quality Verification Program Requirements Inspection Program Requirements
TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS IS:10028 (Part 2 & 3) Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of Transformers (P1:1993), (P2:1991), (P3:1991) IS-2026 (P1 to P4) IS-3347 (part 1 to Part 8) Power Transformers Dimensions for Porcelain transformer Bushings for use in lightly polluted atmospheres. IS-3639 IS-6600 IEC-60076 (Part 1 to 5) IEC-60214 IEC-60289 IEC- 60354 IEC-60076-10 ANSI-C571280 Fittings and Accessories for Power Transformers Guide for Loading of OIl immersed Transformers. Power Transformers On-Load Tap-Changers. Reactors. Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power trans formers Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers
ANSI-C571290 ANSI-C5716 ANSI-C5721
Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers Terminology & Test Code for Current Limiting Reactors Requirements, Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors Rated Over 500 KVA
ANSI-C5792
Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformers upto and including 100 MVA with 55 deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise
ANSI-CG,1EEE-4
Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
CIRCUIT BREAKERS IEC-62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 100: Alternating current Circuit-breakers IEC-62271-101 IEC-62155 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 101: Synthetic testing Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass insulators for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000V IEC-62271-110 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 110: Inductive load switching IEC-62271-109 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 110: Inductive load switching CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS IS-2705- (P1 to P4) IS:3156- (P1 to P4) IS-4379 IEC-44-1 IEC-44-2 IEC-358 Current Transformers. Voltage Transformers. Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders Current transformers. Voltage Transformers. Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.
IEC-44-4 IEC-481 ANSI-C5713 ANSIC92.2 ANSI-C93.1 BUSHING IS-2099 IEC-137 SURGE ARRESTERS IS-3070 (PART2)
Instrument Transformes: Measurement of Partial Discharges Coupling Devices for power Line Carrier Systems. Requirements for Instrument transformers Power Line Coupling voltage Transformers Requirements for Power Line Carrier Coupling Capacitors
Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V
Lightning arresters for alternating current systems : Metal oxide lightning arrestors without gaps.
IEC-99-4 IEC-99-5 ANSI-C62.1 NEMA-LA 1
Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps Selection and application recommendation IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits Surge Arresters
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS IS-722, IS-1248, IS-3231, 3231 (P-3) - Electrical relays for power system protection IS:5039 Distributed pillars for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts.
IEC-68.2.2
Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-529 IEC-158(upto P3-1985) IEC-439 (P1 & 2) ANSI-C37.20
Degree of Protection provided by enclosures. Low Voltage Control Gear: Contactors. Low Voltage Switchgear and control gear assemblies Switchgear Assemblies, including metal enclosed bus.
ANSI-C37.50
Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating Current Power Circuit Breakers
ANSI-C39 ANSI-C83 IS: 8623: (Part I to 3) NEMA-AB NEMA-CS NEMA-PB-1 NEMA-SG-5 NEMA-SG-3 NEMA-SG-6 NEMA-5E-3 1248 (P1 to P9)
Electric Measuring instrument Components for Electric Equipment Specification for Switchgear & Control Assemblies. Moulded Case Circuit and Systems Industrial Controls and Systems Panel Boards Low voltage Power Circuit breakers Power Switchgear Assemblies Power switching Equipment Motor Control Centers Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments & their accessories.
Disconnecting switches IEC-60129 Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing switches IEC-1129 IEC-265 (Part 1 & Part 2) ANSI-C37.32 Alternating Current Earthing Switches Induced Current switching High Voltage switches Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing Specifications and Application Guide for high voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and switch accessories ANSI-C37.34 NEMA-SG6 PLCC and line traps IS-8792 IS-8793 Line traps for AC power system. Methods of tests for line traps. Test Code for high voltage air switches Power switching equipment
IS-8997 IS-8998 IEC-353 IEC-481 IEC-495 IEC-683 CIGRE CIGRE CCIR CCITT EIA
Coupling devices for PLC systems. Methods of test for coupling devices for PLC systems. Line traps for A.C. power systems. Coupling Devices for power line carrier systems. Single sideboard power line carrier terminals Planning of (single Side-Band) power line carrier systems. Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35. Guide on power line carrier 1979. International Radio Consultative Committee International Telegraph & Telephone Consultative Committee Electric Industries Association
Protection and control equipment IEC-51 : (P1 to P9) - Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories. IEC-255 (Part 1 to part 23) IEC-297 (P1 to P4) Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series. IEC-359 Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring equipment. IEC-387 IEC-447 IEC-521 IEC-547 Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters. Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating principles. Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on NIM Standard (for electronic nuclear instruments) ANSI-81 ANSI-B18 Screw threads Bolts and Nuts Electrical relays.
ANSI-C37.1 ANSI-C37.2
Relays, Station Controls etc. Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated telemetering equipment
ANSI-C37.2
Relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus
ANSI-C39.1 MOTORS IS-325 IS-4691
Requirements for electrical analog indicating instruments
Three phase induction motors. Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical machinery.
IEC-34 (P1 to P19:) IEC-Document 2 (Central Office) NEMA-MGI
Rotating electrical machines Three phase induction motors Motors and Generators
Electronic equipment and components MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750 IEC-68 (P1 to P5) IEC-326 (P1 to P2) : : Environmental testing Printed boards Material and workmanship standards IS-1363 (P1 to P3) 1364 (P1 to P5) IS-3138 ISO-898 ASTM Clamps & connectors IS-5561 NEMA-CC1 NEMA-CC 3 Electric power connectors. Electric Power connectors for sub station Connectors for Use between aluminium or aluminum-Copper Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product IS-grade C. Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products grades A and B. Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts (M42 to M150) Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs Specification and tests for materials
Overhead Conductors Bus hardware and insulators IS: 2121 Fittings for Aluminum and steel cored Al conductors for overhead power lines. IS-731 Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V. IS-2486 (P1 to P4) Insulator fittings for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V IEC-120 IEC-137 IEC-168 Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of string Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V. Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for Systems with Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V. IEC-233 IEC-273 Tests on Hollow Insulators for use in electrical equipment. Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V. IEC-305 Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000Vceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems Characteristics of String Insulator Units of the cap and pin type IEC-372 (1984) Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units : dimensions and tests. IEC-383 (P1 and P2) IEC-433 IEC-471 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000V. Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type. Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator units. ANSI-C29 ANSI-C29.1 ANSI-C92.2 Wet process porcelain insulators Test methods for electrical power insulators For insulators, wet-process porcelain and toughened glass
suspension type ANSI-C29.8 ANSI-G.8 CISPR-7B ASTM A-153 Strain and rigid bus-conductor IS-2678 Dimensions & tolerances for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys drawn round tube. IS-5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars. Rods, Tubes and Sections for Electrical purposes. ASTM-B 230-82 ASTM-B 231-81 ASTM-B 221 ASTM-B 236-83 ASTM-B 317-83 Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical purposes Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350 Conductors Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire, shape Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars) Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for electrical purposes (Bus Conductors) Batteries and batteries charger Battery IS:1651 Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Tubular Positive Plates) IS:1652 Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plante Positive Plates) IS:1146 IS:6071 IS:266 IS:1069 IS:3116 Rubber and Plastic Containers for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries Synthetic Separators for Lead-Acid Batteries Specification for Sulphuric Acid Specification for Water for Storage Batteries Specification for Sealing Compound for Lead-Acid Batteries For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-Type Iron and steel hardware Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of form and of Position, Part 1 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
IS:1248 Battery Charger IS:3895 IS:4540
Indicating Instruments
Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and stacks Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Assemblies and Equipment.
IS:6619 IS:2026 IS:2959 IS:1248 IS:2208 IS:13947 (Part-3)
Safety Code for Semiconductor Rectifier Equipment Power Transformers AC Contactors for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts Indicating Instruments HRC Fuses Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse combination units for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1200V DC
IS:2147
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IS:6005 IS:3231 IS:3842 IS:5 IEEE-484
Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel Electrical relays for power system protection Electrical relay for AC Systems Colours for ready mix paint Recommended Design for installation design and installation of large lead storage batteries for generating stations and substations
IEEE-485
Sizing large lead storage batteries for generating stations and Substations
Wires and cables ASTMD-2863 Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to support candle like combustion of plastics (oxygen index) IS-694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including
1100 Volts. IS-1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables, upto and including 33 kV rating IS-1554 (P1 and P2) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working voltage upto and including 1100 V. - Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 11kV. IS:1753 IS:2982 IS-3961 (P1 to P5) IS-3975 IS-5831 IS-6380 IS-7098 Aluminium conductor for insulated cables Copper Conductor in insulated cables. Recommended current ratings for cables. Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables. PVC insulating and sheath of electric cables. Elastometric insulating and sheath of electric cables. Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltage upto and including 1100 volts. IS-7098 Cross-linked polyethyle insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltage from 3.3kV upto and including 33 kV. IS-8130 IS-1753 IS-10418 IEC-96 (part 0 to p4) IEC-183 IEC-189 (P1 to P7) Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords. Aluminum Conductors for insulated cables. Specification for drums for electric cables. Radio Frequency cables. Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables. Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath. IEC-227 (P1 to P7) Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and. including 450/750V IEC-228 IEC-230 Conductors of insulated cables Impulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-287 (P1 to P3)
Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load factor).
IEC-304
Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires.
IEC-331 IEC-332 (P1 to P3) IEC-502
Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables. Tests on electric cables under fire conditions. Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV upto to 30 kV
IEC-754 (P1 and P2)
Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables.
AIR conditioning and ventilation IS-659 IS-660 ARI:520 Safety code for air conditioning Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration Standard for Positive Displacement Refrigeration Compressor and Condensing Units IS:4503 ASHRAE-24 ANSI-B-31.5 IS:2062 IS:655 IS:277 IS-737 Shell and tube type heat exchanger Method of testing for rating of liquid coolers Refrigeration Piping Steel for general structural purposes Specification for Metal Air Dust Specification for Galvanised Steel Sheets Specification for Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Sheet & Strip IS-1079 IS-3588 IS-2312 BS-848 BS-6540 Part-I Hot rolled cast steel sheet & strip Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans Propeller Type AC Ventilation Fans Methods of Performance Test for Fans Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General Ventilation
BS-3928
Sodium Flame Test for Air Filters (Other than for Air Supply to I.C. Engines and Compressors)
US-PED-2098 MIL-STD-282 ASHRAE-52
Method of cold DOP & hot DOP test DOP smoke penetration method Air cleaning device used in general ventilation for removing particle matter
IS:3069
Glossary of Terms, Symbols and Units Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.
IS:4671 IS:8183 IS:3346
Expanded Polystyrene for Thermal Insulation Purposes Bonded Mineral Wool Evaluation of Thermal Conductivity properties by means of guarded hot plate method
ASTM-C-591-69
Standard specification for rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation
BS:848 IS:325 IS:4722 IS:1231 IS:2233
Method of Performance Test for Centrifugal Fans Induction motors, three-phase Rotating electrical machines Three phase foot mounted Induction motors, dimensions of Designations of types of construction and mounting arrangements of rotating electrical machines
IS:2254 IS:7816 IS:4029 IS:4729
Vertical shaft motors for pumps, dimensions of Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines Guide for testing three phase induction motors Rotating electrical machines, vibration of, Measurement and evaluation of
IS:4691
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for rotating electrical machinery
IS:7572 IS:2148 BS:4999 (Part-51) Galvanizing IS-209 IS-2629 IS-2633 ASTM-A-123
Guide for testing single-phase a.c. motors Flame proof enclosure for electrical apparatus Noise levels
Zinc Ingot Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron and steel. Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles. Specification for zinc (Hot Galvanizing) Coatings, on products Fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.
ASTM-A-121-77 Painting IS-6005 ANSI-Z551 SSPEC Fire protection system
Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel barbed wire
Code of practice for phosphating of iron and steel. Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and equipment Steel structure painting council
Fire protection manual issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC) of India HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS IS:1520 IS:9137 IS:5120 API-610 BS:599 PTC-8.2 DIESEL ENGINES Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh water Code for acceptance test for centrifugal & axial pumps Technical requirement - Rotodynamic special purpose pumps Centrifugal pumps for general services Hydraulic Institutes Standards Methods of testing pumps Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps
IS:10000 IS:10002
Methods of tests for internal combustion engines Specification for performance requirements for constant speed compression ignition engines for general purposes (above 20 kW)
BS:5514
The performance of reciprocating compression ignition (Diesel) engines, utilizing liquid fuel only, for general purposes
ISO:3046 IS:554
Reciprocating internal combustion engines performance Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on threads
ASME Power Test Code
Internal combustion engine PTC-17 Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES IS:636 IS:638 IS:778 IS:780 IS:901 Non percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose Sheet rubber jointing and rubber inserting jointing Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for general purpose Sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 300 mm) Couplings, double male and double female instantaneous pattern for fire fighting IS:902 IS:903 Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes Fire hose delivery couplings branch pipe nozzles and nozzle spanner IS:1538 IS:1903 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including floats for water supply purposes IS:2062 IS:2379 IS:2643 IS:2685 SP for weldable structural steel Colour Code for the identification of pipelines Dimensions of pipe threads for fastening purposes Code of Practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sluice valves IS:2906 IS:3582 IS:3589 Sluice valves for water-works purposes (350 to 1200 mm size) Basket strainers for fire fighting purposes (cylindrical type) Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 2000 mm nominal diameter) IS:4038 IS:4927 IS:5290 IS:5312 IS:5306 Foot valves for water works purposes Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting Landing valves (internal hydrant) Swing check type reflex (non-return) valves (Part-I) Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises Part-I Part-II BS:5150 Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam inlets Sprinkler systems Specification for cast iron gate valves
MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS IS:325 IS:900 IS:996 IS:1231 IS:2148 IS:2223 IS:2253 Three phase induction motors Code of practice for installation and maintenance of induction motors Single phase small AC and universal electric motors Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors Flame proof enclosure of electrical apparatus Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction motors Designations for types of construction and mounting arrangements of rotating electrical machines IS:2254 IS:3202 IS:4029 IS:4691 Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment Guide for testing three phase induction motors Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery IS:4722 IS:4729 Rotating electrical machines Measurement and evaluation of vibration of rotating electrical machines IS:5572 Classification of hazardous areas for electrical (Part-I) installations (Areas having gases and vapours) IS:6362 IS:6381 Designation of methods of cooling for rotating electrical machines Construction and testing of electrical apparatus with type of protection e IS:7816 IS:4064 IEC DOCUMENT 2 (Control Office) 432 VDE 0530 Part I/66 IS:9224 (Part-II) IS:6875 IS:694 IS:1248 IS:375 IS:2147 IS:5 IS:2959 PG Test Procedures NFPA-13 NFPA-15 NFPA-12A Standard for the installation of sprinkler system Standard for water spray fixed system for the fire protection Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing System Push Button and Control Switches PVC Insulated cables Indicating instruments Auxiliary wiring & bus bar markings Degree of protection Colour Relay and timers Contactors Three Phase Induction Motor HRC Fuses Guide for testing insulation for rotating machine Air break switches Three Phase Induction Motor
NFPA-72E
Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)
NFPA-12 IS:3034
Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher systems Fire of industrial building: Electrical generating and distributing stations code of practice
IS:2878 IS:2171 IS:940 D.G. SET IS:10002
CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type Extinguisher DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type Pressurised Water Type
Specification for performance requirements for constant speed compression ignition (diesel engine) for general purposes
IS:10000 IS:4722 IS:12063
Method of tests for internal combustion engines Rotating electrical machines-specification Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:12065
Permissible limit of noise levels for rotating electrical machines. Indian Explosive Act 1932
Steel structures IS-228 (1992) Method of Chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain carbon and low alloy steels. IS-802 (P1 to 3:) Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line towers. IS-806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction IS-808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column channel and angle sections. IS-814 Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon of carbon
manganese steel. IS-816 Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in Mild steel IS-817 Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders. Part 1 : Manual Metal arc welding. IS-875 (P1 to P4) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures. IS-1161 IS-1182 Steel tubes for structural purposes. Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel plates. IS-1363 (P1 to P3) IS-1364 IS-1367 (P1 to P18) IS-1599 IS-1608 IS-1893 IS-1978 IS-2062 IS-2595 IS-3063 Hexagonal head bolts, screws & nuts of products grade C. Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B. Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners. Methods for bend test. Method for tensile testing of steel products. Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures. Line Pipe. Steel for general structural purposes. Code of practice for Radiographic testing. Single coil rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and screws IS-3664 Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse echo testing by contact and immersion methods. IS-7205 IS-9595 Safety code for erection of structural steel work. Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels.
ANSI-B18.2.1 ANSI-B18.2.2 ANSI-G8.14 ASTM-A6
Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws Square and hexagonal nuts Round head bolts Specification for General Requirements for rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling and bars of structural use
ASTM-A36 ASTM-A47 ASTM-A143
Specifications of structural steel Specification for malleable iron castings Practice for safeguarding against embilement of Hot Galvanized structural steel products and procedure for detaching embroilment
ASTM-A242 ASTM-A283
Specification for high strength low alloy structural steel Specification for low and intermediate tensile strength carbon steel plates of structural quality
ASTM-A394 ASTM-441
Specification for Galvanized steel transmission tower bolts and nuts Specification for High strength low alloy structural manganese vanadium steel.
ASTM-A572
Specification for High strength low alloy columbium-Vanadium steel of structural quality
AWS D1-0 AWS D1-1 AISC NEMA-CG1 Piping and pressure vessels IS-1239 (Part 1 and 2) IS-3589 IS-6392 ASME ASTM-A120
Code for welding in building construction welding inspection Structural welding code American institute of steel construction Manufactured graphite electrodes
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings Seamless electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage. Steel pipe flanges Boiler and pressure vessel code Specification for pipe steel, black and hot dipped, zinccoated
(Galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe for ordinary use ASTM-A53 Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot-dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless ASTM-A106 ASTM-A284 Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature service Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon-silicon steel plates for machine parts and general construction. ASTM-A234 Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel for moderate and elevated temperatures ASTM-S181 ASTM-A105 ASTM-A307 ASTM-A193 Specification for forgings, carbon steel for general purpose piping Forgings, carbon steel for piping components Carbon steel externally threaded standard fasteners Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials for high temperature service ASTM-A345 ASTM-A197 ANSI-B2.1 ANSI-B16.1 Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic applications Cupola malleable iron Pipe threads (Except dry seal) Cast iron pipe flanges and glanged fitting. Class 25, 125,250 and 800 ANSI-B16.1 ANSI-B16.5 Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and 300 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel alloy and other special alloys ANSI-B16.9 ANSI-B16.11 ANSI-B16.14 ANSI-B16.25 ANSI-B18.1.1 ANSI-B18.2.1 Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and threaded Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with piplethreads Butt welding ends Fire hose couplings screw thread. Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 NSI-B18.21.1 ANSI-B18.21.2 ANSI-B31.1 ANSI-B36.10 ANSI-B36.9 Other civil works standards IS-269 IS2721 IS-278 IS-383 IS-432 (P1 and P2)
Square and hexagonal nuts Lock washers Plain washers Power piping Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe Stainless steel pipe
33 grade ordinary portland cement. Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing. Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete. Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-dawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.
IS-456 IS-516 IS-800 IS-806 IS-1172 IS-1199 IS-1566 IS-1742 IS-1785 IS-1786
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete. Method of test for strength of concrete. Code of practice for general construction in steel. Steel tubes for structural purposes. Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation. Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete. Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement. Code of Practice for Building drainage. Plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete. High strength deformed Steel Bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.
IS-1811 IS-1893 IS-2062
Methods of sampling Foundry sands. Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures. Steel for general structural purposes.
IS-2064
Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances-code of practices.
IS-2065 IS-2090 IS-2140 IS-2470 (P1 & P2) IS-2514 IS-2645 IS-3025 (Part 1 to Part 48)
Code of practice for water supply in buildings. High tension steel bars used in prestressed concrete. Standard Galvanized steel wire for fencing. Code of practice for installation of septic tanks. Concrete vibrating tables. Integral cement waterproofing compounds. Methods of sampling and test (Physical and chemical) for water and waste water.
IS-4091
Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers and poles.
IS-4111 (Part 1 to P5) IS-4990 IS-5600 ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR IS:6745 Methods for Determination of BS:443-1969 Mass of zinc coating on zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles IS:8263 IEC:437 IS:209 IS:398 Part V BS:215(Part-II) Methods for Radio Interference 1973Test on High Voltage Insulators NEMA:107-1964 CISPR Zinc Ingot BS:3436-1961 Aluminum Conductors for IEC:209-1966 Overhead Transmission Purposes Aluminium Conductors galvanized IEC:209-1966 steel reinforced extra high Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system. Plywood for concrete shuttering work. Sewage and drainage pumps.
BS:215(Part-II) IS:1778 IS:1521 IS:2629 IS:2633 IS:4826
voltage (400 kV and above) Reels and Drums forBS:1559-1949 Bare Conductors Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R89-1959 of steel wire Recommended practice for Hot dip Galvanising on Iron and Steel. Method for Testing Uniformity of coating of zinc Coated Articles. Hot dip galvanised coatings on round steel wires ASTMA-472-729
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE IS:1521 IS:1778 IS:2629 IS:2633 IS:4826 Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R:89-1959 of Steel Wire Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors Recommended practice forHot Dip Galvanising on Ironand Steel. Methods for testing Uniformityof Coating of Zinc Coated Articles. Hot dip Galvanised Coatings ASTM:A 475-72a on Round Steel Wires BS:443-1969 IS:6745 Method for Determination BS:443-1969of mass of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles. IS:209 IS:398 P5:1992) Lighting Fixtures and Accessories (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) IS:1913 IS:3528 IS:4012 IS:4013 IS:10322 IS:10322 IS:2206 General and safety requirements for electric lighting fittings. Water proof electric lighting fittings. Dust proof electric lighting fittings. Dust tight proof electric lighting fittings. Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors. Industrial lighting fittings with plastic reflectors. Well glass lighting fittings for use under ground in mines (nonflameproof type). Zinc ingot BS:3463-1961 (Pt. I to Aluminum Conductors for BS:215 (Part-II) overhead transmission purposes.
(viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv)
IS:10322 IS:10322 IS:10322 IS:2418 IS:9900 IS:1258 IS:3323 IS:1534
Specification for flood light. Specification for decorative lighting outfits. Lumanaries for street lighting Tubular flourescent lamps High pressure mercury vapour lamps. Specification for Bayonet lamp flourescent lamp. Bi-pin lamp holder tubular flourescent lamps. Ballasts for use in flourescent lighting fittings. (Part-I)
(xvi) (xvii) (xviii) (xix) (xx) (xxi) (xxii)
IS:1569 IS:2215 IS:3324 IS:418 IS:3553 IS:2713 IS:280
Capacitors for use in flourescent lighting fittings. Starters for flourescent lamps. Holders for starters for tubular flourescent lamps GLS lamps Water tight electric fittings Tubular steel poles MS wire for general engg. Purposes
Conduits, Accessories and Junction Boxes (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) IS:9537 IS:3480 IS:2667 IS:3837 IS:4649 IS:5133 IS:2629 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring Adaptors for flexible steel conduits. Steel and Cast Iron Boxes Hot dip galvanising of Iron & Steel.
Lighting Panels (1) (2) IS:13947 IS:8828 LV Switchgear and Control gear(Part 1 to 5) Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold and
similar installations. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) IS:5 IS:2551 IS:2705 IS:9224 IS:5082 Ready mix paints Danger notice plates Current transformers HRC Cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650V(Part-2) Wrought aluminium and Al. alloys, bars, rods, tubes and sections for electrical purposes. (8) IS:8623 Factory built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control Gear for voltages upto and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC. (9) IS:1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating instruments
Electrical Installation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) IS:1293 IS:371 IS:3854 IS:5216 IS:732 3 pin plug Two to three ceiling roses Switches for domestic and similar purposes Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work. Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (system voltage not exceeding 650 Volts.) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) IS:3043 IS:3646 IS:1944 IS:5571 IS:800 Code of practice for earthing. Code of practice of interior illumination part II & III. Code of practice for lighting of public through fares. Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous areas. Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building construction.
(11) (12) (13)
IS:2633 IS:6005
Methods of Testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles. Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel.
INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT
(14)
INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
LT SWITCHGEAR IS:8623 (Part-I) IS:13947 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 1 General Rules IS:13947 (part-2) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit breakers. IS:13947 (part-3) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 3 Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors and fuse combination units
IS:13947 (part-4)
Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 4 Contactors and motors starters.
IS:13947 (part-5)
Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 5 Control-circuit devices and switching elements
IS:13947 (part-6)
Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 6 Multiple function switching devices.
IS:13947 (part-7)
Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 7 Ancillary equipments
IS:12063 IS:2705 IS:3156 IS:3231 IS:1248 IS:722 IS:5578 IS:13703 (part 1)
Degree of protection provided by enclosures Current Transformers Voltage Transformers Electrical relays for power system protection Electrical indicating instruments AC Electricity meters Guide for Marking of insulated conductors of apparatus terminals Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC
Part 1 General Requirements IS:13703 (part 2) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized persons IS:6005 IS:5082 IS:2633 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum alloys for electrical purposes Hot dip galvanizing
SECTION-F
Diagnostic tools: At least the following diagnostic tools shall be provided by the Bidder. However additional tools, if required/recommended shall be mentioned in the offer. S.No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Item Dissolved Gas Analysis of Transformer oil Frequency response analysis of transformer/reactors Tan and capacitance measurement Circuit breaker operational analyzer Dynamic contact resistance measurement of breakers Third harmonic resistive current measurements of surge arresters Recovery voltage measurements of transformers/reactors Vibration measurement of the reactors Steady state and Dynamic testing of protective relays Signature Analysis Partial Discharge measurement for transformers/Gas Insulated Switchgear Static resistance meter for circuit breakers, Isolators, bus bar joint, earth switches etc. Ground tester for measurement of resistivity of soil and ground resistance Battery impedance test equipment Insulator tester SF6 gas leakage detector and dew point Power quality analyzer Fibre optic cable testing devices
APPENDIX-I
APPENDIX-II

AIS Specification PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AIS Specification PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Invitation to Bid For

(Hapur, Greater Noida, Sikandrabad, Nehtaur)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

submission shall be complete in all respects.

5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

VOLUME-I, Section-A (GTF)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

765kV System 1550kVp

400kV System 1050kVp

132kV System 275kV

33kV System 70kV

One minute power frequency dry withstand voltage (rms)

Corona extinction voltage

Minimum creepage distance

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

765kV System structure) 6400mm (for rodstructure)

5.0 5.1 5.1.1

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

HOT DIP GALVANISING

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

ii) Spring washers for items for a to c IS:1573 17.2

ii) Electro-galvanised mild steel suitable

at-least service condition-3 as per

17.9 17.10 17.11

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

Switches and Fuses:

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

VOLUME-I, Section-B (TR)

TERMINAL FAULT Close -1 Min-Open-Close-open- 2 min-close-1 Min-open close open.

For 800 kV Switching of transformer Switching of shunt reactor

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker

Volume-II (Section-A), Circuit Breaker